معرفی چند منبع در زمینه آموزش برنامه نویسی MATLABیا متلب
کتاب های به زبان انگلیسی
عنوانMatlab, Third Edition: A Practical Introduction to :
Programming and Problem Solving
ترجمه عنوان :متلب :مقدمه ای عملی بر برنامه نويسی و حل مساله ،چاپ سوم
مولفینStormy Attaway :
سال چاپ2013 :
انتشاراتButterworth-Heinemann :
کتاب های به زبان فارسی
عنوان :اصول و مبانی متلب برای علوم مهندسی
مولفین :برايان هان ،دانیل تی ،والنتین
مترجمین :رامین موالنا پور ،سارا موالناپور ،نینا اسدی پور
انتشارات :سها دانش
لینک دسترسی :لینک
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانMATLAB For Dummies :
ترجمه عنوان :تلب به زبان ساده
مولفینJim Sizemore, John Paul Mueller :
سال چاپ2014 :
انتشاراتFor Dummies :
عنوان :کاربرد MATLABدر علوم مهندسی
مولفین :حیدرعلی شايانفر ،حسین شايقی
انتشارات :ياوريان
لینک دسترسی :لینک
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانEssential MATLAB for Engineers and Scientists :
عنوان :برنامه نويسی MATLABبرای مهندسان
ترجمه عنوان :آنچه بايد مهندسین و دانشمندان از متلب بدانند
مولفین :محمود کشاورز مهر ،بهزاد عبدی
مولفینBrian Hahn, Daniel Valentine:
سال چاپ2013 :
انتشاراتAcademic Press :
انتشارات :نوپردازان
لینک دسترسی :لینک
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانMATLAB: An Introduction with Applications :
عنوان :آموزش کاربردی مباحث پیشرفته با MATLAB
ترجمه عنوان :مقدمه ای بر متلب و کاربردهای آن
مولفین :نیما جمشیدی ،علی ابويی مهريزی ،رسول مواليی
مولفAmos Gilat :
انتشارات :عابد
سال چاپ2014 :
انتشاراتWiley :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانMATLAB For Beginners: A Gentle Approach:
عنوان :کاملترين مرجع آموزشی و کاربردی MATLAB
ترجمه عنوان :متلب برای افراد مبتدی با يک رويکرد تدريجی
مولفین :علی اکبر علمداری ،نسرين علمداری
مولفPeter I. Kattan:
انتشارات :نگارنده دانش
سال چاپ2008 :
انتشاراتCreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانMATLAB for Engineers :
عنوان :برنامه نويسی MATLABبرای مهندسین
ترجمه عنوان :متلب برای مهندسین
مولف :استفن چاپمن
مولفHolly Moore :
سال چاپ2011 :
انتشاراتPrentice Hall :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانMastering MATLAB :
ترجمه عنوان :تسلط بر متلب
مولفینDuane C. Hanselman, Bruce L. Littlefield :
سال چاپ2011 :
انتشاراتPrentice Hall :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
مترجم :سعدان زکائی
انتشارات :دانشگاه صنعتی خواجه نصیرالدين طوسی
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوان :آموزش گام به گام محاسبات عددی با متلب
مولف :کلیو مولر
مترجم :رسول نصیری
انتشارات :نشر گستر
لینک دسترسی :لینک
منابع آموزشی آنالین
عنوان :مجموعه فرادرسهای برنامهنويسی متلب
مدرس :دکتر سید مصطفی کالمی هريس
مدت زمان ۹ :ساعت و ۳دقیقه
زبان :فارسی
ارائه دهنده :فرادرس
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوان :مجموعه فرادرسهای متلب برای علوم و مهندسی
مدرس :دکتر سید مصطفی کالمی هريس
مدت زمان 14 :ساعت و 2۲دقیقه
زبان :فارسی
ارائه دهنده :فرادرس
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوان :مجموعه فرادرسهای برنامه نويسی متلب پیشرفته
مدرس :دکتر سید مصطفی کالمی هريس
مدت زمان ۲ :ساعت و 12دقیقه
زبان :فارسی
ارائه دهنده :فرادرس
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانIntroduction to Programming with MATLAB :
ترجمه عنوان :آشنايی با برنامهنويسی متلب
مدرسینAkos Ledeczi, Michael Fitzpatrick, Robert Tairas :
زبان :انگلیسی
ارائه دهندهVanderbilt University :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانIntroduction to MATLAB :
ترجمه عنوان :مقدمهای بر متلب
مدرسDanilo Šćepanović :
زبان :انگلیسی
ارائه دهندهMIT OCW :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانUp and Running with MATLAB :
ترجمه عنوان :شروع سريع کار با متلب
مدرسPatrick Royal :
زبان :انگلیسی
ارائه دهندهlynda.com :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانModelling and Simulation using MATLAB :
ترجمه عنوان :مدلسازی و شبیهسازی با استفاده از متلب
مدرسین Prof. Dr.-Ing. Georg Fries :و دیگران
زبان :انگلیسی
ارائه دهندهiversity.org :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
Robust Control Toolbox™
Getting Started Guide
R2014b
Gary Balas
Richard Chiang
Andy Packard
Michael Safonov
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
How to Contact MathWorks
Latest news:
www.mathworks.com
Sales and services:
www.mathworks.com/sales_and_services
User community:
www.mathworks.com/matlabcentral
Technical support:
www.mathworks.com/support/contact_us
Phone:
508-647-7000
The MathWorks, Inc.
3 Apple Hill Drive
Natick, MA 01760-2098
Robust Control Toolbox™ Getting Started Guide
© COPYRIGHT 2005–2014 by The MathWorks, Inc.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement. The software may be used
or copied only under the terms of the license agreement. No part of this manual may be photocopied or
reproduced in any form without prior written consent from The MathWorks, Inc.
FEDERAL ACQUISITION: This provision applies to all acquisitions of the Program and Documentation
by, for, or through the federal government of the United States. By accepting delivery of the Program
or Documentation, the government hereby agrees that this software or documentation qualifies as
commercial computer software or commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used
or defined in FAR 12.212, DFARS Part 227.72, and DFARS 252.227-7014. Accordingly, the terms and
conditions of this Agreement and only those rights specified in this Agreement, shall pertain to and
govern the use, modification, reproduction, release, performance, display, and disclosure of the Program
and Documentation by the federal government (or other entity acquiring for or through the federal
government) and shall supersede any conflicting contractual terms or conditions. If this License fails
to meet the government's needs or is inconsistent in any respect with federal procurement law, the
government agrees to return the Program and Documentation, unused, to The MathWorks, Inc.
Trademarks
MATLAB and Simulink are registered trademarks of The MathWorks, Inc. See
www.mathworks.com/trademarks for a list of additional trademarks. Other product or brand
names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Patents
MathWorks products are protected by one or more U.S. patents. Please see
www.mathworks.com/patents for more information.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Revision History
September 2005
March 2006
September 2006
March 2007
September 2007
March 2008
October 2008
March 2009
September 2009
March 2010
September 2010
April 2011
September 2011
March 2012
September 2012
March 2013
September 2013
March 2014
October 2014
First printing
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
Online only
New for Version 3.0.2 (Release 14SP3)
Revised for Version 3.1 (Release 2006a)
Revised for Version 3.1.1 (Release 2006b)
Revised for Version 3.2 (Release 2007a)
Revised for Version 3.3 (Release 2007b)
Revised for Version 3.3.1 (Release 2008a)
Revised for Version 3.3.2 (Release 2008b)
Revised for Version 3.3.3 (Release 2009a)
Revised for Version 3.4 (Release 2009b)
Revised for Version 3.4.1 (Release 2010a)
Revised for Version 3.5 (Release 2010b)
Revised for Version 3.6 (Release 2011a)
Revised for Version 4.0 (Release 2011b)
Revised for Version 4.1 (Release 2012a)
Revised for Version 4.2 (Release 2012b)
Revised for Version 4.3 (Release 2013a)
Revised for Version 5.0 (Release 2013b)
Revised for Version 5.1 (Release 2014a)
Revised for Version 5.2 (Release 2014b)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Contents
Introduction
1
Robust Control Toolbox Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-2
Product Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Modeling Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
System with Uncertain Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
Worst-Case Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
Worst-Case Performance of Uncertain System . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
Loop-Shaping Controller Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Model Reduction and Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
LMI Solvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-19
Extends Control System Toolbox Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-21
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
v
2
3
Multivariable Loop Shaping
Tradeoff Between Performance and Robustness . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Norms and Singular Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Properties of Singular Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-3
Typical Loop Shapes, S and T Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Robustness in Terms of Singular Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guaranteed Gain/Phase Margins in MIMO Systems . . . . . .
2-5
2-6
2-10
Using LOOPSYN to Do H-Infinity Loop Shaping . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Loop-Shaping Control Design of Aircraft Model . . . . . . . . .
Design Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATLAB Commands for a LOOPSYN Design . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
2-16
2-16
Fine-Tuning the LOOPSYN Target Loop Shape Gd to Meet
Design Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Mixed-Sensitivity Loop Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
Mixed-Sensitivity Loop-Shaping Controller Design . . . . . .
2-23
Model Reduction for Robust Control
Why Reduce Model Order? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Hankel Singular Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Model Reduction Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...............................................
3-5
3-5
Approximate Plant Model by Additive Error Methods . . . . .
3-7
Approximate Plant Model by Multiplicative Error Method
vi
Contents
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3-10
4
Using Modal Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
Reducing Large-Scale Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
Normalized Coprime Factor Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Robustness Analysis
Create Models of Uncertain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Uncertain Models of Dynamic Systems . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Uncertain Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantifying Unmodeled Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-6
Robust Controller Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
MIMO Robustness Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
Summary of Robustness Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Interpretation of H-Infinity Norm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Norms of Signals and Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Weighted Norms to Characterize Performance . . . . . .
5-2
5-2
5-3
H-Infinity Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance as Generalized Disturbance Rejection . . . . . . . .
Robustness in the H-Infinity Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9
5-9
5-14
Active Suspension Control Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
vii
6
viii
Contents
Control System Tuning
Automated Tuning of Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automated Tuning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing an Automated Tuning Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
6-4
6-5
Automated Tuning Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Control System Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Signal From the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Multiple Operating Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linearization Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard feedback configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generalized feedback configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
6-10
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
Specify Control Architecture in Control System Tuner . . .
About Control Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Predefined Feedback Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arbitrary Feedback Control Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control System Architecture in Simulink . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-21
Open Control System Tuner for Tuning Simulink Model . .
Command-Line Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
6-23
Specify Operating Points for Tuning in Control System
Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Operating Points in Control System Tuner . . . . . . . .
Linearize at Simulation Snapshot Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compute Operating Points at Simulation Snapshot Times . .
Compute Steady-State Operating Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24
6-24
6-24
6-26
6-28
Specify Blocks to Tune in Control System Tuner . . . . . . . .
6-31
View and Change Block Parameterization in Control System
Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
Tuned Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Parameter Values and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
6-37
6-39
Setup for Tuning Control System Modeled in MATLAB . . .
6-41
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
How Tuned Simulink Blocks Are Parameterized . . . . . . . .
Blocks With Predefined Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blocks Without Predefined Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . .
View and Change Block Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-42
6-42
6-43
6-43
Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44
Quick Loop Tuning of Feedback Loops in Control System
Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
Quick Loop Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feedback Loop Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desired Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-62
6-62
6-62
6-62
6-63
6-64
6-64
Step Tracking Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Response Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desired Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-66
6-66
6-66
6-67
6-68
6-69
6-70
Step Rejection Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Disturbance Response Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desired Response to Step Disturbance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-72
6-72
6-72
6-73
6-74
6-74
6-75
Transient Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desired Transient Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-77
6-77
6-77
6-78
6-79
6-79
6-79
6-81
6-81
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
ix
x
Contents
LQR/LQG Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LQG Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-83
6-83
6-83
6-84
6-84
6-85
6-86
6-86
Gain Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Transfer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-88
6-88
6-88
6-89
6-90
6-91
Variance Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Transfer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-93
6-93
6-93
6-93
6-94
6-95
6-96
Reference Tracking Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracking Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-97
6-97
6-97
6-99
6-100
6-101
6-102
Overshoot Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-103
6-103
6-103
6-104
6-105
6-106
Disturbance Rejection Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disturbance Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-107
6-107
6-107
6-108
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Rejection Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-109
6-109
6-110
Sensitivity Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensitivity Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensitivity Bound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-112
6-112
6-112
6-113
6-113
6-114
6-114
Weighted Gain Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Transfer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-116
6-116
6-116
6-89
6-117
6-118
6-118
Weighted Variance Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Transfer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-120
6-120
6-120
6-93
6-121
6-122
6-122
6-123
Minimum Loop Gain Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Loop Response Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desired Loop Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-124
6-124
6-124
6-126
6-126
6-127
6-128
Maximum Loop Gain Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Loop Response Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desired Loop Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-129
6-129
6-129
6-126
6-131
6-132
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
xi
xii
Contents
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-133
Loop Shape Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Loop Response Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desired Loop Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-134
6-134
6-134
6-126
6-137
6-137
6-138
Margins Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feedback Loop Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desired Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-140
6-140
6-140
6-141
6-141
6-142
6-143
Poles Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feedback Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pole Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-144
6-144
6-144
6-145
6-146
6-146
6-147
Controller Poles Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constrain Dynamics of Tuned Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keep Poles Inside the Following Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-149
6-149
6-149
6-150
6-150
6-151
Manage Tuning Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-152
Generate MATLAB Code from Control System Tuner for
Command-Line Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-154
Tuning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stabilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solver Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-158
6-158
6-159
6-160
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Interpreting Tuning Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-161
Create Response Plots in Control System Tuner . . . . . . . .
6-163
Examine Tuned Controller Parameters in Control System
Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-170
Compare Performance of Multiple Tuned Controllers . . .
6-172
Validate Tuned Controller in Simulink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-177
Create and Configure slTuner Interface to Simulink Model
6-178
Time-Domain Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-184
Frequency-Domain Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-190
Loop Shape and Stability Margin Specifications . . . . . . . .
6-200
System Dynamics Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-206
Interpreting Stability Margins in Control System Tuning
Stability Margins Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain and Phase Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combined Gain and Phase Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interpreting the Gain and Phase Margin Plot . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-209
6-209
6-210
6-211
6-212
6-214
Tune Control System at the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . .
6-215
Tune Controller Against Set of Plant Models . . . . . . . . . . .
6-216
Speed Up Tuning with Parallel Computing Toolbox
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-217
Validate Tuned Control System at the Command Line . . .
Extract and Plot System Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Tuning Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Tuned Parameters to Simulink Model . . . . . . . . . . .
Improve Tuning Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-219
6-219
6-219
6-220
6-220
Extract Responses from Tuned MATLAB Model at the
Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-221
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
xiii
7
xiv
Contents
Tuning Control Systems with SYSTUNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-223
Tuning Control Systems in Simulink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-231
Building Tunable Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-240
Validating Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-249
Using Parallel Computing to Accelerate Tuning . . . . . . . .
6-258
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
6-263
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL
SYSTEM TUNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-289
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
What Is a Fixed-Structure Control System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
Difference Between Fixed-Structure Tuning and Traditional
H-Infinity Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
7-4
Structure of Control System for Tuning With looptune . . . .
7-5
Set Up Your Control System for Tuning with looptune . . . .
Set Up Your Control System for looptunein MATLAB . . . . . .
Set Up Your Control System for looptune in Simulink . . . . . .
7-6
7-6
7-6
Tune MIMO Control System for Specified Bandwidth . . . . .
7-8
What Is hinfstruct? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14
Formulating Design Requirements as H-Infinity
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15
Structured H-Infinity Synthesis Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-16
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Build Tunable Closed-Loop Model for Tuning with
hinfstruct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constructing the Closed-Loop System Using Control System
Toolbox Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constructing the Closed-Loop System Using Simulink Control
Design Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-17
7-17
7-21
Tune the Controller Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-24
Interpret the Outputs of hinfstruct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Model is Tuned Version of Input Model . . . . . . . . . .
Interpreting gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-25
7-25
7-25
Validate the Controller Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Validating the Design in MATLAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Validating the Design in Simulink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26
7-26
7-27
Tuning Feedback Loops with LOOPTUNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-30
Tuning Multi-Loop Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-38
PID Tuning for Setpoint Tracking vs. Disturbance
Rejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-49
Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column . . . . . . . .
7-61
Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-72
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-89
Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-101
Active Vibration Control in Three-Story Building . . . . . . .
7-117
Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-130
Multi-Loop Control of a Helicopter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-147
Fixed-Structure Autopilot for a Passenger Jet . . . . . . . . .
7-156
Fault-Tolerant Control of a Passenger Jet . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-169
Fixed-Structure H-infinity Synthesis with HINFSTRUCT
7-179
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
xv
8
xvi
Contents
MIMO Control of Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-191
Digital Control of Power Stage Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-205
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Gain-Scheduled Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Plant Models for Gain-Scheduled Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Scheduling for Linear Parameter-Varying Plants . . . . .
Gain Scheduling for Nonlinear Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
8-3
8-4
Parametric Gain Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
Tuning Gain-Scheduled Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-12
Validating Gain-Scheduled Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-13
Improving Gain-Scheduled Tuning Results . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normalize the Scheduling Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Requirements With Operating Condition . . . . . . .
8-14
8-14
8-15
Tunable Gain With Two Independent Scheduling Variables
8-17
Gain-Scheduled PID Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-21
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot . . . . . . . .
8-23
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1
Introduction
• “Robust Control Toolbox Product Description” on page 1-2
• “Product Requirements” on page 1-3
• “Modeling Uncertainty” on page 1-4
• “System with Uncertain Parameters” on page 1-5
• “Worst-Case Performance” on page 1-9
• “Worst-Case Performance of Uncertain System” on page 1-10
• “Loop-Shaping Controller Design” on page 1-13
• “Model Reduction and Approximation” on page 1-18
• “LMI Solvers” on page 1-19
• “Extends Control System Toolbox Capabilities” on page 1-20
• “Acknowledgments” on page 1-21
• “Bibliography” on page 1-22
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1
Introduction
Robust Control Toolbox Product Description
Design robust controllers for uncertain plants
Robust Control Toolbox™ provides functions, algorithms, and blocks for analyzing and
tuning control systems for performance and robustness. You can create uncertain models
by combining nominal dynamics with uncertain elements, such as uncertain parameters
or unmodeled dynamics. You can analyze the impact of plant model uncertainty on
control system performance and identify worst-case combinations of uncertain elements.
H-infinity and mu-synthesis techniques let you design controllers that maximize robust
stability and performance.
The toolbox automatically tunes both SISO and MIMO controllers. These can include
decentralized, fixed-structure controllers with multiple tunable blocks spanning multiple
feedback loops. The toolbox lets you tune one controller against a set of plant models.
You can also tune gain-scheduled controllers. You can specify multiple tuning objectives,
such as reference tracking, disturbance rejection, stability margins, and closed-loop pole
locations.
Key Features
• Modeling of systems with uncertain parameters or neglected dynamics
• Worst-case analysis of stability margins and sensitivity to disturbances
• Automatic tuning of centralized, decentralized, and multiloop controllers
• Automatic tuning of gain-scheduled controllers
• Robustness analysis and controller tuning in Simulink®
• H-infinity and mu-synthesis algorithms
• General-purpose LMI solvers
1-2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Product Requirements
Product Requirements
Robust Control Toolbox software requires that you have installed Control System
Toolbox™ software.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-3
1
Introduction
Modeling Uncertainty
At the heart of robust control is the concept of an uncertain LTI system. Model
uncertainty arises when system gains or other parameters are not precisely known,
or can vary over a given range. Examples of real parameter uncertainties include
uncertain pole and zero locations and uncertain gains. You can also have unstructured
uncertainties, by which is meant complex parameter variations satisfying given
magnitude bounds.
With Robust Control Toolbox software you can create uncertain LTI models as MATLAB®
objects specifically designed for robust control applications. You can build models of
complex systems by combining models of subsystems using addition, multiplication, and
division, as well as with Control System Toolbox commands like “feedback” and “lft”.
For information about LTI model types, see “Linear System Representation”.
1-4
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
System with Uncertain Parameters
System with Uncertain Parameters
For instance, consider the two-cart "ACC Benchmark" system [13] consisting of two
frictionless carts connected by a spring shown as follows.
ACC Benchmark Problem
The system has the block diagram model shown below, where the individual carts have
the respective transfer functions.
G1 ( s) =
G2 ( s) =
1
m1 s2
1
m 2s2
.
The parameters m1, m2, and k are uncertain, equal to one plus or minus 20%:
m1 = 1 ± 0.2
m2 = 1 ± 0.2
k = 1 ± 0.2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-5
1
Introduction
"ACC Benchmark" Two-Cart System Block Diagram y1 = P(s) u1
The upper dashed-line block has transfer function matrix F(s):
È1˘
È 0 ˘
F( s) = Í
˙ [1 - 1] + Í ˙ ÈÎ 0 G2 ( s) ˘˚ .
Î -1 ˚
ÎG1 ( s) ˚
This code builds the uncertain system model P shown above:
m1 = ureal('m1',1,'percent',20);
m2 = ureal('m2',1,'percent',20);
k = ureal('k',1,'percent',20);
s = zpk('s');
G1 = ss(1/s^2)/m1;
G2 = ss(1/s^2)/m2;
F = [0;G1]*[1 -1]+[1;-1]*[0,G2];
P = lft(F,k);
The variable P is a SISO uncertain state-space (USS) object with four states and three
uncertain parameters, m1, m2, and k. You can recover the nominal plant with the
command:
1-6
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
System with Uncertain Parameters
zpk(P.nominal)
ans =
1
--------------------------(s^2 + 5.995e-16) (s^2 + 2)
Continuous-time zero/pole/gain model.
If the uncertain model P(s) has LTI negative feedback controller
3
C( s) =
100 ( s + 1 )
3
( 0 .001s + 1 )
then you can form the controller and the closed-loop system y1 = T(s) u1 and view the
closed-loop system's step response on the time interval from t=0 to t=0.1 for a Monte
Carlo random sample of five combinations of the three uncertain parameters k, m1, and
m2 using this code:
C=100*ss((s+1)/(.001*s+1))^3; % LTI controller
T=feedback(P*C,1); % closed-loop uncertain system
step(usample(T,5),.1);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-7
Introduction
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1
1-8
Worst-Case Performance
Worst-Case Performance
To be robust, your control system should meet your stability and performance
requirements for all possible values of uncertain parameters. Monte Carlo parameter
sampling via usample can be used for this purpose as shown in “System with Uncertain
Parameters” on page 1-5, but Monte Carlo methods are inherently hit or miss. With
Monte Carlo methods, you might need to take an impossibly large number of samples
before you hit upon or near a worst-case parameter combination.
Robust Control Toolbox software gives you a powerful assortment of robustness analysis
commands that let you directly calculate upper and lower bounds on worst-case
performance without random sampling.
Worst-Case Robustness Analysis Commands
loopmargin
Comprehensive analysis of feedback loop
loopsens
Sensitivity functions of feedback loop
ncfmargin
Normalized coprime stability margin of feedback loop
robustperf
Robust performance of uncertain systems
robuststab
Stability margins of uncertain systems
wcgain
Worst-case gain of an uncertain system
wcmargin
Worst-case gain/phase margins for feedback loop
wcsens
Worst-case sensitivity functions of feedback loop
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-9
1
Introduction
Worst-Case Performance of Uncertain System
This example shows how to calculate the worst-case performance of the closed-loop
system described in “System with Uncertain Parameters” on page 1-5. The following
commands construct that system.
m1 = ureal('m1',1,'percent',20);
m2 = ureal('m2',1,'percent',20);
k = ureal('k',1,'percent',20);
s = zpk('s');
G1 = ss(1/s^2)/m1;
G2 = ss(1/s^2)/m2;
F = [0;G1]*[1 -1]+[1;-1]*[0,G2];
P = lft(F,k);
C = 100*ss((s+1)/(.001*s+1))^3;
T = feedback(P*C,1); % Closed-loop uncertain system
This uncertain state-space model T has three uncertain parameters, k, m1, and m2, each
equal to 1±20% uncertain variation. To analyze whether the closed-loop system T is
robustly stable for all combinations of values for these three parameters, you can execute
the commands:
[StabilityMargin,Udestab,REPORT] = robuststab(T);
REPORT
REPORT =
Uncertain system is robustly stable to modeled uncertainty.
-- It can tolerate up to 301% of the modeled uncertainty.
-- A destabilizing combination of 500% of the modeled uncertainty was found.
-- This combination causes an instability at 155 rad/seconds.
-- Sensitivity with respect to the uncertain elements are:
'k' is 20%. Increasing 'k' by 25% leads to a 5% decrease in the margin.
'm1' is 60%. Increasing 'm1' by 25% leads to a 15% decrease in the margin.
'm2' is 58%. Increasing 'm2' by 25% leads to a 14% decrease in the margin.
1-10
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Worst-Case Performance of Uncertain System
The report tells you that the control system is robust for all parameter variations in the
±20% range, and that the smallest destabilizing combination of real variations in the
values k, m1, and m2 has sizes somewhere between 301% and 500% greater than ±20%,
i.e., between ±62.2% and ±100%. The value Udestab returns an estimate of the 500%
destabilizing parameter variation combination:
Udestab
Udestab =
k: 5.5122e-07
m1: 7.3749e-07
m2: 0.2151
You have a comfortable safety margin of between 311% to 500% larger than the
anticipated ±20% parameter variations before the closed loop goes unstable. But how
much can closed-loop performance deteriorate for parameter variations constrained to
lie strictly within the anticipated ±20% range? The following code computes worst-case
peak gain of T, and estimates the frequency and parameter values at which the peak gain
occurs:
[PeakGain,Uwc] = wcgain(T);
Twc = usubs(T,Uwc);
% Worst case closed-loop system T
Trand = usample(T,4); % 4 random samples of uncertain system T
bodemag(Twc,'r',Trand,'b-.',{.5,50});
legend('T_{wc}
- worst-case','T_{rand} - random samples',...
'Location','SouthWest');
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-11
Introduction
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1
1-12
Loop-Shaping Controller Design
Loop-Shaping Controller Design
One of the most powerful yet simple controller synthesis tools is loopsyn. Given an
LTI plant, you specify the shape of the open-loop systems frequency response plot that
you want, then loopsyn computes a stabilizing controller that best approximates your
specified loop shape.
For example, consider the 2-by-2 NASA HiMAT aircraft model (Safonov, Laub, and
Hartmann [8]) depicted in the following figure. The control variables are elevon and
canard actuators (δe and δc). The output variables are angle of attack (α) and attitude
angle (θ). The model has six states:
È x1 ˘
Íx ˙
Í 2˙
Íx ˙
x = Í 3˙ =
Í x4 ˙
Íx ˙
Í 5˙
ÍÎ x6 ˙˚
È a& ˘
Ía ˙
Í ˙
Í q& ˙
Í ˙
Íq ˙
Íx ˙
Í e˙
ÍÎ xd ˙˚
where xe and xδ are elevator and canard actuator states.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-13
1
Introduction
Aircraft Configuration and Vertical Plane Geometry
You can enter the state-space matrices for this model with the following code:
ag =[ -2.2567e-02
9.2572e-05
1.2338e-02
0
0
0
bg = [ 0
0;
0
0;
0
0;
0
0;
30
0;
0
30];
cg = [ 0
1
0
0
dg = [ 0
0;
1-14
-3.6617e+01 -1.8897e+01
-1.8997e+00
9.8312e-01
1.1720e+01 -2.6316e+00
0
1.0000e+00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
-3.2090e+01
3.2509e+00 -7.6257e-01;
-7.2562e-04 -1.7080e-01 -4.9652e-03;
8.7582e-04 -3.1604e+01
2.2396e+01;
0
0
0;
0 -3.0000e+01
0;
0
0 -3.0000e+01];
0;
0];
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Loop-Shaping Controller Design
0
0];
G = ss(ag,bg,cg,dg);
% NASA HiMAT model G(s)
To design a controller to shape the frequency response (sigma) plot so that the system
has approximately a bandwidth of 10 rad/s, you can set as your target desired loop shape
Gd(s)=10/s, then use loopsyn(G,Gd) to find a loop-shaping controller for G that optimally
matches the desired loop shape Gd by typing:
s = zpk('s');
w0 = 10;
Gd = w0/(s+.001);
[K,CL,GAM] = loopsyn(G,Gd); % Design a loop-shaping controller K
% Plot the results
sigma(G*K,'r',Gd,'k-.',Gd/GAM,'k:',Gd*GAM,'k:',{.1,30})
legend('Achieved Loop Shape','Target Loop Shape','Gd/GAM','Gd*GAM')
figure
T = feedback(G*K,eye(2));
sigma(T,ss(GAM),'r*',{.1,30});
legend('Closed loop','GAM')
grid
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-15
Introduction
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1
1-16
Loop-Shaping Controller Design
The value of γ= GAM returned is an indicator of the accuracy to which the optimal loop
shape matches your desired loop shape and is an upper bound on the resonant peak
magnitude of the closed-loop transfer function T = feedback(G*K,eye(2)). In this
case, γ = 1.6024 = 4 dB, as the singular value plots show. The plots also show that the
achieved loop shape matches the desired target Gd to within about γ dB.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-17
1
Introduction
Model Reduction and Approximation
Complex models are not always required for good control. Unfortunately, however,
optimization methods (including methods based on H∞, H2, and µ-synthesis optimal
control theory) generally tend to produce controllers with at least as many states
as the plant model. For this reason, Robust Control Toolbox software offers you an
assortment of model-order reduction commands that help you to find less complex loworder approximations to plant and controller models.
Model Reduction Commands
reduce
Main interface to model approximation algorithms
balancmr
Balanced truncation model reduction
bstmr
Balanced stochastic truncation model reduction
hankelmr
Optimal Hankel norm model approximations
modreal
State-space modal truncation/realization
ncfmr
Balanced normalized coprime factor model reduction
schurmr
Schur balanced truncation model reduction
slowfast
State-space slow-fast decomposition
“stabsep”
State-space stable/antistable decomposition
imp2ss
Impulse response to state-space approximation
Among the most important types of model reduction methods are minimize bounds
methods on additive, multiplicative, and normalized coprime factor (NCF) model error.
You can access all three of these methods using the command reduce.
1-18
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
LMI Solvers
LMI Solvers
At the core of many emergent robust control analysis and synthesis routines are powerful
general-purpose functions for solving a class of convex nonlinear programming problems
known as linear matrix inequalities. The LMI capabilities are invoked by Robust Control
Toolbox software functions that evaluate worst-case performance, as well as functions
like hinfsyn and h2hinfsyn. Some of the main functions that help you access the LMI
capabilities of the toolbox are shown in the following table.
Specification of LMIs
lmiedit
GUI for LMI specification
setlmis
Initialize the LMI description
lmivar
Define a new matrix variable
lmiterm
Specify the term content of an LMI
newlmi
Attach an identifying tag to new LMIs
getlmis
Get the internal description of the LMI system
LMI Solvers
feasp
Test feasibility of a system of LMIs
gevp
Minimize generalized eigenvalue with LMI constraints
mincx
Minimize a linear objective with LMI constraints
dec2mat
Convert output of the solvers to values of matrix variables
Evaluation of LMIs/Validation of Results
evallmi
Evaluate for given values of the decision variables
showlmi
Return the left and right sides of an evaluated LMI
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-19
1
Introduction
Extends Control System Toolbox Capabilities
Robust Control Toolbox software is designed to work with Control System Toolbox
software. Robust Control Toolbox software extends the capabilities of Control System
Toolbox software and leverages the LTI and plotting capabilities of Control System
Toolbox software. The major analysis and synthesis commands in Robust Control Toolbox
software accept LTI object inputs, e.g., LTI state-space systems produced by commands
such as:
G=tf(1,[1 2 3])
G=ss([-1 0; 0 -1], [1;1],[1 1],3)
The uncertain system (USS) objects in Robust Control Toolbox software generalize the
Control System Toolbox LTI SS objects and help ease the task of analyzing and plotting
uncertain systems. You can do many of the same algebraic operations on uncertain
systems that are possible for LTI objects (multiply, add, invert), and Robust Control
Toolbox software provides USS uncertain system extensions of Control System Toolbox
software interconnection and plotting functions like feedback, lft, and bode.
1-20
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Acknowledgments
Acknowledgments
Professor Andy Packard is with the Faculty of Mechanical Engineering at the
University of California, Berkeley. His research interests include robustness issues in
control analysis and design, linear algebra and numerical algorithms in control problems,
applications of system theory to aerospace problems, flight control, and control of fluid
flow.
Professor Gary Balas is with the Faculty of Aerospace Engineering & Mechanics at the
University of Minnesota and is president of MUSYN Inc. His research interests include
aerospace control systems, both experimental and theoretical.
Dr. Michael Safonov is with the Faculty of Electrical Engineering at the University of
Southern California. His research interests include control and decision theory.
Dr. Richard Chiang is employed by Boeing Satellite Systems, El Segundo, CA. He is a
Boeing Technical Fellow and has been working in the aerospace industry over 25 years.
In his career, Richard has designed 3 flight control laws, 12 spacecraft attitude control
laws, and 3 large space structure vibration controllers, using modern robust control
theory and the tools he built in this toolbox. His research interests include robust control
theory, model reduction, and in-flight system identification. Working in industry instead
of academia, Richard serves a unique role in our team, bridging the gap between theory
and reality.
The linear matrix inequality (LMI) portion of Robust Control Toolbox software was
developed by these two authors:
Dr. Pascal Gahinet is employed by MathWorks. His research interests include robust
control theory, linear matrix inequalities, numerical linear algebra, and numerical
software for control.
Professor Arkadi Nemirovski is with the Faculty of Industrial Engineering and
Management at Technion, Haifa, Israel. His research interests include convex
optimization, complexity theory, and nonparametric statistics.
The structured H∞ synthesis (hinfstruct) portion of Robust Control Toolbox software
was developed by the following author in collaboration with Pascal Gahinet:
Professor Pierre Apkarian is with ONERA (The French Aerospace Lab) and the
Institut de Mathématiques at Paul Sabatier University, Toulouse, France. His research
interests include robust control, LMIs, mathematical programming, and nonsmooth
optimization techniques for control.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-21
1
Introduction
Bibliography
[1] Boyd, S.P., El Ghaoui, L., Feron, E., and Balakrishnan, V., Linear Matrix Inequalities
in Systems and Control Theory, Philadelphia, PA, SIAM, 1994.
[2] Dorato, P. (editor), Robust Control, New York, IEEE Press, 1987.
[3] Dorato, P., and Yedavalli, R.K. (editors), Recent Advances in Robust Control, New
York, IEEE Press, 1990.
[4] Doyle, J.C., and Stein, G., “Multivariable Feedback Design: Concepts for a Classical/
Modern Synthesis,” IEEE Trans. on Automat. Contr., 1981, AC-26(1), pp. 4-16.
[5] El Ghaoui, L., and Niculescu, S., Recent Advances in LMI Theory for Control,
Philadelphia, PA, SIAM, 2000.
[6] Lehtomaki, N.A., Sandell, Jr., N.R., and Athans, M., “Robustness Results in LinearQuadratic Gaussian Based Multivariable Control Designs,” IEEE Trans. on
Automat. Contr., Vol. AC-26, No. 1, Feb. 1981, pp. 75-92.
[7] Safonov, M.G., Stability and Robustness of Multivariable Feedback Systems,
Cambridge, MA, MIT Press, 1980.
[8] Safonov, M.G., Laub, A.J., and Hartmann, G., “Feedback Properties of Multivariable
Systems: The Role and Use of Return Difference Matrix,” IEEE Trans. of
Automat. Contr., 1981, AC-26(1), pp. 47-65.
[9] Safonov, M.G., Chiang, R.Y., and Flashner, H., “H∞ Control Synthesis for a Large
Space Structure,” Proc. of American Contr. Conf., Atlanta, GA, June 15-17, 1988.
[10] Safonov, M.G., and Chiang, R.Y., “CACSD Using the State-Space L∞ Theory —
A Design Example,” IEEE Trans. on Automatic Control, 1988, AC-33(5), pp.
477-479.
[11] Sanchez-Pena, R.S., and Sznaier, M., Robust Systems Theory and Applications, New
York, Wiley, 1998.
[12] Skogestad, S., and Postlethwaite, I., Multivariable Feedback Control, New York,
Wiley, 1996.
[13] Wie, B., and Bernstein, D.S., “A Benchmark Problem for Robust Controller Design,”
Proc. American Control Conf., San Diego, CA, May 23-25, 1990; also Boston, MA,
June 26-28, 1991.
1-22
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Bibliography
[14] Zhou, K., Doyle, J.C., and Glover, K., Robust and Optimal Control, Englewood Cliffs,
NJ, Prentice Hall, 1996.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-23
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
1-24
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
• “Tradeoff Between Performance and Robustness” on page 2-2
• “Norms and Singular Values” on page 2-3
• “Typical Loop Shapes, S and T Design” on page 2-5
• “Using LOOPSYN to Do H-Infinity Loop Shaping” on page 2-13
• “Loop-Shaping Control Design of Aircraft Model” on page 2-14
• “Fine-Tuning the LOOPSYN Target Loop Shape Gd to Meet Design Goals” on page
2-20
• “Mixed-Sensitivity Loop Shaping” on page 2-21
• “Mixed-Sensitivity Loop-Shaping Controller Design” on page 2-23
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
Tradeoff Between Performance and Robustness
When the plant modeling uncertainty is not too big, you can design high-gain, highperformance feedback controllers. High loop gains significantly larger than 1 in
magnitude can attenuate the effects of plant model uncertainty and reduce the overall
sensitivity of the system to plant noise. But if your plant model uncertainty is so large
that you do not even know the sign of your plant gain, then you cannot use large
feedback gains without the risk that the system will become unstable. Thus, plant model
uncertainty can be a fundamental limiting factor in determining what can be achieved
with feedback.
Multiplicative Uncertainty: Given an approximate model of the plant G0 of a plant G, the
multiplicative uncertainty ΔM of the model G0 is defined as D M = G0-1 ( G - G0 )
or, equivalently,
G = ( I + D M ) G0 .
Plant model uncertainty arises from many sources. There might be small unmodeled
time delays or stray electrical capacitance. Imprecisely understood actuator time
constants or, in mechanical systems, high-frequency torsional bending modes and similar
effects can be responsible for plant model uncertainty. These types of uncertainty are
relatively small at lower frequencies and typically increase at higher frequencies.
In the case of single-input/single-output (SISO) plants, the frequency at which there
are uncertain variations in your plant of size |ΔM|=2 marks a critical threshold beyond
which there is insufficient information about the plant to reliably design a feedback
controller. With such a 200% model uncertainty, the model provides no indication of the
phase angle of the true plant, which means that the only way you can reliably stabilize
your plant is to ensure that the loop gain is less than 1. Allowing for an additional
factor of 2 margin for error, your control system bandwidth is essentially limited to the
frequency range over which your multiplicative plant uncertainty ΔM has gain magnitude
|ΔM|<1.
2-2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Norms and Singular Values
Norms and Singular Values
For MIMO systems the transfer functions are matrices, and relevant measures of gain
are determined by singular values, H∞, and H2 norms, which are defined as follows:
H2 and H# Norms The H2-norm is the energy of the impulse response of plant G. The H∞norm is the peak gain of G across all frequencies and all input directions.
Another important concept is the notion of singular values.
Singular Values: The singular values of a rank r matrix A Œ Cm¥n , denoted σi, are the
nonnegative square roots of the eigenvalues of A* A ordered such that σ1 ≥ σ2 ≥ ... ≥σp > 0,
p ≤ min{m, n}.
If r < p then there are p – r zero singular values, i.e., σr+1 = σr+2 = ... =σp = 0.
The greatest singular value σ1 is sometimes denoted
s ( A) = s 1 .
When A is a square n-by-n matrix, then the nth singular value (i.e., the least singular
value) is denoted
s ( A) @ s n.
Properties of Singular Values
Some useful properties of singular values are:
s ( A ) = max xŒCh
s ( A ) = min xŒCh
Ax
x
Ax
x
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-3
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
These properties are especially important because they establish that the greatest and
least singular values of a matrix A are the maximal and minimal "gains" of the matrix as
the input vector x varies over all possible directions.
For stable continuous-time LTI systems G(s), the H2-norm and the H∞-norms are defined
terms of the frequency-dependent singular values of G(jω):
H2-norm:
p
2
È1 ˘ •
[email protected]Í ˙
s i ( G ( jw ) ) dw
Î 2p ˚ -• i =1
Ú Â(
)
H∞-norm:
G 2 @ sups ( G ( jw ) )
w
where sup denotes the least upper bound.
2-4
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Typical Loop Shapes, S and T Design
Typical Loop Shapes, S and T Design
Consider the multivariable feedback control system shown in the following figure. In
order to quantify the multivariable stability margins and performance of such systems,
you can use the singular values of the closed-loop transfer function matrices from r to
each of the three outputs e, u, and y, viz.
def
-1
S ( s ) = ( I + L ( s ))
def
R ( s ) = K ( s) ( I + L ( s) )
def
T ( s ) = L ( s ) ( I + L ( s) )
-1
-1
= I - S( s)
where the L(s) is the loop transfer function matrix
L ( s ) = G ( s ) K ( s) .
Block Diagram of the Multivariable Feedback Control System
The two matrices S(s) and T(s) are known as the sensitivity function and complementary
sensitivity function, respectively. The matrix R(s) has no common name. The singular
value Bode plots of each of the three transfer function matrices S(s), R(s), and T(s) play
an important role in robust multivariable control system design. The singular values of
the loop transfer function matrix L(s) are important because L(s) determines the matrices
S(s) and T(s).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-5
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
Robustness in Terms of Singular Values
The singular values of S(jω) determine the disturbance attenuation, because S(s) is in
fact the closed-loop transfer function from disturbance d to plant output y — see Block
Diagram of the Multivariable Feedback Control System. Thus a disturbance attenuation
performance specification can be written as
s ( S ( jw ) ) £ W1-1 ( jw )
where W1-1 ( jw ) is the desired disturbance attenuation factor. Allowing W1 ( jw ) to
depend on frequency ω enables you to specify a different attenuation factor for each
frequency ω.
The singular value Bode plots of R(s) and of T(s) are used to measure the stability
margins of multivariable feedback designs in the face of additive plant perturbations ΔA
and multiplicative plant perturbations ΔM, respectively. See the following figure.
Consider how the singular value Bode plot of complementary sensitivity T(s) determines
the stability margin for multiplicative perturbations ΔM. The multiplicative stability
margin is, by definition, the "size" of the smallest stable ΔM(s) that destabilizes the
system in the figure below when ΔA = 0.
Additive/Multiplicative Uncertainty
2-6
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Typical Loop Shapes, S and T Design
Taking s ( D M ( jw ) ) to be the definition of the "size" of ΔM(jω), you have the following
useful characterization of "multiplicative" stability robustness:
Multiplicative Robustness: The size of the smallest destabilizing multiplicative uncertainty
ΔM(s) is:
s ( D M ( jw ) ) =
1
.
s ( T ( jw ) )
The smaller is s ( T ( jw ) ) , the greater will be the size of the smallest destabilizing
multiplicative perturbation, and hence the greater will be the stability margin.
A similar result is available for relating the stability margin in the face of additive plant
perturbations ΔA(s) to R(s) if you take s ( D A ( jw ) ) to be the definition of the "size" of
ΔA(jω) at frequency ω.
Additive Robustness: The size of the smallest destabilizing additive uncertainty ΔA is:
s ( D A ( jw ) ) =
1
.
s ( R ( jw ) )
As a consequence of robustness theorems 1 and 2, it is common to specify the stability
margins of control systems via singular value inequalities such as
s ( R { jw} ) £ W2-1 ( jw )
s ( T { jw} ) £ W3-1 ( jw )
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-7
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
where |W2(jω)| and |W3(jω)| are the respective sizes of the largest anticipated additive
and multiplicative plant perturbations.
It is common practice to lump the effects of all plant uncertainty into a single fictitious
multiplicative perturbation ΔM, so that the control design requirements can be written
1
≥ W1 ( jw ) ; s i ( T [ jw ]) £ W3-1 ( jw )
s i ( S ( jw ) )
as shown in Singular Value Specifications on L, S, and T.
It is interesting to note that in the upper half of the figure (above the 0 dB line),
s ( L ( jw ) ) ª
1
s ( S ( jw ) )
while in the lower half of Singular Value Specifications on L, S, and T (below the 0 dB
line),
s ( L ( jw ) ) ª s ( T ( jw ) ) .
This results from the fact that
def
-1
S ( s ) = ( I + L ( s ))
ª L ( s)
-1
if s ( L ( s) ) ? 1 , and
def
T ( s ) = L ( s ) ( I + L ( s) )
-1
ª L (s )
if s ( L ( s ) ) = 1 .
2-8
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Typical Loop Shapes, S and T Design
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-9
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
Singular Value Specifications on L, S, and T
Thus, it is not uncommon to see specifications on disturbance attenuation and
multiplicative stability margin expressed directly in terms of forbidden regions for the
Bode plots of σi(L(jω)) as "singular value loop shaping" requirements, either as specified
upper/lower bounds or as a target desired loop shape — see the preceding figure.
Guaranteed Gain/Phase Margins in MIMO Systems
For those who are more comfortable with classical single-loop concepts, there are the
important connections between the multiplicative stability margins predicted by s ( T )
and those predicted by classical M-circles, as found on the Nichols chart. Indeed in the
single-input/single-output case,
2-10
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Typical Loop Shapes, S and T Design
s ( T ( jw ) ) =
L ( jw )
1 + L ( jw )
which is precisely the quantity you obtain from Nichols chart M-circles. Thus, T • is a
multiloop generalization of the closed-loop resonant peak magnitude which, as classical
control experts will recognize, is closely related to the damping ratio of the dominant
closed-loop poles. Also, it turns out that you can relate T • , S • to the classical gain
margin GM and phase margin θM in each feedback loop of the multivariable feedback
system of Block Diagram of the Multivariable Feedback Control System via the formulas:
GM ≥ 1 +
1
T•
1
GM ≥ 1 +
1-
1
S•
Ê
q M ≥ 2 sin -1 Á
Á2
Ë
Ê
q M ≥ 2 sin -1 Á
Á2
Ë
ˆ
˜
˜
¯
1 ˆ
˜.
T • ˜¯
1
T•
(See [6].) These formulas are valid provided S • and T • are larger than 1, as is
normally the case. The margins apply even when the gain perturbations or phase
perturbations occur simultaneously in several feedback channels.
The infinity norms of S and T also yield gain reduction tolerances. The gain reduction
tolerance gm is defined to be the minimal amount by which the gains in each loop would
have to be decreased in order to destabilize the system. Upper bounds on gm are as
follows:
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-11
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
gM £ 1 -
1
gM £
1+
2-12
1
T•
1
S•
.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Using LOOPSYN to Do H-Infinity Loop Shaping
Using LOOPSYN to Do H-Infinity Loop Shaping
The command loopsyn lets you design a stabilizing feedback controller to optimally
shape the open loop frequency response of a MIMO feedback control system to match as
closely as possible a desired loop shape Gd — see the preceding figure. The basic syntax
of the loopsyn loop-shaping controller synthesis command is:
K = loopsyn(G,Gd)
Here G is the LTI transfer function matrix of a MIMO plant model, Gd is the target
desired loop shape for the loop transfer function L=G*K, and K is the optimal loop-shaping
controller. The LTI controller K has the property that it shapes the loop L=G*K so that it
matches the frequency response of Gd as closely as possible, subject to the constraint that
the compensator must stabilize the plant model G.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-13
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
Loop-Shaping Control Design of Aircraft Model
To see how the loopsyn command works in practice to address robustness and
performance tradeoffs, consider again the NASA HiMAT aircraft model taken from the
paper of Safonov, Laub, and Hartmann [8]. The longitudinal dynamics of the HiMAT
aircraft trimmed at 25000 ft and 0.9 Mach are unstable and have two right-half-plane
phugoid modes. The linear model has state-space realization G(s) = C(Is – A)–1B with
six states, with the first four states representing angle of attack (α) and attitude angle
(θ) and their rates of change, and the last two representing elevon and canard control
actuator dynamics — see Aircraft Configuration and Vertical Plane Geometry.
ag = [
-2.2567e-02 -3.6617e+01 -1.8897e+01 -3.2090e+01
3.2509e+00 -7.6257e-01;
9.2572e-05 -1.8997e+00
9.8312e-01 -7.2562e-04 -1.7080e-01 -4.9652e-03;
1.2338e-02
1.1720e+01 -2.6316e+00
8.7582e-04 -3.1604e+01
2.2396e+01;
0
0
1.0000e+00
0
0
0;
0
0
0
0 -3.0000e+01
0;
0
0
0
0
0 -3.0000e+01];
bg = [0
0;
0
0;
0
0;
0
0;
30
0;
0
30];
cg = [0
1
0
0
0
0;
0
0
0
1
0
0];
dg = [0
0;
0
0];
G = ss(ag,bg,cg,dg);
The control variables are elevon and canard actuators (δe and δc). The output variables
are angle of attack (α) and attitude angle (θ).
2-14
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Loop-Shaping Control Design of Aircraft Model
Aircraft Configuration and Vertical Plane Geometry
This model is good at frequencies below 100 rad/s with less than 30% variation between
the true aircraft and the model in this frequency range. However as noted in [8], it does
not reliably capture very high-frequency behaviors, because it was derived by treating
the aircraft as a rigid body and neglecting lightly damped fuselage bending modes that
occur at somewhere between 100 and 300 rad/s. These unmodeled bending modes might
cause as much as 20 dB deviation (i.e., 1000%) between the frequency response of the
model and the actual aircraft for frequency ω > 100 rad/s. Other effects like control
actuator time delays and fuel sloshing also contribute to model inaccuracy at even higher
frequencies, but the dominant unmodeled effects are the fuselage bending modes. You
can think of these unmodeled bending modes as multiplicative uncertainty of size 20 dB,
and design your controller using loopsyn, by making sure that the loop has gain less than
–20 dB at, and beyond, the frequency ω > 100 rad/s.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-15
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
Design Specifications
The singular value design specifications are
• Robustness Spec.: –20 dB/decade roll-off slope and –20 dB loop gain at 100 rad/s
• Performance Spec.: Minimize the sensitivity function as much as possible.
Both specs can be accommodated by taking as the desired loop shape
Gd(s)=8/s
MATLAB Commands for a LOOPSYN Design
s = zpk('s'); % Laplace variable s
Gd = 8/s; % desired loop shape
% Compute the optimal loop shaping controller K
[K,CL,GAM] = loopsyn(G,Gd);
% Compute the loop L, sensitivity S and complementary sensitivity T:
L = G*K;
I = eye(size(L));
S = feedback(I,L); % S=inv(I+L);
T = I-S;
% Plot the results:
% step response plots
step(T);title('\alpha and \theta command step responses');
% frequency response plots
figure;
sigma(L,'r--',Gd,'k-.',Gd/GAM,'k:',Gd*GAM,'k:',{.1,100})
legend('\sigma(L) loopshape',...
'\sigma(Gd) desired loop',...
'\sigma(Gd) \pm GAM, dB');
figure;
sigma(T,I+L,'r--',{.1,100})
legend('\sigma(T) robustness','1/\sigma(S) performance')
2-16
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Loop-Shaping Control Design of Aircraft Model
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-17
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
2-18
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Loop-Shaping Control Design of Aircraft Model
The number ±GAM, dB (i.e., 20log10(GAM)) tells you the accuracy with which your
loopsyn control design matches the target desired loop:
s ( GK ) , db ≥ G d , db - GAM, db
s ( GK ) , db ≥ G d , db + GAM, db
(w < wc )
(w > wc ).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-19
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
Fine-Tuning the LOOPSYN Target Loop Shape Gd to Meet Design
Goals
If your first attempt at loopsyn design does not achieve everything you wanted, you will
need to readjust your target desired loop shape Gd. Here are some basic design tradeoffs
to consider:
• Stability Robustness. Your target loop Gd should have low gain (as small as
possible) at high frequencies where typically your plant model is so poor that its phase
angle is completely inaccurate, with errors approaching ±180° or more.
• Performance. Your Gd loop should have high gain (as great as possible) at
frequencies where your model is good, in order to ensure good control accuracy and
good disturbance attenuation.
• Crossover and Roll-Off. Your desired loop shape Gd should have its 0 dB crossover
frequency (denoted ωc) between the above two frequency ranges, and below the
crossover frequency ωc it should roll off with a negative slope of between –20 and –40
dB/decade, which helps to keep phase lag to less than –180° inside the control loop
bandwidth (0 < ω < ωc).
Other considerations that might affect your choice of Gd are the right-half-plane poles
and zeros of the plant G, which impose ffundamental limits on your 0 dB crossover
frequency ωc [12]. For instance, your 0 dB crossover ωc must be greater than the
magnitude of any plant right-half-plane poles and less than the magnitude of any righthalf-plane zeros.
max
Re( pi )>0
pi < wc < min
Re( zi )>0
zi .
If you do not take care to choose a target loop shape Gd that conforms to these
fundamental constraints, then loopsyn will still compute the optimal loop-shaping
controller K for your Gd, but you should expect that the optimal loop L=G*K will have a
poor fit to the target loop shape Gd, and consequently it might be impossible to meet your
performance goals.
2-20
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Mixed-Sensitivity Loop Shaping
Mixed-Sensitivity Loop Shaping
A popular alternative approach to loopsyn loop shaping is H∞ mixed-sensitivity loop
shaping, which is implemented by the Robust Control Toolbox software command:
K=mixsyn(G,W1,[],W3)
With mixsyn controller synthesis, your performance and stability robustness
specifications equations (2-2) and (2-4) are combined into a single infinity norm
specification of the form
Ty u
1 1
•
£1
where (see MIXSYN H∞ Mixed-Sensitivity Loop Shaping Ty1 u1):
def È W
Ty u = Í 1
1 1
ÎW3
S˘
.
T ˙˚
The term Ty u
is called a mixed-sensitivity cost function because it penalizes both
1 1 •
sensitivity S(s) and complementary sensitivity T(s). Loop shaping is achieved when you
choose W1 to have the target loop shape for frequencies ω < ωc, and you choose 1/W3 to be
the target for ω > ωc. In choosing design specifications W1 and W3 for a mixsyn controller
design, you need to ensure that your 0 dB crossover frequency for the Bode plot of W1 is
below the 0 dB crossover frequency of 1/W3, as shown in Singular Value Specifications
on L, S, and T, so that there is a gap for the desired loop shape Gd to pass between the
performance bound W1 and your robustness bound W3-1 . Otherwise, your performance
and robustness requirements will not be achievable.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-21
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
MIXSYN H# Mixed-Sensitivity Loop Shaping Ty1 u1
2-22
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Mixed-Sensitivity Loop-Shaping Controller Design
Mixed-Sensitivity Loop-Shaping Controller Design
To do a mixsyn H∞ mixed-sensitivity synthesis design on the HiMAT model, start with
the plant model G discussed in “Mixed-Sensitivity Loop-Shaping Controller Design” on
page 2-23. The following code recreates that plant model.
ag =[ -2.2567e-02 -3.6617e+01 -1.8897e+01 -3.2090e+01
9.2572e-05 -1.8997e+00
9.8312e-01 -7.2562e-04
1.2338e-02
1.1720e+01 -2.6316e+00
8.7582e-04
0
0
1.0000e+00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
bg = [ 0
0;
0
0;
0
0;
0
0;
30
0;
0
30];
cg = [ 0
1
0
0
0
0;
0
0
0
1
0
0];
dg = [ 0
0;
0
0];
G = ss(ag,bg,cg,dg);
3.2509e+00 -7.6257e-01;
-1.7080e-01 -4.9652e-03;
-3.1604e+01 2.2396e+01;
0
0;
-3.0000e+01 0;
0 -3.0000e+01];
Set up the performance and robustness bounds, W1 and W3.
s = zpk('s'); % Laplace variable s
MS = 2; AS = .03; WS = 5;
W1 = (s/MS+WS)/(s+AS*WS);
MT = 2; AT = .05; WT = 20;
W3 = (s+WT/MT)/(AT*s+WT);
Compute the H-infinity mixed-sensitivity optimal controller K1 using mixsyn.
[K1,CL1,GAM1] = mixsyn(G,W1,[],W3);
Next compute responses of the closed-loop system. Compute the loop L1, sensitivity S1,
and complementary sensitivity T1.
L1 = G*K1;
I = eye(size(L1));
S1 = feedback(I,L1); % S=inv(I+L1);
T1 = I-S1;
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-23
2
Multivariable Loop Shaping
Finally, plot time-domain and frequency-domain responses.
step(T1,1.5);
title('\alpha and \theta command step responses');
figure;
sigma(I+L1,'--',T1,':',L1,'r--',W1/GAM1,'k--',GAM1/W3,'k-.',{.1,100})
legend('1/\sigma(S) performance','\sigma(T) robustness','\sigma(L) loopshape',...
'\sigma(W1) performance bound','\sigma(1/W3) robustness bound')
2-24
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Mixed-Sensitivity Loop-Shaping Controller Design
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-25
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
2-26
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
• “Why Reduce Model Order?” on page 3-2
• “Hankel Singular Values” on page 3-3
• “Model Reduction Techniques” on page 3-5
• “Approximate Plant Model by Additive Error Methods” on page 3-7
• “Approximate Plant Model by Multiplicative Error Method” on page 3-10
• “Using Modal Algorithms” on page 3-13
• “Reducing Large-Scale Models” on page 3-17
• “Normalized Coprime Factor Reduction” on page 3-18
• “Bibliography” on page 3-20
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
Why Reduce Model Order?
In the design of robust controllers for complicated systems, model reduction fits several
goals:
1
To simplify the best available model in light of the purpose for which the model is to
be used—namely, to design a control system to meet certain specifications.
2
To speed up the simulation process in the design validation stage, using a smaller
size model with most of the important system dynamics preserved.
3
Finally, if a modern control method such as LQG or H∞ is used for which the
complexity of the control law is not explicitly constrained, the order of the resultant
controller is likely to be considerably greater than is truly needed. A good model
reduction algorithm applied to the control law can sometimes significantly reduce
control law complexity with little change in control system performance.
Model reduction routines in this toolbox can be put into two categories:
• Additive error method — The reduced-order model has an additive error bounded
by an error criterion.
• Multiplicative error method — The reduced-order model has a multiplicative or
relative error bounded by an error criterion.
The error is measured in terms of peak gain across frequency (H∞ norm), and the error
bounds are a function of the neglected Hankel singular values.
3-2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Hankel Singular Values
Hankel Singular Values
In control theory, eigenvalues define a system stability, whereas Hankel singular values
define the “energy” of each state in the system. Keeping larger energy states of a system
preserves most of its characteristics in terms of stability, frequency, and time responses.
Model reduction techniques presented here are all based on the Hankel singular values
of a system. They can achieve a reduced-order model that preserves the majority of the
system characteristics.
Mathematically, given a stable state-space system (A,B,C,D), its Hankel singular values
are defined as [1]
s H = li ( PQ )
where P and Q are controllability and observability grammians satisfying
AP + PA T = - BBT
AT Q + QA = -C T C.
For example, generate a random 30-state system and plot its Hankel singular values.
rng(1234,'twister');
G = rss(30,4,3);
hankelsv(G)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3-3
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
The plot shows shows that system G has most of its “energy” stored in states 1 through 15
or so. Later, you will see how to use model reduction routines to keep a 15-state reduced
model that preserves most of its dynamic response.
Related Examples
•
“Approximate Plant Model by Additive Error Methods” on page 3-7
•
“Approximate Plant Model by Multiplicative Error Method” on page 3-10
More About
•
3-4
“Model Reduction Techniques” on page 3-5
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Model Reduction Techniques
Model Reduction Techniques
Robust Control Toolbox software offers several algorithms for model approximation and
order reduction. These algorithms let you control the absolute or relative approximation
error, and are all based on the Hankel singular values of the system.
Robust control theory quantifies a system uncertainty as either additive or multiplicative
types. These model reduction routines are also categorized into two groups: additive error
and multiplicative error types. In other words, some model reduction routines produce a
reduced-order model Gred of the original model G with a bound on the error G - Gred • ,
the peak gain across frequency. Others produce a reduced-order model with a bound on
the relative error G -1 ( G - Gred )
•
.
These theoretical bounds are based on the “tails” of the Hankel singular values of the
model, i.e.,
Additive Error Bound
n
 si
G - Gred • £ 2
k+1
where σi are denoted the ith Hankel singular value of the original system G.
Multiplicative (Relative) Error Bound
n
G -1 ( G - Gred )
£
•
Ê
’ ÁË 1 + 2s i ÊÁË
k+ 1
ˆ
1 + s i2 + s i ˆ˜ ˜ - 1
¯¯
where σi are denoted the ith Hankel singular value of the phase matrix of the model G
(see the bstmr reference page).
Top-Level Model Reduction Command
Method
Description
reduce
Main interface to model approximation algorithms
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3-5
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
Normalized Coprime Balanced Model Reduction Command
Method
Description
ncfmr
Normalized coprime balanced truncation
Additive Error Model Reduction Commands
Method
Description
balancmr
Square-root balanced model truncation
schurmr
Schur balanced model truncation
hankelmr
Hankel minimum degree approximation
Multiplicative Error Model Reduction Command
Method
Description
bstmr
Balanced stochastic truncation
Additional Model Reduction Tools
3-6
Method
Description
modreal
Modal realization and truncation
slowfast
Slow and fast state decomposition
“stabsep”
Stable and antistable state projection
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Approximate Plant Model by Additive Error Methods
Approximate Plant Model by Additive Error Methods
Given a system G in LTI form, the following commands reduce the system to any desired
order you specify. The judgment call is based on its Hankel singular values.
rng(1234,'twister');
G = rss(30,4,3); % random 30-state model
% balanced truncation to models with sizes 12:16
[G1,info1] = balancmr(G,12:16);
% Schur balanced truncation by specifying `MaxError'
[G2,info2] = schurmr(G,'MaxError',[1,0.8,0.5,0.2]);
sigma(G,'b-',G1,'r--',G2,'g-.')
legend('G','G1','G2')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3-7
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
The plot compares the original model G with the reduced models G1 and G2.
To determine whether the theoretical error bound is satisfied, calculate the peak
difference across frequencies between the gain of the original system and the reduced
system. Compare that to the error bound stored in the info structure.
norm(G-G1(:,:,1),'inf')
info1.ErrorBound(1)
ans =
1.2556
ans =
6.2433
Or, plot the model error vs. error bound via the following commands:
[sv,w] = sigma(G-G1(:,:,1));
loglog(w,sv,w,info1.ErrorBound(1)*ones(size(w)))
xlabel('rad/sec');ylabel('SV');
title('Error Bound and Model Error')
3-8
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Approximate Plant Model by Additive Error Methods
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3-9
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
Approximate Plant Model by Multiplicative Error Method
In most cases, the multiplicative error model reduction method bstmr tends to bound the
relative error between the original and reduced-order models across the frequency range
of interest, hence producing a more accurate reduced-order model than the additive error
methods. This characteristic is obvious in system models with low damped poles.
The following commands illustrate the significance of a multiplicative error model
reduction method as compared to any additive error type. Clearly, the phase-matching
algorithm using bstmr provides a better fit in the Bode plot.
rng(123456);
G = rss(30,1,1);
% random 30-state model
[gr,infor] = reduce(G,'Algorithm','balance','order',7);
[gs,infos] = reduce(G,'Algorithm','bst','order',7);
figure(1)
bode(G,'b-',gr,'r--')
title('Additive Error Method')
legend('Original','Reduced')
figure(2)
bode(G,'b-',gs,'r--')
title('Relative Error Method')
legend('Original','Reduced')
3-10
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Approximate Plant Model by Multiplicative Error Method
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3-11
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
Therefore, for some systems with low damped poles or zeros, the balanced stochastic
method (bstmr) produces a better reduced-order model fit in those frequency ranges to
make multiplicative error small. Whereas additive error methods such as balancmr,
schurmr, or hankelmr only care about minimizing the overall "absolute" peak error,
they can produce a reduced-order model missing those low damped poles/zeros frequency
regions.
See Also
balancmr | bstmr | hankelmr | schurmr
3-12
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Using Modal Algorithms
Using Modal Algorithms
Rigid Body Dynamics
In many cases, a model's -axis poles are important to keep after model reduction, e.g.,
rigid body dynamics of a flexible structure plant or integrators of a controller. A unique
routine, modreal, serves the purpose nicely.
modreal puts a system into its modal form, with eigenvalues appearing on the diagonal
of its A-matrix. Real eigenvalues appear in 1-by-1 blocks, and complex eigenvalues
appear in 2-by-2 real blocks. All the blocks are ordered in ascending order, based on
their eigenvalue magnitudes, by default, or descending order, based on their real parts.
Therefore, specifying the number of -axis poles splits the model into two systems with
one containing only -axis dynamics, the other containing the remaining dynamics.
rng(5678,'twister');
G = rss(30,1,1);
% random 30-state model
[Gjw,G2] = modreal(G,1); % only one rigid body dynamics
G2.d = Gjw.d; Gjw.d = 0; % put DC gain of G into G2
subplot(211);sigma(Gjw);ylabel('Rigid Body')
subplot(212);sigma(G2);ylabel('Nonrigid Body')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3-13
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
Further model reduction can be done on G2 without any numerical difficulty. After G2 is
further reduced to Gred, the final approximation of the model is simply Gjw+Gred.
This process of splitting -axis poles has been built in and automated in all the model
reduction routines balancmr, schurmr, hankelmr, bstmr, and hankelsv, so that users
need not worry about splitting the model.
Examine the Hankel singular value plot.
hankelsv(G)
3-14
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Using Modal Algorithms
Calculate an eighth-order reduced model.
[gr,info] = reduce(G,8);
figure
bode(G,'b-',gr,'r--')
legend('Original','Reduced');
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3-15
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
The default algorithm balancmr of reduce has done a great job of approximating a
30-state model with just eight states. Again, the rigid body dynamics are preserved for
further controller design.
See Also
balancmr | bstmr | hankelmr | hankelsv | modreal | schurmr
3-16
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Reducing Large-Scale Models
Reducing Large-Scale Models
For some really large size problems (states > 200), modreal turns out to be the only
way to start the model reduction process. Because of the size and numerical properties
associated with those large size, and low damped dynamics, most Hankel based routines
can fail to produce a good reduced-order model.
modreal puts the large size dynamics into the modal form, then truncates the dynamic
model to an intermediate stage model with a comfortable size of 50 or so states. From
this point on, those more sophisticated Hankel singular value based routines can further
reduce this intermediate stage model, in a much more accurate fashion, to a smaller size
for final controller design.
For a typical 240-state flexible spacecraft model in the spacecraft industry, applying
modreal and bstmr (or any other additive routines) in sequence can reduce the
original 240-state plant dynamics to a seven-state three-axis model including rigid body
dynamics. Any modern robust control design technique mentioned in this toolbox can
then be easily applied to this smaller size plant for a controller design.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3-17
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
Normalized Coprime Factor Reduction
A special model reduction routine ncfmr produces a reduced-order model by truncating
a balanced coprime set of a given model. It can directly simplify a modern controller with
integrators to a smaller size by balanced truncation of the normalized coprime factors.
It does not need modreal for pre-/postprocessing as the other routines do. However, any
integrators in the model will not be preserved.
rng(89,'twister');
K= rss(30,4,3);
[Kred,info2] = ncfmr(K);
Again, without specifying the size of the reduced-order model, any model reduction
routine presented here will plot a Hankel singular value bar chart and prompt you for a
reduced model size. In this case, enter 15.
Then, plot the singular values of the original and reduced-order models.
sigma(K,Kred)
legend('Original (30-state)','Kred (15-state)')
3-18
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Normalized Coprime Factor Reduction
If integral control is important, previously mentioned methods (except ncfmr) can nicely
preserve the original integrator(s) in the model.
See Also
modreal | ncfmr | ncfmr
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
3-19
3
Model Reduction for Robust Control
Bibliography
[1] Glover, K., “All Optimal Hankel Norm Approximation of Linear Multivariable
Systems, and Their L∝ - Error Bounds,” Int. J. Control, Vol. 39, No. 6, 1984, pp.
1145-1193.
[2] Zhou, K., Doyle, J.C., and Glover, K., Robust and Optimal Control, Englewood Cliffs,
NJ, Prentice Hall, 1996.
[3] Safonov, M.G., and Chiang, R.Y., “A Schur Method for Balanced Model Reduction,”
IEEE Trans. on Automat. Contr., Vol. 34, No. 7, July 1989, pp. 729-733.
[4] Safonov, M.G., Chiang, R.Y., and Limebeer, D.J.N., “Optimal Hankel Model Reduction
for Nonminimal Systems,” IEEE Trans. on Automat. Contr., Vol. 35, No. 4, April
1990, pp. 496-502.
[5] Safonov, M.G., and Chiang, R.Y., “Model Reduction for Robust Control: A Schur
Relative Error Method,” International J. of Adaptive Control and Signal
Processing, Vol. 2, 1988, pp. 259-272.
[6] Obinata, G., and Anderson, B.D.O., Model Reduction for Control System Design,
London, Springer-Verlag, 2001.
3-20
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4
Robustness Analysis
• “Create Models of Uncertain Systems” on page 4-2
• “Robust Controller Design” on page 4-10
• “MIMO Robustness Analysis” on page 4-15
• “Summary of Robustness Analysis Tools” on page 4-27
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4
Robustness Analysis
Create Models of Uncertain Systems
Dealing with and understanding the effects of uncertainty are important tasks for the
control engineer. Reducing the effects of some forms of uncertainty (initial conditions,
low-frequency disturbances) without catastrophically increasing the effects of other
dominant forms (sensor noise, model uncertainty) is the primary job of the feedback
control system.
Closed-loop stability is the way to deal with the (always present) uncertainty in initial
conditions or arbitrarily small disturbances.
High-gain feedback in low-frequency ranges is a way to deal with the effects of unknown
biases and disturbances acting on the process output. In this case, you are forced to use
roll-off filters in high-frequency ranges to deal with high-frequency sensor noise in a
feedback system.
Finally, notions such as gain and phase margins (and their generalizations) help quantify
the sensitivity of stability and performance in the face of model uncertainty, which is the
imprecise knowledge of how the control input directly affects the feedback variables.
Robust Control Toolbox software has built-in features allowing you to specify model
uncertainty simply and naturally. The primary building blocks, called uncertain elements
(or uncertain “Control Design Blocks”) are uncertain real parameters and uncertain
linear, time-invariant objects. These can be used to create coarse and simple or detailed
and complex descriptions of the model uncertainty present within your process models.
Once formulated, high-level system robustness tools can help you analyze the potential
degradation of stability and performance of the closed-loop system brought on by the
system model uncertainty.
Creating Uncertain Models of Dynamic Systems
The two dominant forms of model uncertainty are as follows:
• Uncertainty in parameters of the underlying differential equation models
• Frequency-domain uncertainty, which often quantifies model uncertainty by
describing absolute or relative uncertainty in the process's frequency response
Using these two basic building blocks, along with conventional system creation
commands (such as ss and tf), you can easily create uncertain system models.
4-2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create Models of Uncertain Systems
Creating Uncertain Parameters
An uncertain parameter has a name (used to identify it within an uncertain system
with many uncertain parameters) and a nominal value. Being uncertain, it also has
variability, described in one of the following ways:
• An additive deviation from the nominal
• A range about the nominal
• A percentage deviation from the nominal
Create a real parameter, with name '|bw|', nominal value 5, and a percentage
uncertainty of 10%.
bw = ureal('bw',5,'Percentage',10)
bw =
Uncertain real parameter "bw" with nominal value 5 and variability [-10,10]%.
This command creates a ureal object that stores a number of parameters in its
properties. View the properties of bw.
get(bw)
Name:
NominalValue:
Mode:
Range:
PlusMinus:
Percentage:
AutoSimplify:
'bw'
5
'Percentage'
[4.5000 5.5000]
[-0.5000 0.5000]
[-10 10]
'basic'
Note that the range of variation (Range property) and the additive deviation from
nominal (the PlusMinus property) are consistent with the Percentage property value.
You can create state-space and transfer function models with uncertain real coefficients
using ureal objects. The result is an uncertain state-space (uss) object. As an example,
use the uncertain real parameter bw to model a first-order system whose bandwidth is
between 4.5 and 5.5 rad/s.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-3
4
Robustness Analysis
H = tf(1,[1/bw 1])
H =
Uncertain continuous-time state-space model with 1 outputs, 1 inputs, 1 states.
The model uncertainty consists of the following blocks:
bw: Uncertain real, nominal = 5, variability = [-10,10]%, 1 occurrences
Type "H.NominalValue" to see the nominal value, "get(H)" to see all properties, and "H.
Note that the result H is an uncertain system, called a uss model. The nominal value of
H is a state-space (ss) model. Verify that the pole is at -5, as expected from the uncertain
parameter's nominal value of 5.
pole(H.NominalValue)
ans =
-5
Next, use bodeplot and stepplot to examine the behavior of H. These commands plot
the responses of the nominal system and a number of random samples of the uncertain
system.
bodeplot(H,{1e-1 1e2});
4-4
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create Models of Uncertain Systems
stepplot(H)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-5
4
Robustness Analysis
While there are variations in the bandwidth and time constant of H, the high-frequency
rolls off at 20 dB/decade regardless of the value of bw. You can capture the more
complicated uncertain behavior that typically occurs at high frequencies using the
ultidyn uncertain element.
Quantifying Unmodeled Dynamics
An informal way to describe the difference between the model of a process and the
actual process behavior is in terms of bandwidth. It is common to hear “The model is
good out to 8 radians/second.” The precise meaning is not clear, but it is reasonable
to believe that for frequencies lower than, say, 5 rad/s, the model is accurate, and for
frequencies beyond, say, 30 rad/s, the model is not necessarily representative of the
4-6
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create Models of Uncertain Systems
process behavior. In the frequency range between 5 and 30, the guaranteed accuracy of
the model degrades.
The uncertain linear, time-invariant dynamics object ultidyn can be used to model this
type of knowledge. An ultidyn object represents an unknown linear system whose only
known attribute is a uniform magnitude bound on its frequency response. When coupled
with a nominal model and a frequency-shaping filter, ultidyn objects can be used to
capture uncertainty associated with the model dynamics.
Suppose that the behavior of the system modeled by H significantly deviates from its
first-order behavior beyond 9 rad/s, for example, about 5% potential relative error at low
frequency, increasing to 1000% at high frequency where H rolls off. In order to model
frequency domain uncertainty as described above using ultidyn objects, follow these
steps:
1
Create the nominal system Gnom, using tf, ss, or zpk. Gnom itself might already
have parameter uncertainty. In this case Gnom is H, the first-order system with an
uncertain time constant.
2
Create a filter W, called the “weight,” whose magnitude represents the relative
uncertainty at each frequency. The utility makeweight is useful for creating firstorder weights with specific low- and high-frequency gains, and specified gain
crossover frequency.
3
Create an ultidyn object Delta with magnitude bound equal to 1.
The uncertain model G is formed by G = Gnom*(1+W*Delta).
If the magnitude of W represents an absolute (rather than relative) uncertainty, use the
formula G = Gnom + W*Delta instead.
The following commands carry out these steps:
bw = ureal('bw',5,'Percentage',10);
H = tf(1,[1/bw 1]);
Gnom = H;
W = makeweight(.05,9,10);
Delta = ultidyn('Delta',[1 1]);
G = Gnom*(1+W*Delta)
G =
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-7
4
Robustness Analysis
Uncertain continuous-time state-space model with 1 outputs, 1 inputs, 2 states.
The model uncertainty consists of the following blocks:
Delta: Uncertain 1x1 LTI, peak gain = 1, 1 occurrences
bw: Uncertain real, nominal = 5, variability = [-10,10]%, 1 occurrences
Type "G.NominalValue" to see the nominal value, "get(G)" to see all properties, and "G.
Note that the result G is also an uncertain system, with dependence on both Delta and
bw. You can use bode to make a Bode plot of 20 random samples of G's behavior over the
frequency range [0.1 100] rad/s.
bode(G,{1e-1 1e2})
4-8
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create Models of Uncertain Systems
In the next section, you design and compare two feedback controllers for G.
Related Examples
•
“Robust Controller Design” on page 4-10
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-9
4
Robustness Analysis
Robust Controller Design
In this tutorial, design a feedback controller for G, the uncertain model created in “Create
Models of Uncertain Systems” on page 4-2. The goals of this design are the usual ones:
good steady-state tracking and disturbance rejection properties. Because the plant model
is nominally a first-order lag, choose a PI control architecture. Given the desired closedloop damping ratio ξ and natural frequency ωn, the design equations for KI and KP (based
on the nominal open-loop time constant of 0.2) are
w2
2xwn
KI = n , KP =
- 1.
5
5
Follow these steps to design the controller:
1
In order to study how the uncertain behavior of G affects the achievable closed-loop
bandwidth, design two controllers, both achieving ξ=0.707, with different ωn: 3 and
7.5 respectively.
xi
wn
K1
wn
K2
=
=
=
=
=
0.707;
3;
tf([(2*xi*wn/5-1) wn*wn/5],[1 0]);
7.5;
tf([(2*xi*wn/5-1) wn*wn/5],[1 0]);
Note that the nominal closed-loop bandwidth achieved by K2 is in a region where G
has significant model uncertainty. It will not be surprising if the model variations
lead to significant degradations in the closed-loop performance.
2
Form the closed-loop systems using feedback.
T1 = feedback(G*K1,1);
T2 = feedback(G*K2,1);
3
Plot the step responses of 20 samples of each closed-loop system.
tfinal = 3;
stepplot(T1,'b',T2,'r',tfinal)
4-10
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Robust Controller Design
The step responses for T2 exhibit a faster rise time because K2 sets a higher closed loop
bandwidth. However, the model variations have a greater effect.
You can use robuststab to check the robustness of stability to the model variations.
[stabmarg1,destabu1,report1] = robuststab(T1);
stabmarg1
[stabmarg2,destabu2,report2] = robuststab(T2);
stabmarg2
stabmarg1 =
LowerBound: 4.0137
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-11
4
Robustness Analysis
UpperBound: 4.0137
DestabilizingFrequency: 3.6934
stabmarg2 =
LowerBound: 1.2530
UpperBound: 1.2530
DestabilizingFrequency: 10.8831
The stabmarg variable gives lower and upper bounds on the stability margin. A
stability margin greater than 1 means the system is stable for all values of the modeled
uncertainty. A stability margin less than 1 means there are allowable values of the
uncertain elements that make the system unstable. The report variable briefly
summarizes the analysis.
report1
report2
report1 =
Uncertain system is robustly stable to modeled uncertainty.
-- It can tolerate up to 401% of the modeled uncertainty.
-- A destabilizing combination of 401% of the modeled uncertainty was found.
-- This combination causes an instability at 3.69 rad/seconds.
-- Sensitivity with respect to the uncertain elements are:
'Delta' is 100%. Increasing 'Delta' by 25% leads to a 25% decrease in the margin.
'bw' is 21%. Increasing 'bw' by 25% leads to a 5% decrease in the margin.
report2 =
Uncertain system is robustly stable to modeled uncertainty.
-- It can tolerate up to 125% of the modeled uncertainty.
-- A destabilizing combination of 125% of the modeled uncertainty was found.
-- This combination causes an instability at 10.9 rad/seconds.
-- Sensitivity with respect to the uncertain elements are:
'Delta' is 100%. Increasing 'Delta' by 25% leads to a 25% decrease in the margin.
'bw' is 11%. Increasing 'bw' by 25% leads to a 3% decrease in the margin.
While both systems are stable for all variations, their performance is clearly affected to
different degrees. To determine how the uncertainty affects closed-loop performance,
4-12
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Robust Controller Design
you can use wcgain to compute the worst-case effect of the uncertainty on the peak
magnitude of the closed-loop sensitivity (S=1/(1+GK)) function. This peak gain is
typically correlated with the amount of overshoot in a step response.
To do this, form the closed-loop sensitivity functions and call wcgain.
S1 = feedback(1,G*K1);
S2 = feedback(1,G*K2);
[maxgain1,wcu1] = wcgain(S1);
maxgain1
[maxgain2,wcu2] = wcgain(S2);
maxgain2
maxgain1 =
LowerBound: 1.8831
UpperBound: 1.8835
CriticalFrequency: 3.2651
maxgain2 =
LowerBound: 4.6037
UpperBound: 4.6120
CriticalFrequency: 11.1286
The maxgain variable gives lower and upper bounds on the worst-case peak gain of the
sensitivity transfer function, as well as the specific frequency where the maximum gain
occurs. The wcu variable contains specific values of the uncertain elements that achieve
this worst-case behavior.
You can use usubs to substitute these worst-case values for uncertain elements, and
compare the nominal and worst-case behavior. Use bodemag and step to make the
comparison.
bodemag(S1.NominalValue,'b',usubs(S1,wcu1),'b');
hold on
bodemag(S2.NominalValue,'r',usubs(S2,wcu2),'r');
hold off
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-13
4
Robustness Analysis
Clearly, while K2 achieves better nominal sensitivity than K1, the nominal closed-loop
bandwidth extends too far into the frequency range where the process uncertainty is
very large. Hence the worst-case performance of K2 is inferior to K1 for this particular
uncertain model.
The next section explores these robustness analysis tools further on a multiinput,
multioutput system.
4-14
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Robustness Analysis
MIMO Robustness Analysis
The previous sections focused on simple uncertainty models of single-input and singleoutput systems, predominantly from a transfer function perspective. You can also create
uncertain state-space models made up of uncertain state-space matrices. Moreover, all
the analysis tools covered thus far can be applied to these systems as well.
Consider, for example, a two-input, two-output, two-state system whose model has
parametric uncertainty in the state-space matrices. First create an uncertain parameter
p. Using the parameter, make uncertain A and C matrices. The B matrix happens to be
not-uncertain, although you will add frequency-domain input uncertainty to the model
later.
p
A
B
C
H
=
=
=
=
=
ureal('p',10,'Percentage',10);
[0 p;-p 0];
eye(2);
[1 p;-p 1];
ss(A,B,C,[0 0;0 0])
H =
Uncertain continuous-time state-space model with 2 outputs, 2 inputs, 2 states.
The model uncertainty consists of the following blocks:
p: Uncertain real, nominal = 10, variability = [-10,10]%, 2 occurrences
Type "H.NominalValue" to see the nominal value, "get(H)" to see all properties, and "H.
You can view the properties of the uncertain system H using the get command.
get(H)
a:
b:
c:
d:
e:
StateName:
StateUnit:
NominalValue:
Uncertainty:
InternalDelay:
[2x2
[2x2
[2x2
[2x2
[]
{2x1
{2x1
[2x2
[1x1
[0x1
umat]
double]
umat]
double]
cell}
cell}
ss]
struct]
double]
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-15
4
Robustness Analysis
InputDelay:
OutputDelay:
Ts:
TimeUnit:
InputName:
InputUnit:
InputGroup:
OutputName:
OutputUnit:
OutputGroup:
Name:
Notes:
UserData:
SamplingGrid:
[2x1 double]
[2x1 double]
0
'seconds'
{2x1 cell}
{2x1 cell}
[1x1 struct]
{2x1 cell}
{2x1 cell}
[1x1 struct]
''
{}
[]
[1x1 struct]
Most properties behave in the same way as the corresponding properties of ss objects.
The property NominalValue is itself an ss object.
Adding Independent Input Uncertainty to Each Channel
The model for H does not include actuator dynamics. Said differently, the actuator models
are unity-gain for all frequencies.
Nevertheless, the behavior of the actuator for channel 1 is modestly uncertain (say 10%)
at low frequencies, and the high-frequency behavior beyond 20 rad/s is not accurately
modeled. Similar statements hold for the actuator in channel 2, with larger modest
uncertainty at low frequency (say 20%) but accuracy out to 45 rad/s.
Use ultidyn objects Delta1 and Delta2 along with shaping filters W1 and W2 to add
this form of frequency domain uncertainty to the model.
W1 = makeweight(.1,20,50);
W2 = makeweight(.2,45,50);
Delta1 = ultidyn('Delta1',[1 1]);
Delta2 = ultidyn('Delta2',[1 1]);
G = H*blkdiag(1+W1*Delta1,1+W2*Delta2)
G =
Uncertain continuous-time state-space model with 2 outputs, 2 inputs, 4 states.
The model uncertainty consists of the following blocks:
Delta1: Uncertain 1x1 LTI, peak gain = 1, 1 occurrences
4-16
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Robustness Analysis
Delta2: Uncertain 1x1 LTI, peak gain = 1, 1 occurrences
p: Uncertain real, nominal = 10, variability = [-10,10]%, 2 occurrences
Type "G.NominalValue" to see the nominal value, "get(G)" to see all properties, and "G.
Note that G is a two-input, two-output uncertain system, with dependence on three
uncertain elements, Delta1, Delta2, and p. It has four states, two from H and one each
from the shaping filters W1 and W2, which are embedded in G.
You can plot a 2-second step response of several samples of G The 10% uncertainty in the
natural frequency is obvious.
stepplot(G,2)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-17
4
Robustness Analysis
You can create a Bode plot of samples of G. The high-frequency uncertainty in the model
is also obvious. For clarity, start the Bode plot beyond the resonance.
bodeplot(G,{13 100})
Closed-Loop Robustness Analysis
Load the controller and verify that it is two-input and two-output.
load mimoKexample
size(K)
Warning: Updating objects saved with previous MATLAB version...
Resave your MAT files to improve loading speed.
4-18
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Robustness Analysis
State-space model with 2 outputs, 2 inputs, and 9 states.
You can use the command loopsens to form all the standard plant/controller feedback
configurations, including sensitivity and complementary sensitivity at both the input and
output. Because G is uncertain, all the closed-loop systems are uncertain as well.
F = loopsens(G,K)
F =
Si:
Ti:
Li:
So:
To:
Lo:
PSi:
CSo:
Poles:
Stable:
[2x2 uss]
[2x2 uss]
[2x2 uss]
[2x2 uss]
[2x2 uss]
[2x2 uss]
[2x2 uss]
[2x2 uss]
[13x1 double]
1
F is a structure with many fields. The poles of the nominal closed-loop system are
in F.Poles, and F.Stable is 1 if the nominal closed-loop system is stable. In the
remaining 10 fields, S stands for sensitivity, T or complementary sensitivity, and L for
open-loop gain. The suffixes i and o refer to the input and output of the plant. Finally, P
and C refer to the plant and controller.
Hence, Ti is mathematically the same as:
Lo is G*K, and CSo is mathematically the same as
Examine the transmission of disturbances at the plant input to the plant output by
plotting responses of F.PSi. Graph some samples along with the nominal.
bodemag(F.PSi.NominalValue,'r+',F.PSi,'b-',{1e-1 100})
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-19
4
Robustness Analysis
Nominal Stability Margins
You can use loopmargin o investigate loop-at-a-time gain and phase margins, loop-at-atime disk margins, and simultaneous multivariable margins. They are computed for the
nominal system and do not reflect the uncertainty models within G.
Explore the simultaneous margins individually at the plant input, individually at the
plant output, and simultaneously at both input and output.
[I,DI,SimI,O,DO,SimO,Sim] = loopmargin(G,K);
The third output argument is the simultaneous gain and phase variations allowed in all
input channels to the plant.
4-20
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Robustness Analysis
SimI
SimI =
GainMargin: [0.1179 8.4796]
PhaseMargin: [-76.5484 76.5484]
Frequency: 6.3496
This information implies that the gain at the plant input can vary in both channels
independently by factors between (approximately) 1/8 and 8, as well as phase variations
up to 76 degrees.
The sixth output argument is the simultaneous gain and phase variations allowed in all
output channels to the plant.
SimO
SimO =
GainMargin: [0.1190 8.4013]
PhaseMargin: [-76.4242 76.4242]
Frequency: 19.5393
Note that the simultaneous margins at the plant output are similar to those at the input.
This is not always the case in multiloop feedback systems.
The last output argument is the simultaneous gain and phase variations allowed in
all input and output channels to the plant. As expected, when you consider all such
variations simultaneously, the margins are somewhat smaller than those at the input or
output alone.
Sim
Sim =
GainMargin: [0.5660 1.7667]
PhaseMargin: [-30.9788 30.9788]
Frequency: 9.2914
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-21
4
Robustness Analysis
Nevertheless, these numbers indicate a generally robust closed-loop system, able to
tolerate significant gain (more than +/-50% in each channel) and 30 degree phase
variations simultaneously in all input and output channels of the plant.
Robustness of Stability Model Uncertainty
With loopmargin, you determined various margins of the nominal, multiloop system.
These margins are computed only for the nominal system, and do not reflect the
uncertainty explicitly modeled by the ureal and ultidyn objects. When you work with
detailed, complex uncertain system models, the conventional margins computed by
loopmargin might not always be indicative of the actual stability margins associated
with the uncertain elements. You can use robuststab to check the stability margin of
the system to these specific modeled variations.
In this example, use robuststab to compute the stability margin of the closed-loop
system represented by Delta1, Delta2, and p.
Use any of the closed-loop systems within F = loopsens(G,K). All of them, F.Si,
F.To, etc., have the same internal dynamics, and hence the stability properties are the
same.
[stabmarg,desgtabu,report] = robuststab(F.So);
stabmarg
stabmarg =
LowerBound: 2.2174
UpperBound: 2.2175
DestabilizingFrequency: 13.5963
report
report =
Uncertain system is robustly stable to modeled uncertainty.
-- It can tolerate up to 222% of the modeled uncertainty.
-- A destabilizing combination of 222% of the modeled uncertainty was found.
-- This combination causes an instability at 13.6 rad/seconds.
-- Sensitivity with respect to the uncertain elements are:
'Delta1' is 55%. Increasing 'Delta1' by 25% leads to a 14% decrease in the margin
'Delta2' is 54%. Increasing 'Delta2' by 25% leads to a 14% decrease in the margin
4-22
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Robustness Analysis
'p' is 39%.
Increasing 'p' by 25% leads to a 10% decrease in the margin.
This analysis confirms what the loopmargin analysis suggested. The closed-loop
system is quite robust, in terms of stability, to the variations modeled by the uncertain
parameters Delta1, Delta2, and p. In fact, the system can tolerate more than twice the
modeled uncertainty without losing closed-loop stability.
Worst-Case Gain Analysis
You can plot the Bode magnitude of the nominal output sensitivity function. It clearly
shows decent disturbance rejection in all channels at low frequency.
bodemag(F.So.NominalValue,{1e-1 100})
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-23
4
Robustness Analysis
You can compute the peak value of the maximum singular value of the frequency
response matrix using norm.
[PeakNom,freq] = norm(F.So.NominalValue,'inf')
PeakNom =
1.1288
freq =
6.7969
The peak is about 1.13, occurring at a frequency of 36 rad/s. What is the maximum
output sensitivity gain that is achieved when the uncertain elements Delta1, Delta2,
and p vary over their ranges? You can use wcgain to answer this.
[maxgain,wcu] = wcgain(F.So);
The analysis indicates that the worst-case gain is somewhere between 2.1 and 2.2. The
frequency where the peak is achieved is about 8.5.
You can replace the values for Delta1, Delta2, and p that achieve the gain of 2.1, using
usubs. . Make the substitution in the output complementary sensitivity, and do a step
response.
step(F.To.NominalValue,usubs(F.To,wcu),5)
4-24
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Robustness Analysis
The perturbed response, which is the worst combination of uncertain values in terms of
output sensitivity amplification, does not show significant degradation of the command
response. The settling time is increased by about 50%, from 2 to 4, and the off-diagonal
coupling is increased by about a factor of about 2, but is still quite small.
You can also examine the worst-case frequency response alongside the nominal and
sampled systems using wcgainplot.
wcgainplot(F.To,{1e-1,100})
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-25
4
Robustness Analysis
See Also
loopmargin | loopsens | robuststab | ultidyn | usubs | wcgain | wcgainplot
4-26
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Summary of Robustness Analysis Tools
Summary of Robustness Analysis Tools
Function
Description
ureal
Create uncertain real parameter.
ultidyn
Create uncertain, linear, time-invariant dynamics.
uss
Create uncertain state-space object from uncertain statespace matrices.
ufrd
Create uncertain frequency response object.
loopsens
Compute all relevant open and closed-loop quantities for a
MIMO feedback connection.
loopmargin
Compute loop-at-a-time as well as MIMO gain and phase
margins for a multiloop system, including the simultaneous
gain/phase margins.
robustperf
Robustness performance of uncertain systems.
robuststab
Compute the robust stability margin of a nominally stable
uncertain system.
wcgain
Compute the worst-case gain of a nominally stable uncertain
system.
wcmargin
Compute worst-case (over uncertainty) loop-at-a-time diskbased gain and phase margins.
wcsens
Compute worst-case (over uncertainty) sensitivity of plantcontroller feedback loop.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-27
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
4-28
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
• “Interpretation of H-Infinity Norm” on page 5-2
• “H-Infinity Performance” on page 5-9
• “Active Suspension Control Design” on page 5-17
• “Bibliography” on page 5-36
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Interpretation of H-Infinity Norm
Norms of Signals and Systems
There are several ways of defining norms of a scalar signal e(t) in the time domain. We
will often use the 2-norm, (L2-norm), for mathematical convenience, which is defined as
1
e
2
Ê
:= Á
Ë
•
Ú-• e ( t)
2
ˆ2
dt ˜ .
¯
If this integral is finite, then the signal e is square integrable, denoted as e ∝ L2. For
vector-valued signals
È e1 ( t ) ˘
Í
˙
e2 ( t ) ˙
Í
e (t ) =
,
Í M ˙
Í
˙
ÍÎ en ( t ) ˙˚
the 2-norm is defined as
e
2
Ê •
:= Á Ú e ( t)
Ë -•
1
2
ˆ2
dt ˜
2
¯
1
Ê •
ˆ2
= Á Ú eT ( t ) e ( t) dt ˜ .
-•
Ë
¯
In µ-tools the dynamic systems we deal with are exclusively linear, with state-space
model
È x& ˘ È A
Í ˙ =Í
Îe˚ ÎC
B˘ È x˘
˙Í ˙,
D˚ Î d ˚
or, in the transfer function form,
e(s) = T(s)d(s), T(s):= C(sI – A)–1B + D
5-2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Interpretation of H-Infinity Norm
Two mathematically convenient measures of the transfer matrix T(s) in the frequency
domain are the matrix H2 and H∞ norms,
1
2
È1 •
˘2
T 2 := Í
T ( jw ) dw ˙
F
-•
2
p
Î
˚
T • := max s ÈÎ T ( jw ) ˘˚ ,
Ú
wŒR
where the Frobenius norm (see the MATLAB norm command) of a complex matrix M is
M F :=
(
)
Trace M * M .
Both of these transfer function norms have input/output time-domain interpretations. If,
starting from initial condition x(0) = 0, two signals d and e are related by
È x& ˘ È A
Í ˙ =Í
Îe˚ ÎC
B˘ È x˘
˙Í ˙,
D˚ Î d ˚
then
• For d, a unit intensity, white noise process, the steady-state variance of e is ∝T∝2.
• The L2 (or RMS) gain from d → e,
e2
d π0 d
2
max
is equal to ∝T∝∞. This is discussed in greater detail in the next section.
Using Weighted Norms to Characterize Performance
Any performance criterion must also account for
• Relative magnitude of outside influences
• Frequency dependence of signals
• Relative importance of the magnitudes of regulated variables
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-3
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
So, if the performance objective is in the form of a matrix norm, it should actually be a
weighted norm
∝WLTWR∝
where the weighting function matrices WL and WR are frequency dependent, to account
for bandwidth constraints and spectral content of exogenous signals. The most natural
(mathematical) manner to characterize acceptable performance is in terms of the MIMO
∝·∝∞ (H∞) norm. For this reason, this section now discusses some interpretations of the H∞
norm.
Unweighted MIMO System
Suppose T is a MIMO stable linear system, with transfer function matrix T(s). For a
given driving signal d% ( t) , define e% as the output, as shown below.
Note that it is more traditional to write the diagram in Unweighted MIMO System:
Vectors from Left to Right with the arrows going from left to right as in Weighted MIMO
System.
Unweighted MIMO System: Vectors from Left to Right
The two diagrams shown above represent the exact same system. We prefer to write
these block diagrams with the arrows going right to left to be consistent with matrix and
operator composition.
Assume that the dimensions of T are ne × nd. Let β > 0 be defined as
b := T
•
:= max s ÈÎ T ( jw ) ˘˚ .
wŒR
Now consider a response, starting from initial condition equal to 0. In that case,
Parseval's theorem gives that
5-4
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Interpretation of H-Infinity Norm
1
e% 2
=
d%
2
È
ÍÎ
È
ÍÎ
• T
e%
0
Ú
( t) e% ( t ) dt ˘˙ 2
˚
1
˘2
•
£ b.
T
Ú0 d% ( t) d% (t ) dt ˙˚
Moreover, there are specific disturbances d that result in the ratio e% 2 d% arbitrarily
2
close to β. Because of this, ∝T∝∞ is referred to as the L2 (or RMS) gain of the system.
As you would expect, a sinusoidal, steady-state interpretation of ∝T∝∞ is also possible:
For any frequency w ΠR , any vector of amplitudes a ΠRnd , and any vector of phases
f Œ Rnd , with ∝a∝2 ≤ 1, define a time signal
È
Í a1 sin (w t + f1 )
d% ( t) = Í
M
Í
Í an sin w t + fn
d
Î d
(
)
˘
˙
˙.
˙
˙
˚
Applying this input to the system T results in a steady-state response e%ss of the form
È
Í b1 sin ( w t + f1 )
e%ss ( t) = Í
M
Í
Íbn sin w t + fn
e
Î e
(
)
˘
˙
˙.
˙
˙
˚
The vector b Œ R ne will satisfy ∝b∝2 ≤ β. Moreover, β, as defined in Weighted MIMO
System, is the smallest number such that this is true for every ∝a∝2 ≤ 1, w , and ϕ.
Note that in this interpretation, the vectors of the sinusoidal magnitude responses are
unweighted, and measured in Euclidean norm. If realistic multivariable performance
objectives are to be represented by a single MIMO ∝·∝∞ objective on a closed-loop transfer
function, additional scalings are necessary. Because many different objectives are being
lumped into one matrix and the associated cost is the norm of the matrix, it is important
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-5
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
to use frequency-dependent weighting functions, so that different requirements can be
meaningfully combined into a single cost function. Diagonal weights are most easily
interpreted.
Consider the diagram of Weighted MIMO System, along with Unweighted MIMO
System: Vectors from Left to Right.
Assume that WL and WR are diagonal, stable transfer function matrices, with diagonal
entries denoted Li and Ri.
È L1
Í
0
WL = Í
Í M
Í
ÍÎ 0
0 ˘
È R1
˙
Í
L2 … 0 ˙
0
, WR = Í
Í M
M O M ˙
˙
Í
0 … Lne ˙˚
ÍÎ 0
0
0
0 ˘
˙
R2 … 0 ˙
.
M O
M ˙
˙
0 … Rn d ˙˚
…
…
Weighted MIMO System
Bounds on the quantity ∝WLTWR∝∞ will imply bounds about the sinusoidal steadystate behavior of the signals d% and e% = Td% in the diagram of Unweighted MIMO
(
)
System: Vectors from Left to Right. Specifically, for sinusoidal signal d% , the steady-state
relationship between e% = Td% , d% and ∝WLTWR∝∞ is as follows. The steady-state solution
(
)
e%ss , denoted as
È %
Í e1 sin ( w t + f1 )
e%ss ( t) = Í
M
Í
Í e%n sin w t + fn
d
Î e
(
)
˘
˙
˙
˙
˙
˚
satisfies
5-6
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Interpretation of H-Infinity Norm
ne
 WL ( jw ) e%i
2
£1
i
i =1
for all sinusoidal input signals d% of the form
È %
Í d1 sin ( w t + f1 )
%d ( t) = Í
M
Í
%
Í dn sin w t + fn
d
Î e
(
)
˘
˙
˙
˙
˙
˚
satisfying
2
d% i
nd
Â
i =1
WR
i
( jw )
2
£1
if and only if ∝WLTWR∝∞ ≤ 1.
This approximately (very approximately — the next statement is not actually correct)
implies that ∝WLTWR∝∞ ≤ 1 if and only if for every fixed frequency w , and all sinusoidal
disturbances d% of the form Equation 5-2 satisfying
d%i £ WR
i
( jw )
the steady-state error components will satisfy
e%i £
1
WL
i
.
( jw )
This shows how one could pick performance weights to reflect the desired frequencydependent performance objective. Use WR to represent the relative magnitude of
sinusoids disturbances that might be present, and use 1/WL to represent the desired
upper bound on the subsequent errors that are produced.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-7
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Remember, however, that the weighted H∞ norm does not actually give element-byelement bounds on the components of e% based on element-by-element bounds on the
components of d% . The precise bound it gives is in terms of Euclidean norms of the
components of e% and d% (weighted appropriately by WL(j w ) and WR(j w )).
5-8
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
H-Infinity Performance
H-Infinity Performance
Performance as Generalized Disturbance Rejection
The modern approach to characterizing closed-loop performance objectives is to measure
the size of certain closed-loop transfer function matrices using various matrix norms.
Matrix norms provide a measure of how large output signals can get for certain classes of
input signals. Optimizing these types of performance objectives over the set of stabilizing
controllers is the main thrust of recent optimal control theory, such as L1, H2, H∞,
and optimal control. Hence, it is important to understand how many types of control
objectives can be posed as a minimization of closed-loop transfer functions.
Consider a tracking problem, with disturbance rejection, measurement noise, and control
input signal limitations, as shown in Generalized and Weighted Performance Block
Diagram. K is some controller to be designed and G is the system you want to control.
Typical Closed-Loop Performance Objective
A reasonable, though not precise, design objective would be to design K to keep tracking
errors and control input signal small for all reasonable reference commands, sensor
noises, and external force disturbances.
Hence, a natural performance objective is the closed-loop gain from exogenous influences
(reference commands, sensor noise, and external force disturbances) to regulated
variables (tracking errors and control input signal). Specifically, let T denote the closedloop mapping from the outside influences to the regulated variables:
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-9
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
You can assess performance by measuring the gain from outside influences to regulated
variables. In other words, good performance is associated with T being small. Because
the closed-loop system is a multiinput, multioutput (MIMO) dynamic system, there are
two different aspects to the gain of T:
• Spatial (vector disturbances and vector errors)
• Temporal (dynamic relationship between input/output signals)
Hence the performance criterion must account for
• Relative magnitude of outside influences
• Frequency dependence of signals
• Relative importance of the magnitudes of regulated variables
So if the performance objective is in the form of a matrix norm, it should actually be a
weighted norm
∝WLTWR∝
where the weighting function matrices WL and WR are frequency dependent, to account
for bandwidth constraints and spectral content of exogenous signals. A natural
(mathematical) manner to characterize acceptable performance is in terms of the MIMO
∝· ∝∞ (H∞) norm. See “Interpretation of H-Infinity Norm” on page 5-2 for an interpretation
of the H∞ norm and signals.
Interconnection with Typical MIMO Performance Objectives
The closed-loop performance objectives are formulated as weighted closed-loop transfer
functions that are to be made small through feedback. A generic example, which includes
many relevant terms, is shown in block diagram form in Generalized and Weighted
Performance Block Diagram. In the diagram, G denotes the plant model and K is the
feedback controller.
5-10
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
H-Infinity Performance
Wmodel
e1
d2
Wact
d1
Wcmd
~
d1
~
e1
Wdist
~
d2
~
e2
G
K
Wperf1
e2
Wperf2
e3
~
e3
Hsens
~
d3
Wsnois
d3
Generalized and Weighted Performance Block Diagram
The blocks in this figure might be scalar (SISO) and/or multivariable (MIMO), depending
on the specific example. The mathematical objective of H∞ control is to make the closedloop MIMO transfer function Ted satisfy ∝Ted∝∞ < 1. The weighting functions are used
to scale the input/output transfer functions such that when ∝Ted∝∞ < 1, the relationship
between d% and e% is suitable.
Performance requirements on the closed-loop system are transformed into the H∞
framework with the help of weighting or scaling functions. Weights are selected to
account for the relative magnitude of signals, their frequency dependence, and their
relative importance. This is captured in the figure above, where the weights or scalings
[Wcmd, Wdist,Wsnois] are used to transform and scale the normalized input signals [d1,d2,d3]
into physical units defined as [d1, d2, d3]. Similarly weights or scalings [Wact, Wperf1,Wperf2]
transform and scale physical units into normalized output signals [e1, e2, e3]. An
interpretation of the signals, weighting functions, and models follows.
Signal
Meaning
d1
Normalized reference command
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-11
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Signal
d%1
Meaning
Typical reference command in physical units
d2
Normalized exogenous disturbances
Typical exogenous disturbances in physical units
d% 2
Normalized sensor noise
d3
Typical sensor noise in physical units
d% 3
e1
Weighted control signals
e%1
Actual control signals in physical units
e2
Weighted tracking errors
e%2
Actual tracking errors in physical units
e3
Weighted plant errors
e%3
Actual plant errors in physical units
Wcmd
Wcmd is included in H∞ control problems that require tracking of a reference command.
Wcmd shapes the normalized reference command signals (magnitude and frequency)
into the actual (or typical) reference signals that you expect to occur. It describes the
magnitude and the frequency dependence of the reference commands generated by the
normalized reference signal. Normally Wcmd is flat at low frequency and rolls off at high
frequency. For example, in a flight control problem, fighter pilots generate stick input
reference commands up to a bandwidth of about 2 Hz. Suppose that the stick has a
maximum travel of three inches. Pilot commands could be modeled as normalized signals
passed through a first-order filter:
Wcmd =
3
1
s +1
2 ◊ 2p
.
Wmodel
5-12
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
H-Infinity Performance
Wmodel represents a desired ideal model for the closed-looped system and is often included
in problem formulations with tracking requirements. Inclusion of an ideal model for
tracking is often called a model matching problem, i.e., the objective of the closed-loop
system is to match the defined model. For good command tracking response, you might
want the closed-loop system to respond like a well-damped second-order system. The
ideal model would then be
Wmodel =
w2
s2 + 2zw + w 2
for specific desired natural frequency ω and desired damping ratio ζ. Unit conversions
might be necessary to ensure exact correlation between the ideal model and the closedloop system. In the fighter pilot example, suppose that roll-rate is being commanded and
10º/second response is desired for each inch of stick motion. Then, in these units, the
appropriate model is:
Wmodel = 10
w2
s2 + 2zw + w 2
.
Wdist
Wdist shapes the frequency content and magnitude of the exogenous disturbances
affecting the plant. For example, consider an electron microscope as the plant. The
dominant performance objective is to mechanically isolate the microscope from outside
mechanical disturbances, such as ground excitations, sound (pressure) waves, and air
currents. You can capture the spectrum and relative magnitudes of these disturbances
with the transfer function weighting matrix Wdist.
Wperf1
Wperf1 weights the difference between the response of the closed-loop system and the
ideal model W model. Often you might want accurate matching of the ideal model at low
frequency and require less accurate matching at higher frequency, in which case Wperf1 is
flat at low frequency, rolls off at first or second order, and flattens out at a small, nonzero
value at high frequency. The inverse of the weight is related to the allowable size of
tracking errors, when dealing with the reference commands and disturbances described
by Wcmd and Wdist.
Wperf2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-13
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Wperf2 penalizes variables internal to the process G, such as actuator states that are
internal to G or other variables that are not part of the tracking objective.
Wact
Wact is used to shape the penalty on control signal use. Wact is a frequency varying
weighting function used to penalize limits on the deflection/position, deflection rate/
velocity, etc., response of the control signals, when dealing with the tracking and
disturbance rejection objectives defined above. Each control signal is usually penalized
independently.
Wsnois
Wsnois represents frequency domain models of sensor noise. Each sensor measurement
feedback to the controller has some noise, which is often higher in one frequency range
than another. The Wsnois weight tries to capture this information, derived from laboratory
experiments or based on manufacturer measurements, in the control problem. For
example, medium grade accelerometers have substantial noise at low frequency and high
frequency. Therefore the corresponding Wsnois weight would be larger at low and high
frequency and have a smaller magnitude in the mid-frequency range. Displacement or
rotation measurement is often quite accurate at low frequency and in steady state, but
responds poorly as frequency increases. The weighting function for this sensor would
be small at low frequency, gradually increase in magnitude as a first- or second-order
system, and level out at high frequency.
Hsens
Hsens represents a model of the sensor dynamics or an external antialiasing filter. The
transfer functions used to describe Hsens are based on physical characteristics of the
individual components. These models might also be lumped into the plant model G.
This generic block diagram has tremendous flexibility and many control performance
objectives can be formulated in the H∞ framework using this block diagram description.
Robustness in the H-Infinity Framework
Performance and robustness tradeoffs in control design were discussed in the context
of multivariable loop shaping in “Tradeoff Between Performance and Robustness” on
page 2-2. In the H∞ control design framework, you can include robustness objectives
as additional disturbance to error transfer functions — disturbances to be kept small.
5-14
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
H-Infinity Performance
Consider the following figure of a closed-loop feedback system with additive and
multiplicative uncertainty models.
The transfer function matrices are defined as:
-1
TF ( s ) z Æw = TI ( s ) = KG ( I + GK )
1
1
TF ( s ) z Æ w = KSO ( s ) = K ( I + GK )
2
2
-1
where TI(s) denotes the input complementary sensitivity function and SO(s) denotes
the output sensitivity function. Bounds on the size of the transfer function matrices
from z1 to w1 and z2 to w2 ensure that the closed-loop system is robust to multiplicative
uncertainty, ΔM(s), at the plant input, and additive uncertainty, ΔA(s), around the plant
G(s). In the H∞ control problem formulation, the robustness objectives enter the synthesis
procedure as additional input/output signals to be kept small. The interconnection with
the uncertainty blocks removed follows.
The H∞ control robustness objective is now in the same format as the performance
objectives, that is, to minimize the H∞ norm of the transfer matrix from z, [z1,z2], to w,
[w1,w2].
Weighting or scaling matrices are often introduced to shape the frequency and
magnitude content of the sensitivity and complementary sensitivity transfer function
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-15
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
matrices. Let WM correspond to the multiplicative uncertainty and WA correspond to
the additive uncertainty model. ΔM(s) and ΔA(s) are assumed to be a norm bounded by 1,
i.e., |ΔM(s)|<1 and |ΔA(s)|<1. Hence as a function of frequency, |WM(jω)| and |WA(jω)|
are the respective sizes of the largest anticipated additive and multiplicative plant
perturbations.
The multiplicative weighting or scaling WM represents a percentage error in the model
and is often small in magnitude at low frequency, between 0.05 and 0.20 (5% to 20%
modeling error), and growing larger in magnitude at high frequency, 2 to 5 ((200% to
500% modeling error). The weight will transition by crossing a magnitude value of 1,
which corresponds to 100% uncertainty in the model, at a frequency at least twice the
bandwidth of the closed-loop system. A typical multiplicative weight is
WM
1
s+1
= 0 .10 5
.
1
s+1
200
By contrast, the additive weight or scaling WA represents an absolute error that is often
small at low frequency and large in magnitude at high frequency. The magnitude of this
weight depends directly on the magnitude of the plant model, G(s).
5-16
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Suspension Control Design
Active Suspension Control Design
This example shows how to use robust control techniques to design an active suspension
system for a quarter car body and wheel assembly model. In this example, you use H∞
design techniques to design a controller for a nominal quarter-car model. Then, you use μ
synthesis to design a robust controller that accounts for uncertainty in the model.
Conventional passive suspensions use a spring and damper between the car body and
wheel assembly. The spring-damper characteristics are adjusted to emphasize one of
several conflicting objectives such as passenger comfort, road holding, and suspension
deflection. Active suspensions use a feedback-controller hydraulic actuator between the
chassis and wheel assembly, which allows the designer to better balance these objectives.
Quarter-Car Suspension Model
This example uses the quarter-car model of the following illustration to design active
suspension control laws.
xb
mb
ks
bs
fs
mw
xw
kt
r
The mass, mb, represents the car chassis (body) and the mass, mw, represents the
wheel assembly. The spring, ks, and damper, bs, represent the passive spring and shock
absorber placed between the car body and the wheel assembly. The spring, kt, models the
compressibility of the pneumatic tire. The variables xb, xw, and r are the car body travel,
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-17
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
the wheel travel, and the road disturbance, respectively. The force, fs, which is applied
between the body and wheel assembly, is controlled by feedback. This force represents
the active component of the suspension system.
The following state-space equations describe the quarter-car dynamics.
x& 1 = x2 ,
1
È ks ( x1 - x3 ) + bs ( x2 - x4 ) - f s ˘˚ ,
x& 2 = mb Î
x& 3 = x4 ,
x& 4 =
1
È ks ( x1 - x3 ) + bs ( x2 - x4 ) - kt ( x3 - r ) - fs ˘˚ .
mw Î
The state variables in the system are defined as x1 := xb , x2 := x& b , x3 := xw , and
x4 := x& w .
Define the physical parameters of the system.
mb
mw
bs
ks
kt
=
=
=
=
=
300;
60;
1000;
16000 ;
190000;
%
%
%
%
%
kg
kg
N/m/s
N/m
N/m
Use these equations and parameter values to construct a state-space model, qcar, of the
quarter-car suspension system.
A = [ 0 1 0 0; [-ks -bs ks bs]/mb ; ...
0 0 0 1; [ks bs -ks-kt -bs]/mw];
B = [0 0; 0 10000/mb ; 0 0; [kt -10000]/mw];
C = [1 0 0 0; 1 0 -1 0; A(2,:)];
D = [0 0; 0 0; B(2,:)];
qcar = ss(A,B,C,D);
qcar.StateName = {'body travel xb (m)';'body vel (m/s)';...
'wheel travel xw (m)';'wheel vel (m/s)'};
qcar.InputName = {'r';'fs'};
qcar.OutputName = {'xb';'sd';'ab'};
5-18
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Suspension Control Design
The model inputs are the road disturbance, r, and actuator force, fs. The model outputs
are the car body travel, xb , suspension deflection sd = xb - xw , and car body acceleration
ab = &&xs .
The transfer function from actuator to body travel and acceleration has an imaginaryaxis zero. Examine the zero of this transfer function.
tzero(qcar({'xb','ab'},'fs'))
ans =
-0.0000 +56.2731i
-0.0000 -56.2731i
The natural frequency of this zero, 56.27 rad/s, is called the tire-hop frequency.
The transfer function from the actuator to suspension deflection also has an imaginaryaxis zero. Examine this zero.
zero(qcar('sd','fs'))
ans =
0.0000 +22.9734i
0.0000 -22.9734i
The natural frequency of this zero, 22.97 rad/s, is called the rattlespace frequency.
Plot the frequency response of the quarter-car model from inputs, (r,fs), to outputs, (ab,sd).
Both zeros are visible on the Bode plot.
bodemag(qcar({'ab','sd'},'r'),'b',qcar({'ab','sd'},'fs'),'r',{1 100});
legend('Road disturbance (r)','Actuator force (fs)','location','SouthWest')
title({'Gain from road dist (r) and actuator force (fs)';...
'to body accel (ab) and suspension travel (sd)'})
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-19
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Road disturbances influence the motion of the car and suspension:
• Small body acceleration influences passenger comfort.
• Small suspension travel contributes to good road handling. Further, limits on the
actuator displacement constrain the allowable travel.
Because of the imaginary axis zeros, feedback control cannot improve the response
from road disturbance (r) to body acceleration (ab) at the tire-hop frequency. Similarly,
feedback control cannot improve the response from r to suspension deflection (sd) at
the rattlespace frequency. Moreover, there is an inherent trade-off between passenger
comfort and suspension deflection. Any reduction of body travel at low frequency results
in an increase of suspension deflection. This trade-off arises because of the relationship
xw = xb – sd and the fact that xw roughly follows r at low frequency (less than 5 rad/s).
5-20
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Suspension Control Design
Hydraulic Actuator Model
The hydraulic actuator used for active suspension control is connected between the body
mass, mb, and the wheel assembly mass, mw. The nominal actuator dynamics can be
represented by the first-order transfer function:
ActNom ( s ) =
1
.
1
s +1
60
The maximum displacement is 0.05 m.
The nominal actuator model approximates the physical actuator dynamics. You can
model variations between the actuator model and the physical device as a family of
actuator models. You can also use this approach to model variations between the passive
quarter-car model and actual vehicle dynamics. The resulting family of models comprises
a nominal model with a frequency-dependent amount of uncertainty.
Create an uncertain model that represents this family of models.
ActNom = tf(1,[1/60 1]);
Wunc = makeweight(0.40,15,3);
unc = ultidyn('unc',[1 1],'SampleStateDim',5);
Act = ActNom*(1 + Wunc*unc);
Act.InputName = 'u';
Act.OutputName = 'fs';
At low frequency, below 3 rad/s, the model can vary up to 40% from its nominal value.
Around 3 rad/s, the percentage variation starts to increase. The uncertainty crosses
100% at 15 rad/s, and reaches 2000% at approximately 1000 rad/sec. The weighting
function, Wunc, reflects this profile and is used to modulate the amount of uncertainty as
a function of frequency. The result Act is an uncertain state-space model of the actuator.
Examine the uncertain actuator model by plotting the frequency response of 20 randomly
sampled models from Act.
bodeplot(Act,'b',Act.NominalValue,'r+',logspace(-1,3,120))
title('Nominal and 20 random actuator models')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-21
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
The plus (+) marker denotes the nominal actuator model. The blue solid lines represent
the randomly sampled models.
Design Objectives for H-Infinity Synthesis
To use H∞ synthesis algorithms, you must express your design objectives as a single cost
function to be minimized. For the quarter-car model, the main control objectives are
formulated in terms of passenger comfort and road handling. These objectives relate to
body acceleration, ab, and suspension travel, sd. Other factors that influence the control
design include:
• Characteristics of the road disturbance
• Quality of the sensor measurements for feedback
• Limits on the available control force
Use weights to model external disturbances and quantify the design objectives, as shown
in the following diagram.
5-22
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Suspension Control Design
d1
u
xb
r
Wroad
Act
fs
1/4 Car
Model
(qcar)
sd
ab
xb
Wsd
e2
Wa b
e3
fs
Wact
e1
y1
Wd 2
d2
y2
Wd 3
d3
The feedback controller uses the measurements y1 and y2 of the suspension travel, sd,
and body acceleration, ab, to compute the control signal, u. This control signal drives the
hydraulic actuator. There are three external sources of disturbance:
• The road disturbance, r, which is modeled as a normalized signal, d1, which is shaped
by a weighting function Wroad.
• Sensor noise on both measurements. This noise is modeled as normalized signals, d2
and d3, which are shaped by weighting functions Wd2 and Wd3.
You can reinterpret the control objectives as a disturbance rejection goal. The goal is
to minimize the impact of the disturbances, d1, d2, and d3, on a weighted combination
of suspension travel (sd), body acceleration (ab), and control effort (u). You can consider
the H∞ norm (peak gain) as the measure of the effect of the disturbances. Then, you can
meet the requirements by designing a controller that minimizes the H∞ norm from the
disturbance inputs, d1, d2, and d3, to the error signals , e1, e2, and e3.
Create the weighting functions that model the design objectives.
Wroad = ss(0.07);
Wroad.u = 'd1';
Wroad.y = 'r';
Wact = 8*tf([1 50],[1 500]);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-23
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Wact.u = 'u';
Wact.y = 'e1';
Wd2 = ss(0.01);
Wd2.u = 'd2';
Wd2.y = 'Wd2';
Wd3 = ss(0.5);
Wd3.u = 'd3';
Wd3.y = 'Wd3';
The constant weight Wroad = 0.07 models broadband road deflections of magnitude
7 cm. Wact is a highpass filter. This filter penalizes high-frequency content in the
control signal, and thus limits control bandwidth. Wd2 and Wd3 model broadband sensor
noise of intensity 0.01 and 0.5, respectively. In a more realistic design, Wd2 and Wd3
would be frequency dependent to model the noise spectrum of the displacement and
acceleration sensors. The inputs and outputs of all weighting functions are named to
facilitate interconnection. The notation u and y are shorthand for the InputName and
OutputName properties, respectively.
Specify target functions for the closed-loop response of the system from the road
disturbance, r, to the suspension deflection, sd, and body acceleration, ab.
HandlingTarget = 0.04 * tf([1/8 1],[1/80 1]);
ComfortTarget = 0.4 * tf([1/0.45 1],[1/150 1]);
Targets = [HandlingTarget;ComfortTarget];
Because of the actuator uncertainty and imaginary-axis zeros, the targets attenuate
disturbances only below 10 rad/s. These targets represent the goals of passenger comfort
(small car body acceleration) and adequate road handling (small suspension deflection).
Plot the closed-loop targets and compare to the open-loop response.
bodemag(qcar({'sd','ab'},'r')*Wroad,'b',Targets,'r--',{1,1000})
grid, title('Response to road disturbance')
legend('Open-loop','Closed-loop target')
5-24
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Suspension Control Design
The corresponding performance weights Wsd and Wab are the reciprocals of the comfort
and handling targets. To investigate the trade-off between passenger comfort and road
handling, construct three sets of weights, (βWsd,(1 – β)Wab). These weights use a blending
parameter, β, to modulate the trade-off.
beta = reshape([0.01 0.5 0.99],[1 1 3]);
Wsd = beta/HandlingTarget;
Wsd.u = 'sd';
Wsd.y = 'e3';
Wab = (1-beta)/ComfortTarget;
Wab.u = 'ab';
Wab.y = 'e2';
Wsd and Wab are arrays of weighting functions that correspond to three different tradeoffs: emphasizing comfort (β = 0.01), balancing comfort and handling (β = 0.5), and
emphasizing handling (β = 0.99).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-25
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Connect the quarter-car plant model, actuator model, and weighting functions to
construct the block diagram of the plant model weighted by the objectives.
sdmeas = sumblk('y1 = sd+Wd2');
abmeas = sumblk('y2 = ab+Wd3');
ICinputs = {'d1';'d2';'d3';'u'};
ICoutputs = {'e1';'e2';'e3';'y1';'y2'};
qcaric = connect(qcar(2:3,:),Act,Wroad,Wact,Wab,Wsd,Wd2,Wd3,...
sdmeas,abmeas,ICinputs,ICoutputs);
qcaric is an array of three models, one for each value of the blending parameter, β.
Also, the models in qcaric are uncertain, because they contain the uncertain actuator
model Act.
Nominal H-Infinity Synthesis
Use hinfsyn to compute an H∞ controller for each value of the blending parameter, β.
hinfsyn ignores the uncertainty in the plant models and synthesizes a controller for the
nominal value of each model.
ncont = 1;
nmeas = 2;
K = ss(zeros(ncont,nmeas,3));
gamma = zeros(3,1);
for i=1:3
[K(:,:,i),~,gamma(i)] = hinfsyn(qcaric(:,:,i),nmeas,ncont);
end
The weighted plant model has one control input (ncont), the hydraulic actuator force.
The model also has two measurement outputs (nmeas), which give the suspension
deflection and body acceleration.
Examine the resulting closed-loop H∞ norms, gamma.
gamma
gamma =
0.9410
0.6724
0.8877
The three H∞ controllers achieve closed-loop H∞ norms of 0.94 (emphasizing comfort),
0.67 (balancing comfort and handling), and 0.89 (emphasizing handling).
5-26
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Suspension Control Design
Construct closed-loop models of the quarter-car plant with the synthesized controller,
corresponding to each of the three blending parameter values. Compare the frequency
response from the road disturbance to xb, sd, and ab for the passive and active
suspensions.
K.u = {'sd','ab'}; K.y = 'u';
CL = connect(qcar,Act.Nominal,K,'r',{'xb';'sd';'ab'});
clf
bodemag(qcar(:,'r'),'b', CL(:,:,1),'r-.', ...
CL(:,:,2),'m-.', CL(:,:,3),'k:',{1,140})
grid
legend('Open-loop','Comfort','Balanced','Handling','location','SouthEast')
title('Body travel, suspension deflection, and body acceleration due to road')
The solid blue line corresponds to the open-loop response. The other lines are the
closed-loop frequency responses for the different comfort and handling blends. All three
controllers reduce suspension deflection and body acceleration below the rattlespace
frequency (23 rad/s).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-27
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Time-Domain Evaluation
To further evaluate the three designs, perform time-domain simulations using the
following road disturbance signal r(t):
Ï a( 1 - cos 8p t) , 0 £ t £ 0 .25
r (t ) = Ì
Ó 0, otherwise.
This signal corresponds to a road bump of height 5 cm.
Create a vector that represents the road disturbance.
t = 0:0.005:1;
roaddist = zeros(size(t));
roaddist(1:51) = 0.025*(1-cos(8*pi*t(1:51)));
Build the closed-loop model using the synthesized controller.
SIMK = connect(qcar,Act.Nominal,K,'r',{'xb';'sd';'ab';'fs'});
SIMK is a model array containing three closed-loop models, one for each of the three
blending parameter values. Each model in the array represents a closed loop that is
built from the original quarter-car plant model, the nominal actuator model, and the
corresponding synthesized controller.
Simulate and plot the time-domain response of the closed-loop models to the road
disturbance signal.
p1
y1
y2
y3
=
=
=
=
lsim(qcar(:,1),roaddist,t);
lsim(SIMK(1:4,1,1),roaddist,t);
lsim(SIMK(1:4,1,2),roaddist,t);
lsim(SIMK(1:4,1,3),roaddist,t);
clf
subplot(221)
plot(t,p1(:,1),'b',t,y1(:,1),'r.',t,y2(:,1),'m.',t,y3(:,1),'k.',t,roaddist,'g')
title('Body travel')
ylabel('x_b (m)')
subplot(222)
plot(t,p1(:,3),'b',t,y1(:,3),'r.',t,y2(:,3),'m.',t,y3(:,3),'k.',t,roaddist,'g')
title('Body acceleration')
ylabel('a_b (m/s^2)')
subplot(223)
plot(t,p1(:,2),'b',t,y1(:,2),'r.',t,y2(:,2),'m.',t,y3(:,2),'k.',t,roaddist,'g')
title('Suspension deflection')
xlabel('Time (s)')
ylabel('s_d (m)')
5-28
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Suspension Control Design
subplot(224)
plot(t,zeros(size(t)),'b',t,y1(:,4),'r.',t,y2(:,4),'m.',t,y3(:,4),'k.',t,roaddist,'g')
title('Control force')
xlabel('Time (s)')
ylabel('f_s (N)')
legend('Open-loop','Comfort','Balanced','Suspension','Road Disturbance','location','SouthEast')
The simulations show that the body acceleration is smallest for the controller
emphasizing passenger comfort. Body acceleration is largest for the controller
emphasizing suspension deflection. The balanced design achieves a good tradeoff
between body acceleration and suspension deflection.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-29
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Robust µ Design
So far you designed H∞ controllers that meet the performance objectives for the nominal
actuator model. However, this model is only an approximation of the true actuator.
To make sure that controller performance is maintained even with model error and
uncertainty, you must design the model to have robust performance. In this part of the
example, you use μ-synthesis to design a controller that achieves robust performance for
the entire family of actuator models that takes uncertainty into account.
Use D-K iteration to synthesize a controller for the quarter-car model with actuator
uncertainty.
[Krob,~,RPmuval] = dksyn(qcaric(:,:,2),nmeas,ncont);
The model qcaric(:,:,2) is the weighted quarter-car model for the uncertain model
that corresponds to the blending variable β = 0.5.
Examine the resulting μ-synthesis controller.
size(Krob)
State-space model with 1 outputs, 2 inputs, and 11 states.
Build the closed-loop model using the robust controller, Krob.
Krob.u = {'sd','ab'};
Krob.y = 'u';
SIMKrob = connect(qcar,Act.Nominal,Krob,'r',{'xb';'sd';'ab';'fs'});
Simulate and plot the nominal time-domain response to a road bump with the robust
controller.
p1 = lsim(qcar(:,1),roaddist,t);
y1 = lsim(SIMKrob(1:4,1),roaddist,t);
clf
subplot(221)
plot(t,p1(:,1),'b',t,y1(:,1),'r',t,roaddist,'g')
title('Body travel'), ylabel('x_b (m)')
subplot(222)
plot(t,p1(:,3),'b',t,y1(:,3),'r')
title('Body acceleration'), ylabel('a_b (m/s^2)')
5-30
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Suspension Control Design
subplot(223)
plot(t,p1(:,2),'b',t,y1(:,2),'r')
title('Suspension deflection'), xlabel('Time (s)'), ylabel('s_d (m)')
subplot(224)
plot(t,zeros(size(t)),'b',t,y1(:,4),'r')
title('Control force'), xlabel('Time (s)'), ylabel('f_s (N)')
legend('Open-loop','Robust design','location','SouthEast')
These responses are similar to those obtained with the balanced H∞ controller.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-31
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Examine the effect of the robust controller on variability caused by model uncertainty. To
do so, simulate the response to a road bump for 120 actuator models randomly sampled
from the uncertain model, Act. Perform this simulation for both the H∞ and the robust
controllers, to compare the results.
Compute an uncertain closed-loop model with the balanced H∞ controller, K. Sample this
model, simulate the sampled models, and plot the results.
CLU = connect(qcar,Act,K(:,:,2),'r',{'xb','sd','ab'});
nsamp = 120;
rng('default');
figure(1)
clf
lsim(usample(CLU,nsamp),'b',CLU.Nominal,'r+',roaddist,t)
title('Nominal "balanced" design')
5-32
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Suspension Control Design
Compute an uncertain closed-loop model with the balanced robust controller, Krob.
Sample this model, simulate the sampled models, and plot the results.
CLU = connect(qcar,Act,Krob,'r',{'xb','sd','ab'});
figure(2)
clf
lsim(usample(CLU,nsamp),'b',CLU.Nominal,'r+',roaddist,t)
title('Robust "balanced" design')
The robust controller reduces variability caused by model uncertainty, and delivers more
consistent performance.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-33
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Controller Simplification
The robust controller Krob has eleven states. It is often the case that controllers
synthesized with dksyn have high order. You can use the model reduction functions to
find a lower-order controller that achieves the same level of robust performance. Use
reduce to generate approximations of various orders. Then, use robustperf to compute
the robust performance margin for each reduced-order approximation.
Create an array of reduced-order controllers.
NS = order(Krob);
StateOrders = 1:NS;
Kred = reduce(Krob,StateOrders);
Krob is a model array containing a reduced-order controller of every order from 1 up to
the original 11 states.
Compute the robust performance margin for each reduced controller.
CLP = lft(qcaric(:,:,2),Kred);
ropt = robustperfOptions('Sensitivity','off','Display','off','Mussv','a');
PM = robustperf(CLP,ropt);
Compare the robust performance of the reduced- and full-order controllers.
plot(StateOrders,[PM.LowerBound],'b-o',...
StateOrders,repmat(1/RPmuval,[1 NS]),'r');
title('Robust performance as a function of controller order')
legend('Reduced order','Full order','Location','SouthEast')
5-34
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Suspension Control Design
There is no significant difference in robust performance between the 8th- and 11th-order
controllers. Therefore, you can safely replace Krob by its 8th-order approximation.
Krob8 = Kred(:,:,8);
You now have a simplified controller, Krob8, that provides robust control with a balance
between passenger comfort and handling.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-35
5
H-Infinity and Mu Synthesis
Bibliography
[1] Balas, G.J., and A.K. Packard, “The structured singular value µ-framework,” CRC
Controls Handbook, Section 2.3.6, January, 1996, pp. 671-688.
[2] Ball, J.A., and N. Cohen, “Sensitivity minimization in an H∞ norm: Parametrization
of all suboptimal solutions,” International Journal of Control, Vol. 46, 1987, pp.
785-816.
[3] Bamieh, B.A., and Pearson, J.B., “A general framework for linear periodic systems
with applications to H∞ sampled-data control,” IEEE Transactions on Automatic
Control, Vol. AC-37, 1992, pp. 418-435.
[4] Doyle, J.C., Glover, K., Khargonekar, P., and Francis, B., “State-space solutions to
standard H2 and H∞ control problems,” IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control,
Vol. AC-34, No. 8, August 1989, pp. 831-847.
[5] Fialho, I., and Balas, G.J., “Design of nonlinear controllers for active vehicle
suspensions using parameter-varying control synthesis,” Vehicle Systems
Dynamics, Vol. 33, No. 5, May 2000, pp. 351-370.
[6] Francis, B.A., A course in H∞ control theory, Lecture Notes in Control and Information
Sciences, Vol. 88, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1987.
[7] Glover, K., and Doyle, J.C., “State-space formulae for all stabilizing controllers that
satisfy an H∞ norm bound and relations to risk sensitivity,” Systems and Control
Letters, Vol. 11, pp. 167-172, August 1989. International Journal of Control, Vol.
39, 1984, pp. 1115-1193.
[8] Hedrick, J.K., and Batsuen, T., “Invariant Properties of Automotive Suspensions,”
Proceedings of The Institution of Mechanical Engineers, 204 (1990), pp. 21-27.
[9] Lin, J., and Kanellakopoulos, I., “Road Adaptive Nonlinear Design of Active
Suspensions,” Proceedings of the American Control Conference, (1997), pp.
714-718.
[10] Packard, A.K., Doyle, J.C., and Balas, G.J., “Linear, multivariable robust control
with a µ perspective,” ASME Journal of Dynamics, Measurements and Control:
Special Edition on Control, Vol. 115, No. 2b, June, 1993, pp. 426-438.
[11] Skogestad, S., and Postlethwaite, I., Multivariable Feedback Control: Analysis &
Design, John Wiley & Sons, 1996.
5-36
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Bibliography
[12] Stein, G., and Doyle, J., “Beyond singular values and loopshapes,” AIAA Journal of
Guidance and Control, Vol. 14, Num. 1, January, 1991, pp. 5-16.
[13] Zames, G., “Feedback and optimal sensitivity: model reference transformations,
multiplicative seminorms, and approximate inverses,” IEEE Transactions on
Automatic Control, Vol. AC-26, 1981, pp. 301-320.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-37
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
5-38
6
Control System Tuning
• “Automated Tuning of Control Systems” on page 6-4
• “Automated Tuning Workflow” on page 6-8
• “Control System Tuner” on page 6-10
• “Specify Control Architecture in Control System Tuner” on page 6-17
• “Open Control System Tuner for Tuning Simulink Model” on page 6-22
• “Specify Operating Points for Tuning in Control System Tuner” on page 6-24
• “Specify Blocks to Tune in Control System Tuner” on page 6-31
• “View and Change Block Parameterization in Control System Tuner” on page 6-33
• “Tuned Block Editor” on page 6-36
• “Setup for Tuning Control System Modeled in MATLAB” on page 6-41
• “How Tuned Simulink Blocks Are Parameterized” on page 6-42
• “Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
• “Quick Loop Tuning of Feedback Loops in Control System Tuner” on page 6-52
• “Quick Loop Tuning” on page 6-62
• “Step Tracking Goal” on page 6-66
• “Step Rejection Goal” on page 6-72
• “Transient Goal” on page 6-77
• “LQR/LQG Goal” on page 6-83
• “Gain Goal” on page 6-88
• “Variance Goal” on page 6-93
• “Reference Tracking Goal” on page 6-97
• “Overshoot Goal” on page 6-103
• “Disturbance Rejection Goal” on page 6-107
• “Sensitivity Goal” on page 6-112
• “Weighted Gain Goal” on page 6-116
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6
Control System Tuning
• “Weighted Variance Goal” on page 6-120
• “Minimum Loop Gain Goal” on page 6-124
• “Maximum Loop Gain Goal” on page 6-129
• “Loop Shape Goal” on page 6-134
• “Margins Goal” on page 6-140
• “Poles Goal” on page 6-144
• “Controller Poles Goal” on page 6-149
• “Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
• “Generate MATLAB Code from Control System Tuner for Command-Line Tuning” on
page 6-154
• “Tuning Options” on page 6-158
• “Interpreting Tuning Results” on page 6-161
• “Create Response Plots in Control System Tuner” on page 6-163
• “Examine Tuned Controller Parameters in Control System Tuner” on page 6-170
• “Compare Performance of Multiple Tuned Controllers” on page 6-172
• “Validate Tuned Controller in Simulink” on page 6-177
• “Create and Configure slTuner Interface to Simulink Model” on page 6-178
• “Time-Domain Specifications” on page 6-184
• “Frequency-Domain Specifications” on page 6-190
• “Loop Shape and Stability Margin Specifications” on page 6-200
• “System Dynamics Specifications” on page 6-206
• “Interpreting Stability Margins in Control System Tuning” on page 6-209
• “Tune Control System at the Command Line” on page 6-215
• “Tune Controller Against Set of Plant Models” on page 6-216
• “Speed Up Tuning with Parallel Computing Toolbox Software” on page 6-217
• “Validate Tuned Control System at the Command Line” on page 6-219
• “Extract Responses from Tuned MATLAB Model at the Command Line” on page
6-221
• “Tuning Control Systems with SYSTUNE” on page 6-223
• “Tuning Control Systems in Simulink” on page 6-231
• “Building Tunable Models” on page 6-240
6-2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control System Tuning
• “Validating Results” on page 6-249
• “Using Parallel Computing to Accelerate Tuning” on page 6-258
• “Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER” on page 6-263
• “Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER” on page
6-289
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-3
6
Control System Tuning
Automated Tuning of Control Systems
In this section...
“Automated Tuning Overview” on page 6-4
“Choosing an Automated Tuning Approach” on page 6-5
Automated Tuning Overview
The control system tuning tools of Robust Control Toolbox automatically tune control
systems from high-level tuning goals you specify, such as reference tracking, disturbance
rejection, and stability margins. The software jointly tunes all the free parameters of
your control system regardless of control system architecture or the number of feedback
loops it contains. For example, the model of the following illustration represents a
multiloop control system for a helicopter.
This control system includes a number of fixed elements, such as the helicopter model
itself and the roll-off filters. The inner control loop provides static output feedback for
6-4
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Automated Tuning of Control Systems
decoupling. The outer loop includes PI controllers for setpoint tracking. The Robust
Control Toolbox tuning tools jointly optimize the gains in the SOF and PI blocks to meet
setpoint tracking, stability margin, and other requirements that you specify. These tools
allow you to specify any control structure and designate which blocks in your system are
tunable.
Control systems are tuned to meet your specific performance and robustness goals
subject to feasibility constraints such as actuator limits, sensor accuracy, computing
power, or energy consumption. The library of tuning goals lets you capture these
objectives in a form suitable for fast automated tuning. This library includes standard
control objectives such as reference tracking, disturbance rejection, loop shapes, closedloop damping, and stability margins. Using these tools, you can perform multi-objective
tuning of control systems having any structure.
Choosing an Automated Tuning Approach
You can tune control systems at the MATLAB command line or using the Control System
Tuner App.
Control System Tuner provides an interactive graphical interface for specifying your
tuning goals and validating the performance of the tuned control system.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-5
6
Control System Tuning
Use Control System Tuner to tune control systems consisting of any number of feedback
loops, with tunable components having any structure (such as PID, gain block, or statespace). You can represent your control architecture in MATLAB as a tunable generalized
state-space (genss) model. If you have Simulink Control Design™ software, you can
tune a control system represented by a Simulink model. Use the graphical interface to
configure your tuning goals, examine response plots, and validate your controller design.
The systune command can perform all the same tuning tasks as Control System Tuner.
Tuning at the command line allows you to write scripts for repeated tuning tasks.
systune also provides advanced techniques such as tuning a controller for multiple
6-6
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Automated Tuning of Control Systems
plants, or designing gain-scheduled controllers. To use the command-line tuning tools,
you can represent your control architecture in MATLAB as a tunable generalized statespace (genss) model. If you have Simulink Control Design software, you can tune a
control system represented by a Simulink model using an slTuner interface. Use the
TuningGoal requirement objects to configure your tuning goals. Analysis commands
such as getIOTransfer and viewSpec let you examine and validate the performance of
your tuned system.
Related Examples
•
“Specify Control Architecture in Control System Tuner” on page 6-17
•
“Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER” on page 6-263
More About
•
“Automated Tuning Workflow” on page 6-8
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-7
6
Control System Tuning
Automated Tuning Workflow
Whether you are tuning a control system at the command line or using Control System
Tuner, the basic workflow includes the following steps:
1
Define your control architecture, by building a model of your control system from
fixed-value blocks and blocks with tunable parameters. You can do so in one of
several ways:
• Create a Simulink model of your control system. (Tuning a Simulink model
requires Simulink Control Design software.)
• Use a predefined control architecture available in Control System Tuner.
• At the command line, build a tunable genss model of your control system out of
numeric LTI models and tunable control design blocks.
For more information, see “Specify Control Architecture in Control System Tuner” on
page 6-17.
2
Set up your model for tuning.
• In Control System Tuner, identify which blocks of the model you want to tune.
See “Model Setup for Control System Tuner”.
• If tuning a Simulink model at the command line, create and configure the
slTuner interface to the model. See “Setup for Tuning Simulink Models at the
Command Line”.
3
Specify your tuning goals. Use the library of tuning goals to capture requirements
such as reference tracking, disturbance rejection, stability margins, and more.
• In Control System Tuner, use the graphical interface to specify tuning goals. See
“Tuning Goals”.
• At the command-line, use the TuningGoal requirement objects to specify your
tuning goals. See “ at the Command Line”.
4
Tune the model. Use the systune command or Control System Tuner to optimize
the tunable parameters of your control system to best meet your specified tuning
goals.
• For tuning in Control System Tuner, see “Parameter Tuning”.
• For tuning at the command line, see “Parameter Tuning”.
6-8
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Automated Tuning Workflow
5
Analyze system response and validate the design. Whether at the command line or
in Control System Tuner, you can plot system responses to examine any aspects of
system performance you need to validate your design.
• For validation in Control System Tuner, see “Analysis and Validation”.
• For validating a tuned Simulink model at the command line, see “Validation of
Tuned Simulink Models”.
• For validating a tuned genss model at the command line, see “Validation of
Tuned MATLAB Models”.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-9
6
Control System Tuning
Control System Tuner
In this section...
“Add Signal From the Model” on page 6-10
“Specify Multiple Operating Points” on page 6-13
“Linearization Options” on page 6-14
“Standard feedback configuration” on page 6-15
“Generalized feedback configuration” on page 6-16
Add Signal From the Model
Use this dialog box to add signal locations from a Simulink model to the specifications for
tuning goals or response plots. For example, When you create a new response plot using
New Plot, the software prompts you to specify input signals, output signals, and loopopening locations. Similarly, when you create a new tuning goal, the software prompts
you for signal locations at which to apply the tuning goal. Adding signals to these lists
opens the Add Signal From the Model dialog box.
To add a signal from the Simulink model:
1
In the Simulink model, select the signal you want to add. Shift-click to select
multiple signals at once.
The Add Signal From the Model dialog box displays the signals that are currently
selected in the model.
6-10
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control System Tuner
2
In the Add Signal From the Model dialog box, click Add Signal. The Add Signal
From the Model dialog box closes, returning you to the plot or new tuning goal
specification. The signals you selected are added to the signal list.
Tip When multiple signals are selected, start typing in the Filter by name field to
filter the list.
Add Bus Element
To select an individual element of a bus signal:
1
In the Simulink model, select the bus signal that contains the signal you want to
add.
The Add Signal From the Model dialog box displays the name of the currently
selected bus. The display also includes signals and nodes within the bus.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-11
6
Control System Tuning
2
In the Add Signal From the Model dialog box, find the signal that you want to
select. If necessary, expand nodes within the bus.
Tip For large buses, you can enter search text for filtering element names in the
Filter by name edit box. The name match is case-sensitive. Additionally, you can
enter a MATLAB “regular expression”.
To modify the filtering options, click
adjacent to the Filter by name edit box.
Filtering Options
• Enable regular expression
MATLAB “regular expression” for filtering signal names. For example,
entering t$ displays all signals whose names end with a lowercase t (and
their immediate parents).
6-12
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Filtering Options
• Show filtered results as a flat list
Flat list format to display the list of filtered signals.
By default, filtered signals are displayed using a tree format. The flat list
format uses dot notation to reflect the hierarchy of bus signals.
3
When you find the signal you want to add, click to select it. Then click Add Signal.
The Add Signal From the Model dialog box closes, returning you to the plot or
new tuning goal specification. The signal you selected is added to the signal list.
Specify Multiple Operating Points
This dialog box allows you to tune your controller for a Simulink model linearized at
multiple operating points. Doing so helps to ensure that your tuned controller meets your
design requirements at a variety of operating conditions.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-13
6
Control System Tuning
The Operating Points list contains all the operating points you have created for the
model in Control System Tuner. Check the Selected box for an operating point to
activate it for tuning.
To reorder operating points in the list, use the Up and Down buttons. Control System
Tuner places linearized models in an array in the order of operating points in this list.
When you use the Apply goal to option to restrict a tuning goal to a subset of linearized
models, enter the array indices corresponding to the operating points you want to
include.
Related Examples
• “Specify Operating Points for Tuning in Control System Tuner” on page 6-24
Linearization Options
Use this dialog box to set options for the linearization that Control System Tuner
performs on your Simulink model.
Working Domain
Specify whether to compute linearization in continuous time or discrete time. If in
discrete time, specify a sample time.
6-14
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Filtering Options
Rate Conversions
Specify the method used for rate conversion when linearizing a multirate system.
• 'Zero-Order Hold' — Yields best match in the time domain for staircase inputs.
• Tustin — Yields best match in the frequency domain.
• Tustin with Prewarping — Tustin method with best match at a particular
frequency. Enter the prewarping frequency in the text box.
• Upsample when possible, Zero-Order Hold otherwise — Upsamples
discrete states when possible, and uses zero-order hold otherwise.
• Upsample when possible, Tustin otherwise — Upsamples discrete states
when possible, and uses Tustin method otherwise.
• Upsample when possible, Tustin otherwise — Upsamples discrete states
when possible, and uses Tustin method with prewarping otherwise. Enter the
prewarping frequency in the text box.
Standard feedback configuration
Use this dialog box to specify values for the fixed blocks and structures for the tuned
blocks in the standard feedback configuration:
• Fixed components — The plant model G and the sensor dynamics H are fixed
components. Each of these components defaults to a SISO unity-gain transfer
function.
To change the value of one of these components, check Specify new value and enter
the new value in the text box. The new value can be any numeric LTI model, such
as a tf, zpk, or ss model. If the LTI model is in the MATLAB workspace, enter the
variable name in the text box.
• Tunable components — The controller block C and the filter F are tunable
components. When you tune the control system, Control System Tuner adjusts the
parameters of these components to meet your tuning goals. Each of the tunable
components defaults to a SISO tunable gain (an ltiblock.gain block).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-15
6
Control System Tuning
To specify a different structure for these blocks, use Control Design Blocks to create
tunable components. For example, to make C a PID controller, use ltiblock.pid
to create a tunable PID block in the MATLAB workspace. Then check Specify new
value for C and enter the variable name in the text box.
(See “Tunable Models” for more information about creating tunable components.)
All the components can be MIMO, provided the dimensions are compatible. For example,
if the plant has two inputs and two outputs, then all the components must have two
inputs and two outputs.
Generalized feedback configuration
View and change the custom control architecture and controller structure represented by
a genss model.
The display box lists a summary of the genss model specifying the current control
architecture. The display lists the tunable blocks and their current values.
To specify a different control architecture that is represented by a genss model in the
MATLAB workspace, enter model’s variable name in the Enter expression or variable
for custom parameterization text box.
For more information, see “Arbitrary Feedback Control Architecture” on page 6-19.
6-16
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Control Architecture in Control System Tuner
Specify Control Architecture in Control System Tuner
In this section...
“About Control Architecture” on page 6-17
“Predefined Feedback Architecture” on page 6-18
“Arbitrary Feedback Control Architecture” on page 6-19
“Control System Architecture in Simulink ” on page 6-21
About Control Architecture
Control System Tuner lets you tune a control system having any architecture. Control
system architecture defines how your controllers interact with the system under control.
The architecture comprises the tunable control elements of your system, additional filter
and sensor components, the system under control, and the interconnections between all
these elements. For example, a common control system architecture is the single-loop
feedback configuration of the following illustration:
G is the plant model, and H the sensor dynamics. These are usually the fixed components
of the control system. The prefilter F and feedback controller C are the tunable elements.
Because control systems are so conveniently expressed in this block diagram form, these
elements are referred to as fixed blocks and tunable blocks.
Control System Tuner gives you several ways to define your control system architecture:
• Use the predefined feedback structure of the illustration.
• Model any control system architecture in MATLAB by building a generalized statespace (genss) model from fixed LTI components and tunable control design blocks.
• Model your control system in Simulink and specify the blocks to tune in Control
System Tuner (requires Simulink Control Design software).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-17
6
Control System Tuning
Predefined Feedback Architecture
If your control system has the single-loop feedback configuration of the following
illustration, use the predefined feedback structure built into Control System Tuner.
For example, suppose you have a DC motor for which you want to tune a PID controller.
The response of the motor is modeled as G(s) = 1/(s + 1)2. Create a fixed LTI model
representing the plant, and a tunable PID controller model.
Gmot = zpk([],[-1,-1],1);
Cmot = ltiblock.pid('Cmot','PID');
Open Control System Tuner.
controlSystemTuner
Control System Tuner opens, set to tune this default architecture. Next, specify the
values of the blocks in the architecture. Click
configuration dialog box.
6-18
to open the Standard feedback
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Control Architecture in Control System Tuner
Enter the values for C and G that you created. Control System Tuner reads these values
from the MATLAB workspace. Click OK.
The default value for the sensor dynamics is a fixed unity-gain transfer function. The
default value for the filter F is a tunable gain block.
You can now select blocks to tune, create tuning goals, and tune the control system.
Arbitrary Feedback Control Architecture
If your control architecture does not match Control System Tuner’s predefined control
architecture, you can create a generalized state-space (genss) model with tunable
components representing your controller elements. For example, suppose you want to
tune the cascaded control system of the following illustration, that includes two tunable
PID controllers.
.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-19
6
Control System Tuning
r
+
PID
-
u1 +
-
C1
PI
C2
u2
x2
G2
y2
G1
y1
x1
Create tunable control design blocks for the controllers, and fixed LTI models for the
plant components, G1 and G2. Also include optional loop-opening locations x1 and x2.
These locations indicate where you can open loops or inject signals for the purpose of
specifying requirements for tuning the system.
G2 = zpk([],-2,3);
G1 = zpk([],[-1 -1 -1],10);
C20 = ltiblock.pid('C2','pi');
C10 = ltiblock.pid('C1','pid');
X1 = AnalysisPoint('X1');
X2 = AnalysisPoint('X2');
Connect these components to build a model of the entire closed-loop control system.
InnerLoop = feedback(X2*G2*C20,1);
CL0 = feedback(G1*InnerLoop*C10,X1);
CL0.InputName = 'r';
CL0.OutputName = 'y';
CL0 is a tunable genss model. Specifying names for the input and output channels
allows you to identify them when you specify tuning requirements for the system.
Open Control System Tuner to tune this model.
controlSystemTuner(CL0)
You can now select blocks to tune, create tuning goals, and tune the control system.
Related Examples
• “Building Tunable Models”
• “Specify Blocks to Tune in Control System Tuner” on page 6-31
6-20
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Control Architecture in Control System Tuner
• “Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
Control System Architecture in Simulink
If you have Simulink Control Design software, you can model an arbitrary control system
architecture in a Simulink model and tune the model in Control System Tuner.
See “Open Control System Tuner for Tuning Simulink Model” on page 6-22.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-21
6
Control System Tuning
Open Control System Tuner for Tuning Simulink Model
To open Control System Tuner for tuning a Simulink model, open the model. In the
Simulink Editor, select Analysis > Control Design > Control System Tuner.
Each instance of Control System Tuner is linked to the Simulink model from which it
is opened. The title bar of the Control System Tuner window reflects the name of the
associated Simulink model.
6-22
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Open Control System Tuner for Tuning Simulink Model
Command-Line Equivalents
At the MATLAB command line, use the controlSystemTuner command to open
Control System Tuner for tuning a Simulink model. For example, the following command
opens Control System Tuner for the model rct_helico.slx.
controlSystemTuner('rct_helico')
If SLT0 is an slTuner interface to the Simulink model, the following command opens
Control System Tuner using the information in the interface, such as blocks to tune and
analysis points.
controlSystemTuner(SLT0)
Related Examples
•
“Specify Operating Points for Tuning in Control System Tuner” on page 6-24
•
“Specify Blocks to Tune in Control System Tuner” on page 6-31
More About
•
“Automated Tuning Workflow” on page 6-8
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-23
6
Control System Tuning
Specify Operating Points for Tuning in Control System Tuner
In this section...
“About Operating Points in Control System Tuner” on page 6-24
“Linearize at Simulation Snapshot Times” on page 6-24
“Compute Operating Points at Simulation Snapshot Times” on page 6-26
“Compute Steady-State Operating Points” on page 6-28
About Operating Points in Control System Tuner
When you use Control System Tuner with a Simulink model, the software computes
system responses and tunes controller parameters for a linearization of the model. That
linearization can depend on model operating conditions.
By default, Control System Tuner linearizes at the operating point specified in the model,
which comprises the initial state values in the model (the model initial conditions). You
can specify one or more alternate operating points for tuning the model. Control System
Tuner lets you compute two types of alternate operating points:
• Simulation snapshot time. Control System Tuner simulates the model for the amount
of time you specify, and linearizes using the state values at that time. Simulation
snapshot linearization is useful, for instance, when you know your model reaches an
equilibrium state after a certain simulation time.
For more information about simulation snapshot linearization, see “Choosing
Between Simulation Snapshot and Operating Point from Specifications” in the
Simulink Control Design documentation.
• Steady-state operating point. Control System Tuner finds a steady-state operating
point at which some specified condition is met (trimming). For example, if your model
represents an automobile motor, you can compute an operating point at which the
motor operates steadily at 2000 rpm.
For more information about steady-state operating points, see “Steady-State
Operating Point (Trimming)” in the Simulink Control Design documentation.
Linearize at Simulation Snapshot Times
This example shows how to compute linearizations at one or more simulation snapshot
times.
6-24
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Operating Points for Tuning in Control System Tuner
In the Control System tab, in the Operating Point menu, select Linearize At.
In the Enter snapshot times to linearize dialog box, specify one or more simulation
snapshot times. Click OK.
When you are ready to analyze system responses or tune your model, Control System
Tuner computes linearizations at the specified snapshot times. If you enter multiple
snapshot times, Control System Tuner computes an array of linearized models, and
displays analysis plots that reflect the multiple linearizations in the array. In this case,
Control System Tuner also takes into account all linearizations when tuning parameters.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-25
6
Control System Tuning
This helps to ensure that your tuned controller meets your design requirements at a
variety of operating conditions.
Compute Operating Points at Simulation Snapshot Times
This example shows how to compute operating points at one or more simulation snapshot
times. Doing so stores the operating point within Control System Tuner. When you later
want to analyze or tune the model at a stored operating point, you can select the stored
operating point from the Operating Point menu.
In the Control System tab, in the Operating Point menu, select Take simulation
snapshot.
In the Operating Point Snapshots tab, in the Simulation Snapshot Times text box,
enter one or more simulation snapshot times.
Click
6-26
.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Operating Points for Tuning in Control System Tuner
Control System Tuner simulates the model and computes the snapshot operating points.
Compute additional snapshot operating points if desired. Enter additional snapshot
times and click
.
When you are ready to analyze responses or tune your model, select the operating point
at which you want to linearize the model. In the Control System tab, in the Operating
Point menu, stored operating points are available.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-27
6
Control System Tuning
Compute Steady-State Operating Points
This example shows how to compute a steady-state operating point with specified
conditions. Doing so stores the operating point within Control System Tuner. When you
later want to analyze or tune the model at a stored operating point, you can select the
stored operating point from the Operating Point menu.
In the Control System tab, in the Operating Point menu, select Trim model.
6-28
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Operating Points for Tuning in Control System Tuner
The Trim Model tab opens.
Enter the specifications for the steady-state state values at which you want to find an
operating point. Click
Specifications to open the Specifications for trim dialog
box in which you can specify target state values.
For examples showing how to use Specifications for trim to specify the conditions for a
steady-state operating point search, see “Steady-State Operating Points (Trimming) from
Specifications” in the Simulink Control Design documentation.
When you have entered your state specifications, click
. Control System Tuner finds
an operating point that meets the state specifications and stores it.
When you are ready to analyze responses or tune your model, select the operating point
at which you want to linearize the model. In the Control System tab, in the Operating
Point menu, stored operating points are available.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-29
6
Control System Tuning
Related Examples
•
6-30
“Specify Blocks to Tune in Control System Tuner” on page 6-31
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Blocks to Tune in Control System Tuner
Specify Blocks to Tune in Control System Tuner
To select which blocks of your Simulink model to tune:
1
In the Tuning tab, click
2
Click Add Blocks. Control System Tuner analyzes your model to find blocks that
can be tuned.
3
In the Select Blocks to Tune dialog box, use the nodes in the left panel to navigate
through your model structure to the subsystem that contains blocks you want to
tune. Check Tune? for the blocks you want to tune. The parameters of blocks you do
not check remain constant when you tune the model.
Select Blocks. The Select tuned Blocks dialog opens.
Tip To identify the location of a block in your model, select the block in the Block
Name list and click Highlight Selected Block.
4
Click OK. The Select tuned blocks dialog box now reflects the blocks you added.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-31
6
Control System Tuning
To import the current value of a block from your model into the current design in Control
System Tuner, select the block in the Blocks list and click Sync from Model. Doing so
is useful when you have tuned a block in Control System Tuner, but wish to restore that
block to its original value. To store the current design before restoring a block value, in
the Control System tab, click
Store.
Related Examples
•
“View and Change Block Parameterization in Control System Tuner” on page
6-33
More About
•
6-32
“How Tuned Simulink Blocks Are Parameterized” on page 6-42
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
View and Change Block Parameterization in Control System Tuner
View and Change Block Parameterization in Control System Tuner
Every block that you designate for tuning is parameterized in Control System Tuner.
• When you tune a Simulink model, Control System Tuner automatically assigns a
default parameterization to tunable blocks in the model. The default parameterization
depends on the type of block. For example, a PID Controller block configured for PI
structure is parameterized by proportional gain and integral gain as follows:
1
u = K p + Ki .
s
Kp and Ki are the tunable parameters whose values are optimized to satisfy your
specified tuning goals.
• When you tune a predefined control architecture or a MATLAB (generalized statespace) model, you define the parameterization of each tunable block when you create
it at the MATLAB command line. For example, you can use ltiblock.pid to create
a tunable PID block.
Control System Tuner lets you view and change the parameterization of any block to be
tuned. Changing the parameterization can include changing the structure or current
parameter values. You can also designate individual block parameters fixed (nontunable) or limit their tuning range.
To view and change the parameterization of a block:
1
In the Tuning tab, click
2
In the Select tuned blocks dialog box, in the Blocks list, select a block.
3
Click Edit. The Tuned Block Editor dialog box opens, displaying the current block
parameterization.
Select Blocks.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-33
6
Control System Tuning
4
6-34
Use the fields of the Tuned Block Editor dialog box to edit the parameterization.
See “Tuned Block Editor” on page 6-36 for more detailed information about these
fields.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
View and Change Block Parameterization in Control System Tuner
5
When you are finished editing, click OK to update the parameterization.
See Also
“Tuned Block Editor” on page 6-36
More About
•
“How Tuned Simulink Blocks Are Parameterized” on page 6-42
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-35
6
Control System Tuning
Tuned Block Editor
The Tuned Block Editor dialog box lets you view and change the parameterization of a
tunable block. The dialog box contains the following fields:
• Name — Name of the tunable block.
• Type — Type of parameterization.
• Change Parameterization — Specify the type of parameterization. The available
types are:
• PID — SISO PID parameterization. Parameters are the PID gains and filter
constant.
• 2-DOF PID — Two-degree-of-freedom PID parameterization. Available only when
the tuned block has two inputs and one output.
• State Space — State-space model. Parameters are entries in the state-space
matrices A, B, C, and D.
• Transfer Function — SISO transfer function. Parameters are the numerator
and denominator coefficients.
• Gain — Scalar static gain or static gain matrix.
• Custom — Custom parameterization, specified as a tunable generalized statespace (genss) model. See “Custom Parameterization” on page 6-39.
This option is not available when you specify your control architecture as a
generalized feedback configuration as described in “Arbitrary Feedback Control
Architecture” on page 6-19.
• PID Structure — For a block of Type PID, select a configuration from the
Structure drop-down menu, such as P (proportional only), PI (proportional and
integral), or PID (proportional, integral, and derivative).
• Order of the system — For a block of Type State Space, specify the order (number
of states) of the parameterization. When you change this value, current values of the
parameters are automatically updated to be consistent with the order. For example, if
you enter 3, the current value of the parameter a is changed to a 3-by-3 array.
• Number of poles, Number of zeros — For a block of Type Transfer Function,
specify the number of poles and number of zeros in the parameterization. When you
change these value, current values of the parameters are automatically updated to be
consistent with the number of poles or zeros. For example, if you specify 3 poles, the
6-36
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuned Block Editor
current value of the parameter den is changed to an array of length 4, representing a
third-order polynomial.
• Parameterization — Current values of the parameters. There is one parameter
field for each tunable parameter in the block parameterization. For example, for a
PID Controller block configured for PI structure, the Tuned Block Editor dialog box
contains parameter fields for Kp and Ki. The text boxes display the current value of
each parameter.
Edit Parameter Values and Properties
You can change the current value of a parameter, fix its current value (make the
parameter nontunable), or limit the parameter’s tuning range.
Type in a text boxes to change a current parameter value. Alternatively, click
to use
a variable editor to change the current value. If you attempt to enter an invalid value,
the parameter returns to its previous value.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-37
6
Control System Tuning
Click
to access and edit additional properties of each parameter.
• Minimum — Minimum value that the parameter can take when the control system is
tuned.
• Maximum — Maximum value that the parameter can take when the control system
is tuned.
• Free — When the value is true, Control System Toolbox tunes the parameter. To fix
the value of the parameter, set Free to false.
For array-valued parameters, you can set these properties independently for each entry
in the array. For example, for a vector-valued gain of length 3, enter [1 10 100] to set
6-38
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuned Block Editor
the current value of the three gains to 1, 10, and 100 respectively. Alternatively, click
to use a variable editor to specify such values.
For vector or matrix-valued parameters, you can use the Free parameter to constrain
the structure of the parameter. For example, to restrict a matrix-valued parameter to be
a diagonal matrix, set the current values of the off-diagonal elements to 0, and set the
corresponding entries in Free to false.
Custom Parameterization
When tuning a control system represented by a Simulink model or by a “Predefined
Feedback Architecture” on page 6-18, you can specify a custom parameterization for any
tuned block using a generalized state-space (genss) model. To do so, create and configure
a genss model in the MATLAB workspace that has the desired parameterization, initial
parameter values, and parameter properties. In the Change parameterization dialog
box, select Custom. In the Parameterization area, the variable name of the genss
model.
For example, suppose you want to specify a tunable low-pass filter, F = a/(s +a), where a
is the tunable parameter. First, at the MATLAB command line, create a tunable genss
model that represents the low-pass filter structure.
a = realp('a',1);
F = tf(a,[1 a]);
F =
Generalized continuous-time state-space model with 1 outputs, 1 inputs,
1 states, and the following blocks:
a: Scalar parameter, 2 occurrences.
Type "ss(F)" to see the current value, "get(F)" to see all properties, and
"F.Blocks" to interact with the blocks.
Then, in the Tuned Block Editor, enter F in the Parameterization area.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-39
6
Control System Tuning
When you specify a custom parameterization for a Simulink block, you might not be
able to write the tuned block value back to the Simulink model. When writing values
to Simulink blocks, Control System Tuner skips blocks that cannot represent the tuned
value in a straightforward and lossless manner. For example, if you reparameterize a
PID Controller Simulink block as a third-order state-space model, Control System Tuner
will not write the tuned value back to the block.
Related Examples
•
“View and Change Block Parameterization in Control System Tuner” on page 6-33
More About
•
6-40
“How Tuned Simulink Blocks Are Parameterized” on page 6-42
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Setup for Tuning Control System Modeled in MATLAB
Setup for Tuning Control System Modeled in MATLAB
To model your control architecture in MATLAB for tuning in Control System Tuner,
construct a tunable model of the control system that identifies and parameterizes its
tunable elements. You do so by combining numeric LTI models of the fixed elements with
parametric models of the tunable elements. The result is a tunable generalized statespace genss model.
Building a tunable genss model for Control System Tuner is the same as building such
a model for tuning at the command line. For information about building such models,
“Setup for Tuning MATLAB Models”.
When you have a tunable genss model of your control system, use the
controlSystemTuner command to open Control System Tuner. For example, if T0 is
the genss model, the following command opens Control System Tuner for tuning T0:
controlSystemTuner(T0)
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-41
6
Control System Tuning
How Tuned Simulink Blocks Are Parameterized
Blocks With Predefined Parameterization
When you tune a Simulink model, either with Control System Tuner or at the command
line through an slTuner interface, the software automatically assigns a predefined
parameterization to certain Simulink blocks. For example, for a PID Controller block
set to the PI controller type, the software automatically assigns the parameterization Kp
+ Ki/s, where Kp and Ki are the tunable parameters. For blocks that have a predefined
parameterization, you can write tuned values back to the Simulink model for validating
the tuned controller.
Blocks that have a predefined parameterization include the following:
Simulink Library
Blocks with Predefined Parameterization
Math Operations
Gain
Continuous
• State-Space
• Transfer Fcn
• Zero-Pole
• PID Controller
• PID Controller (2 DOF)
Discrete
• Discrete State-Space
• Discrete Transfer Fcn
• Discrete Zero-Pole
• Discrete Filter
• Discrete PID Controller
• Discrete PID Controller (2 DOF)
Control System Toolbox
LTI System
Discretizing (Model Discretizer Blocks)
• Discretized State-Space
• Discretized Transfer Fcn
• Discretized Zero-Pole
• Discretized LTI System
6-42
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
How Tuned Simulink Blocks Are Parameterized
Simulink Library
Blocks with Predefined Parameterization
• Discretized Transfer Fcn (with initial
states)
Simulink Extras/Additional Linear
State-Space (with initial outputs)
Blocks Without Predefined Parameterization
You can specify blocks for tuning that do not have a predefined parameterization. When
you do so, the software assigns a state-space parameterization to such blocks based upon
the block linearization. For blocks that do not have a predefined parameterization, the
software cannot write tuned values back to the block, because there is no clear mapping
between the tuned parameters and the block. To validate a tuned control system that
contains such blocks, you can specify a block linearization in your model using the value
of the tuned parameterization. (See “Specify Linear System for Block Linearization Using
MATLAB Expression” for more information about specifying block linearization.)
View and Change Block Parameterization
You can view and edit the current parameterization of every block you designate for
tuning.
• In Control System Tuner, see “View and Change Block Parameterization in Control
System Tuner” on page 6-33.
• At the command line, use getBlockParam to view the current block
parameterization. Use setBlockParam to change the block parameterization.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-43
6
Control System Tuning
Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning
This example shows how to specify your tuning goals for automated tuning in Control
System Tuner.
Use the New Goal menu to create a tuning goal such as a tracking requirement,
disturbance rejection specification, or minimum stability margins. Then, when you
are ready to tune your control system, use Manage Goals to designate which goals to
enforce.
This example creates tuning goals for tuning the sample model rct_helico.
Choose Tuning Goal Type
In Control System Tuner, in the Tuning tab, click
New Goal. Select the type of goal
you want to create. A tuning goal dialog box opens in which you can provide the detailed
specifications of your goal. For example, select Tracking of step commands to make a
particular step response of your control system match a desired response.
6-44
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning
Choose Signal Locations for Evaluating Tuning Goal
Specify the signal locations in your control system at which the tuning goal is evaluated.
For example, the step response goal specifies that a step signal applied at a particular
input location yields a desired response at a particular output location. Use the Step
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-45
6
Control System Tuning
Response Selection section of the dialog box to specify these input and output
locations. (Other tuning goal types, such as loop-shape or stability margins, require you
to specify only one location for evaluation. The procedure for specifying the location is the
same as illustrated here.)
Under Specify step-response inputs, click
input locations appears.
Add signal to list. A list of available
If the signal you want to designate as a step-response input is in the list, click the signal
to add it to the step-response inputs. If the signal you want to designate does not appear,
and you are tuning a Simulink model, click Select signal from model.
The Add signal from the model dialog box contains a list of signals that are currently
selected in the Simulink model. If the signal you want to designate is listed, select it and
click Add signal.
If the signal you want is not listed, select the signal in the Simulink model editor. Shiftclick to select multiple signals at once. Then, return to the Add signal from the model
dialog box and click Add signal.
6-46
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning
The signal you selected now appears in the list of step-response inputs.
Click
Add signal to list again to add an additional signal to the step-response inputs
list, if you want to specify a MIMO tuning goal.
Similarly, specify the locations at which the step response is measured to the stepresponse outputs list. For example, the following configuration constrains the response
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-47
6
Control System Tuning
to a step input applied at theta-ref and measured at theta in the Simulink model
rct_helico.
Tip To highlight any selected signal in the Simulink model, click
from the input or output list, click
. To remove a signal
.
Specify Loop Openings
Most tuning goals can be enforced with loops open at one or more locations in the control
system. Click
tuning goal.
6-48
Add loop opening location to list to specify such locations for the
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning
Define Other Specifications of the Tuning Goal
The tuning goal dialog box prompts you to specify other details about the tuning goal. For
example, to create a step response requirement, you provide details of the desired step
response in the Desired Response area of the Step Response Goal dialog box. Some
tuning goals have additional options in an Options section of the dialog box.
For information about the fields for specifying a particular tuning goal, click
tuning goal dialog box.
in the
Store the Tuning Goal for Tuning
When you have finished specifying the tuning goal, click OK in the tuning goal dialog
box. The new tuning goal appears in the Tuning Goals section of the Data Browser. A
new figure opens displaying a graphical representation of the tuning goal. When you tune
your control system, you can refer to this figure to evaluate graphically how closely the
tuned system satisfies the tuning goal.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-49
6
Control System Tuning
Tip To edit the specifications of the tuning goal, double-click the tuning goal in the Data
Browser.
Activate the Tuning Goal for Tuning
When you have saved your tuning goal, click
goals.
New Goal to create additional tuning
When you are ready to tune your control system, click
Manage Goals to select
which tuning goals are active for tuning. In the Manage Tuning Goals dialog box,
6-50
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning
Active is checked by default for any new goals. Uncheck Active for any tuning goal that
you do not want enforced.
You can also designate one or more tuning goals as Hard goals. Control System Tuner
attempts to satisfy hard requirements, and comes as close as possible to satisfying
remaining (soft) requirements subject to the hard constraints. By default, new goals are
designated soft goals. Check Hard for any goal to designate it a hard goal.
For example, if you tune with the following configuration, Control System Tuner
optimizes StepRespGoal1, subject to MarginsGoal1. The tuning goal PolesGoal1 is
ignored.
Deactivating tuning goals or designating some goals as soft requirements can be useful
when investigating the tradeoffs between different tuning requirements. For example,
if you do not obtain satisfactory performance with all your tuning goals active and
hard, you might try another design in which less crucial goals are designated as soft or
deactivated entirely.
Related Examples
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
•
“Quick Loop Tuning of Feedback Loops in Control System Tuner” on page 6-52
•
“Create Response Plots in Control System Tuner” on page 6-163
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-51
6
Control System Tuning
Quick Loop Tuning of Feedback Loops in Control System Tuner
This example shows how to tune a Simulink model of a control system to meet a specified
bandwidth and stability margins in Control System Tuner, without explicitly creating
tuning goals that capture these requirements. You can use a similar approach for quick
loop tuning of control systems modeled in MATLAB.
This example demonstrates how the Quick Loop Tuning option of Control System
Tuner generates tuning goals from your crossover frequency and gain and phase margin
specifications. This option lets you quickly set up SISO or MIMO feedback loops for
tuning using a loop-shaping approach. The example also shows how to add further tuning
requirements to the control system after using the Quick Loop Tuning option.
Quick Loop Tuning is the Control System Tuner equivalent of the looptune
command.
Set up the Model for Tuning
Open the Simulink model.
open_system('rct_distillation')
This model represents a distillation column, captured in the two-input, two-output plant
G. The tunable elements are the decoupling gain matrix DM, and the two PI controllers,
PI_L and PI_V. (For more information about this model, see “Decoupling Controller for a
Distillation Column”.)
6-52
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Quick Loop Tuning of Feedback Loops in Control System Tuner
Suppose your goal is to tune the MIMO feedback loop between r and y to a bandwidth
between 0.1 and 0.5 rad/s. Suppose you also require a gain margin of 7 dB and a phase
margin of 45 degrees. You can use the Quick Loop Tuning option to quickly configure
Control System Tuner for these goals.
In the Simulink model editor, open Control System Tuner by selecting Analysis >
Control Design > Control System Tuner.
Designate the blocks you want to tune. In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, click
Select Blocks. In the Select tuned blocks dialog box, click Add blocks. Then,
select DM, PI_L, and PI_V for tuning. (For more information about selecting tuned blocks,
see “Specify Blocks to Tune in Control System Tuner” on page 6-31.)
The model is now ready to tune to the target bandwidth and stability margins.
Specify the Goals for Quick Loop Tuning
In the Tuning tab, select New Goal > Quick Loop Tuning.
For Quick Loop Tuning, you need to identify the actuator signals and sensor signals
that separate the plant portion of the control system from the controller, which for the
purpose of Quick Loop Tuning is the rest of the control system. The actuator signals are
the controller outputs that drive the plant, or the plant inputs. The sensor signals are the
measurements of plant output that feed back into the controller. In this control system,
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-53
6
Control System Tuning
the actuator signals are represented by the vector signal u, and the sensor signals by the
vector signal y.
In the Quick Loop Tuning dialog box, under Specify actuator signals (controls),
add the actuator signal, u. Similarly, under Specify sensor signals (measurements),
add the sensor signal, y (For more information about specifying signals for tuning, see
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.)
Under Desired Goals, in the Target gain crossover region field, enter the target
bandwidth range, [0.1 0.5]. Enter the desired gain margin and phase margin in the
corresponding fields.
6-54
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Quick Loop Tuning of Feedback Loops in Control System Tuner
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-55
6
Control System Tuning
Click OK. Control System Tuner automatically generates tuning goals that capture the
desired goals you entered in the dialog box.
Examine the Automatically-Created Tuning Goals
In this example, Control System Tuner creates a Loop Shape Goal and a Margins Goal.
If you had changed the pole-location settings in the Quick Loop Tuning dialog box, a
Poles goal would also have been created.
Click
Manage Goals to examine the automatically-created goals. By default, the
goals are active and designated as soft tuning goals.
6-56
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Quick Loop Tuning of Feedback Loops in Control System Tuner
You can double-click the tuning goals to examine their parameters, which
are automatically computed and populated. You can also examine the
graphical representations of the tuning goals. In the Tuning tab, examine the
LoopTuning1_LoopShapeGoal plot.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-57
6
Control System Tuning
The target crossover range is expressed as a Loop Shape goal with an integrator openloop gain profile. The shaded areas of the graph show that the permitted crossover range
is [0.1 0.5] rad/s, as you specified in the Quick Loop Tuning dialog box.
Similarly, your margin requirements are captured in the LoopTuning1_MarginsGoal
plot.
Tune the Model
Click
Tune to tune the model to meet the automatically-created tuning goals. In the
tuning goal plots, you can see that the requirements are satisfied.
6-58
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Quick Loop Tuning of Feedback Loops in Control System Tuner
To create additional plots for examining other system responses, see “Create Response
Plots in Control System Tuner” on page 6-163.
Change Design Requirements
If you want to change your design requirements after using Quick Loop Tuning, you
can edit the automatically-created tuning goals and tune the model again. You can also
create additional tuning goals.
For example, add a requirement that the outputs, y, track the reference inputs, r, with
response time of 15 s and tracking error of no more than 0.1%. Select New Goal >
Reference Tracking and enter appropriate values in the Reference Tracking Goal
dialog box. (For more information about creating tuning goals, see “Specify Goals for
Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-59
Control System Tuning
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6
6-60
Quick Loop Tuning of Feedback Loops in Control System Tuner
You can now retune the model to meet all these tuning goals.
See Also
looptune (for slTuner)
Related Examples
•
“Specify Operating Points for Tuning in Control System Tuner” on page 6-24
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
•
“Setup for Tuning Control System Modeled in MATLAB” on page 6-41
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-61
6
Control System Tuning
Quick Loop Tuning
Purpose
Tune SISO or MIMO feedback loops using a loop-shaping approach.
Description
Quick Loop Tuning lets you tune your system to meet open-loop gain crossover and
stability margin requirements without explicitly creating tuning goals that capture these
requirements. You specify the feedback loop whose open-loop gain you want to shape by
designating the actuator signals (controls) and sensor signals (measurements) that form
the loop. Actuator signals are the signals that drive the plant. The sensor signals are the
plant outputs that feed back into the controller.
You enter the target loop bandwidth and desired gain and phase margins. You
can also specify constraints on pole locations of the tuned system, to eliminate fast
dynamics. Control System Tuner automatically creates Tuning Goals that capture your
specifications and ensure integral action at frequencies below the target loop bandwidth.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Quick Loop Tuning to
specify loop-shaping requirements.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use looptune (for slTuner) or
looptune for tuning feedback loops using a loop-shaping approach.
Feedback Loop Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify input, output, and loop-opening locations for
evaluating the tuning goal.
• Specify actuator signals (controls)
Designate one or more signals in your model as actuator signals. These are the input
signals that drive the plant. To tune a SISO feedback loop, select a single-valued
input signal. To tune MIMO loop, select multiple signals or a vector-valued signal.
• Specify sensor signals (measurements)
6-62
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Quick Loop Tuning
Designate one or more signals in your model as sensor signals. These are the plant
outputs that provide feedback into the controller. To tune a SISO feedback loop, select
a single-valued input signal. To tune MIMO loop, select multiple signals or a vectorvalued signal.
• Compute the response with the following loops open
Designate additional locations at which to open feedback loops for the purpose of
tuning the loop defined by the control and measurement signals.
Quick Loop Tuning tunes the open-loop response of the loop defined by the control and
measurement signals. If you want your specifications for that loop to apply with other
feedback loops in the system opened, specify loop-opening locations in this section of
the dialog box. For example, if you are tuning a cascaded-loop control system with an
inner loop and an outer loop, you might want to tune the inner loop with the outer
loop open.
For an example showing in more detail how to specify signal locations, see “Specify Goals
for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.
Desired Goals
Use this section of the dialog box to specify desired characteristics of the tuned system.
Control System Tuner converts these into Loop Shape, Margin, and Poles goals.
• Target gain crossover region
Specify a frequency range in which the open-loop gain should cross 0 dB. Specify the
frequency range as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. Alternatively, if you specify a single target frequency, wc, the target
range is taken as [wc/10^0.1,wc*10^0.1], or wc ± 0.1 decade.
• Gain margin (db)
Specify the desired gain margin in decibels. For MIMO control system, the gain
margin is the multiloop disk margin. See loopmargin for information about
multiloop disk margins.
• Phase margin (degrees)
Specify the desired phase margin in degrees. For MIMO control system, the phase
margin is the multiloop disk margin. See loopmargin for information about
multiloop disk margins.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-63
6
Control System Tuning
• Keep poles inside the following region
Specify minimum decay rate and maximum natural frequency for the closed-loop
poles of the tuned system. While the other Quick Loop Tuning options specify
characteristics of the open-loop response, these specifications apply to the closed-loop
dynamics.
The minimum decay rate you enter constrains the closed-loop pole locations to:
• Re(s) < -mindecay, for continuous-time systems.
• log(|z|) < -mindecay*Ts, for discrete-time systems with sample time Ts.
The maximum frequency you enter constrains the closed-loop poles to satisfy |
s| < maxfreq for continuous time, or |log(z)| < maxfreq*Ts for discrete-time
systems with sample time Ts. This constraint prevents fast dynamics in the closedloop system.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
Control System Tuner uses looptuneSetup (for slTuner) or looptuneSetup to
convert Quick Loop Tuning specifications into tuning goals.
Related Examples
•
6-64
“Quick Loop Tuning of Feedback Loops in Control System Tuner” on page 6-52
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Quick Loop Tuning
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-65
6
Control System Tuning
Step Tracking Goal
Purpose
Make the step response from specified inputs to specified outputs closely match a target
response.
Description
Step Tracking Goal constrains the step response between the specified signal locations
to match the step response of a stable reference system. The constraint is satisfied when
the relative difference between the tuned and target responses falls within the tolerance
you specify. You can use this goal to constrain a SISO or MIMO response of your control
system.
You can specify the reference system for the target step response in terms of first-order
system characteristics (time constant) or second-order system characteristics (natural
frequency and percent overshoot). Alternatively, you can specify a custom reference
system as a numeric LTI model.
6-66
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Step Tracking Goal
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Tracking of step
commands to create a Step Tracking Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.StepTracking to
specify a step response goal.
Step Response Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify input, output, and loop-opening locations for
evaluating the tuning goal.
• Specify step-response inputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to apply the step input.
To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued input signal. For example, to
constrain the step response from a location named 'u' to a location named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'u'. To constrain a MIMO response, select multiple
signals or a vector-valued signal.
• Specify step-response outputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to measure the response
to the step input. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued output signal.
For example, to constrain the step response from a location named 'u' to a location
named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain a MIMO
response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued signal. For MIMO systems, the
number of outputs must equal the number of outputs.
• Compute step response with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
For an example showing in more detail how to specify signal locations for a tuning goal,
see “Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-67
6
Control System Tuning
Desired Response
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the shape of the desired step response.
• First-order characteristics
Specify the desired step response (the reference model Href) as a first-order response
with time constant τ:
H ref =
1 /t
.
s +1 / t
Enter the desired value for τ in the Time Constant text box. Specify τ in the time
units of your model.
• Second-order characteristics
Specify the desired step response as a second-order response with time constant τ, and
natural frequency 1/τ.
Enter the desired value for τ in the Time Constant text box. Specify τ in the time
units of your model.
Enter the target overshoot percentage in the Overshoot text box.
The second-order reference system has the form:
H ref =
(1 / t ) 2
.
2
s2 + 2 ( z / t ) s + (1 / t )
The damping constant ζ is related to the overshoot percentage by ζ =
cos(atan2(pi,-log(overshoot/100))).
• Custom reference model
Specify the reference system for the desired step response as a dynamic system model,
such as a tf, zpk, or ss model.
Enter the name of the reference model in the MATLAB workspace in the LTI model
to match text field. Alternatively, enter a command to create a suitable reference
model, such as tf(1,[1 1.414 1]).
6-68
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Step Tracking Goal
The reference model must be stable and must have DC gain of 1 (zero steady-state
error). The model can be continuous or discrete. If the model is discrete, it can include
time delays which are treated as poles at z = 0.
The reference model can be MIMO, provided that it is square and that its DC singular
value (sigma) is 1. Then number of inputs and outputs of the reference model must
match the dimensions of the inputs and outputs specified for the step response goal.
For best results, the reference model should also include intrinsic system
characteristics such as non-minimum-phase zeros (undershoot).
If your selected inputs and outputs define a MIMO system and you apply a SISO
reference system, the software attempts to match the diagonal channels of the MIMO
system. In that case, cross-couplings tend to be minimized.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the step response
goal.
• Keep % mismatch below
Specify the relative matching error between the actual (tuned) step response and
the target step response. Increase this value to loosen the matching tolerance. The
relative matching error, erel, is defined as:
erel =
y ( t ) - yref ( t )
1 - yref ( t )
2.
2
y(t) – yref(t) is the response mismatch, and 1 – yref(t) is the step-tracking error of the
target model. ◊ 2 denotes the signal energy (2-norm).
• Adjust for step amplitude
For a MIMO tuning goal, when the choice of units results in a mix of small and large
signals in different channels of the response, this option allows you to specify the
relative amplitude of each entry in the vector-valued step input. This information
is used to scale the off-diagonal terms in the transfer function from reference to
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-69
6
Control System Tuning
tracking error. This scaling ensures that cross-couplings are measured relative to the
amplitude of each reference signal.
For example, suppose that tuning goal is that outputs 'y1' and 'y2' track
reference signals 'r1'and 'r2'. Suppose further that you require the outputs to
track the references with less than 10% cross-coupling. If r1 and r2 have comparable
amplitudes, then it is sufficient to keep the gains from r1 to y2 and r2 and y1 below
0.1. However, if r1 is 100 times larger than r2, the gain from r1 to y2 must be
less than 0.001 to ensure that r1 changes y2 by less than 10% of the r2 target. To
ensure this result, set Adjust for step amplitude to Yes. Then, enter [100,1] in
the Amplitudes of step commands text box. This tells Control System Tuner to
take into account that the first reference signal is 100 times greater than the second
reference signal.
The default value, No , means no scaling is applied.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Step Response Goal, f(x) is given by:
1
T ( s, x ) - H ref ( s )
s
2.
f (x) =
1
erel
Href ( s) - I
s
2
(
6-70
)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Step Tracking Goal
T(s,x) is the closed-loop transfer function between the specified inputs and outputs,
evaluated with parameter values x. Href(s) is the reference model. erel is the relative error
(see “Options” on page 6-69). ◊ 2 denotes the H2 norm (see norm).
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-71
6
Control System Tuning
Step Rejection Goal
Purpose
Set a minimum standard for rejecting step disturbances.
Description
Use Step Rejection Goal to specify how a step disturbance injected at a specified
location in your control system affects the signal at a specified output location.
You can specify the desired response in time-domain terms of peak value, settling time,
and damping ratio. Control System Tuner attempts to make the actual rejection at least
as good as the desired response. Alternatively, you can specify the response as a stable
reference model having DC-gain. In that case, the tuning goal is to reject the disturbance
as well as or better than the reference model.
To specify disturbance rejection in terms of a frequency-domain attenuation profile, use
Disturbance Rejection Goal.
6-72
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Step Rejection Goal
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Rejection of step
disturbance to create a Step Rejection Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.StepRejection to
specify a step response goal.
Step Disturbance Response Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify input, output, and loop-opening locations for
evaluating the tuning goal.
• Specify step disturbance inputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to apply the input. To
constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued input signal. For example, to
constrain the step-disturbance response from a location named 'u' to a location
named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'u'. To constrain a MIMO
response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued signal.
• Specify step response outputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to measure the response
to the step disturbance. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued output
signal. For example, to constrain the transient response from a location named 'u'
to a location named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain a
MIMO response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued signal. For MIMO systems,
the number of outputs must equal the number of outputs.
• Compute the response with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
For an example showing in more detail how to specify signal locations for a tuning goal,
see “Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-73
6
Control System Tuning
Desired Response to Step Disturbance
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the shape of the desired response to the step
disturbance. Control System Tuner attempts to make the actual response at least as good
as the desired response.
• Response Characteristics
Specify the desired response in terms of time-domain characteristics. Enter the
maximum amplitude, maximum settling time, and minimum damping constant in the
text boxes.
• Reference Model
Specify the desired response in terms of a reference model.
Enter the name of the reference model in the MATLAB workspace in the Reference
Model text field. Alternatively, enter a command to create a suitable reference model,
such as tf(1 0),[1 1.414 1]).
The reference model must be stable and must have zero DC gain. The model can be
continuous or discrete. If the model is discrete, it can include time delays which are
treated as poles at z = 0.
For best results, the reference model and the open-loop response from the disturbance
to the output should have similar gains at the frequency where the reference model
gain peaks.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the step rejection
goal.
• Adjust for amplitude of input signals and Adjust for amplitude of output
signals
For a MIMO tuning goal, when the choice of units results in a mix of small and large
signals in different channels of the response, this option allows you to specify the
relative amplitude of each entry in the vector-valued signals. This information is used
to scale the off-diagonal terms in the transfer function from the tuning goal inputs
to outputs. This scaling ensures that cross-couplings are measured relative to the
amplitude of each reference signal.
6-74
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Step Rejection Goal
When these options are set to No, the closed-loop transfer function being constrained
is not scaled for relative signal amplitudes. When the choice of units results in a mix
of small and large signals, using an unscaled transfer function can lead to poor tuning
results. Set the option to Yes to provide the relative amplitudes of the input signals
and output signals of your transfer function.
For example, suppose the tuning goal constrains a 2-input, 2-output transfer function.
Suppose further that second input signal to the transfer function tends to be about
100 times greater than the first signal. In that case, select Yes and enter [1,100] in
the Amplitudes of input signals text box.
Adjusting signal amplitude causes the tuning goal to be evaluated on the scaled
transfer function Do–1T(s)Di, where T(s) is the unscaled transfer function. Do and Di
are diagonal matrices with the Amplitudes of output signals and Amplitudes of
input signals values on the diagonal, respectively.
The default value, No, means no scaling is applied.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning requirement is a hard constraint.
Step Rejection Goal aims to keep the gain from disturbance to output below the gain of
the reference model. The scalar value of the requirement f(x) is given by:
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-75
6
Control System Tuning
f (x) =
T ( s, x)
Tref ( s)
.
•
T(s,x) is the closed-loop transfer function from the input to the output. Tref(s) is the
reference model. ◊ • denotes the H∞ norm (see norm).
Related Examples
6-76
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Transient Goal
Transient Goal
Purpose
Shape how the closed-loop system responds to a specific input signal. Use a reference
model to specify the desired transient response.
Description
Transient Goal constrains the transient response from specified input locations to
specified output locations. This requirement specifies that the transient response closely
match the response of a reference model. The constraint is satisfied when the relative
difference between the tuned and target responses falls within the tolerance you specify.
You can constrain the response to an impulse, step, or ramp input signal. You can also
constrain the response to an input signal that is given by the impulse response of an
input filter you specify.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-77
6
Control System Tuning
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Transient response
matching to create a Transient Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.Transient to
specify a step response goal.
Response Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify input, output, and loop-opening locations for
evaluating the tuning goal.
• Specify response inputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to apply the input. To
constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued input signal. For example, to
constrain the transient response from a location named 'u' to a location named 'y',
click
Add signal to list and select 'u'. To constrain a MIMO response, select
multiple signals or a vector-valued signal.
• Specify response outputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to measure the transient
response. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued output signal. For
example, to constrain the transient response from a location named 'u' to a location
named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain a MIMO
response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued signal. For MIMO systems, the
number of outputs must equal the number of outputs.
• Compute the response with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
For an example showing in more detail how to specify signal locations for a tuning goal,
see “Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.
6-78
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Transient Goal
Initial Signal Selection
Select the input signal shape for the transient response you want to constrain.
• Impulse — Constrain the response to a unit impulse.
• Step — Constrain the response to a unit step. Using Step is equivalent to using a
Step Tracking Goal.
• Ramp — Constrain the response to a unit ramp, u = t.
• Other — Constrain the response to a custom input signal. Specify the custom
input signal by entering a transfer function (tf or zpkmodel) in the Use impulse
response of filter field. The custom input signal is the response of this transfer
function to a unit impulse.
This transfer function represents the Laplace transform of the desired custom input
signal. For example, to constrain the transient response to a unit-amplitude sine
wave of frequency w, enter tf(w,[1,0,w^2]). This transfer function is the Laplace
transform of sin(wt).
The transfer function you enter must be continuous, and can have no poles in
the open right-half plane. The series connection of this transfer function with the
reference system for the desired transient response must have no feedthrough term.
Desired Transient Response
Specify the reference system for the desired transient response as a dynamic system
model, such as a tf, zpk, or ss model. The Transient Goal constrains the system
response to closely match the response of this system to the input signal you specify in
Initial Signal Selection.
Enter the name of the reference model in the MATLAB workspace in the Reference
Model field. Alternatively, enter a command to create a suitable reference model, such
as tf(1,[1 1.414 1]). The reference model must be stable, and the series connection
of the reference model with the input shaping filter must have no feedthrough term.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the transient
response goal.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-79
6
Control System Tuning
• Keep % mismatch below
Specify the relative matching error between the actual (tuned) transient response and
the target response. Increase this value to loosen the matching tolerance. The relative
matching error, erel, is defined as:
gap =
y ( t ) - yref ( t )
yref ( tr) ( t)
2
.
2
y(t) – yref(t) is the response mismatch, and 1 – yref(tr)(t) is the transient portion of yref
(deviation from steady-state value or trajectory). ◊ 2 denotes the signal energy (2norm). The gap can be understood as the ratio of the root-mean-square (RMS) of the
mismatch to the RMS of the reference transient.
• Adjust for amplitude of input signals and Adjust for amplitude of output
signals
For a MIMO tuning goal, when the choice of units results in a mix of small and large
signals in different channels of the response, this option allows you to specify the
relative amplitude of each entry in the vector-valued signals. This information is used
to scale the off-diagonal terms in the transfer function from the tuning goal inputs
to outputs. This scaling ensures that cross-couplings are measured relative to the
amplitude of each reference signal.
When these options are set to No, the closed-loop transfer function being constrained
is not scaled for relative signal amplitudes. When the choice of units results in a mix
of small and large signals, using an unscaled transfer function can lead to poor tuning
results. Set the option to Yes to provide the relative amplitudes of the input signals
and output signals of your transfer function.
For example, suppose the tuning goal constrains a 2-input, 2-output transfer function.
Suppose further that second input signal to the transfer function tends to be about
100 times greater than the first signal. In that case, select Yes and enter [1,100] in
the Amplitudes of input signals text box.
Adjusting signal amplitude causes the tuning goal to be evaluated on the scaled
transfer function Do–1T(s)Di, where T(s) is the unscaled transfer function. Do and Di
are diagonal matrices with the Amplitudes of output signals and Amplitudes of
input signals values on the diagonal, respectively.
6-80
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Transient Goal
The default value, No, means no scaling is applied.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Tips
When you use this requirement to tune a control system, Control System Tuner attempts
to enforce zero feedthrough (D = 0) on the transfer that the requirement constrains. Zero
feedthrough is imposed because the H2 norm, and therefore the value of the tuning goal
(see “Algorithms” on page 6-81), is infinite for continuous-time systems with nonzero
feedthrough.
Control System Tuner enforces zero feedthrough by fixing to zero all tunable parameters
that contribute to the feedthrough term. Control System Tuner returns an error when
fixing these tunable parameters is insufficient to enforce zero feedthrough. In such cases,
you must modify the requirement or the control structure, or manually fix some tunable
parameters of your system to values that eliminate the feedthrough term.
When the constrained transfer function has several tunable blocks in series, the
software’s approach of zeroing all parameters that contribute to the overall feedthrough
might be conservative. In that case, it is sufficient to zero the feedthrough term of one
of the blocks. If you want to control which block has feedthrough fixed to zero, you can
manually fix the feedthrough of the tuned block of your choice.
To fix parameters of tunable blocks to specified values, see “View and Change Block
Parameterization in Control System Tuner” on page 6-33.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-81
6
Control System Tuning
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning requirement is a hard constraint.
For Transient Goal, f(x) is based upon the relative gap between the tuned response and
the target response:
gap =
y ( t ) - yref ( t )
yref ( tr) ( t)
2
.
2
y(t) – yref(t) is the response mismatch, and 1 – yref(tr)(t) is the transient portion of yref
(deviation from steady-state value or trajectory). ◊ 2 denotes the signal energy (2-norm).
The gap can be understood as the ratio of the root-mean-square (RMS) of the mismatch to
the RMS of the reference transient.
Related Examples
6-82
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
LQR/LQG Goal
LQR/LQG Goal
Purpose
Minimize or limit Linear-Quadratic-Gaussian (LQG) cost in response to white-noise
inputs
Description
LQR/LQG Goal specifies a tuning requirement for quantifying control performance as
an LQG cost. It is applicable to any control structure, not just the classical observer
structure of optimal LQG control.
The LQG cost is given by:
J = E(z(t)′ QZ z(t)).
z(t) is the system response to a white noise input vector w(t). The covariance of w(t is
given by:
E(w(t)w(t)′) = QW.
The vector w(t) typically consists of external inputs to the system such as noise,
disturbances, or command. The vector z(t) includes all the system variables that
characterize performance, such as control signals, system states, and outputs. E(x)
denotes the expected value of the stochastic variable x.
The cost function J can also be written as an average over time:
Ê1
J = lim E Á
T Æ• Ë T
T
ˆ
Ú0 z (t )’ QZ z (t ) dt ˜¯ .
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > LQR/LQG objective to
create an LQR/LQG Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.LQG to specify an
LQR/LQG goal.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-83
6
Control System Tuning
Signal Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify noise input locations and performance output
locations. Also specify any locations at which to open loops for evaluating the tuning goal.
• Specify noise inputs (w)
Select one or more signal locations in your model as noise inputs. To constrain a SISO
response, select a single-valued input signal. For example, to constrain the LQG cost
for a noise input 'u' and performance output 'y', click
Add signal to list and
select 'u'. To constrain the LQG cost for a MIMO response, select multiple signals or
a vector-valued signal.
• Specify performance outputs (z)
Select one or more signal locations in your model as performance outputs. To
constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued output signal. For example, to
constrain the LQG cost for a noise input 'u' and performance output 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain the LQG cost for a MIMO response,
select multiple signals or a vector-valued signal.
• Evaluate LQG objective with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
LQG Objective
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the noise covariance and performance weights
for the LQG goal.
• Performance weight Qz
Performance weights, specified as a scalar or a matrix. Use a scalar value to specify a
multiple of the identity matrix. Otherwise specify a symmetric nonnegative definite
matrix. Use a diagonal matrix to independently scale or penalize the contribution of
each variable in z.
6-84
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
LQR/LQG Goal
The performance weights contribute to the cost function according to:
J = E(z(t)′ Qz z(t)).
When you use the LQG goal as a hard goal, the software tries to drive the cost
function J < 1. When you use it as a soft goal, the cost function J is minimized
subject to any hard goals and its value is contributed to the overall objective function.
Therefore, select Qz values to properly scale the cost function so that driving it below
1 or minimizing it yields the performance you require.
• Noise Covariance Qw
Covariance of the white noise input vector w(t), specified as a scalar or a matrix.
Use a scalar value to specify a multiple of the identity matrix. Otherwise specify a
symmetric nonnegative definite matrix with as many rows as there are entries in the
vector w(t). A diagonal matrix means the entries of w(t) are uncorrelated.
The covariance of w(t is given by:
E(w(t)w(t)′) = QW.
When you are tuning a control system in discrete time, the LQG goal assumes:
E(w[k]w[k]′) = QW/Ts.
Ts is the model sample time. This assumption ensures consistent results with tuning
in the continuous-time domain. In this assumption, w[k] is discrete-time noise
obtained by sampling continuous white noise w(t) with covariance QW. If in your
system w[k] is a truly discrete process with known covariance QWd, use the value
Ts*QWd for the QW value.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the LQG goal.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-85
6
Control System Tuning
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Tips
When you use this requirement to tune a control system, Control System Tuner attempts
to enforce zero feedthrough (D = 0) on the transfer that the requirement constrains. Zero
feedthrough is imposed because the H2 norm, and therefore the value of the tuning goal,
is infinite for continuous-time systems with nonzero feedthrough.
Control System Tuner enforces zero feedthrough by fixing to zero all tunable parameters
that contribute to the feedthrough term. Control System Tuner returns an error when
fixing these tunable parameters is insufficient to enforce zero feedthrough. In such cases,
you must modify the requirement or the control structure, or manually fix some tunable
parameters of your system to values that eliminate the feedthrough term.
When the constrained transfer function has several tunable blocks in series, the
software’s approach of zeroing all parameters that contribute to the overall feedthrough
might be conservative. In that case, it is sufficient to zero the feedthrough term of one
of the blocks. If you want to control which block has feedthrough fixed to zero, you can
manually fix the feedthrough of the tuned block of your choice.
To fix parameters of tunable blocks to specified values, see “View and Change Block
Parameterization in Control System Tuner” on page 6-33.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For LQR/LQG Goal, f(x) is given by the cost function J:
J = E(z(t)′ Qz z(t)).
When you use the LQG requirement as a hard goal, the software tries to drive the
cost function J < 1. When you use it as a soft goal, the cost function J is minimized
subject to any hard goals and its value is contributed to the overall objective function.
Therefore, select Qz values to properly scale the cost function so that driving it below 1 or
minimizing it yields the performance you require.
6-86
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
LQR/LQG Goal
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-87
6
Control System Tuning
Gain Goal
Purpose
Limit gain of a specified input/output transfer function.
Description
Gain Goal limits the gain from specified inputs to specified outputs. If you specify
multiple inputs and outputs, Gain Goal limits the largest singular value of the transfer
matrix. (See sigma for more information about singular values.) You can specify a
constant maximum gain at all frequencies. Alternatively, you can specify a frequencydependent gain profile.
Use Gain Goal, for example, to enforce a custom roll-off rate in a particular frequency
band. To do so, specify a maximum gain profile in that band. You can also use Gain Goal
to enforce disturbance rejection across a particular input/output pair by constraining the
gain to be less than 1.
6-88
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Gain Goal
In Control System Tuner, the shaded area on the plot represents the region in the
frequency domain where the maximum gain goal is not met.
By default, Gain Goal constrains a closed-loop gain. To constrain a gain computed with
one or more loops open, specify loop-opening locations in the I/O Transfer Selection
section of the dialog box.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Gain limits to create a
Gain Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.Gain to specify a
maximum gain goal.
I/O Transfer Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the inputs and outputs of the transfer
function that the tuning goal constrains. Also specify any locations at which to open loops
for evaluating the tuning goal.
• Specify input signals
Select one or more signal locations in your model as inputs to the transfer function
that the tuning goal constrains. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued
input signal. For example, to constrain the gain from a location named 'u' to a
Add signal to list and select 'u'. To constrain the
location named 'y', click
largest singular value of a MIMO response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued
signal.
• Specify output signals
Select one or more signal locations in your model as outputs of the transfer function
that the tuning goal constrains. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued
output signal. For example, to constrain the gain from a location named 'u' to a
location named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain the
largest singular value of a MIMO response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued
signal.
• Compute input/output gain with the following loops open
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-89
6
Control System Tuning
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
For an example showing in more detail how to specify signal locations for a tuning goal,
see “Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the gain goal.
• Limit gain to
Enter the maximum gain in the text box. You can specify a scalar value or a
frequency-dependent gain profile. To specify a frequency-dependent gain profile, enter
a SISO numeric LTI model. For example, you can specify a smooth transfer function
(tf, zpk, or ss model). Alternatively, you can sketch a piecewise maximum gain
using an frd model. When you do so, the software automatically maps the profile
to a smooth transfer function that approximates the desired minimum disturbance
rejection. For example, to specify a gain profile that rolls off at –40dB/decade in the
frequency band from 8 to 800 rad/s, enter frd([0.8 8 800],[10 1 1e-4]).
• Stabilize I/O transfer
By default, the tuning goal imposes a stability requirement on the closed-loop transfer
function from the specified inputs to outputs, in addition to the gain constraint.
If stability is not required or cannot be achieved, select No to remove the stability
requirement. For example, if the gain constraint applies to an unstable open-loop
transfer function, select No.
• Enforce goal in frequency range
Limit the enforcement of the tuning goal to a particular frequency band. Specify the
frequency band as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. For example, to create a tuning goal that applies only between 1 and
100 rad/s, enter [1,100]. By default, the tuning goal applies at all frequencies for
continuous time, and up to the Nyquist frequency for discrete time.
• Adjust for signal amplitude
6-90
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Gain Goal
When this option is set to No, the closed-loop transfer function being constrained is
not scaled for relative signal amplitudes. When the choice of units results in a mix of
small and large signals, using an unscaled transfer function can lead to poor tuning
results. Set the option to Yes to provide the relative amplitudes of the input signals
and output signals of your transfer function.
For example, suppose the tuning goal constrains a 2-input, 2-output transfer function.
Suppose further that second input signal to the transfer function tends to be about
100 times greater than the first signal. In that case, select Yes and enter [1,100] in
the Amplitude of input signals text box.
Adjusting signal amplitude causes the tuning goal to be evaluated on the scaled
transfer function Do–1T(s)Di, where T(s) is the unscaled transfer function. Do and Di
are diagonal matrices with the Amplitude of output signals and Amplitude of
input signals values on the diagonal, respectively.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Gain Goal, f(x) is given by:
f (x) =
1
D-o 1 T ( s, x ) Di
MaxGain
.
•
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-91
6
Control System Tuning
T(s,x) is the closed-loop transfer function between the specified inputs and outputs,
evaluated with parameter values x. MaxGain is the maximum gain profile you provide for
the gain goal. Do and Di are the scaling matrices described in “Options” on page 6-90.
◊
•
denotes the H∞ norm (see norm).
Related Examples
6-92
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Variance Goal
Variance Goal
Purpose
Limit white-noise impact on specified output signals.
Description
Variance Goal imposes a noise attenuation constraint that limits the impact on specified
output signals of white noise applied at specified inputs. The noise attenuation is
measured by the ratio of the noise variance to the output variance.
For stochastic inputs with a nonuniform spectrum (colored noise), use “Weighted
Variance Goal” on page 6-120 instead.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Signal variance
attenuation to create a Variance Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.Variance to
specify a constraint on noise amplification.
I/O Transfer Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify noise input locations and response outputs.
Also specify any locations at which to open loops for evaluating the tuning goal.
• Specify stochastic inputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model as noise inputs. To constrain a SISO
response, select a single-valued input signal. For example, to constrain the gain from
a location named 'u' to a location named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select
'u'. To constrain the noise amplification of a MIMO response, select multiple signals
or a vector-valued signal.
• Specify stochastic outputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model as outputs for computing response to
the noise inputs. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued output signal.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-93
6
Control System Tuning
For example, to constrain the gain from a location named 'u' to a location named
'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain the noise amplification
of a MIMO response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued signal.
• Compute output variance with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the variance goal.
• Attenuate input variance by a factor
Enter the desired noise attenuation from the specified inputs to outputs. This value
specifies the maximum ratio of noise variance to output variance.
When you tune a control system in discrete time, this requirement assumes that
the physical plant and noise process are continuous, and interprets the desired
noise attenuation as a bound on the continuous-time H2 norm. This ensures that
continuous-time and discrete-time tuning give consistent results. If the plant and
noise processes are truly discrete, and you want to bound the discrete-time H2 norm
instead, multiple the desired attenuation value by
Ts . Ts is the sampling time of the
model you are tuning.
• Adjust for signal amplitude
When this option is set to No, the closed-loop transfer function being constrained is
not scaled for relative signal amplitudes. When the choice of units results in a mix of
small and large signals, using an unscaled transfer function can lead to poor tuning
results. Set the option to Yes to provide the relative amplitudes of the input signals
and output signals of your transfer function.
For example, suppose the tuning goal constrains a 2-input, 2-output transfer function.
Suppose further that second input signal to the transfer function tends to be about
100 times greater than the first signal. In that case, select Yes and enter [1,100] in
the Amplitude of input signals text box.
6-94
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Variance Goal
Adjusting signal amplitude causes the tuning goal to be evaluated on the scaled
transfer function Do–1T(s)Di, where T(s) is the unscaled transfer function. Do and Di
are diagonal matrices with the Amplitude of output signals and Amplitude of
input signals values on the diagonal, respectively.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Tips
When you use this requirement to tune a control system, Control System Tuner attempts
to enforce zero feedthrough (D = 0) on the transfer that the requirement constrains. Zero
feedthrough is imposed because the H2 norm, and therefore the value of the tuning goal
(see “Algorithms” on page 6-96), is infinite for continuous-time systems with nonzero
feedthrough.
Control System Tuner enforces zero feedthrough by fixing to zero all tunable parameters
that contribute to the feedthrough term. Control System Tuner returns an error when
fixing these tunable parameters is insufficient to enforce zero feedthrough. In such cases,
you must modify the requirement or the control structure, or manually fix some tunable
parameters of your system to values that eliminate the feedthrough term.
When the constrained transfer function has several tunable blocks in series, the
software’s approach of zeroing all parameters that contribute to the overall feedthrough
might be conservative. In that case, it is sufficient to zero the feedthrough term of one
of the blocks. If you want to control which block has feedthrough fixed to zero, you can
manually fix the feedthrough of the tuned block of your choice.
To fix parameters of tunable blocks to specified values, see “View and Change Block
Parameterization in Control System Tuner” on page 6-33.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-95
6
Control System Tuning
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Variance Goal, f(x) is given by:
f ( x ) = Attenuation ◊ T ( s, x) .
2
T(s,x) is the closed-loop transfer function from Input to Output. ◊ 2 denotes the H2
norm (see norm).
For tuning discrete-time control systems, f(x) is given by:
f (x) =
Attenuation
T ( z, x) .
Ts
2
Ts is the sampling time of the discrete-time transfer function T(z,x).
Related Examples
6-96
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Reference Tracking Goal
Reference Tracking Goal
Purpose
Make specified outputs track reference inputs with prescribed performance and fidelity.
Limit cross-coupling in MIMO systems.
Description
Tracking Goal constrains tracking between the specified signal locations. The constraint
is satisfied when the maximum relative tracking error falls below the value you specify
at all frequencies. The relative error is the gain from reference input to tracking error as
a function of frequency.
You can specify the maximum error profile directly as a function of frequency.
Alternatively, you can specify the tracking goal a target DC error, peak error, and
response time. These parameters are converted to the following transfer function that
describes the maximum frequency-domain tracking error:
MaxError =
( PeakError ) s + wc ( DCError )
s + wc
.
Here, ωc is 2/(response time). The following plot illustrates these relationships for an
example set of values.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-97
6
Control System Tuning
In Control System Tuner, the shaded area on the plot represents the region in the
frequency domain where the tracking goal is not met.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Reference Tracking to
create a Reference Tracking Goal.
6-98
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Reference Tracking Goal
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.Tracking to
specify a tracking goal.
Response Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify input, output, and loop-opening locations for
evaluating the tuning goal.
• Specify reference inputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model as reference signals. To constrain a
SISO response, select a single-valued reference signal. For example, to constrain the
response from a location named 'u' to a location named 'y', click
Add signal to
list and select 'u'. To constrain a MIMO response, select multiple signals or a vectorvalued signal.
• Specify reference-tracking outputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model as reference-tracking outputs. To
constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued output signal. For example, to
constrain the step response from a location named 'u' to a location named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain a MIMO response, select multiple
signals or a vector-valued signal. For MIMO systems, the number of outputs must
equal the number of outputs.
• Evaluate tracking performance with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
For an example showing in more detail how to specify signal locations for a tuning goal,
see “Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-99
6
Control System Tuning
Tracking Performance
Use this section of the dialog box to specify frequency-domain constraints on the tracking
error.
Response time, DC error, and peak error
Select this option to specify the tracking error in terms of response time, percent steadystate error, and peak error across all frequencies. These parameters are converted to
the following transfer function that describes the maximum frequency-domain tracking
error:
MaxError =
( PeakError ) s + wc ( DCError )
s + wc
.
When you select this option, enter the following parameters in the text boxes:
• Response Time — Enter the target response time. The tracking bandwidth is given
by ωc = 2/Response Time. Express the target response time in the time units of your
model.
• Steady-state error (%) — Enter the maximum steady-state fractional tracking
error, expressed in percent. For MIMO tracking goals, this steady-state error applies
to all I/O pairs. The steady-state error is the DC error expressed as a percentage,
DCError/100.
• Peak error across frequency (%) — Enter the maximum fractional tracking error
across all frequencies, expressed in percent.
Maximum error as a function of frequency
Select this option to specify the maximum tracking error profile as a function of
frequency.
Enter a SISO numeric LTI model in the text box. For example, you can specify a smooth
transfer function (tf, zpk, or ss model). Alternatively, you can sketch a piecewise error
profile using an frd model. When you do so, the software automatically maps the error
profile to a smooth transfer function that approximates the desired error profile. For
example, to specify a maximum error of 0.01 below about 1 rad/s, gradually rising to a
peak error of 1 at 100 rad/s, enter frd([0.01 0.01 1],[0 1 100]).
6-100
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Reference Tracking Goal
For MIMO tracking goals, this error profile applies to all I/O pairs.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the tracking goal.
• Enforce goal in frequency range
Limit the enforcement of the tuning goal to a particular frequency band. Specify the
frequency band as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. For example, to create a tuning goal that applies only between 1 and
100 rad/s, enter [1,100]. By default, the tuning goal applies at all frequencies for
continuous time, and up to the Nyquist frequency for discrete time.
• Adjust for step amplitude
For a MIMO tuning goal, when the choice of units results in a mix of small and large
signals in different channels of the response, this option allows you to specify the
relative amplitude of each entry in the vector-valued step input. This information
is used to scale the off-diagonal terms in the transfer function from reference to
tracking error. This scaling ensures that cross-couplings are measured relative to the
amplitude of each reference signal.
For example, suppose that tuning goal is that outputs 'y1' and 'y2' track
reference signals 'r1'and 'r2'. Suppose further that you require the outputs to
track the references with less than 10% cross-coupling. If r1 and r2 have comparable
amplitudes, then it is sufficient to keep the gains from r1 to y2 and r2 and y1 below
0.1. However, if r1 is 100 times larger than r2, the gain from r1 to y2 must be
less than 0.001 to ensure that r1 changes y2 by less than 10% of the r2 target. To
ensure this result, set Adjust for step amplitude to Yes. Then, enter [100,1] in
the Amplitudes of step commands text box. This tells Control System Tuner to
take into account that the first reference signal is 100 times greater than the second
reference signal.
The default value, No , means no scaling is applied.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-101
6
Control System Tuning
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Tracking Goal, f(x) is given by:
f (x) =
1
( T ( s, x ) - I ) .
MaxError
•
T(s,x) is the closed-loop transfer function between the specified inputs and outputs,
evaluated with parameter values x. ◊ • denotes the H∞ norm (see norm).
Related Examples
6-102
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Overshoot Goal
Overshoot Goal
Purpose
Limit overshoot in the step response from specified inputs to specified outputs.
Description
Overshoot Goal limits the overshoot in the step response between the specified signal
locations. The constraint is satisfied when the overshoot in the tuned response is less
than the target overshoot
The software maps the maximum overshoot to a peak gain constraint, assuming secondorder system characteristics. Therefore, for tuning higher-order systems, the overshoot
constraint is only approximate. In addition, the Overshoot Goal cannot reliably reduce
the overshoot below 5%.
In Control System Tuner, the shaded area on the plot represents the region in the
frequency domain where the overshoot goal is not met.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-103
6
Control System Tuning
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Maximum overshoot
to create an Overshoot Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.Overshoot to
specify a step response goal.
Response Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify input, output, and loop-opening locations for
evaluating the tuning goal.
• Specify step-response inputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to apply the step input.
To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued input signal. For example, to
constrain the step response from a location named 'u' to a location named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'u'. To constrain a MIMO response, select multiple
signals or a vector-valued signal.
• Specify step-response outputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to measure the response
to the step input. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued output signal.
For example, to constrain the step response from a location named 'u' to a location
Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain a MIMO
named 'y', click
response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued signal. For MIMO systems, the
number of outputs must equal the number of outputs.
• Evaluate overshoot with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
For an example showing in more detail how to specify signal locations for a tuning goal,
see “Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.
6-104
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Overshoot Goal
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the overshoot
goal.
• Limit % overshoot to
Enter the maximum percent overshoot. Overshoot Goal cannot reliably reduce the
overshoot below 5%
• Adjust for step amplitude
For a MIMO tuning goal, when the choice of units results in a mix of small and large
signals in different channels of the response, this option allows you to specify the
relative amplitude of each entry in the vector-valued step input. This information
is used to scale the off-diagonal terms in the transfer function from reference to
tracking error. This scaling ensures that cross-couplings are measured relative to the
amplitude of each reference signal.
For example, suppose that tuning goal is that outputs 'y1' and 'y2' track
reference signals 'r1'and 'r2'. Suppose further that you require the outputs to
track the references with less than 10% cross-coupling. If r1 and r2 have comparable
amplitudes, then it is sufficient to keep the gains from r1 to y2 and r2 and y1 below
0.1. However, if r1 is 100 times larger than r2, the gain from r1 to y2 must be
less than 0.001 to ensure that r1 changes y2 by less than 10% of the r2 target. To
ensure this result, set Adjust for step amplitude to Yes. Then, enter [100,1] in
the Amplitudes of step commands text box. This tells Control System Tuner to
take into account that the first reference signal is 100 times greater than the second
reference signal.
The default value, No , means no scaling is applied.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-105
6
Control System Tuning
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Overshoot Goal, f(x) reflects the relative satisfaction or violation of the goal. The
percent deviation from f(x) = 1 roughly corresponds to the percent deviation from the
specified overshoot target. For example, f(x) = 1.2 means the actual overshoot exceeds the
target by roughly 20%, and f(x) = 0.8 means the actual overshoot is about 20% less than
the target.
Overshoot Goal uses T • as a proxy for the overshoot, based on second-order model
characteristics. Here, T is the closed-loop transfer function that the requirement
constrains. The overshoot is tuned in the range from 5% ( T • = 1) to 100% ( T • ).
Overshoot Goal is ineffective at forcing the overshoot below 5%.
Related Examples
6-106
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Disturbance Rejection Goal
Disturbance Rejection Goal
Purpose
Attenuate disturbances at particular locations and in particular frequency bands.
Description
Disturbance Rejection Goal specifies the minimum attenuation of a disturbance injected
at a specified location in a control system.
When you use this tuning goal, the software attempts to tune the system so that the
attenuation of a disturbance at the specified location exceeds the minimum attenuation
factor you specify. This attenuation factor is the ratio between the open- and closed-loop
sensitivities to the disturbance, and is a function of frequency.
The following diagram illustrates how the attenuation factor is calculated. Suppose you
specify a location in your control system, y, which is the output of a block A. In that case,
the software calculates the closed-loop sensitivity at out to a signal injected at in. The
software also calculates the sensitivity with the control loop opened at the location z.
A
y
z
To specify a Disturbance Rejection Goal, you specify one or more locations at which to
attenuate disturbance. You also provide the frequency-dependent minimum attenuation
factor as a numeric LTI model. You can achieve disturbance attenuation only inside
the control bandwidth. The loop gain must be larger than one for the disturbance to be
attenuated (attenuation factor > 1).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-107
6
Control System Tuning
In Control System Tuner, the shaded area on the plot represents the region in the
frequency domain where the disturbance rejection goal is not met.
If you prefer to specify sensitivity to disturbance at a location, rather than disturbance
attenuation, you can use “Sensitivity Goal” on page 6-112.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Disturbance rejection
to create a Disturbance Rejection Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.Rejection to
specify a disturbance rejection goal.
Disturbance Scenario
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the signal locations at which to inject the
disturbance. You can also specify loop-opening locations for evaluating the tuning goal.
6-108
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Disturbance Rejection Goal
• Inject disturbances at the following locations
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to measure the disturbance
attenuation. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued location. For
example, to attenuate disturbance at a location named 'y', click
Add signal to
list and select 'y'. To constrain a MIMO response, select multiple signals or a vectorvalued signal.
• Evaluate disturbance rejection with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
Rejection Performance
Specify the minimum disturbance attenuation as a function of frequency.
Enter a SISO numeric LTI model whose magnitude represents the desired attenuation
profile as a function of frequency. For example, you can specify a smooth transfer
function (tf, zpk, or ss model). Alternatively, you can sketch a piecewise minimum
disturbance rejection using an frd model. When you do so, the software automatically
maps the profile to a smooth transfer function that approximates the desired minimum
disturbance rejection. For example, to specify an attenuation factor of 100 (40 dB) below
1 rad/s, that gradually drops to 1 (0 dB) past 10 rad/s, enter frd([100 100 1 1],[0 1
10 100]).
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the disturbance
rejection goal.
• Enforce goal in frequency range
Limit the enforcement of the tuning goal to a particular frequency band. Specify the
frequency band as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. For example, to create a tuning goal that applies only between 1 and
100 rad/s, enter [1,100]. By default, the tuning goal applies at all frequencies for
continuous time, and up to the Nyquist frequency for discrete time.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-109
6
Control System Tuning
Regardless of the limits you enter, a disturbance rejection goal can only be enforced
within the control bandwidth.
• Equalize cross-channel effects
For multiloop or MIMO disturbance rejection requirements, the feedback channels
are automatically rescaled to equalize the off-diagonal (loop interaction) terms in the
open-loop transfer function. Select Off to disable such scaling and shape the unscaled
open-loop response.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Disturbance Rejection Goal, f(x) is given by:
f ( x ) = max W ( jw ) S ( jw , x ) .
wΠW
W(jω) is a rational transfer function whose magnitude approximates the minimum
disturbance attenuation that you specify for the tuning goal. S(jω,x) is the closed-loop
sensitivity function measured at the disturbance location. Ω is the frequency interval
over which the requirement is enforced.
Related Examples
•
6-110
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Disturbance Rejection Goal
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-111
6
Control System Tuning
Sensitivity Goal
Purpose
Limit sensitivity of feedback loops to disturbances.
Description
Sensitivity Goal limits the sensitivity of a feedback loop to disturbances. You specify the
maximum sensitivity as a function of frequency. Constrain the sensitivity to be smaller
than one at frequencies where you need good disturbance rejection.
To specify a Sensitivity Goal, you specify one or more locations at which to limit
sensitivity. You also provide the frequency-dependent maximum sensitivity as a numeric
LTI model whose magnitude represents the desired sensitivity as a function of frequency.
In Control System Tuner, the shaded area on the plot represents the region in the
frequency domain where the sensitivity goal is not met.
6-112
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Sensitivity Goal
If you prefer to specify disturbance attenuation at a particular location, rather than
sensitivity to disturbance, you can use “Disturbance Rejection Goal” on page 6-107.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Sensitivity of
feedback loops to create a Sensitivity Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.Sensitivity to
specify a disturbance rejection goal.
Sensitivity Evaluation
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the signal locations at which to compute the
sensitivity to disturbance. You can also specify loop-opening locations for evaluating the
tuning goal.
• Measure sensitivity at the following locations
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to measure the sensitivity
to disturbance. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued location. For
example, to limit sensitivity at a location named 'y', click
Add signal to list and
select 'y'. To constrain a MIMO response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued
signal.
• Evaluate disturbance rejection with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
Sensitivity Bound
Specify the maximum sensitivity as a function of frequency.
Enter a SISO numeric LTI model whose magnitude represents the desired sensitivity
bound as a function of frequency. For example, you can specify a smooth transfer function
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-113
6
Control System Tuning
(tf, zpk, or ss model). Alternatively, you can sketch a piecewise maximum sensitivity
using an frd model. When you do so, the software automatically maps the profile to
a smooth transfer function that approximates the desired sensitivity. For example, to
specify a sensitivity that rolls up at 20 dB per decade and levels off at unity above 1 rad/
s, enter frd([0.01 1 1],[0.001 0.1 100]).
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the sensitivity
goal.
• Enforce goal in frequency range
Limit the enforcement of the tuning goal to a particular frequency band. Specify the
frequency band as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. For example, to create a tuning goal that applies only between 1 and
100 rad/s, enter [1,100]. By default, the tuning goal applies at all frequencies for
continuous time, and up to the Nyquist frequency for discrete time.
• Equalize cross-channel effects
For multiloop or MIMO sensitivity requirements, the feedback channels are
automatically rescaled to equalize the off-diagonal (loop interaction) terms in the
open-loop transfer function. Select Off to disable such scaling and shape the unscaled
open-loop response.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
6-114
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Sensitivity Goal
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Sensitivity Goal, f(x) is given by:
f (x) =
1
S ( s, x )
S max ( s)
.
•
S(s,x) is the sensitivity function of the control system at the specified location, evaluated
with parameter values x. Smax(s) is the frequency-dependent maximum sensitivity you
specify. ◊ • denotes the H∞ norm (see norm).
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-115
6
Control System Tuning
Weighted Gain Goal
Purpose
Frequency-weighted gain limit.
Description
Weighted Gain Goal limits the gain of the frequency-weighted transfer function
WL(s)H(s)WR(s), where H(s) is the transfer function between inputs and outputs
you specify. WL(s) and WR(s) are weighting functions that you can use to emphasize
particular frequency bands. Weighted Gain Goal constrains the peak gain of
WL(s)H(s)WR(s) to values less than 1. If H(s) is a MIMO transfer function, Weighted
Gain Goal constrains the largest singular value of H(s).
By default, Weighted Gain Goal constrains a closed-loop gain. To constrain a gain
computed with one or more loops open, specify loop-opening locations in the I/O
Transfer Selection section of the dialog box.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Frequency-weighted
gain limit to create a Weighted Gain Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.WeightedGain to
specify a weighted gain goal.
I/O Transfer Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the inputs and outputs of the transfer
function that the tuning goal constrains. Also specify any locations at which to open loops
for evaluating the tuning goal.
• Specify input signals
Select one or more signal locations in your model as inputs to the transfer function
that the tuning goal constrains. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued
input signal. For example, to constrain the gain from a location named 'u' to a
6-116
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Weighted Gain Goal
location named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'u'. To constrain the
largest singular value of a MIMO response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued
signal.
• Specify output signals
Select one or more signal locations in your model as outputs of the transfer function
that the tuning goal constrains. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued
output signal. For example, to constrain the gain from a location named 'u' to a
location named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain the
largest singular value of a MIMO response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued
signal.
• Compute input/output gain with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
For an example showing in more detail how to specify signal locations for a tuning goal,
see “Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.
Weights
Use the Left weight WL and Right weight WR text boxes to specify the frequencyweighting functions for the tuning goal. The tuning goal ensures that the gain H(s) from
the specified input to output satisfies the inequality:
||WL(s)H(s)WR(s)||∞ < 1.
WL provides the weighting for the output channels of H(s), and WR provides the
weighting for the input channels. You can specify scalar weights or frequency-dependent
weighting. To specify a frequency-dependent weighting, use a numeric LTI model whose
magnitude represents the desired weighting function. For example, enter tf(1,[1
0.01]) to specify a high weight at low frequencies that rolls off above 0.01 rad/s.
If the tuning goal constrains a MIMO transfer function, scalar or SISO weighting
functions automatically expand to any input or output dimension. You can specify
different weights for each channel by specifying MIMO weighting functions. The
dimensions H(s) must be commensurate with the dimensions of WL and WR. For
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-117
6
Control System Tuning
example, if the constrained transfer function has two inputs, you can specify diag([1
10]) as WR.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the weighted
gain goal.
• Stabilize I/O transfer
By default, the tuning goal imposes a stability requirement on the closed-loop transfer
function from the specified inputs to outputs, in addition to the gain constraint.
If stability is not required or cannot be achieved, select No to remove the stability
requirement. For example, if the gain constraint applies to an unstable open-loop
transfer function, select No.
• Enforce goal in frequency range
Limit the enforcement of the tuning goal to a particular frequency band. Specify the
frequency band as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. For example, to create a tuning goal that applies only between 1 and
100 rad/s, enter [1,100]. By default, the tuning goal applies at all frequencies for
continuous time, and up to the Nyquist frequency for discrete time.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
6-118
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Weighted Gain Goal
For Weighted Gain Goal, f(x) is given by:
f ( x ) = WL H ( s, x ) WR
.
•
H(s,x) is the closed-loop transfer function between the specified inputs and outputs,
evaluated with parameter values x. ◊ • denotes the H∞ norm (see norm).
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-119
6
Control System Tuning
Weighted Variance Goal
Purpose
Frequency-weighted limit on noise impact on specified output signals.
Description
Weighted Variance Goal limits the noise impact on the outputs of the frequency-weighted
transfer function WL(s)H(s)WR(s), where H(s) is the transfer function between inputs
and outputs you specify. WL(s) and WR(s) are weighting functions you can use to model
a noise spectrum or emphasize particular frequency bands. Thus, you can use Weighted
Variance Goal to tune the system response to stochastic inputs with a nonuniform
spectrum such as colored noise or wind gusts.
Weighted Variance minimizes the response to noise at the inputs by minimizing the H2
norm of the frequency-weighted transfer function. The H2 norm measures:
• The total energy of the impulse response, for deterministic inputs to the transfer
function.
• The square root of the output variance for a unit-variance white-noise input, for
stochastic inputs to the transfer function. Equivalently, the H2 norm measures the
root-mean-square of the output for such input.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Frequency-weighted
variance attenuation to create a Weighted Variance Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use
TuningGoal.WeightedVariance to specify a weighted gain goal.
I/O Transfer Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify noise input locations and response outputs.
Also specify any locations at which to open loops for evaluating the tuning goal.
6-120
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Weighted Variance Goal
• Specify stochastic inputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model as noise inputs. To constrain a SISO
response, select a single-valued input signal. For example, to constrain the gain from
a location named 'u' to a location named 'y', click
Add signal to list and select
'u'. To constrain the noise amplification of a MIMO response, select multiple signals
or a vector-valued signal.
• Specify stochastic outputs
Select one or more signal locations in your model as outputs for computing response to
the noise inputs. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued output signal.
For example, to constrain the gain from a location named 'u' to a location named
'y', click
Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain the noise amplification
of a MIMO response, select multiple signals or a vector-valued signal.
• Compute output variance with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
Weights
Use the Left weight WL and Right weight WR text boxes to specify the frequencyweighting functions for the tuning goal.
WL provides the weighting for the output channels of H(s), and WR provides the
weighting for the input channels.
You can specify scalar weights or frequency-dependent weighting. To specify a frequencydependent weighting, use a numeric LTI model whose magnitude represents the desired
weighting as a function of frequency. For example, enter tf(1,[1 0.01]) to specify a
high weight at low frequencies that rolls off above 0.01 rad/s. To limit the response to a
nonuniform noise distribution, enter as WR an LTI model whose magnitude represents
the noise spectrum.
If the tuning goal constrains a MIMO transfer function, scalar or SISO weighting
functions automatically expand to any input or output dimension. You can specify
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-121
6
Control System Tuning
different weights for each channel by specifying MIMO weighting functions. The
dimensions H(s) must be commensurate with the dimensions of WL and WR. For
example, if the constrained transfer function has two inputs, you can specify diag([1
10]) as WR.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the weighted
variance goal.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Tips
When you use this requirement to tune a control system, Control System Tuner attempts
to enforce zero feedthrough (D = 0) on the transfer that the requirement constrains. Zero
feedthrough is imposed because the H2 norm, and therefore the value of the tuning goal
(see “Algorithms” on page 6-123), is infinite for continuous-time systems with nonzero
feedthrough.
Control System Tuner enforces zero feedthrough by fixing to zero all tunable parameters
that contribute to the feedthrough term. Control System Tuner returns an error when
fixing these tunable parameters is insufficient to enforce zero feedthrough. In such cases,
you must modify the requirement or the control structure, or manually fix some tunable
parameters of your system to values that eliminate the feedthrough term.
When the constrained transfer function has several tunable blocks in series, the
software’s approach of zeroing all parameters that contribute to the overall feedthrough
might be conservative. In that case, it is sufficient to zero the feedthrough term of one
of the blocks. If you want to control which block has feedthrough fixed to zero, you can
manually fix the feedthrough of the tuned block of your choice.
6-122
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Weighted Variance Goal
To fix parameters of tunable blocks to specified values, see “View and Change Block
Parameterization in Control System Tuner” on page 6-33.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Weighted Variance Goal, f(x) is given by:
f ( x ) = WL H ( s, x ) WR .
2
H(s,x) is the closed-loop transfer function between the specified inputs and outputs,
evaluated with parameter values x. ◊ 2 denotes the H2 norm (see norm).
For tuning discrete-time control systems, f(x) is given by:
f (x) =
1
WL ( z ) H ( z, x ) WR ( z ) .
2
Ts
Ts is the sampling time of the discrete-time transfer function H(z,x).
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-123
6
Control System Tuning
Minimum Loop Gain Goal
Purpose
Boost gain of feedback loops at low frequency
Description
Minimum Loop Gain Goal enforces a minimum loop gain in a particular frequency
band. This tuning goal is useful, for example, for improving disturbance rejection at a
particular location.
Minimum Loop Gain Goal imposes a minimum gain on the open-loop frequency response
(L) at a specified location in your control system. You specify the minimum open-loop
gain as a function of frequency (a minimum gain profile). For MIMO feedback loops, the
specified gain profile is interpreted as a lower bound on the smallest singular value of L.
When you tune a control system, the minimum gain profile is converted to a minimum
gain constraint on the inverse of the sensitivity function, inv(S) = (I + L).
The following figure shows a typical specified minimum gain profile (dashed line) and a
resulting tuned loop gain, L (blue line). The green region represents gain profile values
that are forbidden by this requirement. The figure shows that when L is much larger
than 1, imposing a minimum gain on inv(S) is a good proxy for a minimum open-loop
gain.
6-124
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Minimum Loop Gain Goal
Minimum Loop Gain Goal is a constraint on the open-loop gain of the specified control
loop. Thus, the loop gain is computed with the loop open at the specified location.
To compute the gain with loop openings at other points in the control system, use
the Compute response with the following loops open option in the “Open-Loop
Response Selection” on page 6-126 section of the dialog box.
Minimum Loop Gain Goal and Maximum Loop Gain Goal specify only low-gain or highgain constraints in certain frequency bands. When you use these requirements, the
software determines the best loop shape near crossover. When the loop shape near
crossover is simple or well understood (such as integral action), you can use “Loop Shape
Goal” on page 6-134 to specify that target loop shape.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-125
6
Control System Tuning
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Minimum gain for
open-loop response to create a Minimum Gain Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.MinLoopGain to
specify a minimum loop gain goal.
Open-Loop Response Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the signal locations at which to compute the
open-loop gain. You can also specify additional loop-opening locations for evaluating the
tuning goal.
• Shape open-loop response at the following locations
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to compute and constrain
the open-loop gain. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued location.
Add
For example, to constrain the open-loop gain at a location named 'y', click
signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain a MIMO response, select multiple signals
or a vector-valued signal.
• Compute response with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
Desired Loop Gain
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the target minimum loop gain.
• Pure integrator K/s
Check to specify a pure integrator shape for the target minimum loop gain. The
software chooses the integrator constant, K, based on the values you specify for a
6-126
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Minimum Loop Gain Goal
target minimum gain and frequency. For example, to specify an integral gain profile
with crossover frequency 10 rad/s, enter 1 in the Choose K to keep gain above
text box. Then, enter 10 in the at the frequency text box. The software chooses the
integrator constant such that the minimum loop gain is 1 at 10 rad/s.
• Other gain profile
Check to specify the minimum gain profile as a function of frequency. Enter a
SISO numeric LTI model whose magnitude represents the desired gain profile.
For example, you can specify a smooth transfer function (tf, zpk, or ss model).
Alternatively, you can sketch a piecewise target loop gain using an frd model.
When you do so, the software automatically maps the profile to a smooth transfer
function that approximates the desired minimum loop gain. For example, to specify
minimum gain of 100 (40 dB) below 0.1 rad/s, rolling off at a rate of –20 dB/dec at
higher frequencies, enter frd([100 100 10],[0 1e-1 1]).
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the minimum
loop gain goal.
• Enforce goal in frequency range
Limit the enforcement of the tuning goal to a particular frequency band. Specify the
frequency band as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. For example, to create a tuning goal that applies only between 1 and
100 rad/s, enter [1,100]. By default, the tuning goal applies at all frequencies for
continuous time, and up to the Nyquist frequency for discrete time.
• Stabilize closed loop system
By default, the tuning goal imposes a stability requirement on the closed-loop transfer
function from the specified inputs to outputs, in addition to the gain constraint.
If stability is not required or cannot be achieved, select No to remove the stability
requirement. For example, if the gain constraint applies to an unstable open-loop
transfer function, select No.
• Equalize loop interactions
For multi-loop or MIMO loop gain constraints, the feedback channels are
automatically rescaled to equalize the off-diagonal (loop interaction) terms in the
open-loop transfer function. Select Off to disable such scaling and shape the unscaled
open-loop response.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-127
6
Control System Tuning
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Minimum Loop Gain Goal, f(x) is given by:
(
f ( x ) = WS D -1 SD
) •.
WS is the minimum loop gain profile. D is a diagonal scaling (for MIMO loops). S is the
sensitivity function at the specified location.
Although S is a closed-loop transfer function, driving f(x) < 1 is equivalent to enforcing
a lower bound on the open-loop transfer function, L, in a frequency band where the gain
of L is greater than 1. To see why, note that S = 1/(1 + L). For SISO loops, when |L| >>
1, |S | ≈ 1/|L|. Therefore, enforcing the open-loop minimum gain requirement, |L| >
|WS|, is roughly equivalent to enforcing |WsS| < 1. For MIMO loops, similar reasoning
applies, with ||S|| ≈ 1/σmin(L), where σmin is the smallest singular value.
Related Examples
6-128
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Maximum Loop Gain Goal
Maximum Loop Gain Goal
Purpose
Suppress gain of feedback loops at high frequency
Description
Maximum Loop Gain Goal enforces a maximum loop gain in a particular frequency band.
This tuning goal is useful, for example, for increasing system robustness to unmodeled
dynamics.
Maximum Loop Gain Goal imposes a maximum gain on the open-loop frequency response
(L) at a specified location in your control system. You specify the maximum open-loop
gain as a function of frequency (a maximum gain profile). For MIMO feedback loops, the
specified gain profile is interpreted as an upper bound on the largest singular value of L.
When you tune a control system, the maximum gain profile is converted to a maximum
gain constraint on the complementary sensitivity function, T) = L/(I + L).
The following figure shows a typical specified maximum gain profile (dashed line) and
a resulting tuned loop gain, L (blue line). The pink region represents gain profile values
that are forbidden by this requirement. The figure shows that when L is much smaller
than 1, imposing a maximum gain on T is a good proxy for a maximum open-loop gain.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-129
6
Control System Tuning
Maximum Loop Gain Goal is a constraint on the open-loop gain of the specified control
loop. Thus, the loop gain is computed with the loop open at the specified location.
To compute the gain with loop openings at other points in the control system, use
the Compute response with the following loops open option in the Opel-Loop
Response Selection section of the dialog box.
Maximum Loop Gain Goal and Minimum Loop Gain Goal specify only high-gain or
low-gain constraints in certain frequency bands. When you use these requirements,
the software determines the best loop shape near crossover. When the loop shape near
crossover is simple or well understood (such as integral action), you can use “Loop Shape
Goal” on page 6-134 to specify that target loop shape.
6-130
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Maximum Loop Gain Goal
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Maximum gain for
open-loop response to create a Maximum Gain Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.MaxLoopGain to
specify a maximum loop gain goal.
Open-Loop Response Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the signal locations at which to compute the
open-loop gain. You can also specify additional loop-opening locations for evaluating the
tuning goal.
• Shape open-loop response at the following locations
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to compute and constrain
the open-loop gain. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued location.
Add
For example, to constrain the open-loop gain at a location named 'y', click
signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain a MIMO response, select multiple signals
or a vector-valued signal.
• Compute response with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
Desired Loop Gain
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the target maximum loop gain.
• Pure integrator K/s
Check to specify a pure integrator shape for the target maximum loop gain. The
software chooses the integrator constant, K, based on the values you specify for a
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-131
6
Control System Tuning
target maximum gain and frequency. For example, to specify an integral gain profile
with crossover frequency 10 rad/s, enter 1 in the Choose K to keep gain below
text box. Then, enter 10 in the at the frequency text box. The software chooses the
integrator constant such that the maximum loop gain is 1 at 10 rad/s.
• Other gain profile
Check to specify the maximum gain profile as a function of frequency. Enter a
SISO numeric LTI model whose magnitude represents the desired gain profile.
For example, you can specify a smooth transfer function (tf, zpk, or ss model).
Alternatively, you can sketch a piecewise target loop gain using an frd model.
When you do so, the software automatically maps the profile to a smooth transfer
function that approximates the desired maximum loop gain. For example, to specify
maximum gain of 100 (40 dB) below 0.1 rad/s, rolling off at a rate of –20 dB/dec at
higher frequencies, enter frd([100 100 10],[0 1e-1 1]).
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the maximum
loop gain goal.
• Enforce goal in frequency range
Limit the enforcement of the tuning goal to a particular frequency band. Specify the
frequency band as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. For example, to create a tuning goal that applies only between 1 and
100 rad/s, enter [1,100]. By default, the tuning goal applies at all frequencies for
continuous time, and up to the Nyquist frequency for discrete time.
• Stabilize closed loop system
By default, the tuning goal imposes a stability requirement on the closed-loop transfer
function from the specified inputs to outputs, in addition to the gain constraint.
If stability is not required or cannot be achieved, select No to remove the stability
requirement. For example, if the gain constraint applies to an unstable open-loop
transfer function, select No.
• Equalize loop interactions
For multi-loop or MIMO loop gain constraints, the feedback channels are
automatically rescaled to equalize the off-diagonal (loop interaction) terms in the
open-loop transfer function. Select Off to disable such scaling and shape the unscaled
open-loop response.
6-132
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Maximum Loop Gain Goal
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Maximum Loop Gain Goal, f(x) is given by:
(
f ( x ) = WT D-1TD
) •.
WT is the reciprocal of the maximum loop gain profile. D is a diagonal scaling (for MIMO
loops). T is the complementary sensitivity function at the specified location.
Although T is a closed-loop transfer function, driving f(x) < 1 is equivalent to enforcing
an upper bound on the open-loop transfer, L, in a frequency band where the gain of L is
less than one. To see why, note that T = L/(I + L). For SISO loops, when |L| << 1, |T|
≈ |L|. Therefore, enforcing the open-loop maximum gain requirement, |L| < 1/|WT|, is
roughly equivalent to enforcing |WTT| < 1. For MIMO loops, similar reasoning applies,
with ||T|| ≈ σmax(L), where σmax is the largest singular value.
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-133
6
Control System Tuning
Loop Shape Goal
Purpose
Shape open-loop response of feedback loops.
Description
Loop Shape Goal specifies a target gain profile (gain as a function of frequency) of an
open-loop response. Loop Shape Goal constrains the open-loop, point-to-point response
(L) at a specified location in your control system.
When you tune a control system, the target open-loop gain profile is converted into
constraints on the inverse sensitivity function inv(S) = (I + L) and the complementary
sensitivity function T = 1–S. These constraints are illustrated for a representative tuned
system in the following figure.
6-134
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Loop Shape Goal
Where L is much greater than 1, a minimum gain constraint on inv(S) (green shaded
region) is equivalent to a minimum gain constraint on L. Similarly, where L is much
smaller than 1, a maximum gain constraint on T (red shaded region) is equivalent to
a maximum gain constraint on L. The gap between these two constraints is twice the
crossover tolerance, which specifies the frequency band where the loop gain can cross 0
dB.
For multi-input, multi-output (MIMO) control systems, values in the gain profile greater
than 1 are interpreted as minimum performance requirements. Such values are lower
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-135
6
Control System Tuning
bounds on the smallest singular value of the open-loop response. Gain profile values less
than one are interpreted as minimum roll-off requirements, which are upper bounds on
the largest singular value of the open-loop response. For more information about singular
values, see sigma.
Use Loop Shape Goal when the loop shape near crossover is simple or well understood
(such as integral action). To specify only high gain or low gain constraints in certain
frequency bands, use “Minimum Loop Gain Goal” on page 6-124 or “Maximum Loop Gain
Goal” on page 6-129. When you do so, the software determines the best loop shape near
crossover.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Target shape for
open-loop response to create a Loop Shape Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.LoopShape to
specify a loop-shape goal.
Open-Loop Response Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the signal locations at which to compute the
open-loop gain. You can also specify additional loop-opening locations for evaluating the
tuning goal.
• Shape open-loop response at the following locations
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to compute and constrain
the open-loop gain. To constrain a SISO response, select a single-valued location.
Add
For example, to constrain the open-loop gain at a location named 'y', click
signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain a MIMO response, select multiple signals
or a vector-valued signal.
• Compute response with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
6-136
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Loop Shape Goal
Desired Loop Shape
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the target loop shape.
• Pure integrator wc/s
Check to specify a pure integrator and crossover frequency for the target loop shape.
For example, to specify an integral gain profile with crossover frequency 10 rad/s,
enter 10 in the Crossover frequency wc text box.
• Other gain profile
Check to specify the target loop shape as a function of frequency. Enter a SISO
numeric LTI model whose magnitude represents the desired gain profile. For
example, you can specify a smooth transfer function (tf, zpk, or ss model).
Alternatively, you can sketch a piecewise target loop shape using an frd model. When
you do so, the software automatically maps the profile to a smooth transfer function
that approximates the desired loop shape. For example, to specify a target loop shape
of 100 (40 dB) below 0.1 rad/s, rolling off at a rate of –20 dB/dec at higher frequencies,
enter frd([100 100 10],[0 1e-1 1]).
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the loop shape
goal.
• Enforce loop shape within
Specify the tolerance in the location of the crossover frequency, in decades. For
example, to allow gain crossovers within half a decade on either side of the target
crossover frequency, enter 0.5. Increase the crossover tolerance to increase the ability
of the tuning algorithm to enforce the target loop shape for all loops in a MIMO
control system.
• Enforce goal in frequency range
Limit the enforcement of the tuning goal to a particular frequency band. Specify the
frequency band as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. For example, to create a tuning goal that applies only between 1 and
100 rad/s, enter [1,100]. By default, the tuning goal applies at all frequencies for
continuous time, and up to the Nyquist frequency for discrete time.
• Stabilize closed loop system
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-137
6
Control System Tuning
By default, the tuning goal imposes a stability requirement on the closed-loop transfer
function from the specified inputs to outputs, in addition to the gain constraint.
If stability is not required or cannot be achieved, select No to remove the stability
requirement. For example, if the gain constraint applies to an unstable open-loop
transfer function, select No.
• Equalize loop interactions
For multi-loop or MIMO loop gain constraints, the feedback channels are
automatically rescaled to equalize the off-diagonal (loop interaction) terms in the
open-loop transfer function. Select Off to disable such scaling and shape the unscaled
open-loop response.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Loop Shape Goal, f(x) is given by:
f (x) =
WS S
WT T
.
•
S = D–1[I – L(s,x)]–1D is the scaled sensitivity function.
L(s,x) is the open-loop response being shaped.
6-138
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Loop Shape Goal
D is an automatically-computed loop scaling factor. (If Equalize loop interactions is
set to Off, then D = I.)
T = S – I is the complementary sensitivity function.
WS and WT are weighting functions derived from the specified loop shape.
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-139
6
Control System Tuning
Margins Goal
Purpose
Enforce specified gain and phase margins.
Description
Margins Goal enforces specified gain and phase margins on a SISO or MIMO feedback
loop. For MIMO feedback loops, the gain and phase margins are based on the notion of
disk margins, which guarantee stability for concurrent gain and phase variations in all
feedback channels. See loopmargin for more information about disk margins.
In Control System Tuner, the shaded area on the plot represents the region in the
frequency domain where the margins goal is not met. For more information about
interpreting this plot, see “Interpreting Stability Margins in Control System Tuning” on
page 6-209.
6-140
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Margins Goal
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Minimum stability
margins to create a Margins Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.Margins to specify
a stability margin goal.
Feedback Loop Selection
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the signal locations at which to measure
stability margins. You can also specify additional loop-opening locations for evaluating
the tuning goal.
• Measure stability margins at the following locations
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to compute and constrain
the stability margins. To constrain a SISO loop, select a single-valued location. For
example, to constrain the stability margins at a location named 'y', click
Add
signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain a MIMO loop, select multiple signals or a
vector-valued signal.
• Measure stability margins with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
Desired Margins
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the minimum gain and phase margins for the
feedback loop.
• Gain margin (dB)
Enter the required minimum gain margin for the feedback loop as a scalar value
expressed in dB.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-141
6
Control System Tuning
• Phase margin (degrees)
Enter the required minimum phase margin for the feedback loop as a scalar value
expressed in degrees.
For MIMO feedback loops, the gain and phase margins are based on the notion of disk
margins, which guarantee stability for concurrent gain and phase variations in all
feedback channels. See loopmargin for more information about disk margins.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the stability
margin goal.
• Enforce goal in frequency range
Limit the enforcement of the tuning goal to a particular frequency band. Specify the
frequency band as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. For example, to create a tuning goal that applies only between 1 and
100 rad/s, enter [1,100]. By default, the tuning goal applies at all frequencies for
continuous time, and up to the Nyquist frequency for discrete time.
For best results with stability margin requirements, pick a frequency band extending
about one decade on each side of the gain crossover frequencies.
• D scaling order
This value controls the order (number of states) of the scalings involved in computing
MIMO stability margins. Static scalings (scaling order 0) are used by default.
Increasing the order may improve results at the expense of increased computations.
If the stability margin plot shows a large gap between the optimized and actual
margins, consider increasing the scaling order. See “Interpreting Stability Margins in
Control System Tuning” on page 6-209.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
6-142
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Margins Goal
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Margins Goal, f(x) is given by:
f ( x ) = 2a S - a I
•
.
S = D–1[I – L(s,x)]–1D is the scaled sensitivity function.
L(s,x) is the open-loop response being shaped.
D is an automatically-computed loop scaling factor.
α is a scalar parameter computed from the specified gain and phase margin.
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
More About
•
“Interpreting Stability Margins in Control System Tuning” on page 6-209
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-143
6
Control System Tuning
Poles Goal
Purpose
Constrain the dynamics of the closed-loop system, specified feedback loops, or specified
open-loop configurations.
Description
Poles Goal constrains the dynamics of your entire control system or of specified feedback
loops of your control system. Constraining the dynamics of a feedback loop means
constraining the dynamics of the sensitivity function measured at a specified location in
the control system.
Using Poles Goal, you can specify finite minimum decay rate or minimum damping for
the poles in the control system or specified loop. You can specify a maximum natural
frequency for these poles, to eliminate fast dynamics in the tuned control system.
6-144
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Poles Goal
In Control System Tuner, the shaded area on the plot represents the region in the
frequency domain where the pole location constraints are not met.
To constrain dynamics or ensure stability of a single tunable component of the control
system, use “Controller Poles Goal” on page 6-149.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Constraint on closedloop dynamics to create a Poles Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.Poles to specify a
disturbance rejection goal.
Feedback Configuration
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the portion of the control system for
which you want to constrain dynamics. You can also specify loop-opening locations for
evaluating the tuning goal.
• Entire system
Select this option to constrain the locations of closed-loop poles of the control system.
• Specific feedback loop(s)
Select this option to specify one or more feedback loops to constrain. Specify a
feedback loop by selecting a signal location in your control system. Poles Goal
constrains the dynamics of the sensitivity function measured at that location. (See
getSensitivity for information about sensitivity functions.)
To constrain the dynamics of a SISO loop, select a single-valued location. For
example, to constrain the dynamics of the sensitivity function measured at a location
named 'y', click Add signal to list and select 'y'. To constrain the dynamics of a
MIMO loop, select multiple signals or a vector-valued signal.
• Evaluate disturbance rejection with the following loops open
Select one or more signal locations in your model at which to open a feedback loop
for the purpose of evaluating this tuning goal. The tuning goal is evaluated against
the open-loop configuration created by opening feedback loops at the locations you
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-145
6
Control System Tuning
identify. For example, to evaluate the tuning goal with an opening at a location
named 'x',
Add signal to list and select 'x'.
Pole Location
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the limits on pole locations.
• Minimum decay rate
Enter the target minimum decay rate for the system poles. Closed-loop system
poles that depend on the tunable parameters are constrained to satisfy Re(s) < MinDecay for continuous-time systems, or log(|z|) < -MinDecay*Ts for discretetime systems with sample time Ts. This constraint helps ensure stable dynamics in
the tuned system.
Enter 0 to impose no constraint on the decay rate.
• Minimum damping
Enter the target minimum damping of closed-loop poles of tuned system, as a value
between 0 and 1. Closed-loop system poles that depend on the tunable parameters are
constrained to satisfy Re(s) < -MinDamping*|s|. In discrete time, the damping
ratio is computed using s=log(z)/Ts.
Enter 0 to impose no constraint on the damping ratio.
• Maximum natural frequency
Enter the target maximum natural frequency of poles of tuned system, in the units
of the control system model you are tuning. When you tune the control system using
this requirement, closed-loop system poles that depend on the tunable parameters
are constrained to satisfy |s| < MaxFrequency for continuous-time systems, or |
log(z)| < MaxFrequency*Ts for discrete-time systems with sample time Ts. This
constraint prevents fast dynamics in the control system.
Enter Inf to impose no constraint on the natural frequency.
Options
Use this section of the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the poles goal.
• Enforce goal in frequency range
6-146
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Poles Goal
Limit the enforcement of the tuning goal to a particular frequency band. Specify the
frequency band as a row vector of the form [min,max], expressed in frequency units
of your model. For example, to create a tuning goal that applies only between 1 and
100 rad/s, enter [1,100]. By default, the tuning goal applies at all frequencies for
continuous time, and up to the Nyquist frequency for discrete time.
The Poles Goal applies only to poles with natural frequency within the range you
specify.
• Apply goal to
This option applies when you are tuning multiple models at once, such as an array
of models obtained by linearizing a Simulink model at different operating points.
By default, active tuning goals are enforced for all models. To enforce a tuning
requirement for a subset of models in an array, select Only Models. Then, enter
the array indices of the models for which the goal is enforced. For example, suppose
you want to apply the tuning goal to the second, third, and fourth models in a model
array. To restrict enforcement of the requirement, enter 2:4 in the Only Models text
box.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Poles Goal, f(x) reflects the relative satisfaction or violation of the goal. For
example, if your Poles Goal constrains the closed-loop poles of a feedback loop to a
minimum damping of ζ = 0.5, then:
• f(x) = 1 means the smallest damping among the constrained poles is ζ = 0.5 exactly.
• f(x) = 1.1 means the smallest damping ζ = 0.5/1.1 = 0.45, roughly 10% less than the
target.
• f(x) = 0.9 means the smallest damping ζ = 0.5/0.9 = 0.55, roughly 10% better than the
target.
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-147
6
Control System Tuning
•
6-148
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Controller Poles Goal
Controller Poles Goal
Purpose
Constrain the dynamics of a specified tunable block in the tuned control system
Description
Controller Poles Goal constrains the dynamics of a tunable block in your control system
model. Controller Poles Goal can impose a stability constraint on the specified block. You
can also specify a finite minimum decay rate, a minimum damping rate, or a maximum
natural frequency for the poles of the block. These constraints allow you to eliminate fast
dynamics and control ringing in the response of the tunable block.
In Control System Tuner, the shaded area on the plot represents the region in the
frequency domain where the pole location constraints are not met. The constraint applies
to all poles in the block except fixed integrators, such as the I term of a PID controller.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-149
6
Control System Tuning
To constrain dynamics or ensure stability of an entire control system or a feedback loop
in the control system, use “Poles Goal” on page 6-144.
Creation
In the Tuning tab of Control System Tuner, select New Goal > Constraint on
controller dynamics to create a Controller Poles Goal.
Command-Line Equivalent
When tuning control systems at the command line, use TuningGoal.ControllerPoles
to specify a disturbance rejection goal.
Constrain Dynamics of Tuned Block
From the drop-down menu, select the tuned block in your control system to which to
apply the Controller Poles Goal.
If the block you want to constrain is not in the list, add it to the Tuned Blocks list. In
Control System Tuner, in the Tuning tab, click Select Blocks. For more information
about adding tuned blocks, see “Specify Blocks to Tune in Control System Tuner” on page
6-31.
Keep Poles Inside the Following Region
Use this section of the dialog box to specify the limits on pole locations.
• Minimum decay rate
Enter the desired minimum decay rate for the poles of the tunable block. Poles of the
block are constrained to satisfy Re(s) < -MinDecay for continuous-time blocks, or
log(|z|) < -MinDecay*Ts for discrete-time blocks with sample time Ts.
Specify a nonnegative value to ensure that the block is stable. If you specify a
negative value, the tuned block can include unstable poles.
• Minimum damping
Enter the desired minimum damping ratio of poles of the tunable block, as a value
between 0 and 1. Poles of the block that depend on the tunable parameters are
constrained to satisfy Re(s) < -MinDamping*|s|. In discrete time, the damping
ratio is computed using s=log(z)/Ts.
6-150
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Controller Poles Goal
• Maximum natural frequency
Enter the target maximum natural frequency of poles of the tunable block, in the
units of the control system model you are tuning. Poles of the block are constrained
to satisfy |s| < MaxFrequency for continuous-time blocks, or |log(z)| <
MaxFrequency*Ts for discrete-time blocks with sample time Ts. This constraint
prevents fast dynamics in the tunable block.
Algorithms
When you tune a control system, the software converts each tuning goal into a
normalized scalar value f(x). Here, x is the vector of free (tunable) parameters in the
control system. The software then adjusts the parameter values to minimize f(x) or to
drive f(x) below 1 if the tuning goal is a hard constraint.
For Controller Poles Goal, f(x) reflects the relative satisfaction or violation of the
goal. For example, if your Controller Poles Goal constrains the pole of a tuned block to a
minimum damping of ζ = 0.5, then:
• f(x) = 1 means the damping of the pole is ζ = 0.5 exactly.
• f(x) = 1.1 means the damping is ζ = 0.5/1.1 = 0.45, roughly 10% less than the target.
• f(x) = 0.9 means the damping is ζ = 0.5/0.9 = 0.55, roughly 10% better than the target.
Related Examples
•
“Specify Goals for Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44
•
“Manage Tuning Goals” on page 6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-151
6
Control System Tuning
Manage Tuning Goals
Control System Tuner lets you designate one or more tuning goals as hard goals. This
designation gives you a way to differentiate must-have goals from nice-to-have goals.
Control System Tuner attempts to satisfy hard requirements by driving their associated
cost functions below 1. Subject to that constraint, the software comes as close as possible
to satisfying remaining (soft) requirements. For best results, make sure you can obtain
a reasonable design with all goals treated as soft goals before attempting to enforce any
goal as a hard constraint.
By default, new goals are designated soft goals. In the Tuning tab, click
Manage
Goals to open the Manage tuning goals dialog box. Check Hard for any goal to
designate it a hard goal.
You can also designate any tuning goal as inactive for tuning. In this case the software
ignores the tuning goal entirely. Use this dialog box to select which tuning goals are
active when you tune the control system. Active is checked by default for any new goals.
Uncheck Active for any design goal that you do not want enforced.
For example, if you tune with the following configuration, Control System Tuner
optimizes StepRespGoal1, subject to MarginsGoal1. The tuning goal PolesGoal1 is
ignored.
6-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Manage Tuning Goals
All tuning goals you have created in the Control System Tuner session are listed in the
dialog box. To edit an existing tuning goal, select it in the list and click Edit. To delete a
tuning goal from the list, select it and click Remove.
To add more tuning goals to the list, in Control System Tuner, in the Tuning tab, click
New Goal. For more information about creating tuning goals, see “Specify Goals for
Interactive Tuning” on page 6-44.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-153
6
Control System Tuning
Generate MATLAB Code from Control System Tuner for CommandLine Tuning
This example shows how to generate a MATLAB script in Control System Tuner for
tuning a control system at the command line. Generated scripts are useful when you
want to programmatically reproduce a result you obtained interactively. A generated
MATLAB script also enables you to programmatically perform multiple tuning
operations with variations in tuning goals, system parameters, or model conditions such
as operating point.
Tip You can also save a Control System Tuner session to reproduce within Control
System Tuner. To do so, in the Control System tab, click
Save Session.
To generate a MATLAB script in Control System Tuner, in the Tuning tab, click
Tune . Select Script with current values.
6-154
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Generate MATLAB Code from Control System Tuner for Command-Line Tuning
The MATLAB Editor displays the generated script, which script reproduces
programmatically the current tuning configuration of Control System Tuner.
For example, suppose you generate a MATLAB script after completing all steps in the
example “Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER”
on page 6-289. The generated script computes the operating point used for tuning,
designates the blocks to tune, creates the tuning goals, and performs other operations to
reproduce the result at the command line.
The first section of the script creates the slTuner interface to the Simulinkmodel
(rct_linact in this example). The slTuner interface stores a linearization of the model
and parameterizations of the blocks to tune.
%% Create system data with slTuner interface
TunedBlocks = {'rct_linact/Current Controller/Current PID'; ...
'rct_linact/Speed Controller/Speed PID'};
AnalysisPoints = {'rct_linact/Speed Demand (rpm)/1'; ...
'rct_linact/Current Sensor/1'; ...
'rct_linact/Hall Effect Sensor/1'; ...
'rct_linact/Speed Controller/Speed PID/1'; ...
'rct_linact/Current Controller/Current PID/1'};
OperatingPoints = 0.5;
% Create the slTuner object
CL0 = slTuner('rct_linact',TunedBlocks,AnalysisPoints,OperatingPoints);
The slTuner interface also specifies the operating point at which the model is linearized,
and marks as analysis points all the signal locations required to specify the tuning goals
for the example. (See “Create and Configure slTuner Interface to Simulink Model” on
page 6-178.)
If you are tuning a control system modeled in MATLAB instead of Simulink, the first
section of the script constructs a genss model that has equivalent dynamics and
parameterization to the genss model of the control system that you specified Control
System Tuner.
Next, the script creates the three tuning goals specified in the example. The script
uses TuningGoal objects to capture theses tuning goals. For instance, the script uses
TuningGoal.Tracking to capture the Tracking Goal of the example.
%% Create tuning goal to follow reference commands with prescribed performance
% Inputs and outputs
Inputs = {'rct_linact/Speed Demand (rpm)/1'};
Outputs = {'rct_linact/Hall Effect Sensor/1[rpm]'};
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-155
6
Control System Tuning
% Tuning goal specifications
ResponseTime = 0.1; % Approximately reciprocal of tracking bandwidth
DCError = 0.001; % Maximum steady-state error
PeakError = 1; % Peak error across frequency
% Create tuning goal for tracking
TR = TuningGoal.Tracking(Inputs,Outputs,ResponseTime,DCError,PeakError);
TR.Name = 'TR'; % Tuning goal name
After creating the tuning goals, the script sets any algorithm options you had set in
Control System Tuner. The script also designates tuning goals as soft or hard goals,
according to the configuration of tuning goals in Control System Tuner. (See “Manage
Tuning Goals” on page 6-152.)
%% Create option set for systune command
Options = systuneOptions();
%% Set soft and hard goals
SoftGoals = [ TR ; ...
MG1 ; ...
MG2 ];
HardGoals = [];
In this example, all the goals are designated as soft goals when the script is generated.
Therefore, HardGoals is empty.
Finally, the script tunes the control system by calling systune on the slTuner interface
using the tuning goals and options.
%% Tune the parameters with soft and hard goals
[CL1,fSoft,gHard,Info] = systune(CL0,SoftGoals,HardGoals,Options);
The script also includes an optional call to viewSpec, which displays graphical
representations of the tuning goals to aid you in interpreting and validating the tuning
results. Uncomment this line of code to generate the plots.
%% View tuning results
% viewSpec([SoftGoals;HardGoals],CL1,Info);
You can add calls to functions such getIOTransfer to make the script generate
additional analysis plots.
Related Examples
•
6-156
“Create and Configure slTuner Interface to Simulink Model” on page 6-178
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Generate MATLAB Code from Control System Tuner for Command-Line Tuning
•
“Tune Control System at the Command Line” on page 6-215
•
“Validate Tuned Control System at the Command Line” on page 6-219
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-157
6
Control System Tuning
Tuning Options
Tuning
To specify options for the tuning algorithm, in the Tuning tab, click
Options. The Tuning Options dialog box lets you specify the following options:
Optimization
• Use multiple starting points
Control System Tuner tunes by finding a local minimum of a gain minimization
problem. When this option is unchecked, the software performs a single optimization
run starting from the initial values of the tunable parameters. To increase the
likelihood of finding parameter values that meet your design requirements, you can
perform multiple optimization runs that begin from randomized parameter values.
To do so, check this option, and enter a number of optimization runs to perform in
the Number of randomized starts text box. Control System Tuner selects the best
design that results from the multiple optimization runs.
• Run multiple starts in parallel
Check this option enable parallel processing by distributing randomized starts among
workers in a parallel pool. If there is an available parallel pool, then the software
performs independent optimization runs concurrently among workers in that pool. If
no parallel pool is available, one of the following occurs:
• If Automatically create a parallel pool is selected in your “Parallel
Computing Toolbox™ preferences”, then the software starts a parallel pool using
the settings in those preferences.
• If Automatically create a parallel pool is not selected in your
preferences, then the software performs the optimization runs successively,
without parallel processing.
If Automatically create a parallel pool is not selected in your preferences,
you can manually start a parallel pool using parpool before running the tuning
command.
Using parallel processing requires Parallel Computing Toolbox software.
• Stop when soft goal values less than
6-158
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Options
Check this box to specify a custom target value for soft constraints. The optimization
stops when the largest soft constraint value falls below this target value, assuming
it is possible to find parameter values that achieve this result. When the box is
unchecked, the software attempts to minimize the soft goals subject to the hard
constraints.
• Show report with
When this box is checked, Control System Tuner displays a tuning report each time
you tune a model. Select the level of detail to display in the report.
• Final summary — Displays tuning summary containing the best achieved value
for the hard goals and soft goals. Also displays hard goal, soft goal, and number of
iterations for each independent optimization run.
• Intermediate results — In addition to the tuning summary, displays the
results of each optimization subproblem.
When you designate some tuning goals as hard goals, the software divides
the optimization into subproblems. First, the software attempts to satisfy the
hard goals. Then, it attempts to minimize the soft goals, subject to remaining
in a parameter-space region in which the hard goals are satisfied. When you
select Intermediate results, the report includes the results of each of these
subproblems.
• Detailed progress — Displays the result of every iteration in each
optimization run.
Stabilization
• Minimum decay rate
Specify the minimum decay rate for closed-loop poles in the tuned system.
Constrains all closed-loop pole locations |p| to satisfy Re(p) < -MinDecay. Adjust
the minimum value if the optimization cannot meet the default minimum value, or
if the default minimum value conflicts with other requirements. For specifying other
constraints on the closed-loop pole locations, use “Poles Goal” on page 6-144.
Default: 10–7
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-159
6
Control System Tuning
Solver Parameters
• Maximum iterations
Specify the maximum number of iterations in each optimization run, when the run
does not converge to within tolerance.
Default: 300
• Termination tolerance for soft goals
Specify the relative tolerance for termination.
The optimization terminates when the relative decrease in the soft constraint value
decreases by less than this value over 10 consecutive iterations. Increasing this value
speeds up termination. Decreasing the value yields tighter final values.
Default: 0.001
• Guess at best feasible value for soft goals
Specify an priori estimate of best soft constraint value.
For problems that mix soft and hard constraints, providing a rough estimate of the
optimal value of the soft constraints (subject to the hard constraints) helps to speed
up the optimization.
Default: 1
More About
•
6-160
“Interpreting Tuning Results” on page 6-161
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Interpreting Tuning Results
Interpreting Tuning Results
The automated tuning software converts each soft and hard tuning goal into normalized
values fi(x) and gj(x), respectively. Here, x is the vector of tunable parameters in the
control system to tune.
The software then solves the minimization problem:
Minimize max fi ( x ) subject to max g j ( x ) < 1 , for xmin < x < xmax .
i
j
xmin and xmax are the minimum and maximum values of the free parameters of the control
system.
When you tune a control system, you obtain the following output:
• In Control System Tuner, the current design is updated to use the tuned parameters
that best satisfy the minimization problem. By default, the current design is reflected
in all tuning goal plots and response plots you have active in Control System Tuner.
Control System Tuner also displays a Tuning Report summarizing the best achieved
values of fi(x) and gj(x).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-161
6
Control System Tuning
The Worst Value entry reflects the largest of the optimized soft goal values. In other
words, the software minimizes the fi(x) values as well as it can subject to the hard
constraints. Worst Value highlights the largest of the minimized fi(x) values. The
closer each value is to 1, the closer that requirement is to being satisfied.
• For command-line tuning, systune returns the control system model or slTuner
interface with the tuned parameter values. systune also returns the best achieved
values of each fi(x) and gj(x) as the vector-valued output arguments fSoft and gHard,
respectively. See the systune reference page for more information.
For information about the functions fi(x) and gj(x) for each type of constraint, see the
reference pages for each tuning goal.
The software uses the nonsmooth optimization algorithms described in [1].
The software computes the H∞ norm using the algorithm of [2] and structure-preserving
eigensolvers from the SLICOT library. For more information about the SLICOT library,
see http://slicot.org.
References
[1] Apkarian, P. and D. Noll, "Nonsmooth H-infinity Synthesis." IEEE Transactions on
Automatic Control, Vol. 51, No. 1, (2006), pp. 71–86.
[2] Bruisma, N.A. and M. Steinbuch, "A Fast Algorithm to Compute the H∞-Norm of a
Transfer Function Matrix," System Control Letters, Vol. 14, No, 4 (1990), pp. 287–
293.
Related Examples
6-162
•
“Create Response Plots in Control System Tuner” on page 6-163
•
“Examine Tuned Controller Parameters in Control System Tuner” on page 6-170
•
“Compare Performance of Multiple Tuned Controllers” on page 6-172
•
“Validate Tuned Controller in Simulink” on page 6-177
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create Response Plots in Control System Tuner
Create Response Plots in Control System Tuner
This example shows how to create response plots for analyzing system performance in
Control System Tuner. Control System Tuner can generate many types of response plots
in the time and frequency domains. You can view responses of SISO or MIMO transfer
functions between inputs and outputs at any location in your model. Use response plots
to validate the performance of your tuned control system.
This example creates response plots for analyzing the sample model rct_helico.
Choose Response Plot Type
In Control System Tuner, in the Control System tab, click
of plot you want to create.
New Plot. Select the type
A new plot dialog box opens in which you specify the inputs and outputs of the portion of
your control system whose response you want to plot. For example, select New step to
create a step response plot from specified inputs to specified outputs of your system.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-163
6
Control System Tuning
Specify Transfer Function
Choose which transfer function associated with the specified inputs and outputs you
want to analyze.
For most response plots types, the Select Response to Plot menu lets you choose one of
the following transfer functions:
• New Input-Output Transfer Response — Transfer function between specified
inputs and outputs, computed with loops open at any additionally specified loopopening locations.
• New Sensitivity Transfer Response — Sensitivity function computed at the
specified location and with loops open at any specified loop-opening locations.
• New Open-Loop Response — Open loop point-to-point transfer function computed
at the specified location and with loops open at any additionally specified loop-opening
locations.
• Entire System Response — For Pole/Zero maps and I/O Pole/Zero maps only. Plot
the pole and zero locations for the entire closed-loop control system.
• Response of Tuned Block — For Pole/Zero maps and I/O Pole/Zero maps only.
Plot the pole and zero locations of tuned blocks.
Name the Response
Type a name for the response in the Response Name text box. Once you have specified
signal locations defining the response, Control System Tuner stores the response under
this name. When you create additional new response plots, the response appears by this
name in Select Response to Plot menu.
Choose Signal Locations for Evaluating System Response
Specify the signal locations in your control system at which to evaluate the selected
response. For example, the step response plot displays the response of the system at one
6-164
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create Response Plots in Control System Tuner
or more output locations to a unit step applied at one or more input locations. Use the
Specify input signals and Specify output signals sections of the dialog box to specify
these locations. (Other tuning goal types, such as loop-shape or stability margins, require
you to specify only one location for evaluation. The procedure for specifying the location is
the same as illustrated here.)
Under Specify input signals, click
locations appears.
Add signal to list. A list of available input
If the signal you want to designate as a step-response input is in the list, click the signal
to add it to the step-response inputs. If the signal you want to designate does not appear,
and you are tuning a Simulink model, click Select signal from model.
The Add signal from the model dialog box contains a list of signals that are currently
selected in the Simulink model. If the signal you want to designate is listed, select it and
click Add signal.
If the signal you want is not listed, select the signal in the Simulink model editor. Then,
return to the Add signal from the model dialog box and click Add signal.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-165
6
Control System Tuning
The signal you selected now appears in the list of step-response inputs.
Click
Add signal to list again to add an additional signal to the step-response inputs
list, if you want to specify a MIMO response.
Similarly, specify the locations at which the step response is measured to the stepresponse outputs list. For example, the following configuration plots the MIMO response
6-166
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create Response Plots in Control System Tuner
to a step input applied at theta-ref and phi-ref and measured at theta and phi in
the Simulink model rct_helico.
Tip To highlight any selected signal in the Simulink model, click
from the input or output list, click
. To remove a signal
.
Specify Loop Openings
You can evaluate most system responses with loops open at one or more locations in the
control system. Click
the response.
Add loop opening location to list to specify such locations for
Store and Plot the Response
When you have finished specifying the response, click Plot in the new plot dialog box.
The new response appears in the Responses section of the Data Browser. A new figure
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-167
6
Control System Tuning
opens displaying the response plot. When you tune your control system, you can refer to
this figure to evaluate the performance of the tuned system.
Tip To edit the specifications of the response, double-click the response in the Data
Browser. Any plots using that response update to reflect the edited response.
View response characteristics such as rise-times or peak values by right-clicking on the
plot. Other options for managing and organizing multiple plots are available in the View
tab.
6-168
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create Response Plots in Control System Tuner
Related Examples
•
“Compare Performance of Multiple Tuned Controllers” on page 6-172
•
“Examine Tuned Controller Parameters in Control System Tuner” on page 6-170
•
“Validate Tuned Controller in Simulink” on page 6-177
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-169
6
Control System Tuning
Examine Tuned Controller Parameters in Control System Tuner
After you tune your control system, Control System Tuner gives you two ways to view the
current values of the tuned block parameters:
• In the Data Browser, in the Tuned Blocks area, select the block whose parameters
you want to view. A text summary of the block and its current parameter values
appears in the Data Browser in the Data Preview area.
• In the Data Browser, in the Tuned Blocks area, double-click the block whose
parameters you want to view. The Tuned Block Editor window opens, displaying
the current values of the parameters. For array-valued parameters, click
a variable editor displaying values in the array.
6-170
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
to open
Examine Tuned Controller Parameters in Control System Tuner
Related Examples
•
“View and Change Block Parameterization in Control System Tuner” on page 6-33
More About
•
“Tuned Block Editor” on page 6-36
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-171
6
Control System Tuning
Compare Performance of Multiple Tuned Controllers
This example shows how to compare the performance of a control system tuned with
two different sets of tuning goals. Such comparison is useful, for example, to see the
effect on performance of changing a tuning goal from hard goal to soft goal. Comparing
performance is also useful to see the effect of adding an additional tuning goal when an
initial design fails to satisfy all your performance requirements either in the linearized
system or when validated against a full nonlinear model.
This example compares tuning results for the sample model rct_linact.
Store First Design
After tuning a control system with a first set of design requirements, store the design in
Control System Tuner.
In the Control System tab, click
Browser in the Designs area.
6-172
Store. The stored design appears in the Data
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Compare Performance of Multiple Tuned Controllers
Change the name of the stored design, if desired, by right-clicking on the data browser
entry.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-173
6
Control System Tuning
Compute New Design
In the Tuning tab, make any desired changes to the tuning goals for the second design.
For example, add new tuning goals or edit existing tuning goals to change specifications.
Or, in
Manage Goals, change which tuning goals are active and which are
designated hard constraints or soft requirements.
When you are ready, retune the control system with the new set of tuning goals. Click
Tune. Control System Tuner updates the current design (the current set of controller
parameters) with the new tuned design. All existing plots, which by default show the
current design, are updated to reflect the new current design.
Compare New Design with Stored Design
Update all plots to reflect both the new design and the stored design. In the Control
System tab, click
Compare. The Compare Designs dialog box opens.
In the Compare Designs dialog box, the current design is checked by default. Check
the box for the design you want to compare to the current design. All response plots and
6-174
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Compare Performance of Multiple Tuned Controllers
tuning goal plots update to reflect the checked designs. The solid trace corresponds to the
current design. Other designs are identified by name in the plot legend.
Use the same procedure save and compare as many designs as you need.
Restore Previously Saved Design
Under some conditions, it is useful to restore the tuned parameter values from a
previously saved design as the current design. For example, clicking
Update Blocks
writes the current parameter values to the Simulink model. If you decide to test a stored
controller design in your full nonlinear model, you must first restore those stored values
as the current design.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-175
6
Control System Tuning
To do so, click
design.
Retrieve. Select the stored design that you want to make the current
Related Examples
•
6-176
“Create Response Plots in Control System Tuner” on page 6-163
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Validate Tuned Controller in Simulink
Validate Tuned Controller in Simulink
Because Control System Tuner designs for a linearization of your Simulink model, tuned
block parameters must be validated by simulating the full nonlinear model, even if the
tuned system meets all your tuning goals in Control System Tuner.
To write tuned block parameters to a Simulink model, in the Control System tab, click
Update Blocks.
Control System Tuner transfers the current values of the tuned block parameters to
the corresponding blocks in the Simulink model. Simulate the model to evaluate model
performance using the tuned values.
Tip If you tune the Simulink model at an operating point other than the model initial
condition, you might want to initialize the model at the same operating point before
simulating. See “Simulate Simulink Model at Specific Operating Point” in the Simulink
Control Design documentation.
To update Simulink model with parameter values from a previous design stored in
Control System Tuner, click
Retrieve and select the stored design that you want to
make the current design. Then click
Update Blocks.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-177
6
Control System Tuning
Create and Configure slTuner Interface to Simulink Model
This example shows how to create and configure an slTuner interface for a Simulink®
model. The slTuner interface parameterizes blocks in your model that you designate
as tunable and and allows you to tune them using systune. The slTuner interface
generates a linearization of your Simulink model, and also allows you to extract
linearized system responses for analysis and validation of the tuned control system.
For this example, create and configure an slTuner interface for tuning the Simulink
model rct_helico, a multiloop controller for a rotorcraft. Open the model.
open_system('rct_helico');
The control system consists of two feedback loops. The inner loop (static output feedback)
provides stability augmentation and decoupling. The outer loop (PI controllers) provides
the desired setpoint tracking performance.
Suppose that you want to tune this model to meet the following control objectives:
• Track setpoint changes in theta, phi, and r with zero steady-state error, specified
rise times, minimal overshoot, and minimal cross-coupling.
• Limit the control bandwidth to guard against neglected high-frequency rotor
dynamics and measurement noise.
6-178
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create and Configure slTuner Interface to Simulink Model
• Provide strong multivariable gain and phase margins (robustness to simultaneous
gain/phase variations at the plant inputs and outputs).
The systune command can jointly tune the controller blocks SOF and the PI controllers)
to meet these design requirements. The slTuner interface sets up this tuning task.
Create the slTuner interface.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_helico',{'PI1','PI2','PI3','SOF'});
This command initializes the slTuner interface with the three PI controllers and the
SOF block designated as tunable. Each tunable block is automatically parameterized
according to its type and initialized with its value in the Simulink model.
To configure the slTuner interface, designate as analysis points any signal locations of
relevance to your design requirements. First, add the outputs and reference inputs for
the tracking requirements.
addPoint(ST0,{'theta-ref','theta','phi-ref','phi','r-ref','r'});
When you create a TuningGoal.Tracking object that captures the tracking
requirement, this object references the same signals.
Configure the slTuner interface for the stability margin requirements. Designate as
analysis points the plant inputs and outputs (control and measurement signals) where
the stability margins are measured.
addPoint(ST0,{'u','y'});
Display a summary of the slTuner interface configuration in the command window.
ST0
slTuner tuning interface for "rct_helico":
4 Tuned blocks: (Read-only TunedBlocks property)
-------------------------Block 1: rct_helico/PI1
Block 2: rct_helico/PI2
Block 3: rct_helico/PI3
Block 4: rct_helico/SOF
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-179
6
Control System Tuning
8 Analysis points:
-------------------------Point 1: Port 1 of rct_helico/theta-ref
Point 2: Signal "theta", located at port 1 of rct_helico/Demux1
Point 3: Port 1 of rct_helico/phi-ref
Point 4: Signal "phi", located at port 2 of rct_helico/Demux1
Point 5: Port 1 of rct_helico/r-ref
Point 6: Signal "r", located at port 3 of rct_helico/Demux1
Point 7: Signal "u", located at port 1 of rct_helico/Mux3
Point 8: Signal "y", located at port 1 of rct_helico/Helicopter
No permanent openings. Use the addOpening command to add new permanent openings.
Properties with dot notation get/set access:
Parameters
: []
OperatingPoints
: [] (model initial condition will be used.)
BlockSubstitutions : []
Options
: [1x1 linearize.SlTunerOptions]
Ts
: 0
In the command window, click on any highlighted signal to see its location in the
Simulink model.
In addition to specifying design requirements, you can use analysis points for extracting
system responses. For example, extract and plot the step responses between the
reference signals and 'theta', 'phi', and 'r'.
T0 = getIOTransfer(ST0,{'theta-ref','phi-ref','r-ref'},{'theta','phi','r'});
stepplot(T0,1)
6-180
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create and Configure slTuner Interface to Simulink Model
All the step responses are unstable, including the cross-couplings, because this model has
not yet been tuned.
After you tune the model, you can similarly use the designated analysis points to extract
system responses for validating the tuned system. If you want to examine system
responses at locations that are not needed to specify design requirements, add these
locations to the slTuner interface as well. For example, plot the sensitivity function
measured at the output of the block roll-off 2.
addPoint(ST0,'dc')
dcS0 = getSensitivity(ST0,'dc');
bodeplot(dcS0)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-181
6
Control System Tuning
Suppose you want to change the parameterization of tunable blocks in the slTuner
interface. For example, suppose that after tuning the model, you want to test
whether changing from PI to PID controllers yields improved results. Change the
parameterization of the three PI controllers to PID controllers.
PID0
PID1
PID2
PID3
=
=
=
=
pid(0,0.001,0.001,.01); % initial value for PID controllers
ltiblock.pid('C1',PID0);
ltiblock.pid('C2',PID0);
ltiblock.pid('C3',PID0);
setBlockParam(ST0,'PI1',PID1);
setBlockParam(ST0,'PI2',PID2);
setBlockParam(ST0,'PI3',PID3);
6-182
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Create and Configure slTuner Interface to Simulink Model
After you configure the slTuner interface to your Simulink model, you can create tuning
goals and tune the model using systune or looptune.
See Also
addBlock | addPoint | getIOTransfer | getSensitivity | setBlockParam |
slTuner
Related Examples
•
“Multi-Loop Control of a Helicopter”
•
“Control of a Linear Electric Actuator”
More About
•
“Managing Signals in Control System Analysis and Design”
•
“Tuning Goals”
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-183
6
Control System Tuning
Time-Domain Specifications
This example gives a tour of available time-domain requirements for control system
tuning with systune or looptune.
Background
The systune and looptune commands tune the parameters of fixed-structure
control systems subject to a variety of time- and frequency-domain requirements. The
TuningGoal package is the repository for such design requirements.
Step Command Following
The TuningGoal.StepTracking requirement specifies how the tuned closed-loop
system should respond to a step input. You can specify the desired response either in
terms of first- or second-order characteristics, or as an explicit reference model. This
requirement is satisfied when the relative gap between the actual and desired responses
is small enough in the least-squares sense. For example,
R1 = TuningGoal.StepTracking('r','y',0.5);
stipulates that the closed-loop response from r to y should behave like a first-order
system with time constant 0.5, while
R2 = TuningGoal.StepTracking('r','y',zpk(2,[-1 -2],-1));
specifies a second-order, non-minimum-phase behavior. Use viewSpec to visualize the
desired response.
viewSpec(R2)
6-184
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Time-Domain Specifications
This requirement can be used to tune both SISO and MIMO step responses. In the MIMO
case, the requirement ensures that each output tracks the corresponding input with
minimum cross-couplings.
Step Disturbance Rejection
The TuningGoal.StepRejection requirement specifies how the tuned closed-loop
system should respond to a step disturbance. You can specify worst-case values for the
response amplitude, settling time, and damping of oscillations. For example,
R1 = TuningGoal.StepRejection('d','y',0.3,2,0.5);
limits the amplitude of
to 0.3, the settling time to 2 time units, and the damping
ratio to a minimum of 0.5. Use viewSpec to see the corresponding time response.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-185
6
Control System Tuning
viewSpec(R1)
You can also use a "reference model" to specify the desired response. Note that the actual
and specified responses may differ substantially when better disturbance rejection
is possible. Use the TuningGoal.Transient requirement when a close match is
desired. For best results, adjust the gain of the reference model so that the actual and
specified responses have similar peak amplitudes (see TuningGoal.StepRejection
documentation for details).
Transient Response Matching
The TuningGoal.Transient requirement specifies the transient response for a specific
input signal. This is a generalization of the TuningGoal.StepTracking requirement.
For example,
6-186
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Time-Domain Specifications
R1 = TuningGoal.Transient('r','y',tf(1,[1 1 1]),'impulse');
requires that the tuned response from
reference model
to
look like the impulse response of the
.
viewSpec(R1)
The input signal can be an impulse, a step, a ramp, or a more general signal modeled
as the impulse response of some input shaping filter. For example, a sine wave with
frequency
can be modeled as the impulse response of
.
w0 = 2;
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-187
6
Control System Tuning
F = tf(w0^2,[1 0 w0^2]); % input shaping filter
R2 = TuningGoal.Transient('r','y',tf(1,[1 1 1]),F);
viewSpec(R2)
LQG Design
Use the TuningGoal.LQG requirement to create a linear-quadratic-Gaussian objective
for tuning the control system parameters. This objective is applicable to any control
structure, not just the classical observer structure of LQG control. For example, consider
the simple PID loop of Figure 2 where and are unit-variance disturbance and noise
inputs, and
and
are lowpass and highpass filters that model the disturbance and
noise spectral contents.
6-188
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Time-Domain Specifications
Figure 2: Regulation loop.
To regulate
around zero, you can use the following LQG criterion:
The first term in the integral penalizes the deviation of
from zero, and the second
term penalizes the control effort. Using systune, you can tune the PID controller to
minimize the cost . To do this, use the LQG requirement
Qyu = diag([1 0.05]); % weighting of y^2 and u^2
R4 = TuningGoal.LQG({'d','n'},{'y','u'},1,Qyu);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-189
6
Control System Tuning
Frequency-Domain Specifications
This example gives a tour of available frequency-domain requirements for control system
tuning with systune or looptune.
Background
The systune and looptune commands tune the parameters of fixed-structure
control systems subject to a variety of time- and frequency-domain requirements. The
TuningGoal package is the repository for such design requirements.
Gain Limit
The TuningGoal.Gain requirement enforces gain limits on SISO or MIMO closed-loop
transfer functions. This requirement is useful to enforce adequate disturbance rejection
and roll off, limit sensitivity and control effort, and prevent saturation. For MIMO
transfer functions, "gain" refers to the largest singular value of the frequency response
matrix. The gain limit can be frequency dependent. For example
s = tf('s');
R1 = TuningGoal.Gain('d','y',s/(s+1)^2);
specifies that the gain from d to y should not exceed the magnitude of the transfer
function
.
viewSpec(R1)
6-190
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Frequency-Domain Specifications
It is often convenient to just sketch the asymptotes of the desired gain profile. For
example, instead of the transfer function
, we could just specify gain values of
0.01,1,0.01 at the frequencies 0.01,1,100, the point (1,1) being the breakpoint of the two
asymptotes
and
.
Asymptotes = frd([0.01,1,0.01],[0.01,1,100]);
R2 = TuningGoal.Gain('d','y',Asymptotes);
The requirement object automatically turns this discrete gain profile into a gain limit
defined at all frequencies.
bodemag(Asymptotes,R2.MaxGain)
legend('Specified','Interpolated')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-191
6
Control System Tuning
Variance Amplification
The TuningGoal.Variance requirement limits the noise variance amplification from
specified inputs to specified outputs. In technical terms, this requirement constrains
the
norm of a closed-loop transfer function. This requirement is preferable to
TuningGoal.Gain when the input signals are random processes and the average gain
matters more than the peak gain. For example,
R = TuningGoal.Variance('n','y',0.1);
limits the output variance of y to
for a unit-variance white-noise input n.
Reference Tracking and Overshoot Reduction
6-192
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Frequency-Domain Specifications
The TuningGoal.Tracking requirement enforces reference tracking and loop
decoupling objectives in the frequency domain. For example
R1 = TuningGoal.Tracking('r','y',2);
specifies that the output y should track the reference r with a two-second response time.
Similarly
R2 = TuningGoal.Tracking({'Vsp','wsp'},{'V','w'},2);
specifies that V should track Vsp and w should track wsp with minimum cross-coupling
between the two responses. Tracking requirements are converted into frequency-domain
constraints on the tracking error as a function of frequency. For the first requirement
R1, for example, the gain from r to the tracking error e = r-y should be small at low
frequency and approach 1 (100%) at frequencies greater than 1 rad/s (bandwidth for a
two-second response time). You can use viewSpec to visualize this frequency-domain
constraint. Note that the yellow region indicates where the requirement is violated.
viewSpec(R1)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-193
6
Control System Tuning
If the response has excessive overshoot, use the TuningGoal.Overshoot requirement
in conjunction with the TuningGoal.Tracking requirement. For example, you can limit
the overshoot from r to y to 10% using
R3 = TuningGoal.Overshoot('r','y',10);
Disturbance Rejection
In feedback loops such as the one shown in Figure 1, the open- and closed-loop responses
from disturbance to output are related by
6-194
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Frequency-Domain Specifications
where
gain of
is the loop transfer function measured at the disturbance entry point. The
is the disturbance attenuation factor, the ratio between the open- and
closed-loop sensitivities to the disturbance. Its reciprocal
at the disturbance input.
is the sensitivity
Figure 1: Sample feedback loop.
The TuningGoal.Rejection requirement specifies the disturbance attenuation as
a function of frequency. The attenuation factor is greater than one inside the control
bandwidth since feedback control reduces the impact of disturbances. As a rule of thumb,
a 10-times-larger attenuation requires a 10-times-larger loop gain. For example
R1 = TuningGoal.Rejection('u',10);
R1.Focus = [0 1];
specifies that a disturbance entering at the plant input "u" should be attenuated by a
factor 10 in the frequency band from 0 to 1 rad/s.
viewSpec(R1)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-195
6
Control System Tuning
More generally, you can specify a frequency-dependent attenuation profile, for example
s = tf('s');
R2 = TuningGoal.Rejection('u',(s+10)/(s+0.1));
specifies an attenuation factor of 100 below 0.1 rad/s gradually decreasing to 1 (no
attenuation) after 10 rad/s.
viewSpec(R2)
6-196
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Frequency-Domain Specifications
Instead of specifying the minimum attenuation, you can use the
TuningGoal.Sensitivity requirement to specify the maximum sensitivity, that is, the
maximum gain of
. For example,
R3 = TuningGoal.Sensitivity('u',(s+0.1)/(s+10));
is equivalent to the rejection requirement R2 above. The sensitivity increases from 0.01
(1%) below 0.1 rad/s to 1 (100%) above 10 rad/s.
viewSpec(R3)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-197
6
Control System Tuning
Frequency-Weighted Gain and Variance
The TuningGoal.WeightedGain and TuningGoal.WeightedVariance requirements
are generalizations of the TuningGoal.Gain and TuningGoal.Variance
requirements. These requirements constrain the
or
norm of a frequency-weighted
closed-loop transfer function
weighting functions. For example
, where
WL = blkdiag(1/(s+0.001),s/(0.001*s+1));
WR = [];
R = TuningGoal.WeightedGain('r',{'e','y'},WL,[]);
specifies the constraint
6-198
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
and
are user-defined
Frequency-Domain Specifications
Note that this is a normalized gain constraint (unit bound across frequency).
viewSpec(R)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-199
6
Control System Tuning
Loop Shape and Stability Margin Specifications
This example shows how to specify loop shapes and stability margins when tuning
control systems with systune or looptune.
Background
The systune and looptune commands tune the parameters of fixed-structure
control systems subject to a variety of time- and frequency-domain requirements. The
TuningGoal package is the repository for such design requirements.
Loop Shape
The TuningGoal.LoopShape requirement is used to shape the open-loop response
gain(s), a design approach known as loop shaping. For example,
s = tf('s');
R1 = TuningGoal.LoopShape('u',1/s);
specifies that the open-loop response measured at the location "u" should look like a
pure integrator (as far as its gain is concerned). In MATLAB, use an AnalysisPoint
block to mark the location "u", see the "Building Tunable Models" example for details. In
Simulink, use the addPoint method of the slTuner interface to mark "u" as a point of
interest.
As with other gain specifications, you can just specify the asymptotes of the desired
loop shape using a few frequency points. For example, to specify a loop shape with
gain crossover at 1 rad/s, -20 dB/decade slope before 1 rad/s, and -40 dB/decade slope
after 1 rad/s, just specify that the gain at the frequencies 0.1,1,10 should be 10,1,0.01,
respectively.
LS = frd([10,1,0.01],[0.1,1,10]);
R2 = TuningGoal.LoopShape('u',LS);
bodemag(LS,R2.LoopGain)
legend('Specified','Interpolated')
6-200
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Loop Shape and Stability Margin Specifications
Loop shape requirements are constraints on the open-loop response . For tuning
purposes, they are converted into closed-loop gain constraints on the sensitivity function
and complementary sensitivity function
visualize the target loop shape and corresponding gain bounds on
. Use viewSpec to
(green) and (red).
viewSpec(R2)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-201
6
Control System Tuning
Minimum and Maximum Loop Gain
Instead of TuningGoal.LoopShape, you can use TuningGoal.MinLoopGain and
TuningGoal.MaxLoopGain to specify minimum or maximum values for the loop gain in
a particular frequency band. This is useful when the actual loop shape near crossover is
best left to the tuning algorithm to figure out. For example, the following requirements
specify the minimum loop gain inside the bandwidth and the roll-off characteristics
outside the bandwidth, but do not specify the actual crossover frequency nor the loop
shape near crossover.
MinLG = TuningGoal.MinLoopGain('u',5/s);
MinLG.Focus = [0 0.2];
6-202
% integral action
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Loop Shape and Stability Margin Specifications
MaxLG = TuningGoal.MaxLoopGain('u',1/s^2);
MaxLG.Focus = [1 Inf];
% -40dB/decade roll off
viewSpec([MinLG MaxLG])
The TuningGoal.MaxLoopGain requirement rests on the fact that the open- and closedloop gains are comparable when the loop gain is small (
). As a result, it can be
ineffective at keeping the loop gain below some value close to 1. For example, suppose
that flexible modes cause gain spikes beyond the crossover frequency and that you need
to keep these spikes below 0.5 (-6 dB). Instead of using TuningGoal.MaxLoopGain, you
can directly constrain the gain of using TuningGoal.Gain with a loop opening at "u".
MaxLG = TuningGoal.Gain('u','u',0.5);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-203
6
Control System Tuning
MaxLG.Opening = 'u';
If the open-loop response is unstable, make sure to further disable the implicit stability
constraint associated with this requirement.
MaxLG.Stabilize = false;
Figure 1 shows this requirement evaluated for an open-loop response with flexible modes.
Figure 1: Gain constraint on L.
Stability Margins
The TuningGoal.Margins requirement enforces minimum amounts of gain and phase
margins at the specified loop opening site(s). For MIMO feedback loops, this requirement
uses the notion of disk margins, which guarantee stability for concurrent gain and phase
variations of the specified amount in all feedback channels (see loopmargin for details).
For example,
R = TuningGoal.Margins('u',6,45);
6-204
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Loop Shape and Stability Margin Specifications
enforces
dB of gain margin and 45 degrees of phase margin at the location "u". In
MATLAB, use a AnalysisPoint block to mark the location "u", see the "Building
Tunable Models" example for details. In Simulink, use the addPoint method of the
slTuner interface to mark "u" as a point of interest. Stability margins are typically
measured at the plant inputs or plant outputs or both.
The target gain and phase margin values are converted into a normalized gain constraint
on some appropriate closed-loop transfer function. The desired margins are achieved at
frequencies where the gain is less than 1.
viewSpec(R)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-205
6
Control System Tuning
System Dynamics Specifications
This example shows how to constrain the poles of a control system tuned with systune
or looptune.
Background
The systune and looptune commands tune the parameters of fixed-structure
control systems subject to a variety of time- and frequency-domain requirements. The
TuningGoal package is the repository for such design requirements.
Closed-Loop Poles
The TuningGoal.Poles goal constrains the location of the closed-loop poles. You can
enforce some minimum decay rate
impose some minimum damping ratio
or constrain the pole magnitude to
For example
MinDecay = 0.5;
MinDamping = 0.7;
MaxFrequency = 10;
R = TuningGoal.Poles(MinDecay,MinDamping,MaxFrequency);
constrains the closed-loop poles to lie in the white region below.
viewSpec(R)
6-206
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
System Dynamics Specifications
Increasing the MinDecay value results in faster transients. Increasing the MinDamping
value results in better damped transients. Decreasing the MaxFrequency value prevents
fast dynamics.
Controller Poles
The TuningGoal.ControllerPoles goal constrains the pole locations for
tuned elements such as filters and compensators. The tuning algorithm may
produce unstable compensators for unstable plants. To prevent this, use the
TuningGoal.ControllerPoles goal to keep the compensator poles in the left-half
plane. For example, if your compensator is parameterized as a second-order transfer
function,
C = ltiblock.tf('C',1,2);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-207
6
Control System Tuning
you can force it to have stable dynamics by adding the requirement
MinDecay = 0;
R = TuningGoal.ControllerPoles('C',MinDecay);
6-208
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Interpreting Stability Margins in Control System Tuning
Interpreting Stability Margins in Control System Tuning
In this section...
“Stability Margins Plot” on page 6-209
“Gain and Phase Margins” on page 6-210
“Combined Gain and Phase Variations” on page 6-211
“Interpreting the Gain and Phase Margin Plot” on page 6-212
“Algorithm” on page 6-214
Stability Margins Plot
This topic explains how to interpret a stability-margin plot for control system tuning,
such as the following plot.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-209
6
Control System Tuning
. You obtain this plot in one of the following ways:
• Tuning in Control System Tuner using a “Margins Goal” on page 6-140 or “Quick Loop
Tuning” on page 6-62.
• Tuning at the command line using systune with TuningGoal.Margins. If S is the
control system model or slTuner interface, and Req is a TuningGoal.Margins goal,
obtain the stability-margin plot by entering:
viewSpec(S,Req)
Gain and Phase Margins
For SISO systems, the gain and phase margins at a frequency ω indicate how much
the gain or phase of the open-loop response L(jω) can change without loss of stability.
6-210
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Interpreting Stability Margins in Control System Tuning
For example, a gain margin of 5dB at 2 rad/s indicates that closed-loop stability is
maintained when the loop gain increases or decreases by as much as 5dB at this
frequency. Gain and phase margins typically vary across frequencies.
For MIMO systems, gain and phase margins are interpreted as follows:
• Gain margin: Stability is preserved when the gain increases or decreases by up to the
gain margin value in each channel of the feedback loop.
• Phase margin: Stability is preserved when the phase increases or decreases by up to
the phase margin value in each channel of the feedback loop.
In MIMO systems, the gain or phase can change in all channels at once, and by a
different amount in each channel. The Margins Goal and TuningGoal.Margins rely on
the notion of disk margin for MIMO systems. (See “Algorithm” on page 6-214.) Like
SISO stability margins, gain and phase margins in MIMO systems typically vary across
frequency.
Combined Gain and Phase Variations
To assess robustness to changes in both gain and phase, use the following chart.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-211
6
Control System Tuning
For example, if the gain margin plot in Control System Tuner indicates a 10 dB margin
at a particular frequency, then trace the contour starting at (Gain,Phase) = (10,0)
to see how a given amount of phase variation reduces the allowable gain variation at that
frequency. For example, if the phase can vary by 30 degrees than the gain can only vary
by about 8.4 dB (red mark).
Interpreting the Gain and Phase Margin Plot
The stability-margin plot for Margins Goal or TuningGoal.Margins shows in shaded
yellow the region where the target margins are not met. The plot displays the current
gain and phase margins (computed using the current values of the tunable parameters in
the control system) as a blue trace.
6-212
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Interpreting Stability Margins in Control System Tuning
These gain and phase margin curves are obtained using an exact calculation involving
μ-analysis. For computational efficiency, however, the tuning algorithm uses an
approximate calculation that can yield smaller margins in parts of the frequency range.
To see the lower bound used by the tuner, right-click on the plot, and select Systems >
Tuned Lower Bound.
If there is a significant gap between the true margins and the tuner approximation,
try increasing the D-scaling order. The default order is zero (static scaling). For
tuning in Control System Tuner, set the D-scaling order in the Margins Goal dialog
box. For command-line tuning, set this value using the ScalingOrder property of
TuningGoal.Margins.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-213
6
Control System Tuning
Algorithm
The gain and phase margin values are both derived from the disk margin (see
loopmargin). The disk margin measures the radius of a circular exclusion region
centered near the critical point. This radius is a decreasing function of the scaled norm:
min
D diagonal
D -1 ( I - L ( jw ) ) ( I + L ( jw ) )
-1
D .
2
Unlike the traditional gain and phase margins, the disk margins and associated gain and
phase margins guarantee that the open-loop response L(jω) stays at a safe distance from
the critical point at all frequencies.
See Also
TuningGoal.Margins | loopmargin
More About
•
6-214
“Margins Goal” on page 6-140
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tune Control System at the Command Line
Tune Control System at the Command Line
After specifying your tuning goals using TuningGoal objects (see “Tuning Goals”), use
systune to tune the parameters of your model.
The systune command lets you designate one or more design goals as hard goals. This
designation gives you a way to differentiate must-have goals from nice-to-have tuning
goals.systune attempts to satisfy hard requirements by driving their associated cost
functions below 1. Subject to that constraint, the software comes as close as possible to
satisfying remaining (soft) requirements. For best results, make sure you can obtain a
reasonable design with all goals treated as soft goals before attempting to enforce any
goal as a hard constraint.
Organize your TuningGoal objects into a vector of soft requirements and a vector of hard
requirements. For example, suppose you have created a tracking requirement, a rejection
requirement, and stability margin requirements at the plant inputs and outputs. The
following commands tune the control system represented by T0, treating the stability
margins as hard goals, the tracking and rejection requirements as soft goals. (T0 is either
a genss model or an slTuner interface previously configured for tuning.)
SoftReqs = [Rtrack,Rreject];
HardReqs = [RmargIn,RmargOut];
[T,fSoft,gHard] = systune(T0,SoftReqs,HardReqs);
systune converts each tuning requirement into a normalized scalar value, f for the soft
constraints and g for the hard constraints. The command adjusts the tunable parameters
of T0 to minimize the f values, subject to the constraint that each g < 1. systune returns
the vectors fSoft and gHard that contain the final normalized values for each tuning
goal in SoftReqs and HardReqs.
Use systuneOptions to configure additional options for the systune algorithm, such
as the number of independent optimization runs, convergence tolerance, and output
display options.
See Also
systune | systune | systuneOptions
More About
•
“Interpreting Tuning Results” on page 6-161
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-215
6
Control System Tuning
Tune Controller Against Set of Plant Models
systune can simultaneously tune the parameters of multiple models or control
configurations. For example you can:
• Tune a single controller against a range of plant models, to help ensure that the tuned
control system is robust against parameter variations
• Tune for reliable control by simultaneously to multiple plant configurations that
represent different failure modes of a system
In either case, systune finds values for tunable parameters that best satisfy the
specified tuning objectives for all models.
To tune a controller parameters against a set of plant models:
1
Create an array of genss models that represent the control systems or
configurations to tune against.
2
Specify your tuning objectives using TuningGoal requirements objects such as
TuningGoal.Tracking, TuningGoal.Gain, or TuningGoal.Margins. If you
want to limit a tuning requirement to a subset of the models in the model array, set
the Models property of the TuningGoal requirement.
For example, suppose you have a model array whose first entry represents
your control system under normal operating conditions, and whose second
entry represents the system in a failure mode. Suppose further that Req is a
TuningGoal.Tracking requirement that only applies to the normally operating
system. To enforce the requirement only on the first entry, use the following
command:
Req.Models = [1];
3
Provide the model array and tuning requirements as input argument to systune.
systune jointly tunes the tunable parameters for all models in the array to best meet
the tuning requirements as you specify them. systune returns an array containing the
corresponding tuned models. You can use getBlockValue or showTunable to access the
tuned values of the control elements.
6-216
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Speed Up Tuning with Parallel Computing Toolbox Software
Speed Up Tuning with Parallel Computing Toolbox Software
This example shows how to speed up the tuning of fixed-structure control systems if
you have the Parallel Computing Toolbox software installed. When you run multiple
randomized optimization starts, parallel computing speeds up tuning by distributing the
optimization runs among workers.
To distribute randomized optimization runs among workers:
If Automatically create a parallel pool is not selected in your “Parallel Computing
Toolbox preferences”, manually start a parallel pool using parpool. For example:
parpool;
If Automatically create a parallel pool is selected in your preferences, you do not
need to manually start a pool.
Create a systuneOptions, looptuneOptions, or hinfstructOptions set that
specifies multiple random starts. For example, the following options set specifies 20
random restarts to run in parallel for tuning with looptune:
options = systuneOptions('RandomStart',20,'UseParallel',true);
Setting UseParallel to true enables parallel processing by distributing the
randomized starts among available workers in the parallel pool.
Use the options set when you call systune, looptune or hinfstruct. For example, if
you have already created a tunable control system model, CL0, and tunable controller,
and tuning requirement vectors SoftReqs and HardReqs, the following command uses
parallel computing to tune the control system of CL0 with systune.
[CL,fSoft,gHard,info] = systune(CL0,SoftReq,Hardreq,options);
To learn more about configuring a parallel pool, see the Parallel Computing Toolbox
documentation.
See Also
parpool
Related Examples
•
“Using Parallel Computing to Accelerate Tuning” on page 6-258
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-217
6
Control System Tuning
More About
•
6-218
“Parallel Preferences”
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Validate Tuned Control System at the Command Line
Validate Tuned Control System at the Command Line
In this section...
“Extract and Plot System Responses” on page 6-219
“View Tuning Goals” on page 6-219
“Write Tuned Parameters to Simulink Model” on page 6-220
“Improve Tuning Results” on page 6-220
To validate your tuned control system, use the following tools and techniques.
Extract and Plot System Responses
Evaluate the performance of your tuned control system by extracting and plotting system
responses. For instance, evaluate reference tracking or overshoot performance by plotting
the step response of transfer function from the reference input to the controlled output.
Or, evaluate stability margins by extracting an open-loop transfer function and using the
margin command. You can extract any transfer function you need for analysis from the
tuned model of your control system.
• To extract responses from a tuned generalized state-space (genss) model, use
analysis functions such as getIOTransfer, getLoopTransfer, getSensitivity,
andgetCompSensitivity.
• For a Simulink tuned through an slTuner interface, extract responses from the
interface using analysis functions such as getIOTransfer, getLoopTransfer,
getSensitivity, andgetCompSensitivity.
In either case, the extracted responses are represented by state-space (ss) models. You
can analyze these models using commands such as step, bode, sigma, or margin.
View Tuning Goals
Visualize your tuning goals using the viewSpec command. For each type of tuning
goal, viewSpec plots the target requirement and the achieved response of your tuned
system. This visualization allows you to examine how far your control system is from
ideal performance. It can also help you determine where you can achieve better tuning
results by limiting the frequency range of a tuning goal, relaxing a tuning goal from hard
to soft, increasing the tolerance of a tuning goal, or similar adjustments.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-219
6
Control System Tuning
For example, suppose you have tuned your control system with a tracking requirement
Rtrack and a rejection requirement Rreject. The following commands display plots
that let you evaluate how closely the tuned system meets those requirements. (T is the
tuned output of systune, either a genss model or an slTuner interface.)
viewSpec(Rtrack,T)
viewSpec(Rreject,T)
Write Tuned Parameters to Simulink Model
When you tune a Simulink model, the software evaluates tuning goals for a linearization
of the model stored in the slTuner interface. Therefore, you must validate the tuned
controllers by simulating the full nonlinear model, even if the tuned linear system meets
all your tuning goals.
To write tuned block values from a tuned slTuner interface to the corresponding
Simulink model, use the writeBlockValue command. For example, suppose SLT is a
tuned slTuner interface returned by systune. The following command writes the tuned
parameters from SLT to the associated Simulink model.
writeBlockValue(SLT)
Simulate the Simulink model to evaluate the tuned system performance.
Improve Tuning Results
If systune does not find a set of controller parameters that meet your design
requirements, make adjustments to your set of tuning goals to improve the results. For
example:
• Designate tuning goals that are must-have requirements as hard goals. Or, relax
tuning goals that are not absolute requirements by designating them as soft goals.
• Limit the frequency range in which frequency-domain goals are enforced. Use the
Focus property of the TuningGoal object to do this.
• Increase the tolerance of tuning goals for which a tolerance is applicable.
Related Examples
•
6-220
“Extract Responses from Tuned MATLAB Model at the Command Line” on page
6-221
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Extract Responses from Tuned MATLAB Model at the Command Line
Extract Responses from Tuned MATLAB Model at the Command
Line
This example shows how to analyze responses of a tuned control system by using
getIOTransfer to compute responses between various inputs and outputs of a closedloop model of the system.
Consider the following control system.
r
+
C1
-
+
C2
d2
d1
G2
G1
y
-
X2
X1
Suppose you have used systune to tune a genss model of this control system. The result
is a genss model, T, which contains tunable blocks representing the controller elements
C1 and C2. The tuned model also contains AnalysisPoint blocks that represent the
analysis-point locations, X1 and X2.
Analyze the tuned system performance by examining various system responses extracted
from T. For example, examine the response at the output, y, to a disturbance injected at
the point d1.
H1 = getIOTransfer(T,'X1','y');
H1 represents the closed-loop response of the control system to a disturbance injected at
the implicit input associated with the AnalysisPoint block X1, which is the location of
d1:
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-221
6
Control System Tuning
H1 is a genss model that includes the tunable blocks of T. H1 allows you to validate the
disturbance response of your tuned system. For example, you can use analysis commands
such as bodeplot or stepplot to analyze H1. You can also use getValue to obtain
the current value of H1, in which all the tunable blocks are evaluated to their current
numeric values.
Similarly, examine the response at the output to a disturbance injected at the point d2.
H2 = getIOTransfer(T,'X2','y');
You can also generate a two-input, one-output model representing the response of
the control system to simultaneous disturbances at both d1 and d2. To do so, provide
getIOTransfer with a cell array that specifies the multiple input locations.
H = getIOTransfer(T,{'X1','X2'},'y');
6-222
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with SYSTUNE
Tuning Control Systems with SYSTUNE
The systune command can jointly tune the gains of your control system regardless of its
architecture and number of feedback loops. This example outlines the systune workflow
on a simple application.
Head-Disk Assembly Control
This example uses a 9th-order model of the head-disk assembly (HDA) in a hard-disk
drive. This model captures the first few flexible modes in the HDA.
load rctExamples G
bode(G), grid
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-223
6
Control System Tuning
We use the feedback loop shown below to position the head on the correct track. This
control structure consists of a PI controller and a low-pass filter in the return path.
The head position y should track a step change r with a response time of about one
millisecond, little or no overshoot, and no steady-state error.
Figure 1: Control Structure
You can use systune to directly tune the PI gains and filter coefficient
variety of time- and frequency-domain requirements.
subject to a
Specifying the Tunable Elements
There are two tunable elements in the control structure of Figure 1: the PI controller
and the low-pass filter
You can use the ltiblock.pid class to parameterize the PI block:
C0 = ltiblock.pid('C','pi');
% tunable PI
To parameterize the lowpass filter
, create a tunable real parameter
a first-order transfer function with numerator and denominator
:
6-224
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
and construct
Tuning Control Systems with SYSTUNE
a = realp('a',1);
F0 = tf(a,[1 a]);
% filter coefficient
% filter parameterized by a
See the "Building Tunable Models" example for an overview of available tunable
elements.
Building a Tunable Closed-Loop Model
Next build a closed-loop model of the feedback loop in Figure 1. To facilitate open-loop
analysis and specify open-loop requirements such as desired stability margins, add an
analysis point at the plant input u:
AP = AnalysisPoint('u');
Figure 2: Analysis Point Block
Use feedback to build a model of the closed-loop transfer from reference r to head
position y:
T0 = feedback(G*AP*C0,F0);
T0.InputName = 'r';
T0.OutputName = 'y';
% closed-loop transfer from r to y
The result T0 is a generalized state-space model (genss) that depends on the tunable
elements and .
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-225
6
Control System Tuning
Specifying the Design Requirements
The TuningGoal package contains a variety of control design requirements for
specifying the desired behavior of the control system. These include requirements on the
response time, deterministic and stochastic gains, loop shape, stability margins, and pole
locations. Here we use two requirements to capture the control objectives:
• Tracking requirement : The position y should track the reference r with a 1
millisecond response time
• Stability margin requirement : The feedback loop should have 6dB of gain margin
and 45 degrees of phase margin
Use the TuningGoal.Tracking and TuningGoal.Margins objects to capture these
requirements. Note that the margins requirement applies to the open-loop response
measured at the plant input u (location marked by the analysis point AP).
Req1 = TuningGoal.Tracking('r','y',0.001);
Req2 = TuningGoal.Margins('u',6,45);
Tuning the Controller Parameters
You can now use systune to tune the PI gain and filter coefficient . This function
takes the tunable closed-loop model T0 and the requirements Req1,Req2. Use a few
randomized starting points to improve the chances of getting a globally optimal design.
rng('default')
Options = systuneOptions('RandomStart',3);
[T,fSoft,~,Info] = systune(T0,[Req1,Req2],Options);
Final: Soft = 2.61, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 120
Final: Soft = 1.35, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 155
Final: Soft = 2.78e+03, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 187
Some closed-loop poles are marginally stable (decay rate near 1e-07)
Final: Soft = 1.35, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 59
All requirements are normalized so a requirement is satisfied when its value is less
than 1. Here the final value is slightly greater than 1, indicating that the requirements
are nearly satisfied. Use the output fSoft to see the tuned value of each requirement.
Here we see that the first requirement (tracking) is slightly violated while the second
requirement (margins) is satisfied.
fSoft
6-226
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with SYSTUNE
fSoft =
1.3461
0.6326
The first output T of systune is the "tuned" closed-loop model. Use showTunable or
getBlockValue to access the tuned values of the PI gains and filter coefficient:
getBlockValue(T,'C')
% tuned value of PI controller
ans =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.00104, Ki = 0.0122
Name: C
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
showTunable(T)
% tuned values of all tunable elements
C =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.00104, Ki = 0.0122
Name: C
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------a = 3.19e+03
Validating Results
First use viewSpec to inspect how the tuned system does against each requirement.
The first plot shows the tracking error as a function of frequency, and the second plot
shows the normalized disk margins as a function of frequency (see loopmargin). See the
"Creating Design Requirements" example for details.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-227
6
Control System Tuning
clf, viewSpec([Req1 Req2],T,Info)
Next plot the closed-loop step response from reference r to head position y. The response
has no overshoot but wobbles a little.
clf, step(T)
6-228
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with SYSTUNE
To investigate further, use getLoopTransfer to get the open-loop response at the plant
input.
L = getLoopTransfer(T,'u');
bode(L,{1e3,1e6}), grid
title('Open-loop response')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-229
6
Control System Tuning
The wobble is due to the first resonance after the gain crossover. To eliminate it, you
could add a notch filter to the feedback loop and tune its coefficients along with the
lowpass coefficient and PI gains using systune.
6-230
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems in Simulink
Tuning Control Systems in Simulink
This example shows how to use systune or looptune to automatically tune control
systems modeled in Simulink.
Engine Speed Control
For this example we use the following model of an engine speed control system:
open_system('rct_engine_speed')
The control system consists of a single PID loop and the PID controller gains must be
tuned to adequately respond to step changes in the desired speed. Specifically, we want
the response to settle in less than 5 seconds with little or no overshoot. While pidtune is
a faster alternative for tuning a single PID controller, this simple example is well suited
for an introduction to the systune and looptune workflows in Simulink.
Controller Tuning with SYSTUNE
The slTuner interface provides a convenient gateway to systune for control systems
modeled in Simulink. This interface lets you specify which blocks in the Simulink model
are tunable and what signals are of interest for open- or closed-loop validation. Create
an slTuner instance for the rct_engine_speed model and list the "PID Controller"
block (highlighted in orange) as tunable. Note that all Linear Analysis points in the
model (signals "Ref" and "Speed" here) are automatically available as points of interest
for tuning.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_engine_speed','PID Controller');
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-231
6
Control System Tuning
The PID block is initialized with its value in the Simulink model, which you can access
using getBlockValue. Note that the proportional and derivative gains are initialized to
zero.
getBlockValue(ST0,'PID Controller')
ans =
1
Ki * --s
with Ki = 0.01
Name: PID_Controller
Continuous-time I-only controller.
Next create a reference tracking requirement to capture the target settling time. Use the
signal names in the Simulink model to refer to the reference and output signals, and use
a two-second response time target to ensure settling in less than 5 seconds.
TrackReq = TuningGoal.Tracking('Ref','Speed',2);
You can now tune the control system ST0 subject to the requirement TrackReq.
ST1 = systune(ST0,TrackReq);
Final: Soft = 1.07, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 118
The final value is close to 1 indicating that the tracking requirement is met. systune
returns a "tuned" version ST1 of the control system described by ST0. Again use
getBlockValue to access the tuned values of the PID gains:
getBlockValue(ST1,'PID Controller')
ans =
1
s
Kp + Ki * --- + Kd * -------s
Tf*s+1
6-232
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems in Simulink
with Kp = 0.00188, Ki = 0.00333, Kd = 0.000469, Tf = 9.72e-05
Name: PID_Controller
Continuous-time PIDF controller in parallel form.
To simulate the closed-loop response to a step command in speed, get the initial and
tuned transfer functions from speed command "Ref" to "Speed" output and plot their step
responses:
T0 = getIOTransfer(ST0,'Ref','Speed');
T1 = getIOTransfer(ST1,'Ref','Speed');
step(T0,T1)
legend('Initial','Tuned')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-233
6
Control System Tuning
Controller Tuning with LOOPTUNE
You can also use looptune to tune control systems modeled in Simulink. The looptune
workflow is very similar to the systune workflow. One difference is that looptune
needs to know the boundary between the plant and controller, which is specified in terms
of controls and measurements signals. For a single loop the performance is essentially
captured by the response time, or equivalently by the open-loop crossover frequency.
Based on first-order characteristics the crossover frequency should exceed 1 rad/s for the
closed-loop response to settle in less than 5 seconds. You can therefore tune the PID loop
using 1 rad/s as target 0-dB crossover frequency.
% Mark the signal "u" as a point of interest
addPoint(ST0,'u')
% Tune the controller parameters
Control = 'u';
Measurement = 'Speed';
wc = 1;
ST1 = looptune(ST0,Control,Measurement,wc);
Final: Peak gain = 0.961, Iterations = 10
Achieved target gain value TargetGain=1.
Again the final value is close to 1, indicating that the target control bandwidth was
achieved. As with systune, use getIOTransfer to compute and plot the closed-loop
response from speed command to actual speed. The result is very similar to that obtained
with systune.
T0 = getIOTransfer(ST0,'Ref','Speed');
T1 = getIOTransfer(ST1,'Ref','Speed');
step(T0,T1)
legend('Initial','Tuned')
6-234
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems in Simulink
You can also perform open-loop analysis, for example, compute the gain and phase
margins at the plant input u.
% Note: -1 because |margin| expects the negative-feedback loop transfer
L = getLoopTransfer(ST1,'u',-1);
margin(L), grid
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-235
6
Control System Tuning
Validation in Simulink
Once you are satisfied with the systune or looptune results, you can upload the tuned
controller parameters to Simulink for further validation with the nonlinear model.
writeBlockValue(ST1)
You can now simulate the engine response with the tuned PID controller.
6-236
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems in Simulink
The nonlinear simulation results closely match the linear responses obtained in
MATLAB.
Comparison of PI and PID Controllers
Closer inspection of the tuned PID gains suggests that the derivative term contributes
little because of the large value of the Tf coefficient.
showTunable(ST1)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-237
6
Control System Tuning
Block 1: rct_engine_speed/PID Controller =
1
s
Kp + Ki * --- + Kd * -------s
Tf*s+1
with Kp = 0.000653, Ki = 0.00282, Kd = 0.0021, Tf = 46.7
Name: PID_Controller
Continuous-time PIDF controller in parallel form.
This suggests using a simpler PI controller instead. To do this, you need to override the
default parameterization for the "PID Controller" block:
setBlockParam(ST0,'PID Controller',ltiblock.pid('C','pi'))
This specifies that the "PID Controller" block should now be parameterized as a mere PI
controller. Next re-tune the control system for this simpler controller:
ST2 = looptune(ST0,Control,Measurement,wc);
Final: Peak gain = 0.915, Iterations = 5
Achieved target gain value TargetGain=1.
Again the final value is less than one indicating success. Compare the closed-loop
response with the previous ones:
T2 = getIOTransfer(ST2,'Ref','Speed');
step(T0,T1,T2,'r--')
legend('Initial','PID','PI')
6-238
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems in Simulink
Clearly a PI controller is sufficient for this application.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-239
6
Control System Tuning
Building Tunable Models
This example shows how to create tunable models of control systems for use with
systune or looptune.
Background
You can tune the gains and parameters of your control system with systune or
looptune. To use these commands, you need to construct a tunable model of the
control system that identifies and parameterizes its tunable elements. This is done by
combining numeric LTI models of the fixed elements with parametric models of the
tunable elements.
Using Pre-Defined Tunable Elements
You can use one of the following "parametric" blocks to model commonly encountered
tunable elements:
• ltiblock.gain: Tunable gain
• ltiblock.pid: Tunable PID controller
• ltiblock.pid2: Tunable two-degree-of-freedom PID controller
• ltiblock.tf: Tunable transfer function
• ltiblock.ss: Tunable state-space model.
For example, create a tunable model of the feedforward/feedback configuration of Figure
1 where is a tunable PID controller and is a tunable first-order transfer function.
6-240
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Building Tunable Models
Figure 1: Control System with Feedforward and Feedback Paths
First model each block in the block diagram, using suitable parametric blocks for
.
G = tf(1,[1 1]);
C = ltiblock.pid('C','pid');
F = ltiblock.tf('F',0,1);
and
% tunable PID block
% tunable first-order transfer function
Then use connect to build a model of the overall block diagram. To specify how the
blocks are connected, label the inputs and outputs of each block and model the summing
junctions using sumblk.
G.u = 'u';
C.u = 'e';
F.u = 'r';
G.y = 'y';
C.y = 'uC';
F.y = 'uF';
% Summing junctions
S1 = sumblk('e = r-y');
S2 = sumblk('u = uF + uC');
T = connect(G,C,F,S1,S2,'r','y')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-241
6
Control System Tuning
T =
Generalized continuous-time state-space model with 1 outputs, 1 inputs, 3 states, and
C: Parametric PID controller, 1 occurrences.
F: Parametric SISO transfer function, 0 zeros, 1 poles, 1 occurrences.
Type "ss(T)" to see the current value, "get(T)" to see all properties, and "T.Blocks" t
This creates a generalized state-space model T of the closed-loop transfer function from
r to y. This model depends on the tunable blocks C and F. You can use systune to
automatically tune the PID gains and the feedforward coefficients a,b subject to your
performance requirements. Use showTunable to see the current value of the tunable
blocks.
showTunable(T)
C =
1
Ki * --s
with Ki = 0.001
Name: C
Continuous-time I-only controller.
----------------------------------F =
10
-----s + 10
Name: F
Continuous-time transfer function.
Interacting with the Tunable Parameters
You can adjust the parameterization of the tunable elements and
with the objects C and F. Use get to see their list of properties.
get(C)
6-242
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
by interacting
Building Tunable Models
Kp:
Ki:
Kd:
Tf:
IFormula:
DFormula:
Ts:
TimeUnit:
InputName:
InputUnit:
InputGroup:
OutputName:
OutputUnit:
OutputGroup:
Name:
Notes:
UserData:
[1x1 param.Continuous]
[1x1 param.Continuous]
[1x1 param.Continuous]
[1x1 param.Continuous]
''
''
0
'seconds'
{'e'}
{''}
[1x1 struct]
{'uC'}
{''}
[1x1 struct]
'C'
{}
[]
A PID controller has four tunable parameters Kp,Ki,Kd,Tf. The tunable block C
contains a description of each of these parameters. Parameter attributes include current
value, minimum and maximum values, and whether the parameter is free or fixed.
C.Kp
ans =
Name:
Value:
Minimum:
Maximum:
Free:
Scale:
Info:
'Kp'
0
-Inf
Inf
1
1
[1x1 struct]
1x1 param.Continuous
Set the corresponding attributes to override defaults. For example, you can fix the time
constant Tf to the value 0.1 by
C.Tf.Value = 0.1;
C.Tf.Free = false;
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-243
6
Control System Tuning
Creating Custom Tunable Elements
For tunable elements not covered by the pre-defined blocks listed above, you can create
your own parameterization in terms of elementary real parameters (realp). Consider
the low-pass filter
where the coefficient is tunable. To model this tunable element, create a real parameter
and define as a transfer function whose numerator and denominator are functions of
. This creates a generalized state-space model F of the low-pass filter parameterized by
the tunable scalar a.
a = realp('a',1);
F = tf(a,[1 a])
% real tunable parameter, initial value 1
F =
Generalized continuous-time state-space model with 1 outputs, 1 inputs, 1 states, and
a: Scalar parameter, 2 occurrences.
Type "ss(F)" to see the current value, "get(F)" to see all properties, and "F.Blocks" t
Similarly, you can use real parameters to model the notch filter
with tunable coefficients
.
wn = realp('wn',100);
zeta1.Maximum = 1;
zeta1 = realp('zeta1',1);
zeta2 = realp('zeta2',1);
zeta2.Maximum = 1;
N = tf([1 2*zeta1*wn wn^2],[1 2*zeta2*wn wn^2]);
% zeta1 <= 1
% zeta2 <= 1
% tunable notch filter
You can also create tunable elements with matrix-valued parameters. For example,
model the observer-based controller
6-244
with equations
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Building Tunable Models
and tunable gain matrices
and .
% Plant with 6 states, 2 controls, 3 measurements
[A,B,C] = ssdata(rss(6,3,2));
K = realp('K',zeros(2,6));
L = realp('L',zeros(6,3));
C = ss(A-B*K-L*C,L,-K,0)
C =
Generalized continuous-time state-space model with 2 outputs, 3 inputs, 6 states, and
K: Parametric 2x6 matrix, 2 occurrences.
L: Parametric 6x3 matrix, 2 occurrences.
Type "ss(C)" to see the current value, "get(C)" to see all properties, and "C.Blocks" t
Enabling Open-Loop Requirements
The systune command takes a closed-loop model of the overall control system, like
the tunable model T built at the beginning of this example. Such models do not readily
support open-loop analysis or open-loop specifications such as loop shapes and stability
margins. To gain access to open-loop responses, insert an AnalysisPoint block as
shown in Figure 2.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-245
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 2: Analysis Point Block
The AnalysisPoint block can be used to mark internal signals of interest as well
as locations where to open feedback loops and measure open-loop responses. This
block evaluates to a unit gain and has no impact on the model responses. For example,
construct a closed-loop model T of the feedback loop of Figure 2 where is a tunable PID.
G = tf(1,[1 1]);
C = ltiblock.pid('C','pid');
AP = AnalysisPoint('X');
T = feedback(G*C,AP);
You can now use getLoopTransfer to compute the (negative-feedback) loop transfer
function measured at the location "X". Note that this loop transfer function is
for
the feedback loop of Figure 2.
L = getLoopTransfer(T,'X',-1);
clf, bode(L,'b',G*C,'r--')
6-246
% loop transfer at "X"
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Building Tunable Models
You can also refer to the location "X" when specifying target loop shapes or stability
margins for systune. The requirement then applies to the loop transfer measured at this
location.
% Target loop shape for loop transfer at "X"
Req1 = TuningGoal.LoopShape('X',tf(5,[1 0]));
% Target stability margins for loop transfer at "X"
Req2 = TuningGoal.Margins('X',6,40);
In general, loop opening locations are specified in the Location property of
AnalysisPoint blocks. For single-channel analysis points, the block name is used as
default location name. For multi-channel analysis points, indices are appended to the
block name to form the default location names.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-247
6
Control System Tuning
AP = AnalysisPoint('Y',2);
AP.Location
% two-channel analysis point
ans =
'Y(1)'
'Y(2)'
You can override the default location names and use more descriptive names by
modifying the Location property.
% Rename loop opening locations to "InnerLoop" and "OuterLoop".
AP.Location = {'InnerLoop' ; 'OuterLoop'};
AP.Location
ans =
'InnerLoop'
'OuterLoop'
6-248
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Validating Results
Validating Results
This example shows how to interpret and validate tuning results from systune.
Background
You can tune the parameters of your control system with systune or looptune.
The design specifications are captured using TuningGoal requirement objects. This
example shows how to interpret the results from systune, graphically verify the design
requirements, and perform additional open- and closed-loop analysis.
Controller Tuning with SYSTUNE
We use an autopilot tuning application as illustration, see the "Tuning of a Two-Loop
Autopilot" example for details. The tuned compensator is the "MIMO Controller" block
highlighted in orange in the model below.
open_system('rct_airframe2')
The setup and tuning steps are repeated below for completeness.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_airframe2','MIMO Controller');
% Compensator parameterization
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-249
6
Control System Tuning
C0 = ltiblock.ss('C',2,1,2);
C0.d.Value(1) = 0; C0.d.Free(1) = false;
setBlockParam(ST0,'MIMO Controller',C0)
% Requirements
Req1 = TuningGoal.Tracking('az ref','az',1);
% tracking
Req2 = TuningGoal.Gain('delta fin','delta fin',tf(25,[1 0])); % roll-off
% margins
Req3 = TuningGoal.Margins('delta fin',7,45);
MaxGain = frd([2 200 200],[0.02 2 200]);
Req4 = TuningGoal.Gain('delta fin','az',MaxGain); % disturbance rejection
% Tuning
Opt = systuneOptions('RandomStart',3);
rng('default')
[ST1,fSoft,~,Info] = systune(ST0,[Req1,Req2,Req3,Req4],Opt);
Final:
Final:
Final:
Final:
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
=
=
=
=
1.5, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 60
1.49, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 95
1.15, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 64
1.15, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 87
Interpreting Results
systune run three optimizations from three different starting points and returned
the best overall result. The first output ST is an slTuner interface representing the
tuned control system. The second output fSoft contains the final values of the four
requirements for the best design.
fSoft
fSoft =
1.1477
1.1477
0.5458
1.1477
Requirements are normalized so a requirement is satisfied if and only if its value is
less than 1. Inspection of fSoft reveals that Requirements 1,2,4 are active and slightly
violated while Requirement 3 (stability margins) is satisfied.
Verifying Requirements
Use viewSpec to graphically inspect each requirement. This is useful to understand
whether small violations are acceptable or what causes large violations. Make sure to
6-250
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Validating Results
provide the structure Info returned by systune to properly account for scalings and
other parameters computed by the optimization algorithms. First verify the tracking
requirement.
viewSpec(Req1,ST1,Info)
We observe a slight violation across frequency, suggesting that setpoint tracking will
perform close to expectations. Similarly, verify the disturbance rejection requirement.
viewSpec(Req4,ST1,Info)
legend('location','NorthWest')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-251
6
Control System Tuning
Most of the violation is at low frequency with a small bump near 35 rad/s, suggesting
possible damped oscillations at this frequency. Finally, verify the stability margin
requirement.
viewSpec(Req3,ST1,Info)
6-252
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Validating Results
This requirement is satisfied at all frequencies, with the smallest margins achieved
near the crossover frequency as expected. To see the actual margin values at a given
frequency, click on the red curve and read the values from the data tip.
Evaluating Requirements
You can also use evalSpec to evaluate each requirement, that is, compute its
contribution to the soft and hard constraints. For example
[H1,f1] = evalSpec(Req1,ST1,Info);
returns the value f1 of the requirement and the underlying frequency-weighted transfer
function H1 used to computed it. You can verify that f1 matches the first entry of fSoft
and coincides with the peak gain of H1.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-253
6
Control System Tuning
[f1 fSoft(1) getPeakGain(H1,1e-6)]
ans =
1.1477
1.1477
1.1477
Analyzing System Responses
In addition to verifying requirements, you can perform basic open- and closed-loop
analysis using getIOTransfer and getLoopTransfer. For example, verify tracking
performance in the time domain by plotting the response az to a step command azref
for the tuned system ST1.
T = ST1.getIOTransfer('az ref','az');
step(T)
6-254
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Validating Results
Also plot the open-loop response measured at the plant input delta fin. You can use
this plot to assess the classical gain and phase margins at the plant input.
L = ST1.getLoopTransfer('delta fin',-1);
margin(L), grid
% negative-feedback loop transfer
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-255
6
Control System Tuning
Soft vs Hard Requirements
So far we have treated all four requirements equally in the objective function.
Alternatively, you can use a mix of soft and hard constraints to differentiate between
must-have and nice-to-have requirements. For example, you could treat Requirements
3,4 as hard constraints and optimize the first two requirements subject to these
constraints. For best results, do this only after obtaining a reasonable design with all
requirements treated equally.
[ST2,fSoft,gHard,Info] = ST1.systune([Req1 Req2],[Req3 Req4]);
Final: Soft = 1.29, Hard = 0.99999, Iterations = 207
fSoft
6-256
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Validating Results
fSoft =
1.2949
1.2949
gHard
gHard =
0.4774
1.0000
Here fSoft contains the final values of the first two requirements (soft constraints) and
gHard contains the final values of the last two requirements (hard constraints). The hard
constraints are satisfied since all entries of gHard are less than 1. As expected, the best
value of the first two requirements went up as the optimizer strived to strictly enforce
the fourth requirement.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-257
6
Control System Tuning
Using Parallel Computing to Accelerate Tuning
This example shows how to leverage the Parallel Computing Toolbox™ to accelerate
multi-start strategies for tuning fixed-structure control systems.
Background
Both systune and looptune use local optimization methods for tuning the control
architecture at hand. To mitigate the risk of ending up with a locally optimal but globally
poor design, it is recommended to run several optimizations starting from different
randomly generated initial points. If you have a multi-core machine or have access to
distributed computing resources, you can significantly speed up this process using the
Parallel Computing Toolbox.
This example shows how to parallelize the tuning of an airframe autopilot with
looptune. See the example "Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot" for more details about this
application of looptune.
Autopilot Tuning
The airframe dynamics and autopilot are modeled in Simulink.
open_system('rct_airframe1')
6-258
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Using Parallel Computing to Accelerate Tuning
The autopilot consists of two cascaded loops whose tunable elements include two PI
controller gains ("az Control" block) and one gain in the pitch-rate loop ("q Gain" block).
The vertical acceleration az should track the command azref with a 1 second response
time. Use slTunable to configure this tuning task (see "Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot"
example for details):
ST0 = slTunable('rct_airframe1',{'az Control','q Gain'});
ST0.addControl('delta fin');
ST0.addMeasurement({'az','q'});
% Design requirements
wc = [3,12];
% bandwidth
TrackReq = TuningGoal.Tracking('az ref','az',1);
% tracking
Parallel Tuning with LOOPTUNE
We are ready to tune the autopilot gains with looptune. To minimize the risk of getting
a poor-quality local minimum, run 30 optimizations starting from 30 randomly generated
values of the three gains. Configure the looptune options to enable parallel processing
of these 30 runs:
rng('default')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-259
6
Control System Tuning
Options = looptuneOptions('RandomStart',30,'UseParallel',true);
Next call looptune to launch the tuning algorithm. The 30 runs are automatically
distributed across available computing resources:
[ST,gam,Info] = ST0.looptune(wc,TrackReq,Options);
Starting parallel pool (parpool) using the 'local' profile ... connected to 4 workers.
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.042)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.051)
Final: Peak gain = 1.23, Iterations = 46
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.082)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.082)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.04)
Final: Peak gain = 61.9, Iterations = 72
Final: Peak gain = 1.23, Iterations = 42
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.039)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Peak gain = 1.23, Iterations = 90
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.042)
Final: Peak gain = 1.23, Iterations = 46
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.041)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.082)
Final: Failed to enforce closed-loop stability (max Re(s) = 0.039)
Final: Peak gain = 1.23, Iterations = 103
Final: Peak gain = 1.23, Iterations = 57
Final: Peak gain = 1.23, Iterations = 120
Most runs return 1.23 as optimal gain value, suggesting that this local minimum has a
wide region of attraction and is likely to be the global optimum. Use showBlockValue to
see the corresponding gain values:
showBlockValue(ST)
6-260
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Using Parallel Computing to Accelerate Tuning
Block "rct_airframe1/az Control" =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.00165, Ki = 0.00166
Name: az_Control
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------Block "rct_airframe1/q Gain" =
d =
y1
u1
1.985
Name: q_Gain
Static gain.
Plot the closed-loop response for this set of gains:
T = ST.getIOTransfer('az ref','az');
step(T,5)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-261
Control System Tuning
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6
6-262
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
This example shows how to use Control System Tuner App™ of Robust Control Toolbox™
to tune a multi-loop controller for a rotorcraft.
Helicopter Model
This example uses an 8-state helicopter model at the hovering trim condition. The state
vector x = [u,w,q,theta,v,p,phi,r] consists of
• Longitudinal velocity u (m/s)
• Lateral velocity v (m/s)
• Normal velocity w (m/s)
• Pitch angle theta (deg)
• Roll angle phi (deg)
• Roll rate p (deg/s)
• Pitch rate q (deg/s)
• Yaw rate r (deg/s).
The controller generates commands ds,dc,dT in degrees for the longitudinal cyclic,
lateral cyclic, and tail rotor collective using measurements of theta, phi, p, q, and r.
Control Architecture
The following Simulink model depicts the control architecture:
open_system('rct_helico')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-263
6
Control System Tuning
The control system consists of two feedback loops. The inner loop (static output feedback)
provides stability augmentation and decoupling. The outer loop (PI controllers) provides
the desired setpoint tracking performance. The main control objectives are as follows:
• Track setpoint changes in theta, phi, and r with zero steady-state error, rise times
of about 2 seconds, minimal overshoot, and minimal cross-coupling
• Limit the control bandwidth to guard against neglected high-frequency rotor
dynamics and measurement noise
• Provide strong multivariable gain and phase margins (robustness to simultaneous
gain/phase variations at the plant inputs and outputs, see loopmargin for details).
We use lowpass filters with cutoff at 40 rad/s to partially enforce the second objective.
Controller Tuning
You can jointly tune the inner and outer loops with the Control System Tuner
App. This app only requires models of the plant and controller along with the desired
bandwidth (which is function of the desired response time). When the control system is
modeled in Simulink, you can use the Control System Tuner to quickly set up the
tuning task. First, open Control System Tuner App from Simulink Analysis Menu.
6-264
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 1: Control System Tuner App.
Then, open the editor for tuned blocks by clicking Select Blocks from Tuning tab.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-265
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 2: Tuning Tab of Control System Tuner App.
6-266
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 3: Editor for Tuned Blocks of Control System Tuner App.
Add list of blocks, PI1, PI2, PI3, SOF to be tuned into Control System Tuner from
Add Blocks.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-267
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 4: Selection of Tuned Blocks of Control System Tuner App.
Selected tuned blocks appears both in the editor and in the Tuned Blocks section of
Data Browser on the left side of Control System Tuner App.
6-268
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 5: Editor Updated with Selected Tuned Blocks.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-269
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 6: Updated Tuned Blocks in Control System Tuner App.
Each tunable block is automatically parameterized according to its type and initialized
with its value in the Simulink model
for the PI controllers and zero for the static
output-feedback gain). Simulating the model shows that the control system is unstable
for these initial values:
6-270
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Capture the design requirements using TuningGoal objects. We use the following
requirements for this example:
• Tracking requirement: The response of theta, phi, r to step commands
theta_ref, phi_ref, r_ref must resemble a decoupled first-order response with a
one-second time constant
• Stability margins: The multivariable gain and phase margins at the plant inputs u
and plant outputs y must be at least 5 dB and 40 degrees
• Fast dynamics: The magnitude of the closed-loop poles must not exceed 25 to
prevent fast dynamics and jerky transients
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-271
6
Control System Tuning
Add all requirements from New Goal starting with Tracking of Step Commands
requirement.
6-272
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-273
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 6: Available Goals for Selection in Control System Tuner App.
In the Step Tracking Goal dialog, add commands signals, theta_ref, phi_ref, r_ref
and corresponding outputs, theta, phi, r from Add signal to list by Select
signal from Model. Set time constant to 1 and allow mismatch less than 20%
mismatch with reference model 1/(s+1).
6-274
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-275
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 7: Step Tracking Goal Dialog in Control System Tuner App.
In Margins Goal dialogs, add plant inputs and outputs and set gain and phase margins
requirements
6-276
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-277
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 8: Margins Goal at Plant Input Dialog in Control System Tuner App.
6-278
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-279
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 9: Margins Goal at Plant Output Dialog in Control System Tuner App.
Limit on fast dynamics by putting constraint on closed-loop dynamics and selecting Poles
Goal.
6-280
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-281
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 10: Poles Goal Dialog in Control System Tuner App.
The plots for specified requirements are created in Control System Tuner App and
Tuning Goals section of Data Browser on the left side is updated.
Figure 11: Updated Control System Tuner App with Tuning Goals Created.
You can now tune all controller parameters by Tune button in Control System Tuner
App. The parameters of tuned blocks and the plots of tuning goals in Control System
Tuner App are updated. The tuning report is created.
6-282
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 12: Tuning Report in Control System Tuner App.
The final value is close to 1 so the requirements are nearly met. Check the tuned step
responses of tracking requirements.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-283
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 13: Control System Tuner App After Tuning.
The rise time is about two seconds with no overshoot and little cross-coupling. You can
see the plots of each requirement, including a visual assessment of the multivariable
stability margins (see loopmargin for details).
6-284
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 14: Control System Tuner App with Updated Margins Goal Plot.
You can store the current design by clicking Store from Control System Tab and
inspect the tuned values of the PI controllers and static output-feedback gain by double
clicking on Design1.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-285
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 15: Control System Tuner App with Stored Design1.
6-286
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Control Systems with CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-287
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 16: Tuned Values of PI Controllers and Static Output-Feedback Gain.
6-288
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM
TUNER
This example shows how to use Control System Tuner App™ of Robust Control Toolbox™
to tune the current and velocity loops in a linear electric actuator with saturation limits.
Linear Electric Actuator Model
Open the Simulink model of the linear electric actuator:
open_system('rct_linact')
The electrical and mechanical components are modeled using SimElectronics and
SimMechanics. The control system consists of two cascaded feedback loops controlling the
driving current and angular speed of the DC motor.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-289
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 1: Current and Speed Controllers.
Note that the inner-loop (current) controller is a proportional gain while the outer-loop
(speed) controller has proportional and integral actions. The output of both controllers is
limited to plus/minus 5.
Design Specifications
We need to tune the proportional and integral gains to respond to a 2000 rpm speed
demand in about 0.1 seconds with minimum overshoot. The initial gain settings in the
model are P=50 and PI(s)=0.2+0.1/s and the corresponding response is shown in Figure 2.
This response is too slow and too sensitive to load disturbances.
6-290
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 2: Untuned Response.
Control System Tuning
You can use Control System Tuner App to jointly tune both feedback loops. First,
open Control System Tuner App from Simulink Analysis Menu.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-291
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 3: Opening Control System Tuner App.
This opens Control System Tuner App.
6-292
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 4: Control System Tuner App.
You linearize the model at t=0.5 to avoid discontinuities in some derivatives at t=0. You
can set the operating point in Linearize At....
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-293
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 5: Setting Operating Point for Linearization.
Set the linearization snapshot time at t=0.5.
6-294
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 6: Setting the Linearization Snapshot Time.
In order to set the tuned blocks of the control system, open Select Blocks from
Tuning tab.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-295
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 7: Tuning Tab of Control System Tuner App.
This shows the editor for tuned blocks where you can Add Blocks.
6-296
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 8: Editor for Tuned Blocks.
Set the tuned blocks Current PID and Speed PID by navigating through the tree on
the left.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-297
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 9: Selecting Tuned Block Current PID.
6-298
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 10: Selecting Tuned Block Speed PID.
Selected tuned blocks Current PID and Speed PID show in the editor for tuned blocks.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-299
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 11: Editor Updated with Selected Tuned Blocks.
They also appear in the Tuned Blocks section of Data Browser on the left side of
Control System Tuner App.
6-300
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 12: Updated Tuned Blocks in Control System Tuner App.
Next specify the tracking goal that the DC motor should follow a 2000 rpm speed demand
in 0.1 seconds. See different types of goals under New Goal and select Reference
Tracking.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-301
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 13: Available Goals for Selection in Control System Tuner App.
6-302
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Name the tracking goal as TR, specify the tracking goal from the reference input
rct_linact/Speed Demand(rpm)/1 to the reference-tracking output rct_linact/
Hall Effect Sensor/1[rpm] with the response time 0.1 seconds.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-303
Control System Tuning
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6
6-304
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 13: Reference Tracking Dialog in Control System Tuner App.
The plot for specified tracking goal appears in Control System Tuner App and Tuning
Goals section of Data Browser on the left side is updated.
Figure 14: Tracking Tuning Goal in Control System Tuner App.
You can now tune the proportional and integral gains with Control System Tuner
App from clicking Tune button. The plot for tracking goal is updated
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-305
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 15: Updated Tracking Goal Plot with Tuned Blocks in Control System
Tuner App.
and you see Tuning Report which gives additional information about the tuning.
6-306
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 16: Tuning Report in Control System Tuner App.
Tuned blocks are updated with the tuned gain values. To validate this design, plot the
closed-loop response from speed demand to speed from New Plot of Control System
Tab.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-307
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 17: New Plot in Control System Tuner App.
Specify the closed-loop response from speed demand to speed by the step plot dialog.
6-308
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 18: Step Plot Dialog in Control System Tuner App.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-309
6
Control System Tuning
You see the step plot of the response in Control System Tuner App.
Figure 19: Step Plot in Control System Tuner App.
The response looks good in the linear domain so first store the current design by clicking
Store and push the tuned gain values to Simulink by clicking Update Blocks and
further validate the design in the nonlinear model.
6-310
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 20: Stored Values of Tuned Blocks in Control System Tuner App.
The nonlinear simulation results appear in Figure 3. The nonlinear behavior is far worse
than the linear approximation, a discrepancy that can be traced to saturations in the
inner loop (see Figure 4).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-311
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 21: Nonlinear Simulation of Tuned Controller.
6-312
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 22: Current Controller Output (limited to plus/minus 5).
Preventing Saturations
So far we have only specified a desired response time for the outer (speed) loop. This
leaves systune free to allocate the control effort between the inner and outer loops.
Saturations in the inner loop suggest that the proportional gain is too high and that
some rebalancing is needed. One possible remedy is to explicitly limit the gain from the
speed command to the outputs of the P and PI controllers. For a speed reference of 2000
rpm and saturation limits of plus/minus 5, the average gain should not exceed 5/2000 =
0.0025. To be conservative, we can try to keep the gain from speed reference to controller
outputs below 0.001. To do this, add two gain requirements and retune the controller
gains with all three requirements in place.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-313
6
Control System Tuning
Limit gain from speed demand to control signals to avoid saturation by specifying two
new goals from Tuning tab. You need to select control signals from Simulink model since
they are not defined previously.
6-314
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-315
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 23: Gain Goal Dialog from Speed Demand to Control Signal of Speed
PID.
6-316
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-317
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 24: Gain Goal Dialog from Speed Demand to Control Signal of Current
PID.
New gain goals appear in Tuning Goals section of Control System Tuner App.
Figure 25: Two Gain Goals Added to Control System Tuner App.
Retune with these additional requirements. Tuning Report shows the worst gain 1.39
indicating that the requirements are nearly but not exactly met (all requirements are
met when the final gain is less than 1)
6-318
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 26: Tuning Report After Retuning.
Next compare the two designs in the linear domain by clicking Compare in Control
System tab.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-319
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 27: Comparing Two Designs.
The second design is less aggressive but still meets the response time requirement.
6-320
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 28: Step Responses of Two Designs.
Finally, push the new tuned gain values to the Simulink model by Update Blocks
and simulate the response to a 2000 rpm speed demand and 500 N load disturbance.
The simulation results appear in Figure 5 and the current controller output is shown in
Figure 6.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-321
6
Control System Tuning
Figure 29: Nonlinear Response of Tuning with Gain Constraints.
6-322
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator Using CONTROL SYSTEM TUNER
Figure 30: Current Controller Output.
The nonlinear responses are now satisfactory and the current loop is no longer
saturating. The additional gain constraints have forced systune to re-distribute the
control effort between the inner and outer loops so as to avoid saturation.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-323
ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ | www.MatlabSite.com
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
6-324
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
• “What Is a Fixed-Structure Control System?” on page 7-3
• “Difference Between Fixed-Structure Tuning and Traditional H-Infinity Synthesis” on
page 7-4
• “Structure of Control System for Tuning With looptune” on page 7-5
• “Set Up Your Control System for Tuning with looptune” on page 7-6
• “Tune MIMO Control System for Specified Bandwidth” on page 7-8
• “What Is hinfstruct?” on page 7-14
• “Formulating Design Requirements as H-Infinity Constraints” on page 7-15
• “Structured H-Infinity Synthesis Workflow” on page 7-16
• “Build Tunable Closed-Loop Model for Tuning with hinfstruct” on page 7-17
• “Tune the Controller Parameters” on page 7-24
• “Interpret the Outputs of hinfstruct” on page 7-25
• “Validate the Controller Design” on page 7-26
• “Tuning Feedback Loops with LOOPTUNE” on page 7-30
• “Tuning Multi-Loop Control Systems” on page 7-38
• “PID Tuning for Setpoint Tracking vs. Disturbance Rejection” on page 7-49
• “Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column” on page 7-61
• “Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System” on page 7-72
• “Control of a Linear Electric Actuator” on page 7-89
• “Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm” on page 7-101
• “Active Vibration Control in Three-Story Building” on page 7-117
• “Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot” on page 7-130
• “Multi-Loop Control of a Helicopter” on page 7-147
• “Fixed-Structure Autopilot for a Passenger Jet” on page 7-156
• “Fault-Tolerant Control of a Passenger Jet” on page 7-169
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
• “Fixed-Structure H-infinity Synthesis with HINFSTRUCT” on page 7-179
• “MIMO Control of Diesel Engine” on page 7-191
• “Digital Control of Power Stage Voltage” on page 7-205
7-2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
What Is a Fixed-Structure Control System?
What Is a Fixed-Structure Control System?
Fixed-structure control systems are control systems that have predefined architectures
and controller structures. For example,
• A single-loop SISO control architecture where the controller is a fixed-order transfer
function, a PID controller, or a PID controller plus a filter.
• A MIMO control architecture where the controller has fixed order and structure. For
example, a 2-by-2 decoupling matrix plus two PI controllers is a MIMO controller of
fixed order and structure.
• A multiple-loop SISO or MIMO control architecture, including nested or cascaded
loops, with multiple gains and dynamic components to tune.
You can use systune, looptune or hinfstruct for frequency-domain tuning of
virtually any SISO or MIMO feedback architecture to meet your design requirements.
You can use both approaches to tune fixed structure control systems in either MATLAB
or Simulink (requires Simulink Control Design).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-3
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Difference Between Fixed-Structure Tuning and Traditional HInfinity Synthesis
All of the tuning commands systune, looptune, and hinfstruct tune the controller
parameters by optimizing the H∞ norm across a closed-loop system (see [1]). However,
these functions differ in important ways from traditional H∞ methods.
Traditional H∞ synthesis (performed using the hinfsyn or loopsyn commands) designs
a full-order, centralized controller. Traditional H∞ synthesis provides no way to impose
structure on the controller and often results in a controller that has high-order dynamics.
Thus, the results can be difficult to map to your specific real-world control architecture.
Additionally, traditional H∞ synthesis requires you to express all design requirements in
terms of a single weighted MIMO transfer function.
In contrast, structured H∞ synthesis allows you to describe and tune the specific control
system with which you are working. You can specify your control architecture, including
the number and configuration of feedback loops. You can also specify the complexity,
structure, and parametrization of each tunable component in your control system, such
as PID controllers, gains, and fixed-order transfer functions. Additionally, you can easily
combine requirements on separate closed-loop transfer functions.
Bibliography
[1] P. Apkarian and D. Noll, "Nonsmooth H-infinity Synthesis," IEEE Transactions on
Automatic Control, Vol. 51, Number 1, 2006, pp. 71-86.
7-4
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Structure of Control System for Tuning With looptune
Structure of Control System for Tuning With looptune
looptune tunes the feedback loop illustrated below to meet default requirements or
requirements that you specify.
G
u
y
C
C represents the controller and G represents the plant. The sensor outputsy
(measurement signals) and actuator outputs u (control signals) define the boundary
between plant and controller. The controller is the portion of your control system whose
inputs are measurements, and whose outputs are control signals. Conversely, the plant is
the remainder—the portion of your control system that receives control signals as inputs,
and produces measurements as outputs.
For example, in the control system of the following illustration, the controller C receives
the measurement y, and the reference signal r. The controller produces the controls qL
and qV as outputs.
C
r
e
+
-
pL
D
pV
PIL
PIV
qL
G
y
qV
The controller C has a fixed internal structure. C includes a gain matrix D , the PI
controllers PI_L and PI_V, and a summing junction. The looptune command tunes free
parameters of C such as the gains in D and the proportional and integral gains of PI_L
and PI_V. You can also use looptune to co-tune free parameters in both C and G.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-5
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Set Up Your Control System for Tuning with looptune
In this section...
“Set Up Your Control System for looptunein MATLAB” on page 7-6
“Set Up Your Control System for looptune in Simulink” on page 7-6
Set Up Your Control System for looptunein MATLAB
To set up your control system in MATLAB for tuning with looptune:
1
Parameterize the tunable elements of your controller. You can use predefined
structures such as ltiblock.pid, ltiblock.gain, and ltiblock.tf. Or, you can
create your own structure from elementary tunable parameters (realp).
2
Use model interconnection commands such as series and connect to build a
tunable genss model representing the controller C0.
3
Create a “Numeric LTI model” representing the plant G. For co-tuning the plant and
controller, represent the plant as a tunable genss model.
Set Up Your Control System for looptune in Simulink
To set up your control system in Simulink for tuning with systune (requires Simulink
Control Design software):
1
Use slTuner to create an interface to the Simulink model of your control system.
When you create the interface, you specify which blocks to tune in your model.
2
Use addPoint to specify the control and measurement signals that define the
boundaries between plant and controller. Use addOpening to mark optional loopopening or signal injection sites for specifying and assessing open-loop requirements.
The slTuner interface automatically linearizes your Simulink model. The slTuner
interface also automatically parametrizes the blocks that you specify as tunable blocks.
For more information about this linearization, see the slTuner reference page and “How
Tuned Simulink Blocks Are Parameterized” on page 6-42.
Related Examples
•
7-6
“Tune MIMO Control System for Specified Bandwidth” on page 7-8
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Set Up Your Control System for Tuning with looptune
•
“Tuning Feedback Loops with LOOPTUNE” on page 7-30
More About
•
“Structure of Control System for Tuning With looptune” on page 7-5
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-7
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Tune MIMO Control System for Specified Bandwidth
This example shows how to tune the following control system to achieve a loop crossover
frequency between 0.1 and 1 rad/s, using looptune.
The plant, G, is a two-input, two-output model (y is a two-element vector signal). For this
example, the transfer function of G is given by:
This sample plant is based on the distillation column described in more detail in the
example “Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column”.
To tune this control system, you first create a numeric model of the plant. Then you
create tunable models of the controller elements and interconnect them to build a
controller model. Then you use looptune to tune the free parameters of the controller
model. Finally, examine the performance of the tuned system to confirm that the tuned
controller yields desirable performance.
Create a model of the plant.
s = tf('s');
G = 1/(75*s+1)*[87.8 -86.4; 108.2 -109.6];
G.InputName = {'qL','qV'};
G.OutputName = 'y';
When you tune the control system, looptune uses the channel names G.InputName
and G.OutputName to interconnect the plant and controller. Therefore, assign these
channel names to match the illustration. When you set G.OutputName = 'y', the
7-8
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tune MIMO Control System for Specified Bandwidth
G.OutputName is automatically expanded to {'y(1)';'y(2)'}. This expansion occurs
because G is a two-output system.
Represent the components of the controller.
D = ltiblock.gain('Decoupler',eye(2));
D.InputName = 'e';
D.OutputName = {'pL','pV'};
PI_L = ltiblock.pid('PI_L','pi');
PI_L.InputName = 'pL';
PI_L.OutputName = 'qL';
PI_V = ltiblock.pid('PI_V','pi');
PI_V.InputName = 'pV';
PI_V.OutputName = 'qV';
sum1 = sumblk('e = r - y',2);
The control system includes several tunable control elements. PI_L and PI_V are
tunable PI controllers. These elements represented by ltiblock.pid models. The fixed
control structure also includes a decoupling gain matrix D, represented by a tunable
ltiblock.gain model. When the control system is tuned, D ensures that each output of
G tracks the corresponding reference signal r with minimal crosstalk.
Assigning InputName and OutputName values to these control elements allows you to
interconnect them to create a tunable model of the entire controller C as shown.
When you tune the control system, looptune uses these channel names to interconnect
C and G. The controller C also includes the summing junction sum1. This a two-channel
summing junction, because r and y are vector-valued signals of dimension 2.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-9
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Connect the controller components.
C0 = connect(PI_L,PI_V,D,sum1,{'r','y'},{'qL','qV'});
C0 is a tunable genss model that represents the entire controller structure. C0 stores the
tunable controller parameters and contains the initial values of those parameters.
Tune the control system.
The inputs to looptune are G and C0, the plant and initial controller models that you
created. The input wc = [0.1,1] sets the target range for the loop bandwidth. This
input specifies that the crossover frequency of each loop in the tuned system fall between
0.1 and 1 rad/min.
wc = [0.1,1];
[G,C,gam,Info] = looptune(G,C0,wc);
Final: Peak gain = 0.956, Iterations = 19
Achieved target gain value TargetGain=1.
The displayed Peak Gain = 0.949 indicates that looptune has found parameter
values that achieve the target loop bandwidth. looptune displays the final peak gain
value of the optimization run, which is also the output gam. If gam is less than 1, all
tuning requirements are satisfied. A value greater than 1 indicates failure to meet some
requirement. If gam exceeds 1, you can increase the target bandwidth range or relax
another tuning requirement.
looptune also returns the tuned controller model C. This model is the tuned version of
C0. It contains the PI coefficients and the decoupling matrix gain values that yield the
optimized peak gain value.
Display the tuned controller parameters.
showTunable(C)
Decoupler =
d =
y1
y2
7-10
u1
1.561
-1.128
u2
-0.9838
0.9175
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tune MIMO Control System for Specified Bandwidth
Name: Decoupler
Static gain.
----------------------------------PI_L =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 2.17, Ki = 0.00986
Name: PI_L
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------PI_V =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = -2.68, Ki = -0.0376
Name: PI_V
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
Check the time-domain response for the control system with the tuned coefficients. To
produce a plot, construct a closed-loop model of the tuned control system. Plot the step
response from reference to output.
T = connect(G,C,'r','y');
step(T)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-11
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The decoupling matrix in the controller permits each channel of the two-channel output
signal y to track the corresponding channel of the reference signal r, with minimal
crosstalk. From the plot, you can how well this requirement is achieved when you
tune the control system for bandwidth alone. If the crosstalk still exceeds your design
requirements, you can use a TuningGoal.Gain requirement object to impose further
restrictions on tuning.
Examine the frequency-domain response of the tuned result as an alternative method for
validating the tuned controller.
loopview(G,C,Info)
7-12
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tune MIMO Control System for Specified Bandwidth
The first plot shows that the open-loop gain crossovers fall within the specified interval
[0.1,1]. This plot also includes the maximum and tuned values of the sensitivity
function
and complementary sensitivity
. The second and
third plots show that the MIMO stability margins of the tuned system (blue curve) do not
exceed the upper limit (yellow curve).
Related Examples
•
“Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column” on page 7-61
More About
•
“Structure of Control System for Tuning With looptune” on page 7-5
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-13
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
What Is hinfstruct?
hinfstruct lets you use the frequency-domain methods of H∞ synthesis to tune control
systems that have predefined architectures and controller structures.
To use hinfstruct, you describe your control system as a “Generalized LTI model”
that keeps track of the tunable components of your system. hinfstruct tunes those
parameters by minimizing the closed-loop gain from the system inputs to the system
outputs (the “H∞ norm”).
hinfstruct is the counterpart of hinfsyn for fixed-structure controllers. The
methodology and algorithm behind hinfstruct are described in [1].
7-14
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Formulating Design Requirements as H-Infinity Constraints
Formulating Design Requirements as H-Infinity Constraints
Control design requirements are typically performance measures such as response speed,
control bandwidth, roll-off, and steady-state error. To use hinfstruct, first express the
design requirements as constraints on the closed-loop gain.
You can formulate design requirements in terms of the closed-loop gain using loop
shaping. Loop shaping is a common systematic technique for defining control design
requirements for H∞ synthesis. In loop shaping, you first express design requirements as
open-loop gain requirements.
For example, a requirement of good reference tracking and disturbance rejection is
equivalent to high (>1) open-loop gain at low frequency. A requirement of insensitivity
to measurement noise or modeling error is equivalent to a low (<1) open-loop gain at
high frequency. You can then convert these open-loop requirements to constraints on the
closed-loop gain using weighting functions.
This formulation of design requirements results in a H∞ constraint of the form:
H (s )
•
< 1,
where H(s) is a closed-loop transfer function that aggregates and normalizes the various
requirements.
For an example of how to formulate design requirements for H∞ synthesis using loop
shaping, see “Fixed-Structure H-infinity Synthesis with HINFSTRUCT” on page
7-179.
For more information about constructing weighting functions from design requirements,
see “H-Infinity Performance”.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-15
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Structured H-Infinity Synthesis Workflow
Performing structured H∞ synthesis requires the following steps:
7-16
1
Formulate your design requirements as H∞ constraints, which are constraints on the
closed-loop gains from specific system inputs to specific system outputs.
2
Build tunable models of the closed-loop transfer functions of Step 1.
3
Tune the control system using hinfstruct.
4
Validate the tuned control system.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Build Tunable Closed-Loop Model for Tuning with hinfstruct
Build Tunable Closed-Loop Model for Tuning with hinfstruct
In the previous step you expressed your design requirements as a constraint on the H∞
norm of a closed-loop transfer function H(s).
The next step is to create a “Generalized LTI model” of H(s) that includes all of the fixed
and tunable elements of the control system. The model also includes any weighting
functions that represent your design requirements. There are two ways to obtain this
tunable model of your control system:
• Construct the model using Control System Toolbox commands.
• Obtain the model from a Simulink model using Simulink Control Design commands.
Constructing the Closed-Loop System Using Control System Toolbox
Commands
To construct the tunable generalized linear model of your closed-loop control system in
MATLAB:
1
Use commands such as tf, zpk, and ss to create numeric linear models that
represent the fixed elements of your control system and any weighting functions that
represent your design requirements.
2
Use tunable models (either Control Design Blocks or Generalized LTI models) to
model the tunable elements of your control system. For more information about
tunable models, see “Models with Tunable Coefficients” in the Control System
Toolbox User's Guide.
3
Use model-interconnection commands such as series, parallel, and connect to
construct your closed-loop system from the numeric and tunable models.
Example: Modeling a Control System With a Tunable PI Controller and Tunable Filter
This example shows how to construct a tunable generalized linear model of the following
control system for tuning with hinfstruct.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-17
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
ew
LS
r
e
+
C
u
y
G
-
n
+
yf
F
yn
+
1/LS
nw
This block diagram represents a head-disk assembly (HDA) in a hard disk drive. The
architecture includes the plant G in a feedback loop with a PI controller C and a lowpass filter, F = a/(s+a). The tunable parameters are the PI gains of C and the filter
parameter a.
The block diagram also includes the weighting functions LS and 1/LS, which express the
loop-shaping requirements. Let T(s) denote the closed-loop transfer function from inputs
(r,nw) to outputs (y,ew). Then, the H∞ constraint:
T (s )
•
<1
approximately enforces the target open-loop response shape LS. For this example, the
target loop shape is
s
wc
LS =
.
s
0.001 +
wc
1 + 0.001
7-18
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Build Tunable Closed-Loop Model for Tuning with hinfstruct
This value of LS corresponds to the following open-loop response shape.
To tune the HDA control system with hinfstruct, construct a tunable model of the
closed-loop system T(s), including the weighting functions, as follows.
1
Load the plant G from a saved file.
load hinfstruct_demo G
G is a 9th-order SISO state-space (ss) model.
2
Create a tunable model of the PI controller.
You can use the predefined Control Design Block ltiblock.pid to represent a
tunable PI controller.
C = ltiblock.pid('C','pi');
3
Create a tunable model of the low-pass filter.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-19
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Because there is no predefined Control Design Block for the filter F = a/(s+a),
use realp to represent the tunable filter parameter a. Then create a tunable genss
model representing the filter.
a = realp('a',1);
F = tf(a,[1 a]);
4
Specify the target loop shape LC.
wc = 1000;
s = tf('s');
LS = (1+0.001*s/wc)/(0.001+s/wc);
5
Label the inputs and outputs of all the components of the control system.
Labeling the I/Os allows you to connect the elements to build the closed-loop system
T(s).
Wn = 1/LS; Wn.InputName = 'nw'; Wn.OutputName = 'n';
We.OutputName = 'ew';
We = LS; We.InputName = 'e';
C.InputName = 'e'; C.OutputName = 'u';
F.InputName = 'yn'; F.OutputName = 'yf';
6
Specify the summing junctions in terms of the I/O labels of the other components of
the control system.
Sum1 = sumblk('e = r - yf');
Sum2 = sumblk('yn = y + n');
7
Use connect to combine all the elements into a complete model of the closed-loop
system T(s).
T0 = connect(G,Wn,We,C,F,Sum1,Sum2,{'r','nw'},{'y','ew'});
T0 is a genss object, which is a Generalized LTI model representing the closed-loop
control system with weighting functions. The Blocks property of T0 contains the tunable
blocks C and a.
T0.Blocks
ans =
C: [1x1 ltiblock.pid]
a: [1x1 realp]
7-20
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Build Tunable Closed-Loop Model for Tuning with hinfstruct
For more information about generalized models of control systems that include both
numeric and tunable components, see “Models with Tunable Coefficients” in the Control
System Toolbox documentation.
You can now use hinfstruct to tune the parameters of this control system. See “Tune
the Controller Parameters” on page 7-24.
Constructing the Closed-Loop System Using Simulink Control Design
Commands
If you have a Simulink model of your control system and Simulink Control Design
software, use slTuner to create an interface to the Simulink model of your control
system. When you create the interface, you specify which blocks to tune in your model.
The slTuner interface allows you to extract a closed-loop model for tuning with
hinfstruct.
Example: Creating a Weighted Tunable Model of Control System Starting From a Simulink
Model
This example shows how to construct a tunable generalized linear model of the control
system in the Simulink model rct_diskdrive.
To create a generalized linear model of this control system (including loop-shaping
weighting functions):
1
Open the model.
open('rct_diskdrive');
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-21
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
2
Create an slTuner interface to the model. The interface allows you to specify the
tunable blocks and extract linearized open-loop and closed-loop responses. (For more
information about the interface, see the slTuner reference page.)
ST0 = slTuner('rct_diskdrive',{'C','F'});
This command specifies that C and F are the tunable blocks in the model.
The slTuner interface automatically parametrizes these blocks. The default
parametrization of the transfer function block F is a transfer function with two free
parameters. Because F is a low-pass filter, you must constrain its coefficients. To do
so, specify a custom parameterization of F.
a = realp('a',1);
% filter coefficient
setBlockParam(ST0,'F',tf(a,[1 a]));
3
Extract a tunable model of the closed-loop transfer function you want to tune.
T0 = getIOTransfer(ST0,{'r','n'},{'y','e'});
This command returns a genss model of the linearized closed-loop transfer function
from the reference and noise inputs r,n to the measurement and error outputs y,e.
The error output is needed for the loop-shaping weighting function.
4
Define the loop-shaping weighting functions and append them to T0.
wc = 1000;
7-22
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Build Tunable Closed-Loop Model for Tuning with hinfstruct
s = tf('s');
LS = (1+0.001*s/wc)/(0.001+s/wc);
T0 = blkdiag(1,LS) * T0 * blkdiag(1,1/LS);
The generalized linear model T0 is a tunable model of the closed-loop transfer function
T(s), discussed in “Example: Modeling a Control System With a Tunable PI Controller
and Tunable Filter” on page 7-17. T(s) is a weighted closed-loop model of the control
system of rct_diskdrive. Tuning T0 to enforce the H∞ constraint
T (s )
•
<1
approximately enforces the target loop shape LS.
You can now use hinfstruct to tune the parameters of this control system. See “Tune
the Controller Parameters” on page 7-24.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-23
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Tune the Controller Parameters
After you obtain the genss model representing your control system, use hinfstruct to
tune the tunable parameters in the genss model .
hinfstruct takes a tunable linear model as its input.
For example, you can tune controller parameters for the example discussed in “Build
Tunable Closed-Loop Model for Tuning with hinfstruct” on page 7-17 using the following
command:
[T,gamma,info] = hinfstruct(T0);
Final: Peak gain = 3.88, Iterations = 108
This command returns the following outputs:
• T, a genss model object containing the tuned values of C and a.
• gamma, the minimum peak closed-loop gain of T achieved by hinfstruct.
• info, a structure containing additional information about the minimization runs.
7-24
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Interpret the Outputs of hinfstruct
Interpret the Outputs of hinfstruct
Output Model is Tuned Version of Input Model
T contains the same tunable components as the input closed-loop model T0. However, the
parameter values of T are now tuned to minimize the H∞ norm of this transfer function.
Interpreting gamma
gamma is the smallest H∞ norm achieved by the optimizer. Examine gamma to determine
how close the tuned system is to meeting your design constraints. If you normalize your
H∞ constraints, a final gamma value of 1 or less indicates that the constraints are met.
A final gamma value exceeding 1 by a small amount indicates that the constraints are
nearly met.
The value of gamma that hinfstruct returns is a local minimum of the gain
minimization problem. For best results, use the RandomStart option to hinfstruct
to obtain several minimization runs. Setting RandomStart to an integer N > 0 causes
hinfstruct to run the optimization N additional times, beginning from parameter
values it chooses randomly. For example:
opts = hinfstructOptions('RandomStart',5);
[T,gamma,info] = hinfstruct(T0,opts);
You can examine gamma for each run to identify an optimization result that meets your
design requirements.
For more details about hinfstruct, its options, and its outputs, see the hinfstruct
and hinfstructOptions reference pages.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-25
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Validate the Controller Design
To validate the hinfstruct control design, analyze the tuned output models described
in “Interpret the Outputs of hinfstruct” on page 7-25. Use these tuned models to examine
the performance of the tuned system.
Validating the Design in MATLAB
This example shows how to obtain the closed-loop step response of a system tuned with
hinfstruct in MATLAB.
You can use the tuned versions of the tunable components of your system to build closedloop or open-loop numeric LTI models of the tuned control system. You can then analyze
open-loop or closed-loop performance using other Control System Toolbox tools.
In this example, create and analyze a closed-loop model of the HDA system tuned in
“Tune the Controller Parameters” on page 7-24. To do so, use getIOTransfer to extract
from the tuned control system the transfer function between the step input and the
measured output.
Try = getIOTransfer(T,'r','y');
step(Try)
7-26
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Validate the Controller Design
Validating the Design in Simulink
This example shows how to write tuned values to your Simulink model for validation.
The slTuner interface linearizes your Simulink model. As a best practice, validate the
tuned parameters in your nonlinear model. You can use the slTuner interface to do so.
In this example, write tuned parameters to the rct_diskdrive system tuned in “Tune
the Controller Parameters” on page 7-24.
Make a copy of the slTuner description of the control system, to preserve the original
parameter values. Then propagate the tuned parameter values to the copy.
ST = copy(ST0);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-27
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
setBlockValue(ST,T);
This command writes the parameter values from the tuned, weighted closed-loop model T
to the corresponding parameters in the interface ST.
You can examine the closed-loop responses of the linearized version of the control system
represented by ST. For example:
Try = getIOTransfer(ST,'r','y');
step(Try)
Since hinfstruct tunes a linearized version of your system, you should also validate
the tuned controller in the full nonlinear Simulink model. To do so, write the parameter
values from the slTuner interface to the Simulink model.
7-28
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Validate the Controller Design
writeBlockValue(ST)
You can now simulate the model using the tuned parameter values to validate the
controller design.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-29
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Tuning Feedback Loops with LOOPTUNE
This example shows the basic workflow of tuning feedback loops with the looptune
command. looptune is similar to systune and meant to facilitate loop shaping design
by automatically generating the tuning requirements.
Engine Speed Control
This example uses a simple engine speed control application as illustration. The control
system consists of a single PID loop and the PID controller gains must be tuned to
adequately respond to step changes in the desired speed. Specifically, we want the
response to settle in less than 5 seconds with little or no overshoot.
Figure 1: Engine Speed Control Loop
We use the following fourth-order model of the engine dynamics.
load rctExamples Engine
bode(Engine), grid
7-30
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Feedback Loops with LOOPTUNE
Specifying the Tunable Elements
We need to tune the four PID gains to achieve the desired performance. Use the
ltiblock.pid class to parameterize the PID controller.
PID0 = ltiblock.pid('SpeedController','pid')
PID0 =
Parametric continuous-time PID controller "SpeedController" with formula:
1
s
Kp + Ki * --- + Kd * --------
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-31
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
s
Tf*s+1
and tunable parameters Kp, Ki, Kd, Tf.
Type "pid(PID0)" to see the current value and "get(PID0)" to see all properties.
Building a Tunable Model of the Feedback Loop
looptune tunes the generic SISO or MIMO feedback loop of Figure 2. This feedback loop
models the interaction between the plant and the controller. Note that this is a positive
feedback interconnection.
7-32
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Feedback Loops with LOOPTUNE
Figure 2: Generic Feedback Loop
For the speed control loop, the plant
of the PID and the prefilter .
is the engine model and the controller
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
consists
7-33
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 3: Feedback Loop for Engine Speed Control
To use looptune, create models for and in Figure 3. Assign names to the inputs and
outputs of each model to specify the feedback paths between plant and controller. Note
that the controller has two inputs: the speed reference "r" and the speed measurement
"speed".
F = tf(10,[1 10]);
% prefilter
G = Engine;
G.InputName = 'throttle';
G.OutputName = 'speed';
C0 = PID0 * [F , -1];
C0.InputName = {'r','speed'};
C0.OutputName = 'throttle';
Here C0 is a generalized state-space model (genss) that depends on the tunable PID
block PID0.
Tuning the Controller Parameters
You can now use looptune to tune the PID gains subject to a simple control bandwidth
requirement. To achieve the 5-second settling time, the gain crossover frequency of
the open-loop response should be approximately 1 rad/s. Given this basic requirement,
looptune automatically shapes the open-loop response to provide integral action,
high-frequency roll-off, and adequate stability margins. Note that you could specify
additional requirements to further constrain the design, see "Decoupling Controller for a
Distillation Column" for an example.
7-34
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Feedback Loops with LOOPTUNE
wc = 1;
% target gain crossover frequency
[~,C,~,Info] = looptune(G,C0,wc);
Final: Peak gain = 0.92, Iterations = 3
Achieved target gain value TargetGain=1.
The final value is less than 1, indicating that the desired bandwidth was achieved with
adequate roll-off and stability margins. looptune returns the tuned controller C. Use
getBlockValue to retrieve the tuned value of the PID block.
PIDT = getBlockValue(C,'SpeedController')
PIDT =
1
s
Kp + Ki * --- + Kd * -------s
Tf*s+1
with Kp = 0.000484, Ki = 0.00324, Kd = 0.000835, Tf = 1
Name: SpeedController
Continuous-time PIDF controller in parallel form.
Validating Results
Use loopview to validate the design and visualize the loop shaping requirements
implicitly enforced by looptune.
clf, loopview(G,C,Info)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-35
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Next plot the closed-loop response to a step command in engine speed. The tuned
response satisfies our requirements.
T = connect(G,C,'r','speed');
clf, step(T)
7-36
% closed-loop transfer from r to speed
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Feedback Loops with LOOPTUNE
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-37
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Tuning Multi-Loop Control Systems
This example shows how to jointly tune the inner and outer loops of a cascade
architecture with the systune command.
Cascaded PID Loops
Cascade control is often used to achieve smooth tracking with fast disturbance rejection.
The simplest cascade architecture involves two control loops (inner and outer) as shown
in the block diagram below. The inner loop is typically faster than the outer loop to reject
disturbances before they propagate to the outer loop.
open_system('rct_cascade')
Plant Models and Bandwidth Requirements
In this example, the inner loop plant G2 is
and the outer loop plant G1 is
7-38
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Multi-Loop Control Systems
G2 = zpk([],-2,3);
G1 = zpk([],[-1 -1 -1],10);
We use a PI controller in the inner loop and a PID controller in the outer loop. The outer
loop must have a bandwidth of at least 0.2 rad/s and the inner loop bandwidth should be
ten times larger for adequate disturbance rejection.
Tuning the PID Controllers with SYSTUNE
When the control system is modeled in Simulink, use the slTuner interface in Simulink
Control Design™ to set up the tuning task. List the tunable blocks, mark the signals
r and d2 as inputs of interest, and mark the signals y1 and y2 as locations where to
measure open-loop transfers and specify loop shapes.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_cascade',{'C1','C2'});
addPoint(ST0,{'r','d2','y1','y2'})
You can query the current values of C1 and C2 in the Simulink model using
showTunable. The control system is unstable for these initial values as confirmed by
simulating the Simulink model.
showTunable(ST0)
Block 1: rct_cascade/C1 =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.1, Ki = 0.1
Name: C1
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------Block 2: rct_cascade/C2 =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.1, Ki = 0.1
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-39
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Name: C2
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
Next use "LoopShape" requirements to specify the desired bandwidths for the inner and
as target loop shape for the outer loop to enforce integral action
outer loops. Use
with a gain crossover frequency at 0.2 rad/s:
% Outer loop bandwidth = 0.2
s = tf('s');
Req1 = TuningGoal.LoopShape('y1',0.2/s); % loop transfer measured at y1
Req1.Name = 'Outer Loop';
Use
for the inner loop to make it ten times faster (higher bandwidth) than the outer
loop. To constrain the inner loop transfer, make sure to open the outer loop by specifying
y1 as a loop opening:
% Inner loop bandwidth = 2
Req2 = TuningGoal.LoopShape('y2',2/s); % loop transfer measured at y2
% with outer loop opened at y1
Req2.Openings = 'y1';
Req2.Name = 'Inner Loop';
You can now tune the PID gains in C1 and C2 with systune:
[ST,fSoft,~,Info] = systune(ST0,[Req1,Req2]);
Final: Soft = 0.859, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 99
Use showTunable to see the tuned PID gains.
showTunable(ST)
Block 1: rct_cascade/C1 =
1
s
Kp + Ki * --- + Kd * -------s
Tf*s+1
with Kp = 0.0499, Ki = 0.0186, Kd = 0.0426, Tf = 0.0133
Name: C1
7-40
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Multi-Loop Control Systems
Continuous-time PIDF controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------Block 2: rct_cascade/C2 =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.719, Ki = 1.58
Name: C2
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
Validating the Design
The final value is less than 1 which means that systune successfully met both loop
shape requirements. Confirm this by inspecting the tuned control system ST with
viewSpec
viewSpec([Req1,Req2],ST,Info)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-41
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Note that the inner and outer loops have the desired gain crossover frequencies. To
further validate the design, plot the tuned responses to a step command r and step
disturbance d2:
% Response to a step command
H = getIOTransfer(ST,'r','y1');
clf, step(H,30), title('Step command')
7-42
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Multi-Loop Control Systems
% Response to a step disturbance
H = getIOTransfer(ST,'d2','y1');
step(H,30), title('Step disturbance')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-43
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Once you are satisfied with the linear analysis results, use writeBlockValue to write
the tuned PID gains back to the Simulink blocks. You can then conduct a more thorough
validation in Simulink.
writeBlockValue(ST)
Equivalent Workflow in MATLAB
If you do not have a Simulink model of the control system, you can perform the same
steps using LTI models of the plant and Control Design blocks to model the tunable
elements.
7-44
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Multi-Loop Control Systems
Figure 1: Cascade Architecture
First create parametric models of the tunable PI and PID controllers.
C1 = ltiblock.pid('C1','pid');
C2 = ltiblock.pid('C2','pi');
Then use "analysis point" blocks to mark the loop opening locations y1 and y2.
LS1 = AnalysisPoint('y1');
LS2 = AnalysisPoint('y2');
Finally, create a closed-loop model T0 of the overall control system by closing each
feedback loop. The result is a generalized state-space model depending on the tunable
elements C1 and C2.
InnerCL = feedback(LS2*G2*C2,1);
T0 = feedback(G1*InnerCL*C1,LS1);
T0.InputName = 'r';
T0.OutputName = 'y1';
You can now tune the PID gains in C1 and C2 with systune.
[T,fSoft,~,Info] = systune(T0,[Req1,Req2]);
Final: Soft = 0.858, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 99
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-45
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
As before, use getIOTransfer to compute and plot the tuned responses to a step
command r and step disturbance entering at the location y2:
% Response to a step command
H = getIOTransfer(T,'r','y1');
clf, step(H,30), title('Step command')
% Response to a step disturbance
H = getIOTransfer(T,'y2','y1');
step(H,30), title('Step disturbance')
7-46
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning Multi-Loop Control Systems
You can also plot the open-loop gains for the inner and outer loops to validate the
bandwitdth requirements. Note the -1 sign to compute the negative-feedback open-loop
transfer:
L1 = getLoopTransfer(T,'y1',-1);
L2 = getLoopTransfer(T,'y2',-1,'y1');
bodemag(L2,L1,{1e-2,1e2}), grid
legend('Inner Loop','Outer Loop')
% crossover should be at .2
% crossover should be at 2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-47
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
7-48
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
PID Tuning for Setpoint Tracking vs. Disturbance Rejection
PID Tuning for Setpoint Tracking vs. Disturbance Rejection
This example uses systune to explore trade-offs between setpoint tracking and
disturbance rejection when tuning PID controllers.
PID Tuning Trade-Offs
When tuning 1-DOF PID controllers, it is often impossible to achieve good tracking and
fast disturbance rejection at the same time. Assuming the control bandwidth is fixed,
faster disturbance rejection requires more gain inside the bandwidth, which can only
be achieved by increasing the slope at the crossover frequency. Because a larger slope
means a smaller phase margin, this typically comes at the expense of more overshoot in
the response to setpoint changes.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-49
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 1: Trade-off in 1-DOF PID Tuning.
This example uses systune to explore this trade-off and find the right compromise for
your application. See also pidtool for a more direct and interactive way to make such
trade-off (Transient behavior slider).
Tuning Setup
Consider the PI loop of Figure 2 with a load disturbance at the plant input.
Figure 2: PI Control Loop.
For this example we use the plant model
The PI controller has two parameters to tune: the proportional and integral gains. The
target control bandwidth is 1 rad/s.
Construct a tunable model T0 of the closed-loop transfer from r to y. Use an "analysis
point" block to mark the location u where the disturbance enters.
G = zpk(-5,[-1 -2 -10],10);
C = ltiblock.pid('C','pi');
LS = AnalysisPoint('u');
7-50
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
PID Tuning for Setpoint Tracking vs. Disturbance Rejection
T0 = feedback(G*LS*C,1);
T0.u = 'r'; T0.y = 'y';
The gain of the open-loop response
is a key indicator of the feedback loop
behavior. The open-loop gain should be high (greater than one) inside the control
bandwidth to ensure good disturbance rejection, and should be low (less than one) outside
the control bandwidth to be insensitive to measurement noise and unmodeled plant
dynamics. Accordingly, use three requirements to express the control objectives:
• "Tracking" requirement to specify a response time of about 2 seconds to step changes
in r.
• "MinLoopGain" requirement to keep the loop gain high before 0.5 rad/s
• "MaxLoopGain" requirement to limit the control bandwidth and force a roll-off of -20
dB/decade past 4 rad/s
s = tf('s');
wc = 1; % target crossover frequency
% Tracking
R1 = TuningGoal.Tracking('r','y',2);
% Disturbance rejection
R2 = TuningGoal.MinLoopGain('u',wc/s);
R2.Focus = [0 0.5];
% Bandwidth and roll-off
R3 = TuningGoal.MaxLoopGain('u',4/s);
Tuning of 1-DOF PI Controller
Using systune, you can now tune the PI gains to meet these requirements. Treat the
bandwidth and disturbance rejection goals as hard constraints and optimize tracking
subject to these constraints.
T1 = systune(T0,R1,[R2 R3]);
Final: Soft = 1.24, Hard = 0.99993, Iterations = 139
Verify that all three requirements are nearly met. The blue curves are the achieved
values and the yellow patches highlight regions where the requirements are violated.
figure('Position',[100,100,560,580])
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-51
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
viewSpec([R1 R2 R3],T1)
Tracking vs. Rejection Trade-Off
7-52
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
PID Tuning for Setpoint Tracking vs. Disturbance Rejection
To gain insight into this trade-off, increase the required loop gain by a factor
frequency band [0,0.5] rad/s. Re-tune the PI gains for the values
.
inside the
% Increase loop gain by factor 2
alpha = 2;
R2.MinGain = alpha*wc/s;
T2 = systune(T0,R1,[R2 R3]);
Final: Soft = 1.32, Hard = 0.99969, Iterations = 120
% Increase loop gain by factor 5
alpha = 5;
R2.MinGain = alpha*wc/s;
T3 = systune(T0,R1,[R2 R3]);
Final: Soft = 1.52, Hard = 0.99993, Iterations = 147
Now compare the responses to a step command r and to a step disturbance d entering at
the plant input u.
figure, step(T1,T2,T3,10)
title('Setpoint tracking')
legend('\alpha = 1','\alpha = 2','\alpha = 5')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-53
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
% Compute closed-loop transfer from u to y
D1 = getIOTransfer(T1,'u','y');
D2 = getIOTransfer(T2,'u','y');
D3 = getIOTransfer(T3,'u','y');
step(D1,D2,D3,10)
title('Disturbance rejection')
legend('\alpha = 1','\alpha = 2','\alpha = 5')
7-54
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
PID Tuning for Setpoint Tracking vs. Disturbance Rejection
Note how disturbance rejection improves as alpha increases, but only at the expense of
increased overshoot and oscillations in setpoint tracking. Plot the open-loop responses for
the three designs, and note how the slope at crossover (0dB) increases with alpha.
L1 = getLoopTransfer(T1,'u');
L2 = getLoopTransfer(T2,'u');
L3 = getLoopTransfer(T3,'u');
bodemag(L1,L2,L3,{1e-2,1e2}), grid
title('Open-loop response')
legend('\alpha = 1','\alpha = 2','\alpha = 5')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-55
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Which design is most suitable depends on the primary purpose of the feedback loop you
are tuning.
Tuning of 2-DOF PI Controller
If you cannot compromise tracking to improve disturbance rejection, consider using a 2DOF architecture instead. A 2-DOF PI controller is capable of fast disturbance rejection
without significant increase of overshoot in setpoint tracking.
7-56
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
PID Tuning for Setpoint Tracking vs. Disturbance Rejection
Figure 3: 2-DOF PI Control Loop.
Use the ltiblock.pid2 object to parameterize the 2-DOF PI controller and construct a
tunable model T0 of the closed-loop system in Figure 3.
C = ltiblock.pid2('C','pi');
T0 = feedback(G*LS*C,1,2,1,+1);
T0 = T0(:,1);
T0.u = 'r'; T0.y = 'y';
Next tune the 2-DOF PI controller for the largest loop gain tried earlier (
).
% Minimum loop gain inside bandwidth (for disturbance rejection)
alpha = 5;
R2.MinGain = alpha*wc/s;
% Tune 2-DOF PI controller
T4 = systune(T0,R1,[R2 R3]);
Final: Soft = 1.31, Hard = 0.99996, Iterations = 123
Compare the setpoint tracking and disturbance rejection properties of the 1-DOF and 2DOF designs for
.
clf, step(T3,'b',T4,'g--',10)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-57
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
title('Setpoint tracking')
legend('1-DOF','2-DOF')
D4 = getIOTransfer(T4,'u','y');
step(D3,'b',D4,'g--',10)
title('Disturbance rejection')
legend('1-DOF','2-DOF')
7-58
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
PID Tuning for Setpoint Tracking vs. Disturbance Rejection
The responses to a step disturbance are identical but the 2-DOF controller eliminates the
overshoot in the response to a setpoint change. Compare the tuned 1-DOF and 2-DOF PI
controllers and observe how the proportional and integral gains are nearly the same, the
main difference coming from the setpoint weight b.
showTunable(T3)
% 1-DOF PI
C =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 1.94, Ki = 2.13
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-59
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Name: C
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
showTunable(T4)
% 2-DOF PI
C =
1
s
u = Kp (b*r-y) + Ki --- (r-y) + Kd -------- (c*r-y)
s
Tf*s+1
with Kp = 1.943, Ki = 2.1264, Kd = 0, Tf = 1, b = 0.32476, c = 1.
Continuous-time 2-DOF PID controller.
7-60
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column
Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column
This example shows how to use Robust Control Toolbox™ to decouple the two main
feedback loops in a distillation column.
Distillation Column Model
This example uses a simple model of the distillation column shown below.
Figure 1: Distillation Column
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-61
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
In the so-called LV configuration, the controlled variables are the concentrations yD
and yB of the chemicals D (tops) and B (bottoms), and the manipulated variables are
the reflux L and boilup V. This process exhibits strong coupling and large variations in
steady-state gain for some combinations of L and V. For more details, see Skogestad and
Postlethwaite, Multivariable Feedback Control.
The plant is modeled as a first-order transfer function with inputs L,V and outputs
yD,yB:
s = tf('s','TimeUnit','minutes');
G = [87.8 -86.4 ; 108.2 -109.6]/(75*s+1);
G.InputName = {'L','V'};
G.OutputName = {'yD','yB'};
Control Architecture
The control objectives are as follows:
• Independent control of the tops and bottoms concentrations by ensuring that a change
in the tops setpoint Dsp has little impact on the bottoms concentration B and vice
versa
• Response time of about 15 minutes
• Fast rejection of input disturbances affecting the effective reflux L and boilup V
To achieve these objectives we use the control architecture shown below. This
architecture consists of a static decoupling matrix DM in series with two PI controllers for
the reflux L and boilup V.
open_system('rct_distillation')
7-62
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column
Controller Tuning in Simulink with LOOPTUNE
The looptune command provides a quick way to tune MIMO feedback loops. When the
control system is modeled in Simulink, you just specify the tuned blocks, the control and
measurement signals, and the desired bandwidth, and looptune automatically sets
up the problem and tunes the controller parameters. looptune shapes the open-loop
response to provide integral action, roll-off, and adequate MIMO stability margins.
Use the slTuner interface to specify the tuned blocks, the controller I/Os, and signals of
interest for closed-loop validation.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_distillation',{'PI_L','PI_V','DM'});
% Signals of interest
addPoint(ST0,{'r','dL','dV','L','V','y'})
Use TuningGoal objects to express the design requirements. Set the control bandwidth
by using [0.1,0.5] as gain crossover band for the open-loop response.
wc = [0.1,0.5];
Specify that each loop should respond to a step command in about 15 minutes with
minimum cross-coupling.
TR = TuningGoal.Tracking('r','y',15);
Also specify how the feedback loop should reject step disturbances at the plant input.
The response should be well damped, settle in less than 20 minutes, and not exceed 4 in
amplitude.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-63
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
DR = TuningGoal.StepRejection({'dL','dV'},'y',4,20);
Next use looptune to tune the controller blocks PI_L, PI_V, and DM subject to these
requirements.
Controls = {'L','V'};
Measurements = 'y';
[ST,gam,Info] = looptune(ST0,Controls,Measurements,wc,TR,DR);
Final: Peak gain = 1, Iterations = 44
Achieved target gain value TargetGain=1.
The final value is near 1 which indicates that all requirements were met. Use loopview
to check the resulting design. The responses should stay outside the shaded areas.
figure('Position',[10,10,1071,714])
loopview(ST,Info)
7-64
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column
Use getIOTransfer to access and plot the closed-loop responses from reference and
disturbance to the tops and bottoms concentrations. The tuned responses show a good
compromise between tracking and disturbance rejection.
figure
Ttrack = getIOTransfer(ST,'r','y');
step(Ttrack,40), grid, title('Setpoint tracking')
Treject = getIOTransfer(ST,{'dV','dL'},'y');
step(Treject,40), grid, title('Disturbance rejection')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-65
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Equivalent Workflow in MATLAB
If you do not have a Simulink model of the control system, you can use LTI objects
and Control Design blocks to create a MATLAB representation of the following block
diagram.
7-66
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column
Figure 2: Block Diagram of Control System
First parameterize the tunable elements using Control Design blocks. Use the
ltiblock.gain block to parameterize DM:
DM = ltiblock.gain('Decoupler',eye(2));
This creates a 2x2 static gain with four tunable parameters. Similarly, use the
ltiblock.pid block to parameterize the two PI controllers:
PI_L = ltiblock.pid('PI_L','pi');
PI_V = ltiblock.pid('PI_V','pi');
PI_L.TimeUnit = 'minutes';
PI_V.TimeUnit = 'minutes';
At this point, the tunable elements are over-parameterized because multiplying DM
by two and dividing the PI coefficients by two does not change the overall controller.
To eliminate redundant parameters, normalize the PI controllers by fixing their
proportional gain Kp to 1:
PI_L.Kp.Value = 1;
PI_V.Kp.Value = 1;
PI_L.Kp.Free = false;
PI_V.Kp.Free = false;
Next construct a model C0 of the controller
in Figure 2.
C0 = blkdiag(PI_L,PI_V) * DM * [eye(2) -eye(2)];
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-67
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
% Note: I/O names should be consistent with those of G
C0.InputName = {'Dsp','Bsp','yD','yB'};
C0.OutputName = {'L','V'};
Now tune the controller parameters with looptune as done previously.
% Crossover band
wc = [0.1,0.5];
% Tracking requirement
TR = TuningGoal.Tracking({'Dsp','Bsp'},{'yD','yB'},15);
% Disturbance rejection requirement
DR = TuningGoal.StepRejection({'L','V'},{'yD','yB'},4,20);
[~,C] = looptune(G,C0,wc,TR,DR);
Final: Peak gain = 1, Iterations = 70
Achieved target gain value TargetGain=1.
To validate the design, close the loop with the tuned compensator C and simulate the step
responses for setpoint tracking and disturbance rejection. Also compare the open- and
closed-loop disturbance rejection characteristics in the frequency domain.
Tcl = connect(G,C,{'Dsp','Bsp','L','V'},{'yD','yB'});
Ttrack = Tcl(:,[1 2]);
step(Ttrack,40), grid, title('Setpoint tracking')
7-68
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column
Treject = Tcl(:,[3 4]);
Treject.InputName = {'dL','dV'};
step(Treject,40), grid, title('Disturbance rejection')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-69
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
clf, sigma(G,Treject), grid
title('Rejection of input disturbances')
legend('Open-loop','Closed-loop')
7-70
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Decoupling Controller for a Distillation Column
The results are similar to those obtained in Simulink.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-71
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System
This example shows how to use Robust Control Toolbox™ to tune a digital motion control
system.
Motion Control System
The motion system under consideration is shown below.
Figure 1: Digital motion control hardware
This device could be part of some production machine and is intended to move some
load (a gripper, a tool, a nozzle, or anything else that you can imagine) from one angular
position to another and back again. This task is part of the "production cycle" that has to
be completed to create each product or batch of products.
7-72
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System
The digital controller must be tuned to maximize the production speed of the machine
without compromising accuracy and product quality. To do this, we first model the
control system in Simulink using a 4th-order model of the inertia and flexible shaft:
open_system('rct_dmc')
The "Tunable Digital Controller" consists of a gain in series with a lead/lag controller.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-73
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 2: Digital controller
Tuning is complicated by the presence of a flexible mode near 350 rad/s in the plant:
G = linearize('rct_dmc','rct_dmc/Plant Model');
bode(G,{10,1e4}), grid
7-74
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System
Compensator Tuning
We are seeking a 0.5 second response time to a step command in angular position with
minimum overshoot. This corresponds to a target bandwidth of approximately 5 rad/s.
The looptune command offers a convenient way to tune fixed-structure compensators
like the one in this application. To use looptune, first instantiate the slTuner interface
to automatically acquire the control structure from Simulink. Note that the signals of
interest are already marked as Linear Analysis Points in the Simulink model.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_dmc',{'Gain','Leadlag'});
Next use looptune to tune the compensator parameters for the target gain crossover
frequency of 5 rad/s:
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-75
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Measurement = 'Measured Position'; % controller input
Control = 'Leadlag';
% controller output
ST1 = looptune(ST0,Control,Measurement,5);
Final: Peak gain = 0.975, Iterations = 21
Achieved target gain value TargetGain=1.
A final value below or near 1 indicates success. Inspect the tuned values of the gain and
lead/lag filter:
showBlockValue(ST1)
AnalysisPoints_ =
d =
y1
y2
y3
y4
y5
u1
1
0
0
0
0
u2
0
1
0
0
0
u3
0
0
1
0
0
u4
0
0
0
1
0
u5
0
0
0
0
1
Name: AnalysisPoints_
Static gain.
----------------------------------Gain =
d =
y1
u1
2.753e-06
Name: Gain
Static gain.
----------------------------------Leadlag =
30.54 s + 59.01
--------------s + 18.94
Name: Leadlag
Continuous-time transfer function.
Design Validation
7-76
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System
To validate the design, use the slTuner interface to quickly access the closed-loop
transfer functions of interest and compare the responses before and after tuning.
T0 = getIOTransfer(ST0,'Reference','Measured Position');
T1 = getIOTransfer(ST1,'Reference','Measured Position');
step(T0,T1), grid
legend('Original','Tuned')
The tuned response has significantly less overshoot and satisfies the response time
requirement. However these simulations are obtained using a continuous-time lead/
lag compensator (looptune operates in continuous time) so we need to further validate
the design in Simulink using a digital implementation of the lead/lag compensator. Use
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-77
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
writeBlockValue to apply the tuned values to the Simulink model and automatically
discretize the lead/lag compensator to the rate specified in Simulink.
writeBlockValue(ST1)
You can now simulate the response of the continuous-time plant with the digital
controller:
sim('rct_dmc'); % angular position logged in "yout" variable
t = yout.time;
y = yout.signals.values;
step(T1), hold, plot(t,y,'r--')
legend('Continuous','Hybrid (Simulink)')
Current plot held
7-78
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System
The simulations closely match and the coefficients of the digital lead/lag can be read from
the "Leadlag" block in Simulink.
Tuning an Additional Notch Filter
Next try to increase the control bandwidth from 5 to 50 rad/s. Because of the plant
resonance near 350 rad/s, the lead/lag compensator is no longer sufficient to get adequate
stability margins and small overshoot. One remedy is to add a notch filter as shown in
Figure 3.
Figure 3: Digital Controller with Notch Filter
To tune this modified control architecture, create an slTuner instance with the three
tunable blocks.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_dmcNotch',{'Gain','Leadlag','Notch'});
By default the "Notch" block is parameterized as any second-order transfer function. To
retain the notch structure
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-79
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
as real parameters and create a parametric model N of
specify the coefficients
the transfer function shown above:
wn = realp('wn',300);
zeta1 = realp('zeta1',1);
zeta1.Maximum = 1;
zeta2 = realp('zeta2',1);
zeta2.Maximum = 1;
N = tf([1 2*zeta1*wn wn^2],[1 2*zeta2*wn wn^2]);
% zeta1 <= 1
% zeta2 <= 1
% tunable notch filter
Then associate this parametric notch model with the "Notch" block in the Simulink
model. Because the control system is tuned in the continuous time, you can use a
continuous-time parameterization of the notch filter even though the "Notch" block itself
is discrete.
setBlockParam(ST0,'Notch',N);
Next use looptune to jointly tune the "Gain", "Leadlag", and "Notch" blocks with a
50 rad/s target crossover frequency. To eliminate residual oscillations from the plant
resonance, specify a target loop shape with a -40 dB/decade roll-off past 50 rad/s.
% Specify target loop shape with a few frequency points
Freqs = [5 50 500];
Gains = [10 1 0.01];
TLS = TuningGoal.LoopShape('Notch',frd(Gains,Freqs));
Measurement = 'Measured Position'; % controller input
% controller output
Control = 'Notch';
ST2 = looptune(ST0,Control,Measurement,TLS);
Final: Peak gain = 1.05, Iterations = 66
The final gain is close to 1, indicating that all requirements are met. Compare the closedloop step response with the previous designs.
T2 = getIOTransfer(ST2,'Reference','Measured Position');
clf
step(T0,T1,T2,1.5), grid
legend('Original','Lead/lag','Lead/lag + notch')
7-80
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System
To verify that the notch filter performs as expected, evaluate the total compensator C and
the open-loop response L and compare the Bode responses of G, C, L:
% Get tuned block values (in the order blocks are listed in ST2.TunedBlocks)
[g,LL,N] = getBlockValue(ST2);
C = N * LL * g;
L = getLoopTransfer(ST2,'Notch',-1);
bode(G,C,L,{1e1,1e3}), grid
legend('G','C','L')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-81
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
This Bode plot confirms that the plant resonance has been correctly "notched out."
Discretizing the Notch Filter
Again use writeBlockValue to discretize the tuned lead/lag and notch filters and write
their values back to Simulink. Compare the MATLAB and Simulink responses:
writeBlockValue(ST2)
sim('rct_dmcNotch');
t = yout.time;
y = yout.signals.values;
step(T2), hold, plot(t,y,'r--')
legend('Continuous','Hybrid (Simulink)')
7-82
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System
Current plot held
The Simulink response exhibits small residual oscillations. The notch filter discretization
is the likely culprit because the notch frequency is close to the Nyquist frequency
pi/0.002=1570 rad/s. By default the notch is discretized using the ZOH method.
Compare this with the Tustin method prewarped at the notch frequency:
wn = damp(N);
Ts = 0.002;
% natural frequency of the notch filter
% sample time of discrete notch filter
Nd1 = c2d(N,Ts,'zoh');
Nd2 = c2d(N,Ts,'tustin',c2dOptions('PrewarpFrequency',wn(1)));
clf, bode(N,Nd1,Nd2)
legend('Continuous','Discretized with ZOH','Discretized with Tustin',...
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-83
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
'Location','NorthWest')
The ZOH method has significant distortion and prewarped Tustin should be used
instead. To do this, specify the desired rate conversion method for the notch filter block:
setBlockRateConversion(ST2,'Notch','tustin',wn(1))
writeBlockValue(ST2)
writeBlockValue now uses Tustin prewarped at the notch frequency to discretize the
notch filter and write it back to Simulink. Verify that this gets rid of the oscillations.
sim('rct_dmcNotch');
t = yout.time;
y = yout.signals.values;
7-84
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System
step(T2), hold, plot(t,y,'r--')
legend('Continuous','Hybrid (Simulink)')
Current plot held
Discrete-Time Tuning
Alternatively, you can tune the controller directly in discrete time to avoid discretization
issues with the notch filter. To do this, specify that the Simulink model should be
linearized and tuned at the controller sample time of 0.002 seconds:
ST0.Ts = 0.002;
To prevent high-gain control and saturations, add a requirement that limits the gain
from reference to control signal (output of Notch block).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-85
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
GL = TuningGoal.Gain('Reference','Notch',0.01);
Now retune the controller at the specified sampling rate and verify the tuned open- and
closed-loop responses.
ST2 = looptune(ST0,Control,Measurement,TLS,GL);
% Closed-loop responses
T2 = getIOTransfer(ST2,'Reference','Measured Position');
clf
step(T0,T1,T2,1.5), grid
legend('Original','Lead/lag','Lead/lag + notch')
Final: Peak gain = 1.04, Iterations = 46
7-86
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Digital Motion Control System
% Open-loop responses
[g,LL,N] = getBlockValue(ST2);
C = N * LL * g;
L = getLoopTransfer(ST2,'Notch',-1);
bode(G,C,L,{1e1,2e3}), grid
legend('G','C','L')
The results are similar to those obtained when tuning the controller in continuous time.
Now validate the digital controller against the continuous-time plant in Simulink.
writeBlockValue(ST2)
sim('rct_dmcNotch');
t = yout.time;
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-87
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
y = yout.signals.values;
step(T2), hold, plot(t,y,'r--')
legend('Discrete','Hybrid (Simulink)')
Current plot held
This time, the hybrid response closely matches its discrete-time approximation and no
further adjustment of the notch filter is required.
7-88
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator
This example shows how to use Robust Control Toolbox™ to tune the current and
velocity loops in a linear electric actuator with saturation limits.
Linear Electric Actuator Model
Open the Simulink model of the linear electric actuator:
open_system('rct_linact')
The electrical and mechanical components are modeled using SimElectronics and
SimMechanics. The control system consists of two cascaded feedback loops controlling the
driving current and angular speed of the DC motor.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-89
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 1: Current and Speed Controllers.
Note that the inner-loop (current) controller is a proportional gain while the outer-loop
(speed) controller has proportional and integral actions. The output of both controllers is
limited to plus/minus 5.
Design Specifications
We need to tune the proportional and integral gains to respond to a 2000 rpm speed
demand in about 0.1 seconds with minimum overshoot. The initial gain settings in the
model are P=50 and PI(s)=0.2+0.1/s and the corresponding response is shown in Figure 2.
This response is too slow and too sensitive to load disturbances.
7-90
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator
Figure 2: Untuned Response.
Control System Tuning
You can use systune to jointly tune both feedback loops. To set up the design, create
an instance of the slTuner interface with the list of tuned blocks. All blocks and signals
are specified by their names in the model. The model is linearized at t=0.5 to avoid
discontinuities in some derivatives at t=0.
TunedBlocks = {'Current PID','Speed PID'};
tLinearize = 0.5; % linearize at t=0.5
% Create tuning interface
ST0 = slTuner('rct_linact',TunedBlocks,tLinearize);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-91
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The data structure ST0 contains a description of the control system and its tunable
elements. Next specify that the DC motor should follow a 2000 rpm speed demand in 0.1
seconds:
TR = TuningGoal.Tracking('Speed Demand (rpm)','rpm',0.1);
You can now tune the proportional and integral gains with looptune:
ST1 = systune(ST0,TR);
Final: Soft = 1.12, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 34
This returns an updated description ST1 containing the tuned gain values. To validate
this design, plot the closed-loop response from speed demand to speed:
T1 = getIOTransfer(ST1,'Speed Demand (rpm)',{'rpm','i'});
figure
step(T1)
7-92
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator
The response looks good in the linear domain so push the tuned gain values to Simulink
and further validate the design in the nonlinear model.
writeBlockValue(ST1)
The nonlinear simulation results appear in Figure 3. The nonlinear behavior is far worse
than the linear approximation, a discrepancy that can be traced to saturations in the
inner loop (see Figure 4).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-93
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 3: Nonlinear Simulation of Tuned Controller.
7-94
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator
Figure 4: Current Controller Output (limited to plus/minus 5).
Preventing Saturations
So far we have only specified a desired response time for the outer (speed) loop. This
leaves systune free to allocate the control effort between the inner and outer loops.
Saturations in the inner loop suggest that the proportional gain is too high and that
some rebalancing is needed. One possible remedy is to explicitly limit the gain from the
speed command to the outputs of the P and PI controllers. For a speed reference of 2000
rpm and saturation limits of plus/minus 5, the average gain should not exceed 5/2000 =
0.0025. To be conservative, we can try to keep the gain from speed reference to controller
outputs below 0.001. To do this, add two gain requirements and retune the controller
gains with all three requirements in place.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-95
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
% Mark the control signals as points of interest so that they can be
% referenced in the gain requirements
addPoint(ST0,{'Current PID','Speed PID'})
% Limit gain from speed demand to control signals to avoid saturation
MG1 = TuningGoal.Gain('Speed Demand (rpm)','Speed PID',0.001);
MG2 = TuningGoal.Gain('Speed Demand (rpm)','Current PID',0.001);
% Retune with these additional requirements
[ST2,~,~,info] = systune(ST0,[TR,MG1,MG2]);
Final: Soft = 1.39, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 42
The final gain 1.39 indicates that the requirements are nearly but not exactly met (all
requirements are met when the final gain is less than 1). Use viewSpec to inspect how
the tuned controllers fare against each requirement.
figure('Position',[100,100,560,550])
viewSpec([TR,MG1,MG2],ST2,info)
7-96
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator
Next compare the two designs in the linear domain.
T2 = getIOTransfer(ST2,'Speed Demand (rpm)',{'rpm','i'});
figure
step(T1,'b',T2,'g--')
legend('Initial tuning','Tuning with Gain Constraints')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-97
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The second design is less aggressive but still meets the response time requirement.
Finally, push the new tuned gain values to the Simulink model and simulate the
response to a 2000 rpm speed demand and 500 N load disturbance. The simulation
results appear in Figure 5 and the current controller output is shown in Figure 6.
writeBlockValue(ST2)
7-98
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Control of a Linear Electric Actuator
Figure 5: Nonlinear Response of Tuning with Gain Constraints.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-99
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 6: Current Controller Output.
The nonlinear responses are now satisfactory and the current loop is no longer
saturating. The additional gain constraints have forced systune to re-distribute the
control effort between the inner and outer loops so as to avoid saturation.
7-100
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm
Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm
This example shows how to use looptune to tune a multi-loop controller for a 4-DOF
robotic arm manipulator.
Robotic Arm Model and Controller
This example uses the four degree-of-freedom robotic arm shown below. This arm
consists of four joints labeled from base to tip: "Turntable", "Bicep", "Forearm", and
"Wrist". Each joint is actuated by a DC motor except for the Bicep joint which uses two
DC motors in tandem.
Figure 1: Robotic arm manipulator.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-101
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Open the Simulink model of the robot arm.
open_system('rct_robotarm')
The controller consists of four PID controllers (one per joint). Each PID controller is
implemented using the "2-DOF PID Controller" block from the Simulink library (see PID
Tuning for Setpoint Tracking vs. Disturbance Rejection example for motivation).
7-102
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm
Figure 2: Controller structure.
Typically, such multi-loop controllers are tuned sequentially by tuning one PID loop
at a time and cycling through the loops until the overall behavior is satisfactory. This
process can be time consuming and is not guaranteed to converge to the best overall
tuning. Alternatively, you can use systune or looptune to jointly tune all four PID
loops subject to system-level requirements such as response time and minimum crosscoupling.
In this example, the arm must move to a particular configuration in about 1 second with
smooth angular motion at each joint. The arm starts in a fully extended vertical position
with all joint angles at zero. The end configuration is specified by the angular positions:
Turntable = 60 deg, Bicep = -10 deg, Forearm = 60 deg, Wrist = 90 deg. The angular
trajectories for the original PID settings are shown below. Clearly the response is too
sluggish and the forearm is wobbling.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-103
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 3: Untuned angular response.
Linearizing the Plant
The robot arm dynamics are nonlinear. To understand whether the arm can be controlled
with one set of PID gains, linearize the plant at various points (snapshot times) along
the trajectory of interest. Here "plant" refers to the dynamics between the control signals
(outputs of PID blocks) and the measurement signals (output of "Robot Arm" block).
SnapshotTimes = 0:1:5;
7-104
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm
% Plant is from PID outputs to Robot Arm outputs
LinIOs = [...
linio('rct_robotarm/Controller/TurntablePID',1,'openinput'),...
linio('rct_robotarm/Controller/BicepPID',1,'openinput'),...
linio('rct_robotarm/Controller/ForearmPID',1,'openinput'),...
linio('rct_robotarm/Controller/WristPID',1,'openinput'),...
linio('rct_robotarm/Robot Arm',1,'output')];
LinOpt = linearizeOptions('SampleTime',0); % seek continuous-time model
G = linearize('rct_robotarm',LinIOs,SnapshotTimes,LinOpt);
size(G)
6x1 array of state-space models.
Each model has 4 outputs, 4 inputs, and between 0 and 13 states.
The robot arm model linearizes to zero at t=0 due to the Bicep and Forearm joints hitting
their mechanical limits:
getPeakGain(G(:,:,1))
ans =
0
Plot the gap between the linearized models at t=1,2,3,4 seconds and the final model at
t=5 seconds.
G5 = G(:,:,end); % t=5
G5.SamplingGrid = [];
sigma(G5,G(:,:,2:5)-G5,{1e-3,1e3}), grid
title('Variation of linearized dynamics along trajectory')
legend('Linearization at t=5 s','Absolute variation',...
'location','SouthWest')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-105
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
While the dynamics vary significantly at low and high frequency, the variation drops to
less than 10% near 10 rad/s, which is roughly the desired control bandwidth. Small plant
variations near the target gain crossover frequency suggest that we can control the arm
with a single set of PID gains and need not resort to gain scheduling.
Tuning the PID Controllers with LOOPTUNE
With looptune, you can directly tune all four PID loops to achieve the desired response
time with minimal loop interaction and adequate MIMO stability margins. The controller
is tuned in continuous time and automatically discretized when writing the PID gains
back to Simulink. Use the slTuner interface to specify which blocks must be tuned and
to locate the plant/controller boundary.
% Linearize the plant at t=3s
7-106
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm
tLinearize = 3;
% Create slTuner interface
TunedBlocks = {'TurntablePID','BicepPID','ForearmPID','WristPID'};
ST0 = slTuner('rct_robotarm',TunedBlocks,tLinearize);
% Mark outputs of PID blocks as plant inputs
addPoint(ST0,TunedBlocks)
% Mark joint angles as plant outputs
addPoint(ST0,'Robot Arm')
In its simplest use, looptune only needs to know the target control bandwidth, which
should be at least twice the reciprocal of the desired response time. Here the desired
response time is 1 second so try a target bandwidth of 5 rad/s (bearing in mind that the
plant dynamics vary least near 10 rad/s).
wc = 5; % target gain crossover frequency
Controls = TunedBlocks;
% actuator commands
Measurements = 'Robot Arm'; % joint angle measurements
ST1 = looptune(ST0,Controls,Measurements,wc);
Final: Peak gain = 0.999, Iterations = 59
Achieved target gain value TargetGain=1.
A final value near or below 1 indicates that looptune achieved the requested
bandwidth. Compare the responses to a step command in angular position for the initial
and tuned controllers.
RefSignals = {'tREF','bREF','fREF','wREF'};
T0 = getIOTransfer(ST0,RefSignals,'Robot Arm');
T1 = getIOTransfer(ST1,RefSignals,'Robot Arm');
opt = timeoptions; opt.IOGrouping = 'all'; opt.Grid = 'on';
stepplot(T0,'b--',T1,'r',4,opt)
legend('Initial','Tuned','location','SouthEast')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-107
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The four curves settling near y=1 represent the step responses of each joint, and the
curves settling near y=0 represent the cross-coupling terms. The tuned controller is a
clear improvement but should ideally settle faster with less overshoot.
Exploiting the Second Degree of Freedom
The 2-DOF PID controllers have a feedforward and a feedback component.
7-108
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm
Figure 4: Two degree-of-freedom PID controllers.
By default, looptune only tunes the feedback loop and does not "see" the feedforward
component. This can be confirmed by verifying that the and parameters of the
PID controllers remain set to their initial value
(use showTunable for this
purpose). To take advantage of the feedforward action and reduce overshoot, replace
the bandwidth target by an explicit tracking requirement from reference angles to joint
angles.
TR = TuningGoal.Tracking(RefSignals,'Robot Arm',0.5);
ST2 = looptune(ST0,Controls,Measurements,TR);
Final: Peak gain = 1.06, Iterations = 75
T2 = getIOTransfer(ST2,RefSignals,'Robot Arm');
stepplot(T1,'r--',T2,'g',4,opt)
legend('1-DOF tuning','2-DOF tuning','location','SouthEast')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-109
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The 2-DOF tuning reduces overshoot and takes advantage of the
confirmed by inspecting the tuned PID gains:
and
parameters as
showTunable(ST2)
Block 1: rct_robotarm/Controller/TurntablePID =
1
s
u = Kp (b*r-y) + Ki --- (r-y) + Kd -------- (c*r-y)
s
Tf*s+1
with Kp = 13.164, Ki = 11.199, Kd = 0.59535, Tf = 0.021063, b = 0.83826, c = 1.7721.
Continuous-time 2-DOF PID controller.
7-110
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm
----------------------------------Block 2: rct_robotarm/Controller/BicepPID =
1
s
u = Kp (b*r-y) + Ki --- (r-y) + Kd -------- (c*r-y)
s
Tf*s+1
with Kp = 11.6365, Ki = 6.2564, Kd = 1.558, Tf = 0.44824, b = 0.70427, c = 1.8424.
Continuous-time 2-DOF PID controller.
----------------------------------Block 3: rct_robotarm/Controller/ForearmPID =
1
s
u = Kp (b*r-y) + Ki --- (r-y) + Kd -------- (c*r-y)
s
Tf*s+1
with Kp = 18.9585, Ki = 39.3474, Kd = 1.1049, Tf = 0.014576, b = 0.6217, c = 1.2741.
Continuous-time 2-DOF PID controller.
----------------------------------Block 4: rct_robotarm/Controller/WristPID =
1
s
u = Kp (b*r-y) + Ki --- (r-y) + Kd -------- (c*r-y)
s
Tf*s+1
with Kp = 40.9185, Ki = 5.3925, Kd = 1.4567, Tf = 0.010433, b = 0.97787, c = 0.75324.
Continuous-time 2-DOF PID controller.
Validating the Tuned Controller
The tuned linear responses look satisfactory so write the tuned values of the PID gains
back to the Simulink blocks and simulate the overall maneuver. The simulation results
appear in Figure 5.
writeBlockValue(ST2)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-111
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 5: Tuned angular response.
The responses look good except for the Bicep joint whose response is somewhat sluggish
and jerky. It is tempting to blame this discrepancy on nonlinear effects, but this is in
fact due to cross-coupling effects between the Forearm and Bicep joints. To see this, plot
the step response of these two joints for the actual step changes occurring during the
maneuver (-10 deg for the Bicep joint and 60 deg for the Forearm joint).
H2 = T2(2:3,2:3) * diag([-10 60]);
7-112
% scale by step amplitude
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm
H2.u = {'Bicep','Forearm'};
H2.y = {'Bicep','Forearm'};
step(H2,5), grid
When brought to scale, the first row of plots show that a 60-degree step change in
Forearm position has a sizeable and lasting impact on the Bicep position. This explains
the sluggish Bicep response observed when simultaneously moving all four joints.
Refining The Design
To improve the Bicep response for this specific arm maneuver, we must keep the crosscouplings effects small relative to the final angular displacements in each joint. To do
this, scale the cross-coupling terms in the tracking requirement by the reference angle
amplitudes.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-113
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
JointDisp = [60 10 60 90]; % commanded angular displacements, in degrees
TR.InputScaling = JointDisp;
To prevent jerky transients and avoid overloading the motors, limit the control
bandwidth by imposing -20 dB/decade roll-off past 20 rad/s.
s = tf('s');
RO = TuningGoal.MaxGain(RefSignals,'Robot Arm',20/s);
Finally, explicitly limit the overshoot to 5% and increase the desired phase margin from
its default value of 45 degrees to 60 degrees.
OS = TuningGoal.Overshoot(RefSignals,'Robot Arm',5);
Options = looptuneOptions('PhaseMargin',60);
Retune the controller with the additional requirements in force
ST3 = looptune(ST0,Controls,Measurements,TR,RO,OS,Options);
Final: Peak gain = 1.06, Iterations = 88
Compare the scaled responses with the previous design. Notice the significant reduction
of the coupling between Forearm/Wrist and Bicep motion, both in peak value and total
energy.
T2s = diag(1./JointDisp) * T2 * diag(JointDisp);
T3s = diag(1./JointDisp) * getIOTransfer(ST3,RefSignals,'Robot Arm') * diag(JointDisp);
stepplot(T2s,'g--',T3s,'m',4,opt)
legend('Initial 2-DOF','Refined 2-DOF','location','SouthEast')
7-114
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop PID Control of a Robot Arm
Push the retuned values to Simulink for further validation.
writeBlockValue(ST3)
The simulation results appear in Figure 6. The Bicep response is now on par with the
other joints in terms of settling time and smooth transient.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-115
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 6: Angular response with refined controller.
7-116
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Vibration Control in Three-Story Building
Active Vibration Control in Three-Story Building
This example uses systune to control seismic vibrations in a three-story building.
Background
This example considers an Active Mass Driver (AMD) control system for vibration
isolation in a three-story experimental structure. This setup is used to assess
control design techniques for increasing safety of civil engineering structures during
earthquakes. The structure consists of three stories with an active mass driver on the
top floor which is used to attenuate ground disturbances. This application is borrowed
from "Benchmark Problems in Structural Control: Part I - Active Mass Driver System,"
B.F. Spencer Jr., S.J. Dyke, and H.S. Deoskar, Earthquake Engineering and Structural
Dynamics, 27(11), 1998, pp. 1127-1139.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-117
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
7-118
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Vibration Control in Three-Story Building
Figure 1: Active Mass Driver Control System
The plant P is a 28-state model with the following state variables:
• x(i): displacement of i-th floor relative to the ground (cm)
• xm: displacement of AMD relative to 3rd floor (cm)
• xv(i): velocity of i-th floor relative to the ground (cm/s)
• xvm: velocity of AMD relative to the ground (cm/s)
• xa(i): acceleration of i-th floor relative to the ground (g)
• xam: acceleration of AMD relative to the ground (g)
• d(1)=x(1), d(2)=x(2)-x(1), d(3)=x(3)-x(2): inter-story drifts
The inputs are the ground acceleration xag (in g) and the control signal u. We use 1 g =
981 cm/s^2.
load ThreeStoryData
size(P)
State-space model with 20 outputs, 2 inputs, and 28 states.
Model of Earthquake Acceleration
The earthquake acceleration is modeled as a white noise process filtered through a
Kanai-Tajimi filter.
zg = 0.3;
wg = 37.3;
S0 = 0.03*zg/(pi*wg*(4*zg^2+1));
num = sqrt(S0)*[2*zg*wg wg^2];
den = [1 2*zg*wg wg^2];
F = sqrt(2*pi)*tf(num,den);
F.InputName = 'n';
% white noise input
bodemag(F), grid, title('Kanai-Tajimi filter')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-119
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Open-Loop Characteristics
The effect of an earthquake on the uncontrolled structure can be simulated by injecting a
white noise input n into the plant-filter combination. You can also use covar to directly
compute the standard deviations of the resulting inter-story drifts and accelerations.
% Add Kanai-Tajimi filter to the plant
PF = P*append(F , 1);
% Standard deviations of open-loop drifts
CV = covar(PF('d','n'),1);
d0 = sqrt(diag(CV));
% Standard deviations of open-loop acceleration
7-120
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Vibration Control in Three-Story Building
CV = covar(PF('xa','n'),1);
xa0 = sqrt(diag(CV));
% Plot open-loop RMS values
clf, bar([d0 ; xa0])
title('Drifts and accelerations for uncontrolled structure')
ylabel('Standard deviations')
set(gca,'XTickLabel',{'d(1)','d(2)','d(3)','xa(1)','xa(2)','xa(3)'})
Control Structure and Design Requirements
The control structure is depicted in Figure 2.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-121
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 2: Control Structure
7-122
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Vibration Control in Three-Story Building
The controller uses measurements yxa and yxam of xa and xam to generate the control
signal u. Physically, the control u is an electrical current driving an hydraulic actuator
that moves the masses of the AMD. The design requirements involve:
• Minimization of the inter-story drifts d(i) and accelerations xa(i)
• Hard constraints on control effort in terms of mass displacement xm, mass
acceleration xam, and control effort u
All design requirements are assessed in terms of standard deviations of the
corresponding signals. Use TuningGoal.Variance to express these requirements
and scale each variable by its open-loop standard deviation to seek uniform relative
improvement in all variables.
% Soft requirements on drifts and accelerations
Soft = [...
TuningGoal.Variance('n','d(1)', d0(1)) ; ...
TuningGoal.Variance('n','d(2)', d0(2)) ; ...
TuningGoal.Variance('n','d(3)', d0(3)) ; ...
TuningGoal.Variance('n','xa(1)', xa0(1)) ; ...
TuningGoal.Variance('n','xa(2)', xa0(2)) ; ...
TuningGoal.Variance('n','xa(3)', xa0(3))];
% Hard requirements on control effort
Hard = [...
TuningGoal.Variance('n','xm', 3) ; ...
TuningGoal.Variance('n','xam', 2) ; ...
TuningGoal.Variance('n','u', 1)];
Controller Tuning
systune lets you tune virtually any controller structure subject to these requirements.
The controller complexity can be adjusted by trial-and-error, starting with sufficiently
high order to gauge the limits of performance, then reducing the order until you observe
a noticeable performance degradation. For this example, start with a 5th-order controller
with no feedthrough term.
C = ltiblock.ss('C',5,1,4);
C.d.Value = 0;
C.d.Free = false;
% Fix feedthrough to zero
Construct a tunable model T0 of the closed-loop system of Figure 2 and tune the
controller parameters with systune.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-123
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
% Build tunable closed-loop model
T0 = lft(PF,C);
% Tune controller parameters
[T,fSoft,gHard] = systune(T0,Soft,Hard);
Final: Soft = 0.601, Hard = 0.99589, Iterations = 199
The summary indicates that we achieved an overall reduction of 40% in standard
deviations (Soft = 0.6) while meeting all hard constraints (Hard < 1).
Validation
Compute the standard deviations of the drifts and accelerations for the controlled
structure and compare with the uncontrolled results. The AMD control system yields
significant reduction of both drift and acceleration.
% Standard deviations of closed-loop drifts
CV = covar(T('d','n'),1);
d = sqrt(diag(CV));
% Standard deviations of closed-loop acceleration
CV = covar(T('xa','n'),1);
xa = sqrt(diag(CV));
% Compare open- and closed-loop values
clf, bar([d0 d; xa0 xa])
title('Drifts and accelerations')
ylabel('Standard deviations')
set(gca,'XTickLabel',{'d(1)','d(2)','d(3)','xa(1)','xa(2)','xa(3)'})
legend('Uncontrolled','Controlled','location','NorthWest')
7-124
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Vibration Control in Three-Story Building
Simulate the response of the 3-story structure to an earthquake-like excitation in both
open and closed loop. The earthquake acceleration is modeled as a white noise process
colored by the Kanai-Tajimi filter.
% Sampled white noise process
rng('default')
dt = 1e-3;
t = 0:dt:500;
n = randn(1,length(t))/sqrt(dt); % white noise signal
% Open-loop simulation
ysimOL = lsim(PF(:,1), n , t);
% Closed-loop simulation
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-125
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
ysimCL = lsim(T, n , t);
% Drifts
clf, subplot(311); plot(t,ysimOL(:,13),'b',t,ysimCL(:,13),'r'); grid;
title('Inter-story drift d(1) (blue=open loop, red=closed loop)'); ylabel('cm');
subplot(312); plot(t,ysimOL(:,14),'b',t,ysimCL(:,14),'r'); grid;
title('Inter-story drift d(2)'); ylabel('cm');
subplot(313); plot(t,ysimOL(:,15),'b',t,ysimCL(:,15),'r'); grid;
title('Inter-story drift d(3)'); ylabel('cm');
% Accelerations
clf, subplot(311); plot(t,ysimOL(:,9),'b',t,ysimCL(:,9),'r'); grid;
title('Acceleration of 1st floor xa(1) (blue=open loop, red=closed loop)');
7-126
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
ylabel('g'
Active Vibration Control in Three-Story Building
subplot(312); plot(t,ysimOL(:,10),'b',t,ysimCL(:,10),'r'); grid;
title('Acceleration of 2nd floor xa(2)'); ylabel('g');
subplot(313); plot(t,ysimOL(:,11),'b',t,ysimCL(:,11),'r'); grid;
title('Acceleration of 3rd floor xa(3)'); ylabel('g');
% Control variables
clf, subplot(311); plot(t,ysimCL(:,4),'r'); grid;
title('AMD position xm'); ylabel('cm');
subplot(312); plot(t,ysimCL(:,12),'r'); grid;
title('AMD acceleration xam'); ylabel('g');
subplot(313); plot(t,ysimCL(:,16),'r'); grid;
title('Control signal u');
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-127
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Plot the root-mean-square (RMS) of the simulated signals for both the controlled and
uncontrolled scenarios. Assuming ergodicity, the RMS performance can be estimated
from a single sufficiently long simulation of the process and coincides with the standard
deviations computed earlier. Indeed the RMS plot closely matches the standard deviation
plot obtained earlier.
clf, bar([std(ysimOL(:,13:15)) std(ysimOL(:,9:11)) ; ...
std(ysimCL(:,13:15)) std(ysimCL(:,9:11))]')
title('Drifts and accelerations')
ylabel('Simulated RMS values')
set(gca,'XTickLabel',{'d(1)','d(2)','d(3)','xa(1)','xa(2)','xa(3)'})
legend('Uncontrolled','Controlled','location','NorthWest')
7-128
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Active Vibration Control in Three-Story Building
Overall, the controller achieves significant reduction of ground vibration both in terms of
drift and acceleration for all stories while meeting the hard constraints on control effort
and mass displacement.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-129
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot
This example shows how to use Robust Control Toolbox™ to tune a two-loop autopilot
controlling the pitch rate and vertical acceleration of an airframe.
Model of Airframe Autopilot
The airframe dynamics and the autopilot are modeled in Simulink.
open_system('rct_airframe1')
The autopilot consists of two cascaded loops. The inner loop controls the pitch rate q,
and the outer loop controls the vertical acceleration az in response to the pilot stick
command azref. In this architecture, the tunable elements include the PI controller
gains ("az Control" block) and the pitch-rate gain ("q Gain" block). The autopilot must be
tuned to respond to a step command azref in about 1 second with minimal overshoot. In
this example, we tune the autopilot gains for one flight condition corresponding to zero
incidence and a speed of 984 m/s.
To analyze the airframe dynamics, trim the airframe for
and
. The
trim condition corresponds to zero normal acceleration and pitching moment ( and
steady). Use findop to compute the corresponding closed-loop operating condition. Note
7-130
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot
that we added a "delta trim" input port so that findop can adjust the fin deflection to
produce the desired equilibrium of forces and moments.
opspec = operspec('rct_airframe1');
% Specify trim condition
% Xe,Ze: known, not steady
opspec.States(1).Known = [1;1];
opspec.States(1).SteadyState = [0;0];
% u,w: known, w steady
opspec.States(3).Known = [1 1];
opspec.States(3).SteadyState = [0 1];
% theta: known, not steady
opspec.States(2).Known = 1;
opspec.States(2).SteadyState = 0;
% q: unknown, steady
opspec.States(4).Known = 0;
opspec.States(4).SteadyState = 1;
% integrator states unknown, not steady
opspec.States(5).SteadyState = 0;
opspec.States(6).SteadyState = 0;
op = findop('rct_airframe1',opspec);
Operating Point Search Report:
--------------------------------Operating Report for the Model rct_airframe1.
(Time-Varying Components Evaluated at time t=0)
Operating point specifications were successfully met.
States:
---------(1.) rct_airframe1/Airframe Model/Aerodynamics & Equations
x:
0
dx:
984
x:
-3.05e+03
dx:
0
(2.) rct_airframe1/Airframe Model/Aerodynamics & Equations
x:
0
dx:
-0.00972
(3.) rct_airframe1/Airframe Model/Aerodynamics & Equations
x:
984
dx:
22.7
x:
0
dx:
-1.44e-11 (0)
(4.) rct_airframe1/Airframe Model/Aerodynamics & Equations
x:
-0.00972
dx:
1.72e-16 (0)
(5.) rct_airframe1/Integrator
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
of Motion/ Equations of Moti
of Motion/ Equations of Moti
of Motion/ Equations of Moti
of Motion/ Equations of Moti
7-131
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
x:
0.000708
dx:
-0.00972
(6.) rct_airframe1/az Control/Integrator
x:
0
dx:
0.000242
Inputs:
---------(1.) rct_airframe1/delta trim
u:
0.000708
[-Inf Inf]
Outputs: None
----------
Linearize the "Airframe Model" block for the computed trim condition op and plot the
gains from the fin deflection delta to az and q:
G = linearize('rct_airframe1','rct_airframe1/Airframe Model',op);
G.InputName = 'delta';
G.OutputName = {'az','q'};
bodemag(G), grid
7-132
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot
Note that the airframe model has an unstable pole:
pole(G)
ans =
-0.0320
-0.0255
0.1253
-29.4685
Frequency-Domain Tuning with LOOPTUNE
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-133
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
You can use the looptune function to automatically tune multi-loop control systems
subject to basic requirements such as integral action, adequate stability margins, and
desired bandwidth. To apply looptune to the autopilot model, create an instance of
the slTuner interface and designate the Simulink blocks "az Control" and "q Gain" as
tunable. Also specify the trim condition op to correctly linearize the airframe dynamics.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_airframe1',{'az Control','q Gain'},op);
Mark the reference, control, and measurement signals as points of interest for analysis
and tuning.
addPoint(ST0,{'az ref','delta fin','az','q'});
Finally, tune the control system parameters to meet the 1 second response time
requirement. In the frequency domain, this roughly corresponds to a gain crossover
frequency wc = 5 rad/s for the open-loop response at the plant input "delta fin".
wc = 5;
Controls = 'delta fin';
Measurements = {'az','q'};
[ST,gam,Info] = looptune(ST0,Controls,Measurements,wc);
Final: Peak gain = 1.01, Iterations = 52
The requirements are normalized so a final value near 1 means that all requirements are
met. Confirm this by graphically validating the design.
figure('Position',[100,100,560,714])
loopview(ST,Info)
7-134
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-135
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The first plot confirms that the open-loop response has integral action and the desired
gain crossover frequency while the second plot shows that the MIMO stability margins
are satisfactory (the blue curve should remain below the yellow bound). Next check the
response from the step command azref to the vertical acceleration az:
T = getIOTransfer(ST,'az ref','az');
figure, step(T,5)
The acceleration az does not track azref despite the presence of an integrator in the
loop. This is because the feedback loop acts on the two variables az and q and we have
not specified which one should track azref.
Adding a Tracking Requirement
7-136
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot
To remedy this issue, add an explicit requirement that az should follow the step
command azref with a 1 second response time. Also relax the gain crossover
requirement to the interval [3,12] to let the tuner find the appropriate gain crossover
frequency.
TrackReq = TuningGoal.Tracking('az ref','az',1);
ST = looptune(ST0,Controls,Measurements,[3,12],TrackReq);
Final: Peak gain = 1.23, Iterations = 49
The step response from azref to az is now satisfactory:
Tr1 = getIOTransfer(ST,'az ref','az');
step(Tr1,5), grid
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-137
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Also check the disturbance rejection characteristics by looking at the responses from a
disturbance entering at the plant input
Td1 = getIOTransfer(ST,'delta fin','az');
bodemag(Td1), grid
step(Td1,5), grid, title('Disturbance rejection')
7-138
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot
Use showBlockValue to see the tuned values of the PI controller and inner-loop gain
showBlockValue(ST)
AnalysisPoints_ =
d =
y1
y2
y3
y4
u1
1
0
0
0
u2
0
1
0
0
u3
0
0
1
0
u4
0
0
0
1
Name: AnalysisPoints_
Static gain.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-139
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
----------------------------------az_Control =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.00166, Ki = 0.0017
Name: az_Control
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------q_Gain =
d =
y1
u1
1.987
Name: q_Gain
Static gain.
If this design is satisfactory, use writeBlockValue to apply the tuned values to the
Simulink model and simulate the tuned controller in Simulink.
writeBlockValue(ST)
MIMO Design with SYSTUNE
Cascaded loops are commonly used for autopilots. Yet one may wonder how a single
MIMO controller that uses both az and q to generate the actuator command delta fin
would compare with the two-loop architecture. Trying new control architectures is easy
with systune or looptune. For variety, we now use systune to tune the following
MIMO architecture.
open_system('rct_airframe2')
7-140
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot
As before, compute the trim condition for
and
.
opspec = operspec('rct_airframe2');
% Specify trim condition
% Xe,Ze: known, not steady
opspec.States(1).Known = [1;1];
opspec.States(1).SteadyState = [0;0];
% u,w: known, w steady
opspec.States(3).Known = [1 1];
opspec.States(3).SteadyState = [0 1];
% theta: known, not steady
opspec.States(2).Known = 1;
opspec.States(2).SteadyState = 0;
% q: unknown, steady
opspec.States(4).Known = 0;
opspec.States(4).SteadyState = 1;
% controller states unknown, not steady
opspec.States(5).SteadyState = [0;0];
op = findop('rct_airframe2',opspec);
Operating Point Search Report:
---------------------------------
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-141
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Operating Report for the Model rct_airframe2.
(Time-Varying Components Evaluated at time t=0)
Operating point specifications were successfully met.
States:
---------(1.) rct_airframe2/Airframe Model/Aerodynamics & Equations
x:
0
dx:
984
x:
-3.05e+03
dx:
0
(2.) rct_airframe2/Airframe Model/Aerodynamics & Equations
x:
0
dx:
-0.00972
(3.) rct_airframe2/Airframe Model/Aerodynamics & Equations
x:
984
dx:
22.7
x:
0
dx:
2.46e-11 (0)
(4.) rct_airframe2/Airframe Model/Aerodynamics & Equations
x:
-0.00972
dx:
-4.02e-16 (0)
(5.) rct_airframe2/MIMO Controller
x:
0.000654
dx:
-0.009
x:
1.06e-18
dx:
0.0303
of Motion/ Equations of Moti
of Motion/ Equations of Moti
of Motion/ Equations of Moti
of Motion/ Equations of Moti
Inputs:
---------(1.) rct_airframe2/delta trim
u:
0.000436
[-Inf Inf]
Outputs: None
----------
As with looptune, use the slTuner interface to configure the Simulink model for
tuning. Note that the signals of interest are already marked as Linear Analysis points in
the Simulink model.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_airframe2','MIMO Controller',op);
Try a second-order MIMO controller with zero feedthrough from e to delta fin. To
do this, create the desired controller parameterization and associate it with the "MIMO
Controller" block using setBlockParam:
C0 = ltiblock.ss('C',2,1,2);
C0.d.Value(1) = 0; C0.d.Free(1) = false;
setBlockParam(ST0,'MIMO Controller',C0)
% Second-order controller
% Fix D(1) to zero
Next create the tuning requirements. Here we use the following four requirements:
7-142
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot
1
Tracking: az should respond in about 1 second to the azref command
2
Bandwidth and roll-off: The loop gain at delta fin should roll off after 25 rad/s
with a -20 dB/decade slope
3
Stability margins: The margins at delta fin should exceed 7 dB and 45 degrees
4
Disturbance rejection: The attenuation factor for input disturbances should be 40
dB at 1 rad/s increasing to 100 dB at 0.001 rad/s.
% Tracking
Req1 = TuningGoal.Tracking('az ref','az',1);
% Bandwidth and roll-off
Req2 = TuningGoal.MaxLoopGain('delta fin',tf(25,[1 0]));
% Margins
Req3 = TuningGoal.Margins('delta fin',7,45);
% Disturbance rejection
% Use an FRD model to sketch the desired attenuation profile with a few points
Freqs = [0 0.001 1];
MinAtt = [100 100 40]; % in dB
Req4 = TuningGoal.Rejection('delta fin',frd(db2mag(MinAtt),Freqs));
Req4.Focus = [0 1];
You can now use systune to tune the controller parameters subject to these
requirements.
AllReqs = [Req1,Req2,Req3 Req4];
Opt = systuneOptions('RandomStart',3);
rng(0)
[ST,fSoft,~,Info] = systune(ST0,AllReqs,Opt);
Final:
Final:
Final:
Final:
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
=
=
=
=
1.14,
1.14,
1.14,
1.14,
Hard
Hard
Hard
Hard
=
=
=
=
-Inf,
-Inf,
-Inf,
-Inf,
Iterations
Iterations
Iterations
Iterations
=
=
=
=
121
75
83
113
The best design has an overall objective value close to 1, indicating that all four
requirements are nearly met. Use viewSpec to inspect each requirement for the best
design.
figure('Position',[100,100,987,474])
viewSpec(AllReqs,ST,Info)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-143
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Compute the closed-loop responses and compare with the two-loop design.
T = getIOTransfer(ST,{'az ref','delta fin'},'az');
figure
step(Tr1,'b',T(1),'r',5)
title('Tracking'), legend('Cascade','2 dof')
7-144
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of a Two-Loop Autopilot
step(Td1,'b',T(2),'r',5)
title('Disturbance rejection'), legend('Cascade','2 dof')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-145
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The tracking performance is similar but the second design has better disturbance
rejection properties.
7-146
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop Control of a Helicopter
Multi-Loop Control of a Helicopter
This example shows how to use Robust Control Toolbox™ to tune a multi-loop controller
for a rotorcraft.
Helicopter Model
This example uses an 8-state helicopter model at the hovering trim condition. The state
vector x = [u,w,q,theta,v,p,phi,r] consists of
• Longitudinal velocity u (m/s)
• Lateral velocity v (m/s)
• Normal velocity w (m/s)
• Pitch angle theta (deg)
• Roll angle phi (deg)
• Roll rate p (deg/s)
• Pitch rate q (deg/s)
• Yaw rate r (deg/s).
The controller generates commands ds,dc,dT in degrees for the longitudinal cyclic,
lateral cyclic, and tail rotor collective using measurements of theta, phi, p, q, and r.
Control Architecture
The following Simulink model depicts the control architecture:
open_system('rct_helico')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-147
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The control system consists of two feedback loops. The inner loop (static output feedback)
provides stability augmentation and decoupling. The outer loop (PI controllers) provides
the desired setpoint tracking performance. The main control objectives are as follows:
• Track setpoint changes in theta, phi, and r with zero steady-state error, rise times
of about 2 seconds, minimal overshoot, and minimal cross-coupling
• Limit the control bandwidth to guard against neglected high-frequency rotor
dynamics and measurement noise
• Provide strong multivariable gain and phase margins (robustness to simultaneous
gain/phase variations at the plant inputs and outputs, see loopmargin for details).
We use lowpass filters with cutoff at 40 rad/s to partially enforce the second objective.
Controller Tuning
You can jointly tune the inner and outer loops with the systune command. This
command only requires models of the plant and controller along with the desired
bandwidth (which is function of the desired response time). When the control system is
modeled in Simulink, you can use the slTuner interface to quickly set up the tuning
task. Create an instance of this interface with the list of blocks to be tuned.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_helico',{'PI1','PI2','PI3','SOF'});
7-148
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop Control of a Helicopter
Each tunable block is automatically parameterized according to its type and initialized
with its value in the Simulink model (
for the PI controllers and zero for the static
output-feedback gain). Simulating the model shows that the control system is unstable
for these initial values:
Mark the I/O signals of interest for setpoint tracking, and identify the plant inputs and
outputs (control and measurement signals) where the stability margin are measured.
addPoint(ST0,{'theta-ref','phi-ref','r-ref'})
addPoint(ST0,{'theta','phi','r'})
addPoint(ST0,{'u','y'});
% setpoint commands
% corresponding outputs
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-149
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Finally, capture the design requirements using TuningGoal objects. We use the
following requirements for this example:
• Tracking requirement: The response of theta, phi, r to step commands
theta_ref, phi_ref, r_ref must resemble a decoupled first-order response with a
one-second time constant
• Stability margins: The multivariable gain and phase margins at the plant inputs u
and plant outputs y must be at least 5 dB and 40 degrees
• Fast dynamics: The magnitude of the closed-loop poles must not exceed 25 to
prevent fast dynamics and jerky transients
% Less than 20% mismatch with reference model 1/(s+1)
TrackReq = TuningGoal.StepTracking({'theta-ref','phi-ref','r-ref'},{'theta','phi','r'},
TrackReq.RelGap = 0.2;
% Gain and phase margins at plant inputs and outputs
MarginReq1 = TuningGoal.Margins('u',5,40);
MarginReq2 = TuningGoal.Margins('y',5,40);
% Limit on fast dynamics
MaxFrequency = 25;
PoleReq = TuningGoal.Poles(0,0,MaxFrequency);
You can now use systune to jointly tune all controller parameters. This returns the
tuned version ST1 of the control system ST0.
AllReqs = [TrackReq,MarginReq1,MarginReq2,PoleReq];
[ST1,fSoft,~,Info] = systune(ST0,AllReqs);
Final: Soft = 1.13, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 68
The final value is close to 1 so the requirements are nearly met. Plot the tuned responses
to step commands in theta, phi, r:
T1 = getIOTransfer(ST1,{'theta-ref','phi-ref','r-ref'},{'theta','phi','r'});
step(T1,5)
7-150
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop Control of a Helicopter
The rise time is about two seconds with no overshoot and little cross-coupling. You can
use viewSpec for a more thorough validation of each requirement, including a visual
assessment of the multivariable stability margins (see loopmargin for details):
figure('Position',[100,100,900,474])
viewSpec(AllReqs,ST1,Info)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-151
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Inspect the tuned values of the PI controllers and static output-feedback gain.
showTunable(ST1)
Block 1: rct_helico/PI1 =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.735, Ki = 1.61
Name: PI1
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------Block 2: rct_helico/PI2 =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
7-152
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop Control of a Helicopter
with Kp = -0.0719, Ki = -1.54
Name: PI2
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------Block 3: rct_helico/PI3 =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.143, Ki = -2.59
Name: PI3
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------Block 4: rct_helico/SOF =
d =
y1
y2
y3
u1
1.663
-0.2907
-0.002587
u2
-0.1227
-1.427
0.0138
u3
0.09323
0.02917
-2.263
u4
0.6106
-0.07969
-0.01216
u5
-0.0001622
-0.1099
0.03313
Name: SOF
Static gain.
Benefit of the Inner Loop
You may wonder whether the static output feedback is necessary and whether PID
controllers aren't enough to control the helicopter. This question is easily answered by retuning the controller with the inner loop open. First break the inner loop by adding a loop
opening after the SOF block:
addOpening(ST0,'SOF')
Then remove the SOF block from the tunable block list and re-parameterize the PI blocks
as full-blown PIDs with the correct loop signs (as inferred from the first design).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-153
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
PID = pid(0,0.001,0.001,.01);
% initial guess for PID controllers
removeBlock(ST0,'SOF');
setBlockParam(ST0,'PI1',ltiblock.pid('C1',PID));
setBlockParam(ST0,'PI2',ltiblock.pid('C2',-PID));
setBlockParam(ST0,'PI3',ltiblock.pid('C3',-PID));
Re-tune the three PID controllers and plot the closed-loop step responses.
[ST2,fSoft,~,Info] = systune(ST0,AllReqs);
Final: Soft = 4.96, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 64
T2 = getIOTransfer(ST2,{'theta-ref','phi-ref','r-ref'},{'theta','phi','r'});
figure, step(T2,5)
7-154
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Multi-Loop Control of a Helicopter
The final value is no longer close to 1 and the step responses confirm the poorer
performance with regard to rise time, overshoot, and decoupling. This suggests that the
inner loop has an important stabilizing effect that should be preserved.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-155
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Fixed-Structure Autopilot for a Passenger Jet
This example shows how to use Robust Control Toolbox™ to tune the standard
configuration of a longitudinal autopilot. We thank Professor D. Alazard from Institut
Superieur de l'Aeronautique et de l'Espace for providing the aircraft model and Professor
Pierre Apkarian from ONERA for developing the example.
Aircraft Model and Autopilot Configuration
The longitudinal autopilot for a supersonic passenger jet flying at Mach 0.7 and 5000
ft is depicted in Figure 1. The autopilot main purpose is to follow vertical acceleration
commands
issued by the pilot. The feedback structure consists of an inner loop
controlling the pitch rate and an outer loop controlling the vertical acceleration
.
that
The autopilot also includes a feedforward component and a reference model
specifies the desired response to a step command
. Finally, the second-order roll-off
filter
is used to attenuate noise and limit the control bandwidth as a safeguard against
unmodeled dynamics. The tunable components are highlighted in orange.
7-156
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure Autopilot for a Passenger Jet
Figure 1: Longitudinal Autopilot Configuration.
is a 5-state model, the state variables being the aerodynamic
The aircraft model
speed (m/s), the climb angle (rad), the angle of attack (rad), the pitch rate (rad/
s), and the altitude
(m). The elevator deflection
(rad) is used to control the vertical
load factor
. The open-loop dynamics include the oscillation with frequency and
damping ratio
= 1.7 (rad/s) and = 0.33, the phugoid mode
0.06, and the slow altitude mode = -0.0026.
= 0.64 (rad/s) and
=
load ConcordeData G
bode(G,{1e-3,1e2}), grid
title('Aircraft Model')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-157
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Note the zero at the origin in
. Because of this zero, we cannot achieve zero steadystate error and must instead focus on the transient response to acceleration commands.
Note that acceleration commands are transient in nature so steady-state behavior is not
a concern. This zero at the origin also precludes pure integral action so we use a pseudointegrator
with = 0.001.
Tuning Setup
When the control system is modeled in Simulink, you can use the slTuner interface to
quickly set up the tuning task. Open the Simulink model of the autopilot.
open_system('rct_concorde')
7-158
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure Autopilot for a Passenger Jet
Configure the slTuner interface by listing the tuned blocks in the Simulink model
(highlighted in orange). This automatically picks all Linear Analysis points in the model
as points of interest for analysis and tuning.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_concorde',{'Ki','Kp','Kq','Kf','RollOff'});
This also parameterizes each tuned block and initializes the block parameters based on
their values in the Simulink model. Note that the four gains Ki,Kp,Kq,Kf are initialized
to zero in this example. By default the roll-off filter
second-order transfer function. To parameterize it as
create real parameters
with the RollOff block.
is parameterized as a generic
, build the transfer function shown above, and associate it
wn = realp('wn', 3);
% natural frequency
zeta = realp('zeta',0.8);
% damping
Fro = tf(wn^2,[1 2*zeta*wn wn^2]); % parametric transfer function
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-159
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
setBlockParam(ST0,'RollOff',Fro)
% use Fro to parameterize "RollOff" block
Design Requirements
The autopilot must be tuned to satisfy three main design requirements:
1. Setpoint tracking: The response
response of the reference model:
to the command
should closely match the
This reference model specifies a well-damped response with a 2 second settling time.
2. High-frequency roll-off: The closed-loop response from the noise signals to
roll off past 8 rad/s with a slope of at least -40 dB/decade.
3. Stability margins: The stability margins at the plant input
and 45 degrees.
should
should be at least 7 dB
For setpoint tracking, we require that the gain of the closed-loop transfer from the
to the tracking error be small in the frequency band [0.05,5] rad/s (recall
command
that we cannot drive the steady-state error to zero because of the plant zero at s=0).
Using a few frequency points, sketch the maximum tracking error as a function of
frequency and use it to limit the gain from
to .
Freqs = [0.005 0.05 5 50];
Gains = [5 0.05 0.05 5];
Req1 = TuningGoal.Gain('Nzc','e',frd(Gains,Freqs));
Req1.Name = 'Maximum tracking error';
The TuningGoal.Gain constructor automatically turns the maximum error sketch
into a smooth weighting function. Use viewSpec to graphically verify the desired error
profile.
viewSpec(Req1)
7-160
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure Autopilot for a Passenger Jet
Repeat the same process to limit the high-frequency gain from the noise inputs to
enforce a -40 dB/decade slope in the frequency band from 8 to 800 rad/s
and
Freqs = [0.8 8 800];
Gains = [10 1 1e-4];
Req2 = TuningGoal.Gain('n','delta_m',frd(Gains,Freqs));
Req2.Name = 'Roll-off requirement';
viewSpec(Req2)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-161
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Finally, register the plant input
as a site for open-loop analysis and use
TuningGoal.Margins to capture the stability margin requirement.
addPoint(ST0,'delta_m')
Req3 = TuningGoal.Margins('delta_m',7,45);
Autopilot Tuning
We are now ready to tune the autopilot parameters with systune. This command takes
the untuned configuration ST0 and the three design requirements and returns the tuned
version ST of ST0. All requirements are satisfied when the final value is less than one.
[ST,fSoft,~,Info] = systune(ST0,[Req1 Req2 Req3]);
7-162
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure Autopilot for a Passenger Jet
Final: Soft = 0.965, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 58
Use showTunable to see the tuned block values.
showTunable(ST)
Block 1: rct_concorde/Ki =
d =
y1
u1
-0.03004
Name: Ki
Static gain.
----------------------------------Block 2: rct_concorde/Kp =
d =
y1
u1
-0.009627
Name: Kp
Static gain.
----------------------------------Block 3: rct_concorde/Kq =
d =
y1
u1
-0.2871
Name: Kq
Static gain.
----------------------------------Block 4: rct_concorde/Kf =
d =
y1
u1
-0.02279
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-163
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Name: Kf
Static gain.
----------------------------------wn = 4.82
----------------------------------zeta = 0.514
To get the tuned value of
parameter values in ST:
, use getBlockValue to evaluate Fro for the tuned
Fro = getBlockValue(ST,'RollOff');
tf(Fro)
ans =
23.22
--------------------s^2 + 4.955 s + 23.22
Continuous-time transfer function.
Finally, use viewSpec to graphically verify that all requirements are satisfied.
figure('Position',[100,100,550,710])
viewSpec([Req1 Req2 Req3],ST)
7-164
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure Autopilot for a Passenger Jet
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-165
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Closed-Loop Simulations
We now verify that the tuned autopilot satisfies the design requirements. First compare
with the step response of the reference model
. Again use
the step response of
getIOTransfer to compute the tuned closed-loop transfer from Nzc to Nz:
Gref = tf(1.7^2,[1 2*0.7*1.7 1.7^2]);
T = getIOTransfer(ST,'Nzc','Nz');
% reference model
% transfer Nzc -> Nz
figure, step(T,'b',Gref,'b--',6), grid,
ylabel('N_z'), legend('Actual response','Reference model')
7-166
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure Autopilot for a Passenger Jet
Also plot the deflection
feedback paths:
and the respective contributions of the feedforward and
T = getIOTransfer(ST,'Nzc','delta_m'); % transfer Nzc -> delta_m
Kf = getBlockValue(ST,'Kf');
% tuned value of Kf
% feedforward contribution to delta_m
Tff = Fro*Kf;
step(T,'b',Tff,'g--',T-Tff,'r-.',6), grid
ylabel('\delta_m'), legend('Total','Feedforward','Feedback')
Finally, check the roll-off and stability margin requirements by computing the open-loop
response at .
OL = getLoopTransfer(ST,'delta_m',-1); % negative-feedback loop transfer
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-167
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
margin(OL);
grid;
xlim([1e-3,1e2]);
The Bode plot confirms a roll-off of -40 dB/decade past 8 rad/s and indicates gain and
phase margins in excess of 10 dB and 70 degrees.
7-168
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fault-Tolerant Control of a Passenger Jet
Fault-Tolerant Control of a Passenger Jet
This example shows how to tune a fixed-structure controller for multiple operating modes
of the plant.
Background
This example deals with fault-tolerant flight control of passenger jet undergoing
outages in the elevator and aileron actuators. The flight control system must maintain
stability and meet performance and comfort requirements in both nominal operation
and degraded conditions where some actuators are no longer effective due to control
surface impairment. Wind gusts must be alleviated in all conditions. This application is
sometimes called reliable control as aircraft safety must be maintained in extreme flight
conditions.
Aircraft Model
The control system is modeled in Simulink.
open_system('faultTolerantAircraft')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-169
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The aircraft is modeled as a rigid 6th-order state-space system with the following state
variables (units are mph for velocities and deg/s for angular rates):
• u: x-body axis velocity
• w: z-body axis velocity
• q: pitch rate
• v: y-body axis velocity
• p: roll rate
• r: yaw rate
The state vector is available for control as well as the flight-path bank angle rate mu
(deg/s), the angle of attack alpha (deg), and the sideslip angle beta (deg). The control
inputs are the deflections of the right elevator, left elevator, right aileron, left aileron,
and rudder. All deflections are in degrees. Elevators are grouped symmetrically to
generate the angle of attack. Ailerons are grouped anti-symmetrically to generate roll
motion. This leads to 3 control actions as shown in the Simulink model.
The controller consists of state-feedback control in the inner loop and MIMO integral
action in the outer loop. The gain matrices Ki and Kx are 3-by-3 and 3-by-6, respectively,
so the controller has 27 tunable parameters.
Actuator Failures
We use a 9x5 matrix to encode the nominal mode and various actuator failure
modes. Each row corresponds to one flight condition, a zero indicating outage of the
corresponding deflection surface.
OutageCases =
1 1 1 1 1;
0 1 1 1 1;
1 0 1 1 1;
1 1 0 1 1;
1 1 1 0 1;
1 0 0 1 1;
0 1 0 1 1;
0 1 1 0 1;
1 0 1 0 1;
];
[...
... %
... %
... %
... %
... %
... %
... %
... %
... %
nominal operational mode
right elevator outage
left elevator outage
right aileron outage
left aileron outage
left elevator and right aileron outage
right elevator and right aileron outage
right elevator and left aileron outage
left elevator and left aileron outage
Design Requirements
7-170
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fault-Tolerant Control of a Passenger Jet
The controller should:
1
Provide good tracking performance in mu, alpha, and beta in nominal operating
mode with adequate decoupling of the three axes
2
Maintain performance in the presence of wind gust of 10 mph
3
Limit stability and performance degradation in the face of actuator outage.
To express the first requirement, you can use an LQG-like cost function that penalizes
the integrated tracking error e and the control effort u:
The diagonal weights
and
are the main tuning knobs for trading
responsiveness and control effort and emphasizing some channels over others. Use
the WeightedVariance requirement to express this cost function, and relax the
performance weight
by a factor 2 for the outage scenarios.
We = diag([10 20 15]);
Wu = eye(3);
% Nominal tracking requirement
SoftNom = TuningGoal.WeightedVariance('setpoint',{'e','u'}, blkdiag(We,Wu), []);
SoftNom.Models = 1;
% nominal model
% Tracking requirement for outage conditions
SoftOut = TuningGoal.WeightedVariance('setpoint',{'e','u'}, blkdiag(We/2,Wu), []);
SoftOut.Models = 2:9; % outage scenarios
For wind gust alleviation, limit the variance of the error signal e due to the white noise
wg driving the wind gust model. Again use a less stringent requirement for the outage
scenarios.
% Nominal gust alleviation requirement
HardNom = TuningGoal.Variance('wg','e',0.02);
HardNom.Models = 1;
% Gust alleviation requirement for outage conditions
HardOut = TuningGoal.Variance('wg','e',0.1);
HardOut.Models = 2:9;
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-171
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Controller Tuning for Nominal Flight
Set the wind gust speed to 10 mph and initialize the tunable state-feedback and
integrators gains of the controller.
GustSpeed = 10;
Ki = eye(3);
Kx = zeros(3,6);
Use the slTuner interface to set up the tuning task. List the blocks to be tuned and
specify the nine flight conditions by varying the outage variable in the Simulink model.
Because you can only vary scalar parameters in slTuner, independently specify the
values taken by each entry of the outage vector.
OutageData = struct(...
'Name',{'outage(1)','outage(2)','outage(3)','outage(4)','outage(5)'},...
'Value',mat2cell(OutageCases,9,[1 1 1 1 1]));
ST0 = slTuner('faultTolerantAircraft',{'Ki','Kx'},OutageData);
Use systune to tune the controller gains subject to the nominal requirements. Treat the
wind gust alleviation as a hard constraint.
[ST,fSoft,gHard]
= systune(ST0,SoftNom,HardNom);
Final: Soft = 22.6, Hard = 0.99952, Iterations = 277
Retrieve the gain values and simulate the responses to step commands in mu, alpha,
beta for the nominal and degraded flight conditions. All simulations include wind gust
effects, and the red curve is the nominal response.
Ki = getBlockValue(ST, 'Ki');
Kx = getBlockValue(ST, 'Kx');
Ki = Ki.d;
Kx = Kx.d;
% Bank-angle setpoint simulation
plotResponses(OutageCases,1,0,0);
7-172
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fault-Tolerant Control of a Passenger Jet
% Angle-of-attack setpoint simulation
plotResponses(OutageCases,0,1,0);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-173
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
% Sideslip-angle setpoint simulation
plotResponses(OutageCases,0,0,1);
7-174
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fault-Tolerant Control of a Passenger Jet
The nominal responses are good but the deterioration in performance is unacceptable
when faced with actuator outage.
Controller Tuning for Impaired Flight
To improve reliability, retune the controller gains to meet the nominal requirement for
the nominal plant as well as the relaxed requirements for all eight outage scenarios.
[ST,fSoft,gHard]
= systune(ST0,[SoftNom;SoftOut],[HardNom;HardOut]);
Final: Soft = 25.8, Hard = 0.99796, Iterations = 519
The optimal performance (square root of LQG cost ) is only slightly worse than for the
nominal tuning (26 vs. 23). Retrieve the gain values and rerun the simulations (red curve
is the nominal response).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-175
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Ki = getBlockValue(ST, 'Ki');
Kx = getBlockValue(ST, 'Kx');
Ki = Ki.d;
Kx = Kx.d;
% Bank-angle setpoint simulation
plotResponses(OutageCases,1,0,0);
% Angle-of-attack setpoint simulation
plotResponses(OutageCases,0,1,0);
7-176
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fault-Tolerant Control of a Passenger Jet
% Sideslip-angle setpoint simulation
plotResponses(OutageCases,0,0,1);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-177
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The controller now provides acceptable performance for all outage scenarios considered
in this example. The design could be further refined by adding specifications such as
minimum stability margins and gain limits to avoid actuator rate saturation.
7-178
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure H-infinity Synthesis with HINFSTRUCT
Fixed-Structure H-infinity Synthesis with HINFSTRUCT
This example uses the hinfstruct command to tune a fixed-structure controller subject
to
constraints.
Introduction
The hinfstruct command extends classical
synthesis (see hinfsyn) to fixedstructure control systems. This command is meant for users already comfortable with the
hinfsyn workflow. If you are unfamiliar with
synthesis or find augmented plants
and weighting functions intimidating, use systune and looptune instead. See "Tuning
Control Systems with SYSTUNE" for the systune counterpart of this example.
Plant Model
This example uses a 9th-order model of the head-disk assembly (HDA) in a hard-disk
drive. This model captures the first few flexible modes in the HDA.
load hinfstruct_demo G
bode(G), grid
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-179
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
We use the feedback loop shown below to position the head on the correct track. This
control structure consists of a PI controller and a low-pass filter in the return path.
The head position y should track a step change r with a response time of about one
millisecond, little or no overshoot, and no steady-state error.
7-180
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure H-infinity Synthesis with HINFSTRUCT
Figure 1: Control Structure
Tunable Elements
There are two tunable elements in the control structure of Figure 1: the PI controller
and the low-pass filter
Use the ltiblock.pid class to parameterize the PI block and specify the filter
transfer function depending on a tunable real parameter .
C0 = ltiblock.pid('C','pi');
a = realp('a',1);
F0 = tf(a,[1 a]);
as a
% tunable PI
% filter coefficient
% filter parameterized by a
Loop Shaping Design
Loop shaping is a frequency-domain technique for enforcing requirements on response
speed, control bandwidth, roll-off, and steady state error. The idea is to specify a
target gain profile or "loop shape" for the open-loop response
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
.A
7-181
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
reasonable loop shape for this application should have integral action and a crossover
frequency of about 1000 rad/s (the reciprocal of the desired response time of 0.001
seconds). This suggests the following loop shape:
wc = 1000; % target crossover
s = tf('s');
LS = (1+0.001*s/wc)/(0.001+s/wc);
bodemag(LS,{1e1,1e5}), grid, title('Target loop shape')
Note that we chose a bi-proper, bi-stable realization to avoid technical difficulties with
marginally stable poles and improper inverses. In order to tune
and
with
hinfstruct, we must turn this target loop shape into constraints on the closed-loop
gains. A systematic way to go about this is to instrument the feedback loop as follows:
7-182
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure H-infinity Synthesis with HINFSTRUCT
• Add a measurement noise signal n
• Use the target loop shape LS and its reciprocal to filter the error signal e and the
white noise source nw.
Figure 2: Closed-Loop Formulation
If
denotes the closed-loop transfer function from (r,nw) to (y,ew), the gain
constraint
secures the following desirable properties:
• At low frequency (w<wc), the open-loop gain stays above the gain specified by the
target loop shape LS
• At high frequency (w>wc), the open-loop gain stays below the gain specified by LS
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-183
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
• The closed-loop system has adequate stability margins
• The closed-loop step response has small overshoot.
We can therefore focus on tuning
and
to enforce
.
Specifying the Control Structure in MATLAB
In MATLAB, you can use the connect command to model
by connecting the fixed
and tunable components according to the block diagram of Figure 2:
% Label the block I/Os
Wn = 1/LS; Wn.u = 'nw'; Wn.y = 'n';
We = LS;
We.u = 'e';
We.y = 'ew';
C0.y = 'u';
C0.u = 'e';
F0.u = 'yn'; F0.y = 'yf';
% Specify summing junctions
Sum1 = sumblk('e = r - yf');
Sum2 = sumblk('yn = y + n');
% Connect the blocks together
T0 = connect(G,Wn,We,C0,F0,Sum1,Sum2,{'r','nw'},{'y','ew'});
These commands construct a generalized state-space model T0 of
depends on the tunable blocks C and a:
. This model
T0.Blocks
ans =
C: [1x1 ltiblock.pid]
a: [1x1 realp]
Note that T0 captures the following "Standard Form" of the block diagram of Figure 2
where the tunable components
7-184
are separated from the fixed dynamics.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure H-infinity Synthesis with HINFSTRUCT
Figure 3: Standard Form for Disk-Drive Loop Shaping
Tuning the Controller Gains
We are now ready to use hinfstruct to tune the PI controller and filter for
the control architecture of Figure 1. To mitigate the risk of local minima, run three
optimizations, two of which are started from randomized initial values for C0 and F0:
rng('default')
opt = hinfstructOptions('Display','final','RandomStart',5);
T = hinfstruct(T0,opt);
Final: Peak gain = 3.88, Iterations = 108
Final: Peak gain = 1.56, Iterations = 90
Final: Peak gain = 597, Iterations = 185
Some closed-loop poles are marginally stable (decay rate near 1e-07)
Final: Peak gain = 3.94, Iterations = 108
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-185
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Final: Peak gain = 1.56, Iterations = 97
Final: Peak gain = 2.17, Iterations = 63
is nearly satisfied. The
The best closed-loop gain is 1.56, so the constraint
hinfstruct command returns the tuned closed-loop transfer
see the tuned values of and the filter coefficient :
. Use showTunable to
showTunable(T)
C =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.000846, Ki = 0.0103
Name: C
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------a = 5.49e+03
Use getBlockValue to get the tuned value of
filter
and use getValue to evaluate the
for the tuned value of :
C = getBlockValue(T,'C');
F = getValue(F0,T.Blocks);
% propagate tuned parameters from T to F
tf(F)
ans =
From input "yn" to output "yf":
5486
-------s + 5486
Continuous-time transfer function.
To validate the design, plot the open-loop response L=F*G*C and compare with the target
loop shape LS:
7-186
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure H-infinity Synthesis with HINFSTRUCT
bode(LS,'r--',G*C*F,'b',{1e1,1e6}), grid,
title('Open-loop response'), legend('Target','Actual')
The 0dB crossover frequency and overall loop shape are as expected. The stability
margins can be read off the plot by right-clicking and selecting the Characteristics
menu. This design has 24dB gain margin and 81 degrees phase margin. Plot the closedloop step response from reference r to position y:
step(feedback(G*C,F)), grid, title('Closed-loop response')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-187
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
While the response has no overshoot, there is some residual wobble due to the first
resonant peaks in G. You might consider adding a notch filter in the forward path to
remove the influence of these modes.
Tuning the Controller Gains from Simulink
Suppose you used this Simulink model to represent the control structure. If you have
Simulink Control Design installed, you can tune the controller gains from this Simulink
model as follows. First mark the signals r,e,y,n as Linear Analysis points in the
Simulink model.
7-188
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Fixed-Structure H-infinity Synthesis with HINFSTRUCT
Then create an instance of the slTuner interface and mark the Simulink blocks C and F
as tunable:
ST0 = slTuner('rct_diskdrive',{'C','F'});
Since the filter
block:
has a special structure, explicitly specify how to parameterize the F
a = realp('a',1);
% filter coefficient
setBlockParam(ST0,'F',tf(a,[1 a]));
Finally, use getIOTransfer to derive a tunable model of the closed-loop transfer
function
(see Figure 2)
% Compute tunable model of closed-loop transfer (r,n) -> (y,e)
T0 = getIOTransfer(ST0,{'r','n'},{'y','e'});
% Add weighting functions in n and e channels
T0 = blkdiag(1,LS) * T0 * blkdiag(1,1/LS);
You are now ready to tune the controller gains with hinfstruct:
rng(0)
opt = hinfstructOptions('Display','final','RandomStart',5);
T = hinfstruct(T0,opt);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-189
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Final: Peak gain = 3.88, Iterations = 119
Final: Peak gain = 1.56, Iterations = 87
Final: Peak gain = 598, Iterations = 197
Some closed-loop poles are marginally stable (decay rate near 1e-07)
Final: Peak gain = 3.88, Iterations = 104
Final: Peak gain = 1.56, Iterations = 93
Final: Peak gain = 1.56, Iterations = 88
Verify that you obtain the same tuned values as with the MATLAB approach:
showTunable(T)
C =
1
Kp + Ki * --s
with Kp = 0.000846, Ki = 0.0103
Name: C
Continuous-time PI controller in parallel form.
----------------------------------a = 5.49e+03
7-190
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Control of Diesel Engine
MIMO Control of Diesel Engine
This example uses systune to design and tune a MIMO controller for a Diesel engine.
The controller is tuned in discrete time for a single operating condition.
Diesel Engine Model
Modern Diesel engines use a variable geometry turbocharger (VGT) and exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) to reduce emissions. Tight control of the VGT boost pressure and
EGR massflow is necessary to meet strict emission targets. This example shows how to
design and tune a MIMO controller that regulates these two variables when the engine
operates at 2100 rpm with a fuel mass of 12 mg per injection-cylinder.
open_system('rct_diesel')
The VGT/EGR control system is modeled in Simulink. The controller adjusts the
positions EGRLIFT and VGTPOS of the EGR and VGT valves. It has access to the boost
pressure and EGR massflow targets and measured values, as well as fuel mass and
engine speed measurements. Both valves have rate and saturation limits. The plant
model is sampled every 0.1 seconds and the control signals EGRLIFT and VGTPOS are
refreshed every 0.2 seconds. This example considers step changes of +10 KPa in boost
pressure and +3 g/s in EGR massflow, and disturbances of +5 mg in fuel mass and -200
rpm in speed.
For the operating condition under consideration, we used System Identification to derive
a linear model of the engine from experimental data. The frequency response from the
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-191
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
manipulated variables EGRLIFT and VGTPOS to the controlled variables BOOST and EGR
MF appears below. Note that the plant is ill conditioned at low frequency which makes
independent control of boost pressure and EGR massflow difficult.
sigma(Plant(:,1:2)), grid
title('Frequency response of the linearized engine dynamics')
Control Objectives
There are two main control objectives:
1
7-192
Respond to step changes in boost pressure and EGR massflow in about 5 seconds
with minimum cross-coupling
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Control of Diesel Engine
2
Be insensitive to (small) variations in speed and fuel mass.
Use a tracking requirement for the first objective. Specify the amplitudes of the step
changes to ensure that cross-couplings are small relative to these changes.
% 5-second response time, steady-state error less than 5%
TR = TuningGoal.Tracking({'BOOST REF';'EGRMF REF'},{'BOOST';'EGRMF'},5,0.05);
TR.Name = 'Setpoint tracking';
TR.InputScaling = [10 3];
For the second objective, treat the speed and fuel mass variations as step disturbances
and specify the peak amplitude and settling time of the resulting variations in boost
pressure and EGR massflow. Also specify the signal amplitudes to properly reflect the
relative contribution of each disturbance.
% Peak<0.5, settling time<5
DR = TuningGoal.StepRejection({'FUELMASS';'SPEED'},{'BOOST';'EGRMF'},0.5,5);
DR.Name = 'Disturbance rejection';
DR.InputScaling = [5 200];
DR.OutputScaling = [10 3];
To provide adequate robustness to unmodeled dynamics and aliasing, limit the control
bandwidth and impose sufficient stability margins at both the plant inputs and outputs.
Because we are dealing with a 2-by-2 MIMO feedback loops, these stability margins are
interpreted as disk margins (see loopmargin and TuningGoal.Margins for details).
% Roll off of -20 dB/dec past 1 rad/s
RO = TuningGoal.MaxLoopGain({'EGRLIFT','VGTPOS'},1,1);
RO.LoopScaling = 'off';
RO.Name = 'Roll-off';
% 7 dB of gain margin and 45 degrees of phase margin
M1 = TuningGoal.Margins({'EGRLIFT','VGTPOS'},7,45);
M1.Name = 'Plant input';
M2 = TuningGoal.Margins('DIESEL ENGINE',7,45);
M2.Name = 'Plant output';
Tuning of Blackbox MIMO Controller
Without a-priori knowledge of a suitable control structure, first try "blackbox" state-space
controllers of various orders. The plant model has four states, so try a controller of order
four or less. Here we tune a second-order controller since the "SS2" block in the Simulink
model has two states.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-193
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 1: Second-order blackbox controller.
Use the slTuner interface to configure the Simulink model for tuning. Mark the block
"SS2" as tunable, register the locations where to assess margins and loop shapes, and
specify that linearization and tuning should be performed at the controller sampling rate.
ST0 = slTuner('rct_diesel','SS2');
ST0.Ts = 0.2;
addPoint(ST0,{'EGRLIFT','VGTPOS','DIESEL ENGINE'})
Now use systune to tune the state-space controller subject to our control objectives.
Treat the stability margins and roll-off target as hard constraints and try to best meet
the remaining objectives (soft goals). Randomize the starting point to reduce exposure to
undesirable local minima.
Opt = systuneOptions('RandomStart',2);
rng(0), [ST1,~,~,Info1] = systune(ST0,[TR DR],[M1 M2 RO],Opt);
Final: Soft = 1.05, Hard = 0.99841, Iterations = 723
Final: Soft = 1.05, Hard = 0.98913, Iterations = 463
Final: Soft = 1.05, Hard = 0.87833, Iterations = 447
All requirements are nearly met (a requirement is satisfied when its normalized value is
less than 1). Verify this graphically.
figure('Position',[10,10,1071,714])
viewSpec([TR DR RO M1 M2],ST1,Info1)
7-194
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Control of Diesel Engine
Plot the setpoint tracking and disturbance rejection responses. Scale by the signal
amplitudes to show normalized effects (boost pressure changes by +10 KPa, EGR
massflow by +3 g/s, fuel mass by +5 mg, and speed by -200 rpm).
figure('Position',[100,100,560,500])
T1 = getIOTransfer(ST1,{'BOOST REF';'EGRMF REF'},{'BOOST','EGRMF','EGRLIFT','VGTPOS'});
T1 = diag([1/10 1/3 1 1]) * T1 * diag([10 3]);
subplot(211), step(T1(1:2,:),15), title('Setpoint tracking')
subplot(212), step(T1(3:4,:),15), title('Control effort')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-195
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
D1 = getIOTransfer(ST1,{'FUELMASS';'SPEED'},{'BOOST','EGRMF','EGRLIFT','VGTPOS'});
D1 = diag([1/10 1/3 1 1]) * D1 * diag([5 -200]);
subplot(211), step(D1(1:2,:),15), title('Disturbance rejection')
subplot(212), step(D1(3:4,:),15), title('Control effort')
7-196
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Control of Diesel Engine
The controller responds in less than 5 seconds with minimum cross-coupling between the
BOOST and EGRMF variables.
Tuning of Simplified Control Structure
The state-space controller could be implemented as is, but it is often desirable to boil
it down to a simpler, more familiar structure. To do this, get the tuned controller and
inspect its frequency response
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-197
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
C = getBlockValue(ST1,'SS2');
clf
bode(C(:,1:2),C(:,3:4),{.02 20}), grid
legend('REF to U','Y to U')
bodemag(C(:,5:6)), grid
title('Bode response from FUELMASS/SPEED to EGRLIFT/VGTPOS')
7-198
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Control of Diesel Engine
The first plot suggests that the controller essentially behaves like a PI controller
acting on REF-Y (the difference between the target and actual values of the controlled
variables). The second plot suggests that the transfer from measured disturbance
to manipulated variables could be replaced by a gain in series with a lag network.
Altogether this suggests the following simplified control structure consisting of a MIMO
PI controller with a first-order disturbance feedforward.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-199
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 2: Simplified control structure.
Using variant subsystems, you can implement both control structures in the same
Simulink model and use a variable to switch between them. Here setting MODE=2 selects
the MIMO PI structure. As before, use systune to tune the three 2-by-2 gain matrices
Kp, Ki, Kff in the simplified control structure.
% Select "MIMO PI" variant in "CONTROLLER" block
MODE = 2;
% Configure tuning interface
ST0 = slTuner('rct_diesel',{'Kp','Ki','Kff'});
ST0.Ts = 0.2;
addPoint(ST0,{'EGRLIFT','VGTPOS','DIESEL ENGINE'})
% Tune MIMO PI controller.
[ST2,~,~,Info2] = systune(ST0,[TR DR],[M1 M2 RO]);
Final: Soft = 1.08, Hard = 0.99985, Iterations = 221
Again all requirements are nearly met. Plot the closed-loop responses and compare with
the state-space design.
clf
7-200
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Control of Diesel Engine
T2 = getIOTransfer(ST2,{'BOOST REF';'EGRMF REF'},{'BOOST','EGRMF','EGRLIFT','VGTPOS'});
T2 = diag([1/10 1/3 1 1]) * T2 * diag([10 3]);
subplot(211), step(T1(1:2,:),T2(1:2,:),15), title('Setpoint tracking')
legend('SS2','PI+FF')
subplot(212), step(T1(3:4,:),T2(3:4,:),15), title('Control effort')
D2 = getIOTransfer(ST2,{'FUELMASS';'SPEED'},{'BOOST','EGRMF','EGRLIFT','VGTPOS'});
D2 = diag([1/10 1/3 1 1]) * D2 * diag([5 -200]);
subplot(211), step(D1(1:2,:),D2(1:2,:),15), title('Disturbance rejection')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-201
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
legend('SS2','PI+FF')
subplot(212), step(D1(3:4,:),D2(3:4,:),15), title('Control effort')
The blackbox and simplified control structures deliver similar performance. Inspect the
tuned values of the PI and feedforward gains.
showTunable(ST2)
7-202
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
MIMO Control of Diesel Engine
Block 1: rct_diesel/CONTROLLER/MIMO PID/Kp =
d =
y1
y2
u1
-0.007916
-0.0202
u2
-0.000869
0.01424
Name: Kp
Static gain.
----------------------------------Block 2: rct_diesel/CONTROLLER/MIMO PID/Ki =
d =
y1
y2
u1
-0.01052
-0.02998
u2
-0.01425
0.04576
Name: Ki
Static gain.
----------------------------------Block 3: rct_diesel/CONTROLLER/MIMO PID/Kff =
d =
y1
y2
u1
0.01264
0.03922
u2
-8.985e-05
-0.001477
Name: Kff
Static gain.
Nonlinear Validation
To validate the MIMO PI controller in the Simulink model, push the tuned controller
parameters to Simulink and run the simulation.
writeBlockValue(ST2)
The simulation results are shown below and confirm that the controller adequately
tracks setpoint changes in boost pressure and EGR massflow and quickly rejects changes
in fuel mass (at t=90) and in speed (at t=110).
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-203
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 3: Simulation results with simplified controller.
7-204
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Digital Control of Power Stage Voltage
Digital Control of Power Stage Voltage
This example shows how to tune a high-performance digital controller with bandwidth
close to the sampling frequency.
Voltage Regulation in Power Stage
We use Simulink to model the voltage controller in the power stage for an electronic
device:
open_system('rct_powerstage')
The power stage amplifier is modeled as a second-order linear system with the following
frequency response:
bode(psmodel), grid
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-205
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The controller must regulate the voltage Vchip delivered to the device to track
the setpoint Vcmd and be insensitive to variations in load current iLoad. The
control structure consists of a feedback compensator and a disturbance feedforward
compensator. The voltage Vin going into the amplifier is limited to
. The
controller sampling rate is 10 MHz (sample time Tm is 1e-7 seconds).
Performance Requirements
This application is challenging because the controller bandwidth must approach the
Nyquist frequency pi/Tm = 31.4 MHz. To avoid aliasing troubles when discretizing
continuous-time controllers, it is preferable to tune the controller directly in discrete
time.
7-206
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Digital Control of Power Stage Voltage
The power stage should respond to a setpoint change in desired voltage Vcmd in
about 5 sampling periods with a peak error (across frequency) of 50%. Use a tracking
requirement to capture this objective.
Req1 = TuningGoal.Tracking('Vcmd','Vchip',5*Tm,0,1.5);
Req1.Name = 'Setpoint change';
viewSpec(Req1)
The power stage should also quickly reject load disturbances iLoad. Express this
requirement in terms of gain from iLoad to Vchip. This gain should be low at low
frequency for good disturbance rejection.
s = tf('s');
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-207
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
nf = pi/Tm;
% Nyquist frequency
Req2 = TuningGoal.Gain('iLoad','Vchip',1.5e-3 * s/nf);
Req2.Focus = [nf/1e4, nf];
Req2.Name = 'Load disturbance';
High-performance demands may lead to high control effort and saturation. For the ramp
profile vcmd specified in the Simulink model (from 0 to 1 in about 250 sampling periods),
we want to avoid hitting the saturation constraint
. Use a rate-limiting filter to
model the ramp command, and require that the gain from the rate-limiter input to
be
.
less than
RateLimiter = 1/(250*Tm*s); % models ramp command in Simulink
% |RateLimiter * (Vcmd->Vin)| < Vmax
Req3 = TuningGoal.Gain('Vcmd','Vin',Vmax/RateLimiter);
Req3.Focus = [nf/1000, nf];
Req3.Name = 'Saturation';
To ensure adequate robustness, require at least 7 dB gain margin and 45 degrees phase
margin at the plant input.
Req4 = TuningGoal.Margins('Vin',7,45);
Req4.Name = 'Margins';
Finally, the feedback compensator has a tendency to cancel the plant resonance by
notching it out. Such plant inversion may lead to poor results when the resonant
frequency is not exactly known or subject to variations. To prevent this, impose a
minimum closed-loop damping of 0.5 to actively damp of the plant's resonant mode.
Req5 = TuningGoal.Poles(0,0.5,3*nf);
Req5.Name = 'Damping';
Tuning
Next use systune to tune the controller parameters subject to the requirements defined
above. First use the slTuner interface to configure the Simulink model for tuning.
In particular, specify that there are two tunable blocks and that the model should be
linearized and tuned at the sample time Tm.
TunedBlocks = {'compensator','FIR'};
ST0 = slTuner('rct_powerstage',TunedBlocks);
7-208
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Digital Control of Power Stage Voltage
ST0.Ts = Tm;
% Register points of interest for open- and closed-loop analysis
addPoint(ST0,{'Vcmd','iLoad','Vchip','Vin'});
We want to use an FIR filter as feedforward compensator. To do this, create a
parameterization of a first-order FIR filter and assign it to the "Feedforward FIR" block
in Simulink.
FIR = ltiblock.tf('FIR',1,1,Tm);
% Fix denominator to z^n
FIR.den.Value = [1 0];
FIR.den.Free = false;
setBlockParam(ST0,'FIR',FIR);
Note that slTuner automatically parameterizes the feedback compensator as a thirdorder state-space model (the order specified in the Simulink block). Next tune the
feedforward and feedback compensators with systune. Treat the damping and margin
requirements as hard constraints and try to best meet the remaining requirements.
rng(0)
topt = systuneOptions('RandomStart',6);
ST = systune(ST0,[Req1 Req2 Req3],[Req4 Req5],topt);
Final:
Final:
Final:
Final:
Final:
Final:
Final:
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1.3, Hard = 0.99973, Iterations = 374
1.86, Hard = 0.9942, Iterations = 238
1.29, Hard = 0.99976, Iterations = 424
1.29, Hard = 0.99962, Iterations = 372
1.28, Hard = 0.98427, Iterations = 489
1.28, Hard = 0.97883, Iterations = 403
1.29, Hard = 0.97732, Iterations = 302
The best design satisfies the hard constraints (Hard less than 1) and nearly satisfies
the other constraints (Soft close to 1). Verify this graphically by plotting the tuned
responses for each requirement.
figure('Position',[10,10,1071,714])
viewSpec([Req1 Req2 Req3 Req4 Req5],ST)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-209
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Validation
First validate the design in the linear domain using the slTuner interface. Plot the
closed-loop response to a step command Vcmd and a step disturbance iLoad.
figure('Position',[100,100,560,500])
subplot(211), step(getIOTransfer(ST,'Vcmd','Vchip'),20*Tm)
title('Response to step command in voltage')
subplot(212), step(getIOTransfer(ST,'iLoad','Vchip'),20*Tm)
title('Rejection of step disturbance in load current')
7-210
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Digital Control of Power Stage Voltage
Use getLoopTransfer to compute the open-loop response at the plant input and
superimpose the plant and feedback compensator responses.
clf
L = getLoopTransfer(ST,'Vin',-1);
C = getBlockValue(ST,'compensator');
bodeplot(L,psmodel(2),C(2),{1e-3/Tm pi/Tm}), grid
legend('Open-loop response','Plant','Compensator')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-211
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
The controller achieves the desired bandwidth and the responses are fast enough. Apply
the tuned parameter values to the Simulink model and simulate the tuned responses.
writeBlockValue(ST)
The results from the nonlinear simulation appear below. Note that the control signal Vin
remains approximately within
saturation bounds for the setpoint tracking portion
of the simulation.
7-212
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Digital Control of Power Stage Voltage
Figure 1: Response to ramp command and step load disturbances.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
7-213
7
Tuning Fixed Control Architectures
Figure 2: Amplitude of input voltage Vin during setpoint tracking phase.
7-214
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
• “Gain-Scheduled Control Systems” on page 8-2
• “Plant Models for Gain-Scheduled Control” on page 8-3
• “Parametric Gain Surfaces” on page 8-7
• “Tuning Gain-Scheduled Controllers” on page 8-12
• “Validating Gain-Scheduled Controllers” on page 8-13
• “Improving Gain-Scheduled Tuning Results” on page 8-14
• “Tunable Gain With Two Independent Scheduling Variables” on page 8-17
• “Gain-Scheduled PID Controller” on page 8-21
• “Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot” on page 8-23
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Gain-Scheduled Control Systems
A gain-scheduled controller is a controller whose gains are automatically adjusted as a
function of time, operating condition, or plant parameters. Gain scheduling is a common
strategy for controlling systems whose dynamics change with time or operating condition.
Such systems include linear parameter-varying (LPV) systems and large classes of
nonlinear systems. Gain scheduling is most suitable when the scheduling variables
are external parameters that vary slowly compared to the control bandwidth, such as
ambient temperature of a reaction or speed of a cruising aircraft. Gain scheduling is
most challenging when the scheduling variables depend on fast-varying states of the
system. Because local linear performance near operating points is no guarantee of global
performance in nonlinear systems, extensive simulation-based validation is usually
required. See [1] for an overview of gain scheduling and its challenges.
Typically, gain-scheduled controllers are fixed single-loop or multi-loop control structures
that use lookup tables to specify gain values as a function of the scheduling variables. For
tuning purposes, it is convenient to replace lookup tables by parametric gain surfaces. A
parametric gain surface is a basis-function expansion whose coefficients are tunable. For
example, you can model a time-varying gain k(t) as a cubic polynomial in t:
k(t) = k0 + k1t + k2t2 + k3t3.
Here, k0,...,k3 are tunable coefficients. For applications where gains vary smoothly
with the scheduling variables, this approach drastically reduces the number of tunable
parameters. This approach also provides explicit formulas for the gains, and ensures
smooth transitions between operating points. In addition, you can use systune to
automatically tune the gain surface coefficients to meet your control objectives at a
representative set of operating conditions.
References
[1] Rugh, W.J., and J.S. Shamma, “Research on Gain Scheduling”, Automatica, 36 (2000),
pp. 1401-1425.
More About
•
8-2
“Plant Models for Gain-Scheduled Control” on page 8-3
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Plant Models for Gain-Scheduled Control
Plant Models for Gain-Scheduled Control
In this section...
“Gain Scheduling for Linear Parameter-Varying Plants” on page 8-3
“Gain Scheduling for Nonlinear Plants” on page 8-4
Gain Scheduling for Linear Parameter-Varying Plants
Gain-scheduled controllers are usually designed and tuned using a family of linear
models that depend on the scheduling variables, σ:
dx
= A (s ) x + B ( s ) u
dt
y = C (s ) x& + D ( s ) u.
This family of models is called a linear parameter-varying (LPV) model. The LPV model
describes how the (linearized) plant dynamics vary with time, operating condition, or
any other scheduling variable. For example, the pitch axis dynamics of an aircraft can
be approximated by an LPV model that depends on incidence angle, α, air speed, V, and
altitude, h.
In practice, this continuum of plant models is often replaced by a finite set of linear
models obtained for a suitable grid of σ values. This amounts to sampling the LPV
dynamics over the operating range and selecting a set of representative design points.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-3
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
For best results with a gain-scheduled controller, the plant dynamics should vary
smoothly between design points.
When you are tuning a gain-scheduled controller for an LPV plant, you can use a
sampled array of LTI plant models. Use the SamplingGrid property of the LTI model
array to associate each linear models in the set with the underlying design points, σ. For
example, see “Study Parameter Variation by Sampling Tunable Model”.
Gain Scheduling for Nonlinear Plants
In most applications, the plant is not given as an LPV model or a collection of linear
models. Instead, the plant dynamics are described by nonlinear differential equations of
the form:
x& = f ( x, u)
y = g ( x, u) .
8-4
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Plant Models for Gain-Scheduled Control
x is the state vector, u is the plant input, and y is the plant output. These equations can
be specified explicitly. Or, they can be specified implicitly, such as by a Simulink model.
For nonlinear plants, the linearized dynamics describe the local behavior of the plant
around a family of operating points (x(σ),u(σ)) parameterized by the scheduling variables,
σ. Specifically, the deviations from nominal operating condition are defined as:
d x = x - x (s ) , d u = u - u ( s ) .
These deviations are governed, to first order, by the LPV dynamics:
d& x = A ( s ) d x + B( s ) d u,
∂f
( x (s ) ,u (s ))
∂x
∂g
C (s ) =
( x (s ), u (s ))
∂x
A (s ) =
d y = C (s ) d x + D (s ) d u,
∂f
( x (s ), u (s ))
∂u
∂g
D(s ) =
( x (s ), u (s )).
∂u
B (s ) =
When repeated for a finite set of design points, σ, this local linearization produces the
type of sampled LPV model described in “Gain Scheduling for Linear Parameter-Varying
Plants” on page 8-3.
When your nonlinear plant is modeled in Simulink, you can use Simulink Control
Design linearization tools to compute A(σ), B(σ) ,C(σ), and D(σ) for specific values of σ.
If the operating points are equilibrium points, you might need to first use findop to
compute (x(σ),u(σ)) as a function of σ. If you are controlling the system around a reference
trajectory (x(σ),u(σ)), you can use snapshot linearization to acquire A(σ), B(σ) ,C(σ), and
D(σ) at various points along the σ trajectory. This second scenario includes time-varying
systems where the scheduling variable is time. In either case, the result is a collection of
linear models sampled at values of σ.
Typically, the gain-scheduled controller’s main task is to keep the closed-loop system
close to equilibrium or close to the nominal trajectory, (x(σ),u(σ)). The controller provides
a corrective action δu which must be added to the nominal command u(σ) to determine
the total actuator command.
More About
•
“Gain-Scheduled Control Systems” on page 8-2
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-5
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
•
8-6
“Parametric Gain Surfaces” on page 8-7
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Parametric Gain Surfaces
Parametric Gain Surfaces
In a gain-scheduled controller, the gains, which are the tunable parameters, are
functions of the scheduling variables, σ. For example, a gain-scheduled PI controller is of
the form:
C ( s, s ) = K p (s ) +
K i (s )
.
s
Tuning arbitrary functions is difficult. Therefore, it is necessary either to discretize the
operating range, or restrict the generality of the functions themselves.
In the first approach, a collection of design points, σ, is chosen. Then, the gains, Kp
and Ki, are tuned independently at each design point. The resulting set of gain values
is stored in a lookup table driven by the scheduling variables, σ. A drawback of this
approach is that the tuning method may yield substantially different values for
neighboring design points, leading to undesirable jumps when transitioning from one
operating point to another.
Alternatively, you can model the gains as smooth functions of σ, but restrict the
generality of such functions by using specific basis function expansions. For example,
suppose σ is a scalar variable. You can model Kp(σ) as a quadratic function of σ:
K p (s ) = k0 + k1s + k2s 2 .
After tuning, this parametric gain might have a profile such as the following (the specific
shape of the curve depends on the tuned coefficient values and range of σ):
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-7
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Or, suppose that σ consists of two scheduling variables, α, and V. Then, you can model
Kp(σ) as a bilinear function of α and V:
K p (a , V ) = k0 + k1a + k2V + k3a V .
After tuning, this parametric gain might have a profile such as the following (again,
the specific shape of the curve depends on the tuned coefficient values and ranges of σ
values):
8-8
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Parametric Gain Surfaces
In general, a parametric gain surface is a particular expansion of the gain in basis
functions of σ:
K (s ) = K0 + K1 f1 ( s ) + … + K M f M (s ) .
The basis functions f1,...,fM are user-selected and fixed. The coefficients of the expansion,
K0,...,KM, are the tunable parameters of the gain surface. K0,...,KM can be scalar or
matrix-valued, depending on the size of the gain K(σ). The choice of basis function is
problem-dependent, but it is generally good to try low-order polynomial expansions first.
To tune a gain-scheduled controller with systune, use the gainsurf command to
construct a tunable model of a gain surface sampled over a grid of design points (σ
values). For example, consider the gain with bilinear dependence on two scheduling
variables, α, and V:
K p (a , V ) = k0 + k1a + k2V + k3a V .
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-9
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Suppose that α is an angle of incidence that ranges from 0 to 15 degrees, and V is a speed
that ranges from 300 to 600 m/s. Create a grid of design points that span these ranges.
[alpha,V] = ndgrid(0:5:15,300:100:600);
Specify the values of the basis functions f1 = α, f2 = V, f3 = αV over the grid of design
points.
F1 = alpha;
F2 = V;
F3 = alpha.*V;
Kp = gainsurf('Kp',1,F1,F2,F3);
Kp is a tunable model of the gain surface, Kp(α,V) This model contains the tunable
coefficients k0, k1, k2, and k3.
You can use such gain surface models to construct more sophisticated gain-scheduled
control elements, such as gain-scheduled PID controllers, filters, or state-space
controllers. For example, suppose you create two gain surfaces Kp and Ki sampled
over the same σ grid. The following command constructs a gain-scheduled tunable PI
controller.
C = pid(Kp,Ki);
Similarly, suppose you create four matrix-valued gain surfaces A, B, C, D sampled over
the same σ. The following command constructs a gain-scheduled state-space controller:
C = ss(A,B,C,D);
While gain surfaces are tuned at a finite set of design points, they are guaranteed to vary
as smoothly as the underlying basis functions from one design point to another.
See Also
gainsurf
Related Examples
8-10
•
“Tunable Gain With Two Independent Scheduling Variables” on page 8-17
•
“Gain-Scheduled PID Controller” on page 8-21
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Parametric Gain Surfaces
More About
•
“Plant Models for Gain-Scheduled Control” on page 8-3
•
“Tuning Gain-Scheduled Controllers” on page 8-12
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-11
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Tuning Gain-Scheduled Controllers
You can use systune to automatically tune gain-scheduled controllers modeled with
parametric gain surfaces. The tuning workflow is as follows:
1
Select a set of design points, σ, that adequately covers the operating range. The set
can be a regular grid of σ values or a scattered set of values. Typically, start with a
small number of design points. If the performance your tuned system achieved at the
design points is not maintained in between design points, you can add more design
points and retune.
2
Build a collection of linear models describing the linearized plant dynamics at the
selected design points. You can do so by:
• Linearizing a Simulink model at each operating condition, σ (requires Simulink
Control Design).
• Sampling an LPV model of the plant at the design points.
3
Use gain surfaces to model the gain-scheduled controller. Sample these gain surfaces
at the same design points, σ.
4
Combine the plant and controller models to build a closed-loop model. The resulting
model array covers all design points and depends on the tunable coefficients of the
gain surfaces.
5
Use systune to tune the gain surface coefficients subject to suitable requirements
at each design point. From the systune perspective, doing so amounts to tuning one
set of parameters against many plant models (multi-model tuning).
Related Examples
•
“Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot” on page 8-23
•
Gain Scheduled Control Of a Chemical Reactor
More About
8-12
•
“Plant Models for Gain-Scheduled Control” on page 8-3
•
“Parametric Gain Surfaces” on page 8-7
•
“Validating Gain-Scheduled Controllers” on page 8-13
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Validating Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Validating Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Gain-scheduled controllers require careful validation. The tuning process only
guarantees suitable performance in the neighborhood of each design point. In addition,
the tuning ignores dynamic couplings between the plant state variables and the
scheduling variables (see Section 4.3, “Hidden Coupling”, in [1]). Recommended
validation includes:
• Check linear performance on a denser grid of σ values than you used for design. If
adequate linear performance is not maintained between design points, you can add
more design points and retune.
• Perform nonlinear simulations that drive the closed-loop system through its entire
operating range. Pay special attention to maneuvers that cause rapid variations of the
scheduling variables.
References
[1] Rugh, W.J., and J.S. Shamma, “Research on Gain Scheduling”, Automatica, 36 (2000),
pp. 1401-1425.
Related Examples
•
“Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot” on page 8-23
•
Gain Scheduled Control Of a Chemical Reactor
More About
•
“Improving Gain-Scheduled Tuning Results” on page 8-14
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-13
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Improving Gain-Scheduled Tuning Results
In this section...
“Normalize the Scheduling Variables” on page 8-14
“Changing Requirements With Operating Condition” on page 8-15
Normalize the Scheduling Variables
Suppose you are scheduling with respect to a variable h (altitude) that ranges between
5,000 and 10,000 feet. Further, suppose you use a cubic polynomial model for the gain
k(h):
k ( h ) = k0 + k1h + k2 h2 + k3h3 .
The terms h2 and h3 are of order 104 and 108, respectively. You can therefore expect
k2 to be roughly 104 times smaller than k1, and k3 to be 108 times smaller than k1, to
compensate. This means that the entries of the vector of tunable variables vary by
as many as 8 orders of magnitude. Such wide variation may be detrimental to the
performance and accuracy of the solvers used by systune.
To avoid such scaling issues, it is good practice to normalize the scheduling variables
so that they vary in the range [-1,1]. For a variable x taking values in [xmin,xmax], this
normalization is a simple change of variable of the form:
x - xmean
,
dx
x
+ xmax
xmean = min
,
2
x
- xmin
dx = max
.
2
xN =
You then create gain surfaces that depend on the normalized scheduling variables, rather
than the original scheduling variables. You must perform the same normalization when
implementing the tuned controller.
8-14
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Improving Gain-Scheduled Tuning Results
For an example of a gain surface using normalized scheduling variables, see “Tunable
Gain With Two Independent Scheduling Variables” on page 8-17.
Changing Requirements With Operating Condition
It is not uncommon to have the control objectives themselves vary with the operating
condition. In this case, the control objectives also depend on the scheduling variables. For
example, your system might require a reduced control bandwidth if transmission delays
increase or temperature drops. The software offers two approaches to tuning to with such
scheduled requirements.
• Create a separate instance of the requirement for each design point. For example,
suppose you want to enforce a 1/s loop shape with a crossover frequency that depends
on the scheduling variables. Suppose also that you have created a table, wc, that
contains the target bandwidth for each design point, σ. Then you can construct
one TuningGoal.LoopShape requirement for each design point. Associate each
TuningGoal.LoopShape requirement with the corresponding design point using the
Models property.
for ct=1:num_design_points
R(ct) = TuningGoal.LoopShape('u',wc(ct));
R(ct).Model = ct;
end
• Incorporate the varying portion of the requirement into the closed-loop model of the
control system. For example, suppose you want to limit the gain from d to y to a
quantity, γ, that depends on the scheduling variables. Suppose that T0 is an array of
models of the closed-loop system at each design point, and suppose you have created a
table, gmax, of γ values for each design point, σ. Then you can add a new output ys =
y/γ to the closed-loop model, as follows:
% Create array of scalar gains 1/gamma
yScaling = reshape(1./gmax,[1 1 size(gmax)]);
yScaling = ss(yScaling,'InputName','y','OutputName','ys');
% Add these gains in series to y output of T0
T0 = connect(T0,yScaling,T0.InputName,[T0.OutputName ; {'ys'}]);
The value of γ changes at each design point according to the table gmax. You can then
use a single requirement that limits to 1 the gain from d to the scaled output ys.
R = TuningGoal.Gain('d','ys',1);
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-15
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Such effective normalization of requirements moves the requirement variability from
the requirement object, R, to the closed-loop model, T0.
In Simulink, you can use a similar approach by feeding the relevant model inputs
and outputs through a gain block. Then, when you linearize the model, change the
gain value of the block with the operating condition. For example, set the gain to a
MATLAB variable, and use the Parameters property in slLinearizer to change
the variable’s value with each linearization condition.
8-16
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tunable Gain With Two Independent Scheduling Variables
Tunable Gain With Two Independent Scheduling Variables
This example shows how to model a scalar gain K with a bilinear dependence on two
scheduling variables, and V, as follows:
For this example, is an angle of incidence that ranges from 0 to 15 degrees, and V
is a speed that ranges from 300 to 600 m/s. The coefficients
are the tunable
parameters of this variable gain.
Create a grid of design points,
, that are linearly spaced in
points are where you will tune the gain surface coefficients.
and V. These design
[alpha,V] = ndgrid(0:5:15,300:100:600);
These arrays, alpha and V, represent the independent variation of the two scheduling
variables, each across its full range.
When you tune the gain surface coefficients with systune, you might obtain better
solver performance by normalizing the scheduling variables to fall within the interval
[-1,1]. Scale the and V grid to fall within this range.
alphaN = alpha/15;
VN = (V-450)/150;
Create the tunable gain surface sampled at the grid of
values:
In this expansion, the basis functions are:
Specify the values of the basis functions over the
.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-17
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
F1 = alphaN;
F2 = VN;
F3 = alphaN.*VN;
K = gainsurf('K',1,F1,F2,F3)
K =
4x4 array of generalized
K_0: Scalar parameter,
K_1: Scalar parameter,
K_2: Scalar parameter,
K_3: Scalar parameter,
matrices with 1 rows, 1 columns, and the following blocks:
1 occurrences.
1 occurrences.
1 occurrences.
1 occurrences.
Type "double(K)" to see the current value, "get(K)" to see all properties, and "K.Block
K is an array of generalized matrices. Each element in K corresponds to
particular
for a
pair, and depends on the tunable coefficients K_0,...,|K_3|.
Associate the independent variable values with the corresponding values of K.
K.SamplingGrid = struct('alpha',alpha,'V',V);
The SamplingGrid property keeps track of the scheduling variable values associated
with each entry in K. This association is convenient for tracing results back to
independent variable values. For instance, you can use view(K) to inspect the tuned
values of the gain surface after tuning. When you do so, view takes the axis range and
labels from the entries in SamplingGrid. For this example, instead of tuning, manually
set the values of the tunable blocks to non-zero values. View the resulting gain surface as
a function of the scheduling variables.
values = struct('K_0',1,'K_1',-1,'K_2',0.1,'K_3',-0.2);
Ktuned = setBlockValue(K,values);
view(Ktuned)
8-18
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tunable Gain With Two Independent Scheduling Variables
The variable names and values that you specified in the SamplingGrid property are
used to scale and label the axes.
You can use K as a tunable gain to build a control system with gain-scheduled tunable
components. For example, use K to create a gain-scheduled low-pass filter.
F = tf(K,[1 K]);
You can use gain surfaces as arguments to model creation commands like tf the same
way you would use numeric arguments. The resulting filter is a generalized state-space
(genss) model array that depends on the four coefficients of the gain surface.
Use model interconnection commands (such as connect and feedback) to combine
F with an array of plant models sampled at the same values of and V. You can then
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-19
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
use systune to tune the gain-scheduled controller to meet your design requirements.
Because you normalized the scheduling variables to model the tunable gain, you must
adjust the coefficient values in the implementation of your tuned controller.
Related Examples
•
“Gain-Scheduled PID Controller” on page 8-21
•
“Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot” on page 8-23
More About
8-20
•
“Parametric Gain Surfaces” on page 8-7
•
“Plant Models for Gain-Scheduled Control” on page 8-3
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Gain-Scheduled PID Controller
Gain-Scheduled PID Controller
This example shows how to create a gain-scheduled PID controller. The controller's
proportional, integral, and derivative gains have linear, quadratic, and constant
dependence on a scheduling variable, , as follows:
For tuning purposes, sample these gain formulas for a number of values of that span
the operating range of the scheduling variable. For example, sample the gain formulas
for five values of (five design points) in [-1,1]. To do so, first create a vector of values.
alpha = -1:0.5:1;
The PID gains depend on
and
. Evaluate these functions for the sampled values.
F1 = alpha;
F2 = alpha.^2;
Create the tunable gain surfaces that represent the proportional, integral, and derivative
gains over the grid of values. Initialize all the constant coefficients to 1.
Kp = gainsurf('Kp',1,F1);
Ki = gainsurf('Ki',1,F1,F2);
Kd = gainsurf('Kd',1);
Each of Kp, Ki, and Kd is an array of generalized matrices. The array element
Kp(:,:,1) (for example) corresponds to
( ) for
= -1. The element Kp(:,:,2)
corresponds to ( ) for = -0.5, and so on. These values depend on tunable coefficients
Kp_0, and Kp_1. Thus, each of Kp, Ki, and Kd represents a gain curve in with the
appropriate number of tunable coefficients.
Combine the tunable gains into a PID controller. Set the derivative filter time constant to
a fixed value of 0.1.
Tf = 0.1;
C = pid(Kp,Ki,Kd,Tf)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-21
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
C =
1x5 array of generalized continuous-time state-space models.
Each model has 1 outputs, 1 inputs, 2 states, and the following blocks:
Kd: Scalar parameter, 1 occurrences.
Ki_0: Scalar parameter, 1 occurrences.
Ki_1: Scalar parameter, 1 occurrences.
Ki_2: Scalar parameter, 1 occurrences.
Kp_0: Scalar parameter, 1 occurrences.
Kp_1: Scalar parameter, 1 occurrences.
Type "ss(C)" to see the current value, "get(C)" to see all properties, and "C.Blocks" t
You can use generalized matrices as arguments to model creation commands like pid
and tf the same way you would use numeric arguments. The resulting controller is a
generalized state-space (genss) model array that depends on the six coefficients of the
gain curves. Each entry in the array is a PID controller evaluated at a particular value of
.
Associate the
values with the corresponding entries of C.
SG = struct('alpha',alpha);
C.SamplingGrid = SG;
Use model interconnection commands (such as connect and feedback) to combine
C with an array of plant models sampled at the same values of . You can then use
systune to tune the gain-scheduled controller to meet your design requirements.
Related Examples
•
“Tunable Gain With Two Independent Scheduling Variables” on page 8-17
•
“Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot” on page 8-23
More About
8-22
•
“Parametric Gain Surfaces” on page 8-7
•
“Plant Models for Gain-Scheduled Control” on page 8-3
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
This example uses systune to generate smooth gain schedules for a three-loop autopilot.
Airframe Model and Three-Loop Autopilot
This example uses a three-degree-of-freedom model of the pitch axis dynamics of an
airframe. The states are the Earth coordinates
, the body coordinates
, the
. Figure 1 summarizes the relationship between
pitch angle , and the pitch rate
the inertial and body frames, the flight path angle , the incidence angle , and the pitch
angle .
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-23
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Figure 1: Airframe dynamics.
We use a classic three-loop autopilot structure to control the flight path angle . This
autopilot adjusts the flight path by delivering adequate bursts of normal acceleration
(acceleration along ). In turn, normal acceleration is produced by adjusting the
elevator deflection to cause pitching and vary the amount of lift. The autopilot uses
Proportional-Integral (PI) control in the pitch rate loop and proportional control in the
and loops. The closed-loop system (airframe and autopilot) are modeled in Simulink.
8-24
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
open_system('rct_airframeGS')
Autopilot Gain Scheduling
The airframe dynamics are nonlinear and the aerodynamic forces and moments depend
flight
on speed and incidence . To obtain suitable performance throughout the
envelope, the autopilot gains must be adjusted as a function of and to compensate for
changes in plant dynamics. This adjustment process is called "gain scheduling" and
are called the scheduling variables.
Gain scheduling is a linear technique for controlling nonlinear or time-varying
plants. The idea is to compute linear approximations of the plant at various operating
conditions, tune the controller gains at each operating condition, and swap gains as a
function of operating condition during operation. Conventional gain scheduling involves
three major steps:
1
Trim and linearize the plant at each operating condition
2
Tune the controller gains for the linearized dynamics at each operating condition
3
Reconcile the gain values to provide smooth transition between operating conditions.
In this example, we combine Steps 2. and 3. by parameterizing the autopilot gains as
first-order polynomials in
and directly tuning the polynomial coefficients for the
entire flight envelope. This approach eliminates Step 3. and guarantees smooth gain
variations as a function of and . Moreover, the gain schedule coefficients can be
automatically tuned with systune.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-25
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Trimming and Linearization
Assume that the incidence varies between -20 and 20 degrees and that the speed
varies between 700 and 1400 m/s. When neglecting gravity, the airframe dynamics are
symmetric in so consider only positive values of . Use a 5-by-9 grid of linearly spaced
pairs to cover the flight envelope:
nA = 5; % number of alpha values
nV = 9; % number of V values
[alpha,V] = ndgrid(linspace(0,20,nA)*pi/180,linspace(700,1400,nV));
For each flight condition
, linearize the airframe dynamics at trim (zero normal
acceleration and pitching moment). This requires computing the elevator deflection and
pitch rate that result in steady and . To do this, first isolate the airframe model in a
separate Simulink model.
open_system('rct_airframeTRIM')
8-26
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
Use operspec to specify the trim condition, use findop to compute the trim values of
and , and linearize the airframe dynamics for the resulting operating point. See the
"Trimming and Linearizing an Airframe" example in Simulink Control Design for details.
Repeat these steps for the 45 flight conditions
.
% Compute trim condition for each (alpha,V) pair
clear op
for ct=1:nA*nV
alpha_ini = alpha(ct);
% Incidence [rad]
v_ini = V(ct);
% Speed [m/s]
% Specify trim condition
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-27
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
opspec = operspec('rct_airframeTRIM');
% Xe,Ze: known, not steady
opspec.States(1).Known = [1;1];
opspec.States(1).SteadyState = [0;0];
% u,w: known, w steady
opspec.States(3).Known = [1 1];
opspec.States(3).SteadyState = [0 1];
% theta: known, not steady
opspec.States(2).Known = 1;
opspec.States(2).SteadyState = 0;
% q: unknown, steady
opspec.States(4).Known = 0;
opspec.States(4).SteadyState = 1;
% TRIM
Options = findopOptions('DisplayReport','off');
op(ct) = findop('rct_airframeTRIM',opspec,Options);
end
% Linearization I/Os
io = [linio('rct_airframeTRIM/delta',1,'in');...
linio('rct_airframeTRIM/Airframe Model',3,'out');...
linio('rct_airframeTRIM/Airframe Model',4,'out');...
linio('rct_airframeTRIM/Airframe Model',5,'out')];
%
%
%
%
delta
q
az
gamma
% Linearize at trim conditions
G = linearize('rct_airframeTRIM',op,io);
G = reshape(G,[nA nV]);
G.u = 'delta';
G.y = {'q' 'az' 'gamma'};
This produces a 5-by-9 array of linearized plant models at the 45 flight conditions
The plant dynamics vary substantially across the flight envelope.
sigma(G), title('Variations in airframe dynamics')
8-28
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
.
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
Autopilot Modeling
The autopilot consists of four gains that must be "scheduled" (adjusted) as a function of
and . Each "gain" is therefore a two-dimensional gain surface. As a first cut, seek gain
surfaces with a simple multi-linear dependence on and :
.
These gain surfaces are modeled in Simulink as follows:
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-29
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Figure 2: Simulink model for the gain surface
.
Use gainsurf to parameterize these gain surfaces in terms of the tunable coefficients
. To improve convergence of the tuning algorithm, it is recommended to
replace
by normalized values ranging in [-1,1]:
% Subtract the mean value of alpha and divide by its half range
Mean = 10*pi/180; % mean = 10 degrees
HalfRange = Mean; % half range = 10 degrees
alpha_n = (alpha - Mean)/HalfRange;
% varies in [-1,1]
% Subtract the mean value of V and divide by its half range
Mean = (700+1400)/2;
HalfRange = (1400-700)/2;
V_n = (V - Mean)/HalfRange;
% varies in [-1,1]
% Create gain surfaces
Kp = gainsurf('Kp', 0.1, alpha_n, V_n, alpha_n.*V_n);
8-30
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
Ki = gainsurf('Ki', 2, alpha_n, V_n, alpha_n.*V_n);
Ka = gainsurf('Ka', 0.001, alpha_n, V_n, alpha_n.*V_n);
Kg = gainsurf('Kg', -1000, alpha_n, V_n, alpha_n.*V_n);
The initial values for the constant coefficient
are based on tuning results for = 10
deg and = 1000 m/s (mid-range design). Note that Kp, Ki,... are arrays of matrices
(one per flight condition) parameterized by the tunable coefficients
. To facilitate
visualization, use the SamplingGrid property to keep track of the dependence on
:
% Grid of alpha,V values
SG = struct('alpha',alpha,'V',V);
Kp.SamplingGrid
Ki.SamplingGrid
Ka.SamplingGrid
Kg.SamplingGrid
=
=
=
=
SG;
SG;
SG;
SG;
Next construct a closed-loop model T0 by connecting the linearized airframe model G,
the second-order actuator model, and the autopilot gains Kp, Ki, Ka, Kg according to the
block diagram rct_airframeGS. The software lets you manipulate the model arrays G,
Kp, Ki,... as single entities (one block in the block diagram).
% Actuator model
Act = tf(150^2,[1 2*0.7*150 150^2]);
Act.u = 'u'; Act.y = 'delta_d';
% Controller elements
Cq = pid(Kp,Ki);
Cq.u = 'eq'; Cq.y = 'u';
Ca = ss(Ka);
Ca.u = 'eaz'; Ca.y = 'q_ref';
Cg = ss(Kg);
Cg.u = 'eg'; Cg.y = 'az_ref';
% Summing junctions
S1 = sumblk('delta = delta_d + d');
S2 = sumblk('eq = q_ref + q');
S3 = sumblk('eaz = az_ref - az');
S4 = sumblk('eg = gamma_ref - gamma');
% Connect the blocks together
T0 = connect(G,Cq,Ca,Cg,S1,S2,S3,S4,Act,...
{'gamma_ref','az_ref','d'},{'gamma','az'})
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-31
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
T0 =
5x9 array of generalized continuous-time state-space models.
Each model has 2 outputs, 3 inputs, 7 states, and between 4 and 16 blocks.
Type "ss(T0)" to see the current value, "get(T0)" to see all properties, and "T0.Blocks
This creates a 5-by-9 array of closed-loop models parameterized by the tunable
coefficients of the four gain surfaces.
Autopilot Tuning
systune can automatically tune the gain surface coefficients for the entire flight
envelope. Use TuningGoal objects to specify the performance objectives:
•
loop: Track the setpoint with a 1 second response time, less than 2% steady-state
error, and less than 30% peak error.
Req1 = TuningGoal.Tracking('gamma_ref','gamma',1,0.02,1.3);
viewSpec(Req1)
8-32
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
•
loop: Ensure good disturbance rejection at low frequency (to track acceleration
demands) and past 10 rad/s (to be insensitive to measurement noise).
% Note: The disturbance is injected at the az_ref location
RejectionProfile = frd([0.02 0.02 1.2 1.2 0.1],[0 0.02 2 15 150]);
Req2 = TuningGoal.Gain('az_ref','az',RejectionProfile);
viewSpec(Req2)
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-33
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
•
loop: Ensure good disturbance rejection up to 10 rad/s
% Note: The disturbance d enters at the plant input
Req3 = TuningGoal.Gain('d','az',600*tf([0.25 0],[0.25 1]));
viewSpec(Req3)
8-34
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
• Transients: Ensure a minimum damping ratio of 0.35 for oscillation-free transients
MinDamping = 0.35;
Req4 = TuningGoal.Poles(0,MinDamping);
Using systune, tune the 16 gain surface coefficients to best meet these performance
requirements at all 45 flight conditions.
T = systune(T0,[Req1 Req2 Req3 Req4]);
Final: Soft = 1.13, Hard = -Inf, Iterations = 78
The final value of the combined objective is close to 1, indicating that all requirements
are nearly met. Visualize the resulting gain surfaces.
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-35
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
% Use the tuned values of the gain surface coefficients
Kp = setBlockValue(Kp,T);
Ki = setBlockValue(Ki,T);
Ka = setBlockValue(Ka,T);
Kg = setBlockValue(Kg,T);
% Plot gain surfaces
clf
subplot(221), view(Kp),
subplot(222), view(Ki),
subplot(223), view(Ka),
subplot(224), view(Kg),
title('Kp')
title('Ki')
title('Ka')
title('Kg')
Validation
8-36
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
First validate the tuned autopilot at the 45 flight conditions considered above. Plot the
response to a step change in flight path angle and the response to a step disturbance in
elevator deflection.
clf
subplot(211), step(T('gamma','gamma_ref'),5), grid
title('Tracking of step change in flight path angle')
subplot(212), step(T('az','d'),3), grid
title('Rejection of step disturbance at plant input')
The responses are satisfactory at all flight conditions. Next validate the autopilot against
the nonlinear airframe model. First push the tuned gain surface coefficients to the
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-37
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
Simulink model. The coefficients for the "Kp Gain" block are named "Kp_0", "Kp_1",
"Kp_2", "Kp_3", and similarly for the other gain blocks.
[Kp_0,Kp_1,Kp_2,Kp_3]
[Ki_0,Ki_1,Ki_2,Ki_3]
[Ka_0,Ka_1,Ka_2,Ka_3]
[Kg_0,Kg_1,Kg_2,Kg_3]
=
=
=
=
gainsurfdata(Kp);
gainsurfdata(Ki);
gainsurfdata(Ka);
gainsurfdata(Kg);
Now simulate the autopilot performance for a maneuver that takes the airframe through
a large portion of its flight envelope.
% Initial conditions
h_ini = 1000;
alpha_ini = 0;
v_ini = 700;
% Simulate
SimOut = sim('rct_airframeGS', 'ReturnWorkspaceOutputs', 'on');
% Extract simulation data
SimData = get(SimOut,'sigsOut');
Sim_gamma = getElement(SimData,'gamma');
Sim_alpha = getElement(SimData,'alpha');
Sim_V = getElement(SimData,'V');
Sim_delta = getElement(SimData,'delta');
Sim_h = getElement(SimData,'h');
Sim_az = getElement(SimData,'az');
t = Sim_gamma.Values.Time;
% Plot the main flight variables
clf
subplot(211)
plot(t,Sim_gamma.Values.Data(:,1),'r--',t,Sim_gamma.Values.Data(:,2),'b'), grid
legend('Commanded','Actual','location','SouthEast')
title('Flight path angle \gamma in degrees')
subplot(212)
plot(t,Sim_delta.Values.Data), grid
title('Elevator deflection \delta in degrees')
8-38
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
subplot(211)
plot(t,Sim_alpha.Values.Data), grid
title('Incidence \alpha in degrees')
subplot(212)
plot(t,Sim_V.Values.Data), grid
title('Speed V in m/s')
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-39
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
subplot(211)
plot(t,Sim_h.Values.Data), grid
title('Altitude h in meters')
subplot(212)
plot(t,Sim_az.Values.Data), grid
title('Normal acceleration a_z in g''s')
8-40
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
Tuning of Gain-Scheduled Three-Loop Autopilot
Tracking of the flight path angle profile remains good throughout the maneuver.
Note that the variations in incidence and speed cover most of the flight envelope
considered here ([-20,20] degrees for and [700,1400] for ). And while the autopilot was
tuned for a nominal altitude of 3000 m, it fares well despite altitude changing from 1,000
to 10,000 m.
The nonlinear simulation results confirm that the gain-scheduled autopilot delivers
consistently high performance throughout the flight envelope. The simple explicit
formulas for the gain dependence on the scheduling variables is amenable to efficient
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
8-41
8
Gain-Scheduled Controllers
hardware implementation. Alternatively, these formulas can be readily converted into 2D
lookup tables for further adjustment.
Related Examples
•
Gain Scheduled Control Of a Chemical Reactor
More About
8-42
•
“Gain-Scheduled Control Systems” on page 8-2
•
“Parametric Gain Surfaces” on page 8-7
www.MatlabSite.com | ﻣﺘﻠﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ آﻣﻮزش ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺘﻠﺐ در اﯾﺮان
معرفی چند منبع در زمینه آموزش برنامه نویسی MATLABیا متلب
کتاب های به زبان انگلیسی
عنوانMatlab, Third Edition: A Practical Introduction to :
Programming and Problem Solving
ترجمه عنوان :متلب :مقدمه ای عملی بر برنامه نويسی و حل مساله ،چاپ سوم
مولفینStormy Attaway :
سال چاپ2013 :
انتشاراتButterworth-Heinemann :
کتاب های به زبان فارسی
عنوان :اصول و مبانی متلب برای علوم مهندسی
مولفین :برايان هان ،دانیل تی ،والنتین
مترجمین :رامین موالنا پور ،سارا موالناپور ،نینا اسدی پور
انتشارات :سها دانش
لینک دسترسی :لینک
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانMATLAB For Dummies :
ترجمه عنوان :تلب به زبان ساده
مولفینJim Sizemore, John Paul Mueller :
سال چاپ2014 :
انتشاراتFor Dummies :
عنوان :کاربرد MATLABدر علوم مهندسی
مولفین :حیدرعلی شايانفر ،حسین شايقی
انتشارات :ياوريان
لینک دسترسی :لینک
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانEssential MATLAB for Engineers and Scientists :
عنوان :برنامه نويسی MATLABبرای مهندسان
ترجمه عنوان :آنچه بايد مهندسین و دانشمندان از متلب بدانند
مولفین :محمود کشاورز مهر ،بهزاد عبدی
مولفینBrian Hahn, Daniel Valentine:
سال چاپ2013 :
انتشاراتAcademic Press :
انتشارات :نوپردازان
لینک دسترسی :لینک
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانMATLAB: An Introduction with Applications :
عنوان :آموزش کاربردی مباحث پیشرفته با MATLAB
ترجمه عنوان :مقدمه ای بر متلب و کاربردهای آن
مولفین :نیما جمشیدی ،علی ابويی مهريزی ،رسول مواليی
مولفAmos Gilat :
انتشارات :عابد
سال چاپ2014 :
انتشاراتWiley :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانMATLAB For Beginners: A Gentle Approach:
عنوان :کاملترين مرجع آموزشی و کاربردی MATLAB
ترجمه عنوان :متلب برای افراد مبتدی با يک رويکرد تدريجی
مولفین :علی اکبر علمداری ،نسرين علمداری
مولفPeter I. Kattan:
انتشارات :نگارنده دانش
سال چاپ2008 :
انتشاراتCreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانMATLAB for Engineers :
عنوان :برنامه نويسی MATLABبرای مهندسین
ترجمه عنوان :متلب برای مهندسین
مولف :استفن چاپمن
مولفHolly Moore :
سال چاپ2011 :
انتشاراتPrentice Hall :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانMastering MATLAB :
ترجمه عنوان :تسلط بر متلب
مولفینDuane C. Hanselman, Bruce L. Littlefield :
سال چاپ2011 :
انتشاراتPrentice Hall :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
مترجم :سعدان زکائی
انتشارات :دانشگاه صنعتی خواجه نصیرالدين طوسی
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوان :آموزش گام به گام محاسبات عددی با متلب
مولف :کلیو مولر
مترجم :رسول نصیری
انتشارات :نشر گستر
لینک دسترسی :لینک
منابع آموزشی آنالین
عنوان :مجموعه فرادرسهای برنامهنويسی متلب
مدرس :دکتر سید مصطفی کالمی هريس
مدت زمان ۹ :ساعت و ۳دقیقه
زبان :فارسی
ارائه دهنده :فرادرس
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوان :مجموعه فرادرسهای متلب برای علوم و مهندسی
مدرس :دکتر سید مصطفی کالمی هريس
مدت زمان 14 :ساعت و 2۲دقیقه
زبان :فارسی
ارائه دهنده :فرادرس
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوان :مجموعه فرادرسهای برنامه نويسی متلب پیشرفته
مدرس :دکتر سید مصطفی کالمی هريس
مدت زمان ۲ :ساعت و 12دقیقه
زبان :فارسی
ارائه دهنده :فرادرس
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانIntroduction to Programming with MATLAB :
ترجمه عنوان :آشنايی با برنامهنويسی متلب
مدرسینAkos Ledeczi, Michael Fitzpatrick, Robert Tairas :
زبان :انگلیسی
ارائه دهندهVanderbilt University :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانIntroduction to MATLAB :
ترجمه عنوان :مقدمهای بر متلب
مدرسDanilo Šćepanović :
زبان :انگلیسی
ارائه دهندهMIT OCW :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانUp and Running with MATLAB :
ترجمه عنوان :شروع سريع کار با متلب
مدرسPatrick Royal :
زبان :انگلیسی
ارائه دهندهlynda.com :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
عنوانModelling and Simulation using MATLAB :
ترجمه عنوان :مدلسازی و شبیهسازی با استفاده از متلب
مدرسین Prof. Dr.-Ing. Georg Fries :و دیگران
زبان :انگلیسی
ارائه دهندهiversity.org :
لینک دسترسی :لینک
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
advertisement
© 2021